Anda di halaman 1dari 714

en

Service Manual
(20

Wheel loader

(10 points)

L550 - L580 2plus2


(10

en

Service Manual
(20

Wheel loader

(10 points)

L550 - L580 2plus2


(10

Address
Address:

LIEBHERR-WERK BISCHOFSHOFEN GMBH


Dr. Hans Liebherr Strae 4
A 5500 BISCHOFSHOFEN

Product ID
Manufacturer:
Product group:
Type:
Production number:
Serial number:

LIEBHERR-WERK BISCHOFSHOFEN GMBH


Wheel loader
L550
L556
L566
L576
L580
456
454
460
457
459
16978
15653
14171
14171
14171

Document ID
Order number:
Author:
Document version:
Manual number:
Owner:

1035 3357
LBH / Technical Documentation Department
01

Preface

Intended readership

Contents

This service manual is addressed to anyone whose task it is to ensure that the
machines are ready for everyday use. This especially includes mechanics and
workshop staff of Liebherr dealers and branches.
The first chapter contains information on safety regulations and on the
special tools needed for maintenance and repairs.
Chapter 2 gives you an overview of all the most important technical data of
the machine as a whole and its individual assemblies.
Next comes the maintenance chapter, with the maintenance and inspection
schedule, the testing and adjustment checklists, lubrication charts, description
of maintenance tasks, testing and adjustment tasks and specifications of fuel
and lubricants.
The technical description of the machine is in the following chapters,
structured according to fifteen function groups. The layout, function and
technical data of the groups, components and parts are explained.
Chapter 19 contains information on troubleshooting, the service code table
and a description of the SCULI service software.
Chapter 20 will be gradually updated with the latest options.

Instructions on use

This manual describes several types and versions of machines. The


information generally applies to the types and serial numbers stated at the
bottom of the page. The exception to this is information which only applies to
specific types and serial numbers, which are stated at the beginning of the
section concerned (for example technical data of parts).
Where possible, the ID numbers of parts and components are stated in
the heading.
This manual is available in German, English, French, Spanish and Italian.

Working instructions

Always follow the safety regulations whenever you work on the machine.
You will find a reference to this in the General Information section.
In order to perform these tasks you need a complete set of basic tools
andcertain special tools, all in perfect working order. All tasks require
absolute cleanliness.
Replace seals such as O-rings and surface seals during repairs.

General information

Product description

Maintenance

Diesel engine and pump distributor gear

Cooling system

Travel hydraulics

Working hydraulics

Steering system

Brake system

Electrical system

10

Transfer gear

11

Axles and cardan shaft

12

Machine frame and ballast weight

13

Central lubrication system

14

Coverings and access

15

Cab, heating and air-conditioning

16

Lift arms and quick-change device

17

Equipment and accessories

18

Service codes and diagnosis

19

Options

20

1 General Informations
1.0
Chapter contents
1

General Informations........................................................... 1.0-1


1.1

Safety regulations ...........................................................................1.1-1


1.1.1

Introduction...........................................................................1.1-1

1.1.2

Overview of the safety regulations .......................................1.1-2

1.2

Special tools for maintenance and repair work...............................1.2-1


Special tools in general ........................................................1.2-1

1.2.2

Special tools for Liebherr diesel engines..............................1.2-2

1.2.3

Special tools for hydraulic cylinders .....................................1.2-3

1.2.4

Special tools for electronics..................................................1.2-3

1.2.5

Special tools for axles...........................................................1.2-3

1.2.6

Special tools for the transmission.........................................1.2-5

1.2.7

Central lubrication system ....................................................1.2-5

1.2.8

Special tools for the air conditioning system ........................1.2-5

1.2.9

Special tools for cab windows ..............................................1.2-5

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007

1.2.1

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

1.0-1 o f 2

Service Manual

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007

General Informations

1.0-2 o f 2

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

General Informations
Safety regulations

1.1 Safety regulations


Working on the machine poses safety risks to the operator, driver or
maintenance engineers. You can prevent risks and accidents by regularly
reading and observing the various safety instructions.
This is especially important for personnel who only occasionally work on the
machine, for example, carrying out rigging or maintenance work. The safety
regulations listed below, if conscientiously followed, will ensure your own
safety and that of others, and will prevent the machine from being damaged.
Whenever tasks which could cause danger to personnel or damage to the
machine are described, the necessary safety precautions are explained in
this manual.
These are indicated by the headings Danger, Warning or Caution.

1.1.1

Introduction
1. The symbols below have the following meanings:
Danger
Risk of personal injury.
Denotes an impending dangerous situation which can lead to serious injury
or death if not avoided.
! Note the warning.

Warning
Risk of personal injury.
Denotes a potentially dangerous situation which can lead to serious injury or
death if not avoided.
! Note the warning.

Caution
Risk of personal injury.
Denotes a potentially dangerous situation which can lead to slight injury if
not avoided.
! Note the warning.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007

Caution
Risk of damage to the machine.
Denotes actions or circumstances which may result in damage to the machine.
! Note the warning.

Note
Useful information
Denotes information on correctly handling the machine and the lubricants
and fuels used.
! Observe the instructions.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

1.1-1 o f 2

General Informations

Service Manual

Safety regulations

2. Observance of these instructions does not exempt you from following


any additional rules and guidelines that may apply
The following should also be observed:
The safety rules in force at the operating site
Legally enforceable road traffic regulations
Guidelines issued by trade associations

1.1.2

Overview of the safety regulations


A detailed description of these can be read in the relevant section of the
safety regulations chapter in the operating manual.
The following sections are included in the operating manual:
1

Introduction

General safety regulations

Proper use

Decals on the machine

Instructions on preventing crushing injuries and burns

Instructions on preventing fires and explosions

Safety instructions for start-up

Safety precautions during start-up

Instructions for safe working

10

Safety instructions for driving on slopes

11

Parking safely

12

Transporting the machine safely

13

Towing the machine safely

14

Measures for ensuring safe maintenance


Safety instructions for working on machines with hydro accumulators

16

Safety instructions for welding work on the machine

17

Instructions for working safely on the working attachment

18

Safety instructions for transporting the machine by crane

19

Safe maintenance of hydraulic hoses and hose lines

20

Attachments and accessories

21

Protection against vibrations

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007

15

1.1-2 o f 2

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

General Informations
Special tools for maintenance and repair work

1.2 Special tools for maintenance and


repair work
1.2.1

ID no.

Use

Anti-freeze and battery tester

7408922

All wheel loaders

24 volt vacuum pump


Filling and testing device
with case
Manometer 0 - 40 bar
Manometer 0 - 250 bar
Manometer 0 - 600 bar
Manometer connection
High pressure hose 1500 mm
High pressure hose 4000 mm
Screw connection M 10 x 1
Draining hose
Drain piece

7408148

All wheel loaders

Remarks
For checking the acid concentration
(battery charging state) and anti-freeze
For preventing oil loss

8145359

All wheel loaders

For checking the hydro accumulator

7361288
5002932
5002866
7002436
7002475
7009134
5005180
7005660
7402657

All wheel loaders


All wheel loaders
All wheel loaders
All wheel loaders
All wheel loaders
All wheel loaders
All wheel loaders
All wheel loaders
All wheel loaders

Safety cap 10 mm

7009315

All wheel loaders

Safety cap 13 mm
Safety cap 17 mm
Safety cap 19 mm

7615515
7615589
7009317

All wheel loaders


All wheel loaders
All wheel loaders

Safety cap 17 mm

7622068

All wheel loaders

USB dongle

10333608

L550 - L580

Diagnostic data cable

10035410

L550 - L580

Adapter cable RS232<>USB

693190714 All wheel loaders

SDCF-03 memory card adapter

10223098

L550 - L580

Compact flash card

10223095

L550 - L580

For checking the hydraulic pressure


For checking the hydraulic pressure
For checking the hydraulic pressure
Connection for the manometer
High pressure hose for manometer
High pressure hose for manometer
For checking the hydraulic pressure
For draining oil via a drain valve
For the drain hose
For securing the valves on the variable
adjustment motor
For securing the valves on the pumps
For securing the valves on the pumps
For securing the valves on the pumps
For securing the valves on the
control block
With SERVICE authorisation
For adjusting the travel hydraulics, and
testing the electrical system and options
For communicating with the wheel
loader electronics if there is an error with
the RS232 interface on the notebook.
For writing to the compact flash card
Blank compact flash card.
Data medium for application software.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007

Description

Special tools in general

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

1.2-1 o f 6

General Informations

Service Manual

Special tools for maintenance and repair work

Description

Special tools for Liebherr diesel engines


ID no.

Use

Mandrel

9078118

L550 - L556 engine

Mandrel

9078119

L550 - L556 engine

Rotary angle device

0524062

L550 - L580 engine

Holder

0528464

L550 - L580 engine

Dial gauge holder

10023885

L550 - L580 engine

Compression tester
Compression tester insert
Adapter
Claw

8008782
10012817
10297211
10117612

L550 - L580 engine


L550 - L580 engine
L550 - L580 engine
L550 - L580 engine

Engine turner

0524045

L550 - L580 engine

Holder

0528464

L550 - L580 engine

Piston strap

8000592

L550 - L580 engine

Rotary angle device

0524062

L550 - L580 engine

Piston ring tongs

7009319

L550 - L580 engine

Extractor tool

0526855

L550 - L580 engine

Extractor tool

0528462

L550 - L580 engine

Mounting pin

0528470

L550 - L580 engine

Hook and lever

7019858

L550 - L580 engine

Inserter

10116249

L550 - L580 engine

Mounting pin

0528470

L550 - L580 engine

Inserter

10116250

L550 - L580 engine

Special spanner

10020852

L550 - L580 engine

Adapter

0524029

L550 - L580 engine

Adapter

10220689

L550 - L580 engine

Hammer puller

0524072

L550 - L580 engine

Pusher tube

10289319

L550 - L580 engine

Pusher tube

10289320

L550 - L580 engine

Mounting pin

0528472

L550 - L580 engine

1.2-2 o f 6

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

Remarks
For installing the mass equalisation
shafts (D 934)
For installing the mass equalisation
shafts (D 934)
For installing and removing the
cylinder head
For checking projection of the
cylinder bushings
For checking projection of the
cylinder bushings
For checking the compression
For checking the compression
For checking the compression
For checking the compression
For installing and removing the pistons
and rods
For installing and removing the pistons
and rods
For installing and removing the pistons
and rods
For installing and removing the pistons
and rods
For installing and removing the piston
rings
For installing and removing the
cylinder bushing
For installing and removing the
cylinder bushing
For installing and removing
crankshaft attachments
For installing and removing the front
crankshaft seal
For installing and removing the front
crankshaft seal
For installing and removing the flywheel
For installing and removing the rear
crankshaft seal
For installing and removing the
injection line
For installing and removing the
pressure pipe port and injection nozzles
For installing and removing the
pressure pipe port and injection nozzles
For installing and removing the
pressure pipe port and injection nozzles
For installing and removing the injection
pump and roller tappet
For installing and removing the injection
pump and roller tappet
For installing and removing the
exhaust pipe

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007

1.2.2

Service Manual

General Informations
Safety regulations

1.2.3
Description
Assembly sleeve 80 mm

ID no.
9227165

Assembly sleeve 90 mm

9227161

Assembly sleeve 130 mm

9998624

Assembly sleeve 150 mm

9998622

Assembly sleeve 170 mm


Expansion sleeve 80 mm

9107931
9227166

Expansion sleeve 90 mm

9227162

Expansion sleeve 130 mm

9110408

Expansion sleeve 150 mm

9110410

Expansion sleeve 170 mm


Bearing head assembly
spanner 70/8 mm
Bearing head assembly
spanner 75/12 mm

9110412

Use
L550, L556 steering cylinder
L566, L576, L580
steering cylinder
L550, L556 lift cylinder
L550, L556 tilt cylinder
L566, L576, L580 lift cylinder
L566, L576, L580 tilt cylinder
L550, L556 steering cylinder
L566, L576, L580
steering cylinder
L550, L556 lift cylinder
L550, L556 tilt cylinder
L566, L576, L580 lift cylinder
L566, L576, L580 tilt cylinder

9210219

L550, L556 steering cylinder

For fitting the piston rod bearing

9239572

L566, L576, L580


steering cylinder

For fitting the piston rod bearing

1.2.4
Description

8502956

Test probe, red


Test probe, black
Magnet tester
Stripping and crimping pliers
0.5 6.0 mm2
Crimping pliers
Wedge extractor tool
Extraction tool size 12 for
pin and bushing
Extraction tool size 16 for
pin and bushing
Extraction tool size 20 for
pin and bushing

Use

For fitting the seals


For fitting the seals
For fitting the seals
For fitting the seals
For fitting the seals
For fitting the seals
For fitting the seals
For fitting the seals
For fitting the seals

Remarks
For measuring voltage, current,
resistance and frequency
For testing DEUTSCH connectors
For testing DEUTSCH connectors
For checking solenoid valves

All wheel loaders

884191214 All wheel loaders


884191114 All wheel loaders
8145743
All wheel loaders
8460263

All wheel loaders

For MATE-N-LOK connectors

8503647
7026267

All wheel loaders


All wheel loaders

For DEUTSCH connectors


For DEUTSCH connectors

8145674

All wheel loaders

For DEUTSCH connectors

8145673

All wheel loaders

For DEUTSCH connectors

8503630

All wheel loaders

For DEUTSCH connectors

1.2.5

Special tools for axles

Description

ID no.

Hand pump

8145835

L550 - L580 axles

Collet

7009536

L550 - L576 axles

Spring hook

8145767

L550 - L576 axles

Slip bushing 260 mm

7017559

Slip bushing 315 mm

7017556

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

Remarks
For fitting the seals

Special tools for electronics

ID no.

Digital multimeter

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007

Special tools for hydraulic cylinders

Use

Remarks
For finding leaks on
disc brakes
For installing and removing the snap
ring in the planetary drive
For attaching and detaching the
return springs

L556 front axle


L556 rear axle
L566, L576 front axle
L566, L576 rear axle

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

For fitting the brake piston


For fitting the brake piston

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

1.2-3 o f 6

General Informations

Service Manual

Special tools for maintenance and repair work

Use

Remarks

7017558

L556 rear axle

For fitting ring gear carriers

7017557

L556 front axle


L566, L576 rear axle

For fitting ring gear carriers

7017555

L566, L576 front axle

For fitting ring gear carriers

7017566
7011518
7017563

Handle for mounting tool


Handle for various mounting tools
For fitting cartridge seal ring

7011522
7013922

L550 - L576 axles


L550 - L576 axles
L556 rear axle
L556, L566, L576 front axle;
L566, L576 rear axle
L556 - L576 axles
L556 rear axle
L556 front axle
L566, L576 rear axle
L566, L576 front axle
L556 front axle
L556, L566, L576 rear axle
L566, L576, L580 front axle;
L580 rear axle
L556 - L580 axles
L556 - L580 axles

Mounting tool

7017560

Centring bracket
Groove nut spanner 111 mm

7013775
7009537

Groove nut spanner 140 mm

7011251

Groove nut spanner 169 mm


Measuring screw
M 16 x 1.5
Measuring screw
M 16 x 1.5
Clamp fork
Mounting tool
Slotted nut spanner
81 mm
Mounting tool
(used with grip 7011518)

7013774

10017840

L550 - L576 axles

7624271

L550 axles, MT-L 3085

Mounting tool

7624272

L550 axles, MT-L 3085

Centring bracket

10008138

Socket wrench

10008139

Socket wrench

10218794

Clamp fork

10008140

L550 MT-L 3085 axles

10286181

L580 Hercules axles

10286183

L580 Hercules axles

10286186

L580 Hercules axles

Grip for seal driver and shell

10286788

L580 Hercules axles

Driver for inner lip seal

10286189

L580 Hercules axles

Driver for wear bushing


with guide

10286190

L580 Hercules axles

Grooved nut socket

10286192

L580 Hercules axles

Seal holder installation tool


Driver for oil bearing
casings, bevel gear

10286193

L580 Hercules axles

10286194

L580 Hercules axles

Special tool kit for


Hercules axles
Driver for lubrication and
oil seal
3 bushing driver with guide
and grip

1.2-4 o f 6

ID no.

7019556
8145771

L550 - L576 axles


MT-L 3085-3105
L550 MT-L 3085 axles
L556 rear axle
L550 MT-L 3085 front axle
L556 - L576 axles

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

For fitting cartridge seal ring


For groove nut spanner
For fitting the grooved nuts
For fitting the grooved nuts
For fitting the grooved nuts
For measuring wear on the
brake discs
For measuring wear on the
brake discs
For fitting the drive flange
For fitting the shaft seal ring
For fitting the grooved nuts on the
axle shaft
For fitting the dust protection
axle insert
For fitting the shaft seal ring
axle insert
For detaching the output
For detaching the output
For detaching the output
For removing and fitting the
drive pinion
Contains the following items:
10286183 - 10286198
For fitting the lubrication and oil seal,
to be used with grip 10286788
For installing bushing,
including grip 10286788
For fitting the outer lip seal, to be
used with appropriate driver
For fitting the inner lip seal, to be
used with grip 10286788
For installing the wear bushing
For removing and fitting the
grooved nuts
For fitting the seal holder
For installing the bearing casings,
bevel gear

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007

Description
Slip bushing
M 90 x 1.5 mm
Slip bushing
M 110 x 1.5 mm
Slip bushing
M 130 x 1.5 mm
Handle
Handle
Mounting tool

Service Manual

General Informations
Safety regulations

Description
Driver for grease seal
and disc

ID no.
10286195

L580 Hercules axles

Rolling apparatus

10286196

L580 Hercules axles

Lifting tackle
Installation tool for
Lifetime seal

10286197

L580 Hercules axles

Remarks
For fitting the grease seal and disc, to
be used with grip 10286788
For testing the rolling torque of the
wheel hubs
For removing the wheel hub

10286198

L580 Hercules axles

For fitting the Lifetime seal

1.2.6
Description

Special tools for the transmission


ID no.

Use

Fixing spanner

10016179

L550 - L580

Special socket

10016180

L550 - L580

Mounting tool

10016181

L550 - L580

1.2.7
Description

Remarks
For loosening and tightening the
grooved nut on the coupling 1
For loosening and tightening the
grooved nut on the coupling 1
For removing and attaching the snap
ring on the couplings

Central lubrication system


ID no.

Use

BEKA Max filling press

10009239

All wheel loaders

Groeneveld filling press

10333342

All wheel loaders

Filling connection
Grneveld central lubrication
data cable

7029283

All wheel loaders

7624289

All wheel loaders

7624290

All wheel loaders

Grneveld central lubrication


plug adapter

1.2.8
Description

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007

Use

Remarks
For quickly filling the BEKA Max
reservoir
For quickly filling the Groeneveld
reservoir
For filling the reservoir
For inspecting the
central lubrication system
For inspecting the
central lubrication system

Special tools for the air conditioning system


ID no.

Use

Remarks

Vacuum pump

7027552

All wheel loaders

For evacuating the air


conditioning system

4-valve test fitting

7027558

All wheel loaders

For testing, evacuating and filling the air


conditioning system

Filling hose, blue 1500 mm

7027553

All wheel loaders

For the test fitting

Filling hose, yellow 1500 mm

7027554

All wheel loaders

For the test fitting

Filling hose, red 1500 mm

7027555

All wheel loaders

For the test fitting

Car coupling 253a

7027556

All wheel loaders

For the test fitting

Car coupling 254a

7027557

All wheel loaders

For the test fitting

1.2.9
Description
Complete tool box with
suction pads

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

Special tools for cab windows


ID no.

10021147

Use

Remarks

All wheel loaders

For installing and removing windows

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

1.2-5 o f 6

General Informations

Service Manual

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007

Special tools for maintenance and repair work

1.2-6 o f 6

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

2 Production description
2.0
Chapter contents
2

Production description......................................................... 2.0-1


2.1

Technical data ................................................................................2.1-1


Complete machine................................................................2.1-1

2.1.2

Diesel engine and pump distributor gear..............................2.1-8

2.1.3

Cooling system ...................................................................2.1-12

2.1.4

Travel hydraulics ................................................................2.1-13

2.1.5

Working hydraulics .............................................................2.1-16

2.1.6

Steering system..................................................................2.1-20

2.1.7

Brake system......................................................................2.1-22

2.1.8

Electrical system.................................................................2.1-24

2.1.9

Transmission ......................................................................2.1-25

2.1.10

Axles and cardan shaft .......................................................2.1-26

2.1.11

Machine frame and ballast weight......................................2.1-30

2.1.12

Automatic central lubrication system..................................2.1-30

2.1.13

Cab, heating and air-conditioning.......................................2.1-32

2.1.14

Lift arms and quick-change device.....................................2.1-33

2.1.15

Equipment and accessories ...............................................2.1-36

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

2.1.1

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

2.0-1 o f 2

Service Manual

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Production description

2.0-2 o f 2

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Production description
Technical data

2.1 Technical data


2.1.1

Complete machine
Wheel loader with Z lift arms

Valid for:

L550 - 456 / from 16978

The values stated refer to the standard version of the machine:


With Z lift arms (2600 mm), without hydraulic quick-change device.
With 23.5 R25 Michelin XHA tyres.
Tipping loads and weights include all lubricants, full fuel tank, ROPS/
FOPS cab and driver.

Description

Value Unit

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Bucket capacity as per ISO 7546


Bucket width
Specific material weight
A Dump height at maximum lifting height
and 45 tilt-out angle
B Dumping height
C Maximum bucket base height
D Maximum bucket pivot height
E Maximum bucket top edge height

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

3.2
2700
1.8
2882

m
mm
t/m
mm

3500
3645
3915
5395

mm
mm
mm
mm

F Reach at maximum lifting height and


45 tilt-out angle

1095 mm

G Digging depth
H Height above cab
I Height above exhaust
J Ground clearance
K Wheel base
L Overall length
Turning radius over bucket outer edge

85
3365
2985
530
3280
8220
6420

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm

2.1-1 o f 3 8

Production description

Service Manual

Technical data

Description

Value Unit

Lifting force (SAE)


Breakout force (SAE)
Tipping load when straight
Tipping load articulated at 37
Tipping load articulated at 40
Angle of articulation (to each side)
Operating weight
Tractive force
Travel speed in travel range 1,
forward and reverse
Travel speed in travel range 2,
forward and reverse
Travel speed in travel range A1-2
(automatic), forward and reverse
Travel speed in travel range A1-3
(automatic), forward and reverse
Travel speed in travel range A2-3
(automatic), forward and reverse
Sound pressure level in cab in L pA
according to ISO 6396

185
125
13205
11865
11650
40
16525
122.6
0 - 10

kN
kN
kg
kg
kg

kg
kN
km/h

0 - 20 km/h
0 - 20 km/h
0 - 40 km/h
0 - 40 km/h
69 dB(A)

Wheel loader with Z lift arms


Valid for:

L556 - 454 / from 15653

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

The values stated refer to the standard version of the machine:


With Z lift arms (2600 mm), without hydraulic quick-change device.
With 23.5 R25 Michelin XHA tyres.
Tipping loads and weights include all lubricants, full fuel tank, ROPS/
FOPS cab and driver.

2.1-2 o f 3 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Production description
Technical data

Description

Value Unit

Bucket capacity as per ISO 7546


Bucket width

2700 mm

Specific material weight

1.8 t/m

A Dump height at maximum lifting height


and 45 tilt-out angle

2850 mm

B Dumping height

3500 mm

C Maximum bucket base height

3645 mm

D Maximum bucket pivot height

3915 mm

E Maximum bucket top edge height

5460 mm

F Reach at maximum lifting height and


45 tilt-out angle

1160 mm

G Digging depth

85 mm

H Height above cab

3365 mm

I Height above exhaust

2985 mm

J Ground clearance

530 mm

K Wheel base

3280 mm

L Overall length

8240 mm

Turning radius over bucket outer edge

6440 mm

Lifting force (SAE)

185 kN

Breakout force (SAE)

130 kN

Tipping load when straight

14890 kg

Tipping load articulated at 37

13350 kg

Tipping load articulated at 40

13140 kg

Angle of articulation (to each side)

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

3.6 m

40

Operating weight

17270 kg

Tractive force

136.42 kN

Travel speed in travel range 1,


forward and reverse

0 - 10 km/h

Travel speed in travel range 2.


forward and reverse

0 - 20 km/h

Travel speed in travel range A1-2


(automatic), forward and reverse
Travel speed in travel range A1-3
(automatic), forward and reverse
Travel speed in travel range A2-3
(automatic), forward and reverse

0 - 20 km/h

Sound pressure level in cab in L pA


according to ISO 6396

0 - 40 km/h
0 - 40 km/h
69 dB(A)

Wheel loader with Z lift arms


Valid for:

L566 - 460 / from 14171

The values stated refer to the standard version of the machine:


With Z lift arms (2920 mm), without hydraulic quick-change device.
With 26.5 R25 Michelin XHA tyres.
Tipping loads and weights include all lubricants, full fuel tank, ROPS/
FOPS cab and driver.
L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

2.1-3 o f 3 8

Production description

Service Manual

Technical data

Description

Value Unit

Bucket capacity as per DIN 7546


Bucket width

3000 mm

Specific material weight

1.8 t/m

A Dump height at maximum lifting height


and 45 tilt-out angle

3240 mm

B Dumping height

3900 mm

C Maximum bucket base height

4050 mm

D Maximum bucket pivot height

4360 mm

E Maximum bucket top edge height

5870 mm

F Reach at maximum lifting height and


45 tilt-out angle

1180 mm

G Digging depth

100 mm

H Height above cab

3550 mm

I Height above exhaust

3100 mm
565 mm

K Wheel base

3580 mm

L Overall length

8912 mm

Turning radius over bucket outer edge

7096 mm

Lifting force (SAE)

264 kN

Breakout force (SAE)

200 kN

Tipping load when straight

17690 kg

Tipping load articulated at 37

15850 kg

Tipping load articulated at 40

15550 kg

Angle of articulation (to each side)

40

Operating weight

22500 kg

Tractive force

173.31 kN

Travel speed in travel range 1, forward


and reverse
Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

0 - 10 km/h

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

J Ground clearance

2.1-4 o f 3 8

4.0 m

Service Manual

Production description
Technical data

Description

Value Unit

Travel speed in travel range 2, forward


and reverse

0 - 20 km/h

Travel speed in travel range A1-2


(automatic), forward and reverse

0 - 20 km/h

Travel speed in travel range A1-3


(automatic), forward and reverse

0 - 40 km/h

Travel speed in travel range A2-3


(automatic), forward and reverse

0 - 40 km/h

Sound pressure level in cab in L pA


according to ISO 6396

69 dB(A)

Wheel loader with Z lift arms


Valid for:

L576 - 457 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

The values stated refer to the standard version of the machine:


With Z lift arms (2920 mm), without hydraulic quick-change device.
With 26.5 R25 Michelin XHA tyres.
Tipping loads and weights include, all lubricants, full fuel tank, ROPS/
FOPS cab and driver.

Description

Value Unit

Bucket capacity as per ISO 7546


Bucket width

3000 mm

Specific material weight

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

4.5 m
1.8 t/m

A Dump height at maximum lifting height


and 45 tilt-out angle

3187 mm

B Dumping height

3900 mm

C Maximum bucket base height

4050 mm

D Maximum bucket pivot height

4360 mm

E Maximum bucket top edge height

5960 mm

F Reach at maximum lifting height and

1233 mm

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

2.1-5 o f 3 8

Production description

Service Manual

Technical data

Description
45 tilt-out angle

Value Unit

G Digging depth

100 mm

H Height above cab

3550 mm

I Height above exhaust

3100 mm

J Ground clearance

565 mm

K Wheel base

3580 mm

L Overall length

8992 mm

Turning radius over bucket outer edge

7110 mm

Lifting force (SAE)

264 kN

Breakout force (SAE)

190 kN

Tipping load when straight

19570 kg

Tipping load articulated at 37

17530 kg

Tipping load articulated at 40

17200 kg

Angle of articulation (to each side)

40

Operating weight

24260 kg

Tractive force

173.3 kN

Travel speed in travel range 1, forward


and reverse

0 - 10 km/h

Travel speed in travel range 2, forward


and reverse

0 - 20 km/h

Travel speed in travel range A1-2


(automatic), forward and reverse

0 - 20 km/h

Travel speed in travel range A1-3


(automatic), forward and reverse

0 - 40 km/h

Travel speed in travel range A2-3


(automatic), forward and reverse

0 - 40 km/h

Sound pressure level in cab in L pA


according to ISO 6396

69 dB(A)

Wheel loader with Z lift arms


L580 - 459 / from 14171

The values stated refer to the standard version of the machine:


With Z lift arms (3050 mm), without hydraulic quick-change device.
With 26.5 R25 Michelin XHA tyres.
Tipping loads and weights include all lubricants, full fuel tank, ROPS/
FOPS cab and driver.

2.1-6 o f 3 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Valid for:

Service Manual

Production description
Technical data

Description

Value Unit

Bucket capacity as per ISO 7546


Bucket width

3300 mm

Specific material weight

1.8 t/m

A Dump height at maximum lifting height


and 45 tilt-out angle

3320 mm

B Dumping height

4100 mm

C Maximum bucket base height

4270 mm

D Maximum bucket pivot height

4580 mm

E Maximum bucket top edge height

6340 mm

F Reach at maximum lifting height and


45 tilt-out angle

1150 mm

G Digging depth

100 mm

H Height above cab

3550 mm

I Height above exhaust

3100 mm

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

J Ground clearance

565 mm

K Wheel base

3700 mm

L Overall length

9300 mm

Turning radius over bucket outer edge

7420 mm

Lifting force (SAE)

250 kN

Breakout force (SAE)

175 kN

Tipping load when straight

20390 kg

Tipping load articulated at 37

18409 kg

Tipping load articulated at 40

18000 kg

Angle of articulation (to each side)

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

5.0 m

40

Operating weight

24580 kg

Tractive force

173.3 kN

Travel speed in travel range 1, forward


and reverse

0 - 10 km/h

Travel speed in travel range 2, forward

0 - 20 km/h

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

2.1-7 o f 3 8

Production description

Service Manual

Technical data

Description
and reverse

Value Unit

Travel speed in travel range A1-2


(automatic), forward and reverse

0 - 20 km/h

Travel speed in travel range A1-3


(automatic), forward and reverse

0 - 40 km/h

Travel speed in travel range A2-3


(automatic), forward and reverse

0 - 40 km/h

Sound pressure level in cab in L pA


according to ISO 6396

2.1.2

69 dB(A)

Diesel engine and pump distributor gear


Diesel engine
L550 - 456 / from 16978; ID 9080542

Description

Value Unit

Engine model

D934 S A6

Number of cylinders

Firing order

1-3-4-2

Capacity

6360 cm

Cylinder bore

122 mm

Stroke

136 mm

Rated power as per ISO 9249

130 / 190 kW / PS
2000 min-1

Rated speed
Maximum torque at 1500 min-1

828 Nm

Lower idle speed

90010 min-1

Upper idle speed

206510 min-1

Start of delivery before TDC

See type plate

Combustion pressure

20 - 28 bar

Injection nozzle opening pressure

315 - 340 bar

Inlet valve play (cold)

0.3 mm

Outlet valve play (cold)

0.4 mm

Direction of rotation, looking at flywheel

Anticlockwise

Number of teeth on flywheel gear

147

Control thermostat

79 C

Longitudinal / traverse inclinability

45 / 45

Injectors

UP20PLD

Control

LHECU PLD

Starter operating voltage

24 V

Starter power consumption

6.6 kW

Alternator voltage output

28 V

Alternator current output

80 A

Turbocharger

KKK K27

Auxiliary power take-off transmission

1 : 1.1515

Weight

800 kg

Emission thresholds comply with

2.1-8 o f 3 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

EU RL 97/68 EC Stage IIIA

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Valid for:

Service Manual

Production description
Technical data

Valid for:

L556 - 454 / from 15653; ID 10116679

Description

Value Unit

Engine model

D934 L A6

Number of cylinders

Firing order

1-3-4-2

Capacity

7010 cm

Cylinder bore

122 mm

Stroke

150 mm

Rated power as per ISO 9249

140 / 177 kW / PS
2000 min-1

Rated speed
Maximum torque at 1300 min-1

900 Nm

Lower idle speed

90010 min-1

Upper idle speed

206510 min-1

Start of delivery before TDC

See type plate

Combustion pressure

22 - 34 bar

Injection nozzle opening pressure

315 - 340 bar

Inlet valve play (cold)

0.3 mm

Outlet valve play (cold)

0.4 mm

Direction of rotation, looking at


flywheel

Anticlockwise

Number of teeth on flywheel gear

147

Control thermostat

83 C

Longitudinal / traverse inclinability

45 / 45

Injectors

UP20PLD

Control

LH-ECU-UP/CR

Starter operating voltage

24 V

Starter power consumption

6.6 kW

Alternator voltage output

28 V

Alternator current output

80 A

Turbocharger

KKK K27

Auxiliary power take-off transmission

1 : 1.1515

Weight

980 kg

Emission thresholds comply with


LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Valid for:

EU RL 97/68 EC Stage IIIA

L566 - 460 / from 14171; ID 9079516

Description

Value Unit

Engine model

D936 L A6

Number of cylinders

Firing order

1-5-3-6-2-4

Capacity

10520 cm

Cylinder bore

122 mm

Stroke

150 mm

Rated power as per ISO 9249


Rated speed

2000 min-1

Maximum torque at 1300 min-1

1230 Nm
90010 min-1

Lower idle speed


L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

190 / 259 kW / PS

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

2.1-9 o f 3 8

Production description

Service Manual

Technical data

Description

Value Unit
206510 min-1

Upper idle speed


Start of delivery before TDC

See type plate

Combustion pressure

22 - 34 bar

Injection nozzle opening pressure

315 - 340 bar

Inlet valve play (cold)

0.3 mm

Outlet valve play (cold)

0.4 mm

Direction of rotation, looking


at flywheel

Anticlockwise

Number of teeth on flywheel gear

147

Control thermostat

83 C

Longitudinal / traverse inclinability

45 / 45

Injectors

UP20PLD

Control

LH-ECU-UP/CR

Starter operating voltage

24 V

Starter power consumption

6.6 kW

Alternator voltage output

28 V

Alternator current output

80 A

Turbocharger

KKK K27

Auxiliary power take-off transmission

1 : 1.1515

Weight

1180 kg

Emission thresholds comply with

L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171; ID 10116961

Description

Value Unit

Engine model

D936 L A6

Number of cylinders

Firing order

1-5-3-6-2-4

Capacity

10520 cm

Cylinder bore

122 mm

Stroke

150 mm

Rated power as per ISO 9249


Rated speed

2000 min-1

Maximum torque at 1300 min-1

1320 Nm

Lower idle speed

90010 min-1

Upper idle speed

206510 min-1

Start of delivery before TDC


Combustion pressure

See type plate


22 34 bar

Injection nozzle opening pressure

315 - 340 bar

Inlet valve play (cold)

0.3 mm

Outlet valve play (cold)

0.4 mm

Direction of rotation, looking at flywheel


Number of teeth on flywheel gear
Control thermostat
Injectors
Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

Anticlockwise
147
83 C

Longitudinal / traverse inclinability

2.1-10 o f 3 8

200 / 272 kW / PS

45 / 45
UP20PLD

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Valid for:

EU RL 97/68 EC Stage IIIA

Service Manual

Production description
Technical data

Description

Value Unit

Control

LH-ECU-UP/CR

Starter operating voltage

24 V

Starter power consumption

6.6 kW

Alternator voltage output

28 V

Alternator current output

80 A

Turbocharger

KKK K29

Auxiliary power take-off transmission

1 : 1.1515

Weight

1180 kg

Emission thresholds comply with

EU RL 97/68 EC Stage IIIA

Fuel system
Valid for:

L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653

Description

Value Unit

Tank capacity, FULL

300 l

Tank capacity, RESERVE


Valid for:

50 l

L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171

Description

Value Unit

Tank capacity, FULL

400 l

Tank capacity, RESERVE

70 l

Fuel separator
Description

Value Unit

Filter insert grade

10 m

Fuel fine filter


Description

Value Unit

Filtration grade

2 m

Refuelling pump (optional)


LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Description

Value Unit

Flow rate

50 l/min

Current consumption

15 A

Power

360 W

Protection class

IP 44

Max. duty cycle

15 minutes

Fuse

20 A

Max. suction height

4 m

Air filter vacuum switch


Description

Value Unit

Air filter contamination vacuum switch


activation point
L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

50 mbar

2.1-11 o f 3 8

Production description

Service Manual

Technical data

Coupling
Valid for:

L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653

Description

Value Unit

Type

466/233 NGT

Coupling
Valid for:

L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171

Description

Value Unit

Type

345/254 NGT

Pump distributor gear


L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653

Description

Value Unit

Type

PVG 300 B 341

Input direction

Clockwise

Output direction

Valid for:

Anticlockwise

Transmission ratio for travel


hydraulics pump

0.7868

Transmission ratio for working and


steering hydraulics pump

0.7868

L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171

Description

Value Unit

Type

PVG 350 B 384

Input direction

Clockwise

Output direction

2.1.3

Anticlockwise

Transmission ratio for travel


hydraulics pump

0.808

Transmission ratio for working and


steering hydraulics pump

0.865

Cooling system
Gear pump
Description

Value Unit

Capacity

14 cm

Rotary speed at rated engine speed

3030 min-1

Gear motor
Description

Value Unit

Gear motor displacement


Gear motor direction of rotation (looking
towards shaft)
Coil resistance
Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

Clockwise
175 10 bar

Pressure relief valve

2.1-12 o f 3 8

19 cm

4.7 Ohm
L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Valid for:

Service Manual

Production description
Technical data

Description

Value Unit
124 41 Nm

Screw tightening torque


Spanner size

41 mm

Temperature sensor
Description

Value Unit

Measuring range

min. -30 C
max. 130 C

Resistance at 0 C

1000 Ohm

Resistance at 20 C

1112 Ohm

Resistance at 30 C

1171 Ohm

Resistance at 55 C

1322 Ohm

Resistance at 73 C

1437 Ohm

Resistance at 78 C

1469 Ohm

Resistance at 84 C

1509 Ohm

Resistance at 94 C

1577 Ohm

Resistance at 102 C

1632 Ohm

Screw thread

M 14 x 1.5

Protection class

IP 65

Max. tightening torque

30 Nm

Plug connection

2.1.4

Bosch Jet plug,


2-pin (Gold contacts)

Travel hydraulics
Variable displacement pump

Valid for:

L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653

Description

Value Unit

Control type

EZ

Maximum capacity

90 cm

Flow rate at rated speed

222 l/min

Maximum swivel angle (both sides)

20
2542 min-1

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Speed (at rated speed)


Power

L550

111 kW

Power

L556

122 kW

Replenishing pump capacity


Replenishing pump flow rate (at rated speed)

46 l/min

Inlet restrictor

1.8 mm

Travel direction solenoid voltage

24 V

Travel direction solenoid current consumption

1.1 A

Travel direction solenoid resistance

22 Ohm

Control pressure proportional valve resistance

14 Ohm

Replenishing pressure at upper idle speed


High pressure at 1400 min-1
L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

19.6 cm

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

311 bar
35010 bar

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

2.1-13 o f 3 8

Production description

Service Manual

Technical data

Description

Value Unit
-1

High pressure at 1200 min

29010 bar

High pressure at 930 min-1

5010 bar

Pressure relief and replenishing valves

47010 bar
4305 bar

Pressure cut-off
Weight
Valid for:

60 kg

L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171

Description

Value Unit

Control type

EZ

Maximum capacity

125 cm

Flow rate at rated speed

300 l/min

Maximum swivel angle (both sides)

20
2475 min-1

Speed (at rated speed)


Power

L566

160 kW

Power

L576, L580

171 kW

Replenishing pump capacity

28.3 cm

Replenishing pump flow rate (at rated speed)

62 l/min

Inlet restrictor

2.2 mm

Travel direction solenoid voltage

24 V

Travel direction solenoid current consumption

1.1 A

Travel direction solenoid resistance

22 Ohm

Control pressure proportional valve resistance

14 Ohm

Replenishing pressure at upper idle speed

341 bar

-1

High pressure at 1400 min

33010 bar

High pressure at 1200 min-1

23010 bar

High pressure at 930 min-1

5010 bar

Pressure relief and replenishing valves

47010 bar
4305 bar

Pressure cut-off
Weight

75 kg

Valid for:

L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653

Description

Value Unit

Control type

EP

Maximum displacement

80 cm

Maximum swivel angel

25

Minimum swivel angle

0
5900 min-1

Maximum speed

489 Nm

Torque (p 400 bar)

2.1-14 o f 3 8

Maximum discharge valve capacity

20 l/min

Discharge valve orifice diameter

3.0 mm

Weight

34 kg

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Variable displacement motor 1

Service Manual

Production description
Technical data

Valid for:

L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171

Description

Value Unit

Control type

EP

Maximum displacement

107 cm

Maximum swivel angel

25

Minimum swivel angle

0
5292 min-1

Maximum speed

653 Nm

Torque (p 400 bar)


Maximum discharge valve capacity

20 l/min

Discharge valve orifice diameter

3.0 mm

Weight

47 kg

Variable displacement motor 2


Valid for:

L550 - 456 / from 16978

Description

Value Unit

Control type

EP

Maximum displacement

80 cm

Maximum swivel angel

25

Minimum swivel angle

0
5900 min-1

Maximum speed

489 Nm

Torque (p 400 bar)


Weight
Valid for:

34 kg

L556 - 454 / from 15653

Description

Value Unit

Control type

EP

Maximum displacement

107 cm

Maximum swivel angel

25

Minimum swivel angle

0
5292 min-1

Maximum speed

653 Nm

Torque (p 400 bar)


Weight
Valid for:

47 kg

L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Description

Value Unit

Control type

EP

Maximum displacement

140 cm

Maximum swivel angel

25

Minimum swivel angle

0
4950 min-1

Maximum speed

855 Nm

Torque (p 400 bar)

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

Maximum discharge valve capacity

10 l/min

Discharge valve orifice diameter

2.0 mm

Weight

60 kg

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

2.1-15 o f 3 8

Production description

Service Manual

Technical data

Motor scavenging pump


Description

Value Unit

Capacity

11 cm
3030 min-1

Speed at rated speed

2.1.5

Working hydraulics
Working hydraulics pump

Valid for:

L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653

Description

Value Unit

Control type

LRDS

Maximum capacity

95 cm

Flow rate at rated speed

234 l/min
2542 min-1

Speed at rated speed


Power

70 KW
222 bar

Flow regulator (delta p)


Power controller start of regulation
Weight
Valid for:

18010 bar
53 kg

L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171

Description

Value Unit

Control type

LRDS

Capacity

130 cm

Flow rate at rated speed

290 l/min
2312 min-1

Speed at rated speed


Power

87 kW
222 bar

Flow regulator (delta p)


Power controller start of regulation
Weight

18010 bar
66 kg

Control block
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653

Description

Value Unit

Spool valve diameter

25 mm

Piston stroke, both sides

11 mm

Lift arm up/down control piston flow

240 / 160 l/min

Tilt out/in control piston flow

160 / 210 l/min

Primary pressure relief valve

3605 bar

Secondary pressure relief valve / tilt in

3805 bar

Secondary pressure relief valve / tilt out

3805 bar

Secondary pressure relief valve / lift

3805 bar

LS pressure cut-off

2905 bar
3305 bar

L550
L556

Pressure relief valve pre-tension

2.1-16 o f 3 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

81 bar
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Valid for:

Service Manual

Production description
Technical data

Description

Valid for:

Value Unit

Float position/ride control solenoid


valve resistance

30 Ohm

Weight

40 kg

L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171

Description

Value Unit

Spool valve diameter

25 mm

Piston stroke, both sides

11 mm

Lift arm up/down control piston flow

300 / 170 l/min

Tilt out/in control piston flow

180 / 200 l/min

Primary pressure relief valve

3805 bar

Secondary pressure relief valve / tilt-in

4005 bar

Secondary pressure relief valve / tilt out

4005 bar

Secondary pressure relief valve / lift

4205 bar

LS pressure cut-off

3505 bar

Pressure relief valve pre-tension

81 bar

Float position/ride control solenoid


valve resistance

30 Ohm

Weight

40 kg

Pilot control device


Description

Value Unit

Retaining solenoid voltage

12 V

Retaining solenoid current consumption

0.35 A

Retaining solenoid resistance

70 Ohm

Weight

5.7 kg

Pilot control solenoid valve


Description

Value Unit

Current consumption

0.9 A

Resistance

30 Ohm

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Pilot control hydro accumulator


Valid for:

ID 7622 448

Description

Value Unit

Hydro accumulator volume

320 cm

Preload pressure (nitrogen filling)

15 bar

Float position pressure switch


Valid for:

ID 6905 893

Description

Value Unit

Switch type

Normally open
231 bar

Switch point, rising


Thread
L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

M 12 x 1.5 mm
Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

2.1-17 o f 3 8

Production description

Service Manual

Technical data

Stabilisation module
Valid for:

ID 1003 0852

Description

Value Unit

Control piston diameter

16 mm

Cut-off pressure (LFD off)

12020 bar

Safety valve

33010 bar

Restrictor check valve diameter

2.0 / 0.4 mm

Solenoid valve current consumption

0.6 A

Solenoid valve resistance

40 Ohm

Weight

13 kg

Ride control hydro accumulator


Description

Value Unit

Number of hydro accumulators


L550, L556

2 Qty.

Number of hydro accumulators


L566, L566, L576

3 Qty.

Hydro accumulator volume

2000 cm

Preload pressure (nitrogen filling)

252 bar

Oil filling

350 cm

Ride control pressure switch


Valid for:

ID 6905 893

Description

Value Unit

Switch type

N/C
10 1 bar

Switch point, rising


Thread

M 12 x 1.5 mm

Lift cylinder
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653; ID 9231 458

Description

Value Unit

Piston diameter

130 mm

Rod diameter

80 mm

Stroke length

745 mm

Minimum installation length

2.1-18 o f 3 8

1245 mm

Weight

136 kg

Lifting at rated load

5.6 seconds

Lowering empty

2.7 seconds

Piston rod bearing tightening torque


(hex screws)

285 Nm

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Valid for

Service Manual

Production description
Technical data

Valid for:

L566 - 460 / from 14171; L574 - 457 / from 14171;


L580 - 459 / from 14171; ID 9959 881

Description

Value Unit

Piston diameter

150 mm

Rod diameter

80 mm

Stroke length

790 mm

Minimum installation length

1320 mm

Weight

165 kg

Lifting at rated load

5.6 seconds

Lowering empty

3.5 seconds

Piston rod bearing tightening torque


(hex screws)

285 Nm

Tilt cylinder
Valid for:

L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653; ID 9954 056

Description

Value Unit

Piston diameter

Valid for:

150 mm

Rod diameter

80 mm

Stroke length

455 mm

Minimum installation length

860 mm

Weight

127 kg

Tilting out at rated load

2.3 seconds

Piston rod bearing tightening torque (hex


screws)

565 Nm

L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; ID 9248 203

Description

Value Unit

Piston diameter

170 mm

Rod diameter

90 mm

Stroke length

555 mm

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Minimum installation length

Valid for:

1050 mm

Weight

188 kg

Tilting out at rated load

2.0 seconds

Piston rod bearing tightening torque


(hex screws)

970 Nm

L580 - 459 / from 14171; ID 9903 394

Description

Value Unit

Piston diameter

170 mm

Rod diameter

90 mm

Stroke length

555 mm

Minimum installation length

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

1185 mm

Weight

198 kg

Tilting out at rated load

2.0 seconds

Piston rod bearing tightening torque


(hex screws)

970 Nm

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

2.1-19 o f 3 8

Production description

Service Manual

Technical data

Return suction filter


Description

Value Unit

Filtration grade

10 m

Pre-tension valve

0.3 bar

Replenishing valve

0.04 bar

Replenishing strainer

160 m

Bypass valve

3.0 bar

Return strainer

80 m

Bleeder filter
Description

Value Unit

Filtration grade

10 m

Inlet opening pressure

2.1.6

0.03 bar

Outlet opening pressure

0.5 bar

Thread

3/4 inch

Steering system
Steering pump
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653; ID 5716 846

Description

Value Unit

Control type

DFR

Maximum capacity

45 cm

Flow rate at rated speed

111 l/min

Swivel angle

min. 0
max. 15.6
2542 min-1

Speed at rated speed


Power

39 kW
222 bar

Flow regulator (delta p)

2105 bar

Pressure cut-off
Weight
Valid for:

21 kg

L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171;


L580 - 459 / from 14171; ID 5716828

Description

Value Unit

Control type

DFR

Maximum capacity

71 cm

Flow rate at rated speed

160 l/min

Swivel angle

min. 0
max. 15.6
2312 min-1

Speed at rated speed


Power

56 kW
222 bar

Flow regulator (delta p)

2105 bar

Pressure cut-off
Weight

2.1-20 o f 3 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

33 kg
L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Valid for:

Service Manual

Production description
Technical data

Servostat
Valid for:

L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653; ID 1011 3336

Description

Value Unit

Displacement

Valid for:

462 cm

Secondary pressure relief

28510 bar

Flow booster

1 : 1.6

L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171;


L580 - 459 / from 14171; ID 10113338

Description

Value Unit

Displacement

588 cm

Secondary pressure relief

28510 bar

Flow booster

1 : 1.6

Steering cylinder
Valid for:

L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653; ID 9231 461

Description

Valid for:

Value Unit

Piston diameter

80 mm

Rod diameter

40 mm

Stroke length

405 mm

Minimum installation length

730 mm

Piston rod bearing tightening torque

1000 Nm

Weight

26.2 kg

L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171;


L580 - 459 / from 14171; ID 9246849

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Description

Value Unit

Piston diameter

90 mm

Rod diameter

40 mm

Stroke length

455 mm

Minimum installation length

780 mm

Piston rod bearing tightening torque

1000 Nm

Weight

29.5 kg

Steering damper hydro accumulator


Valid for:

ID 7623 934

Description

Value Unit

Hydro accumulator volume

320 cm

Preload pressure (nitrogen filling)


Oil filling

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

30 bar
180 cm

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

2.1-21 o f 3 8

Production description

Service Manual

Technical data

Emergency steering pump


Valid for:

ID 1000 7930

Description

Value Unit

Capacity

11 cm
555 bar

Pressure relief valve


Protection class

IP 66

Maximum current consumption

150 A

Weight

10 kg

Emergency steering pressure switch


Valid for:

ID 1029 4440

Description

Value Unit

Switch type

Normally open
162 bar

Switching point
Thread

M 12 x 1.5 mm

Emergency steering check pressure switch


Valid for:

ID 1029 4440

Description

Value Unit

Switch type

Normally open
162 bar

Switching point
Thread

2.1.7

M 12 x 1.5 mm

Brake system
Brake system gear pump
Description

Value Unit

Capacity

4 cm

Flow rate at rated speed

12.1 l/min

Speed at rated speed

3030 min-1

Valid for:

L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653;


L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; ID 1029 2360

Description

Value Unit

Accumulator charge valve


activation pressure

1805 bar

Accumulator charge valve


deactivation pressure

2105 bar

Parking brake solenoid valve


current consumption

0.6 A

Parking brake solenoid valve resistance

40 Ohm

Maximum service brake pressure

2.1-22 o f 3 8

955 bar

Pedal start angle

42

Pedal stop angle

15

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Compact brake valve

Service Manual

Production description
Technical data

Valid for:

L580 - 459 / from 14171; ID 1029 5965

Description

Value Unit

Accumulator charge valve


activation pressure

1805 bar

Accumulator charge valve


deactivation pressure

2105 bar

Parking brake solenoid valve


current consumption

0.6 A

Parking brake solenoid valve resistance

40 Ohm
705 bar

Maximum service brake pressure


Pedal start angle

42

Pedal stop angle

15

Service brake hydro accumulator


Valid for:

ID 1003 8487

Description

Value Unit

Number of hydro accumulators

4 Qty.

Hydro accumulator volume

1400 cm

Preload pressure (nitrogen filling)

95 bar

Brake light button


Valid for:

ID 6905 535

Description

Value Unit

Switch type

Normally open
50.5 bar

Switch point, rising


Thread

M 12 x 1.5 mm

Accumulator charge pressure switch


Valid for:

ID 1003 6072

Description

Value Unit

Switch type

N/C
120 5 bar

Switching point, falling


LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Thread

M 12 x 1.5 mm

Disc brake

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

Description

Value Unit

Gap

1.00.5 mm

Brake lining thickness, NEW

4.5 mm

Minimum brake lining thickness

1.0 mm

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

2.1-23 o f 3 8

Production description

Service Manual

Technical data

Parking brake hydro accumulator


Valid for:

ID 1028 8602

Description

Value Unit

Hydro accumulator volume

320 cm

Preload pressure (nitrogen filling)

80 bar

Overspeed protection solenoid valve


Description

2.1.8

Value Unit

Current consumption

0.9 A

Resistance

30 Ohm

Electrical system
Description

Value Unit

System voltage

24 V

Battery voltage

12 V

Battery
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653; ID 6002 886

Description

Value Unit

Battery voltage

12 V

Battery capacity

143 Ah

Acid density of charged battery


Cold test current (at -18 C EN 60095-1)
Valid for:

1.26-1.28 kg/l
950 A

L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171;
ID 6132 03208

Description

Value Unit

Battery voltage

12 V

Battery capacity

170 Ah

Acid density of charged battery


Cold test current (at -18 C EN 60095-1)

1.26-1.28 kg/l
1000 A

Input / Output - module


Description

Value Unit

Protection class (with connector


plugged in)
Power supply (logical unit)

7.0 to 48.0 VDC

Operating temperature

-40 to +85 C

Operation at ambient air pressure


Weight

2.1-24 o f 3 8

IP6K9K

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

500 to 1100 mbar


1.77 kg

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Valid for:

Service Manual

Production description
Technical data

Main electronics (master)


Description

Value Unit

Protection class (with connector


plugged in)
Computing power

266 MHz

Power supply (logical unit)

9.0 to 60.0 VDC

Operating temperature

-40 to +85 C

Operation at ambient air pressure


Weight

2.1.9

IP 65

500 to 1100 mbar


3.5 kg

Transmission
Transmission
Description

Value Unit

Number of gears

Transfer ratio in 1st gear

6.103

Transfer ratio in 2nd gear

3.033

Transfer ratio in 3rd gear

1.342

Weight (without oil)

285 kg

Drive shaft flange tightening torque


Tightening torque
Control valve block fastening screws

340 - 400 Nm
30 - 35 Nm

Gear shifting solenoid valves


Description

Value Unit

Voltage

24 V
30050 mA

Current consumption

936 Ohm

Resistance

Speed sensors
Description

Value Unit
1050100 Ohm

Resistance

0.30.2 mm

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Distance
Number of teeth on drive shaft VM 1

60

Number of teeth on drive shaft VM 2

60

Number of teeth on power take-off speed


sensor

128

Gear pump
Description

Value Unit

Capacity

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

16 cm

Flow rate at rated speed

40.8 l/min

Speed at rated speed

2550 min-1

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

2.1-25 o f 3 8

Production description

Service Manual

Technical data

2.1.10

Axles and cardan shaft


Front axle
L550 - 456 / from 16978

Description

Value Unit

Type

MT-L 3085 -

Self-locking differential

45 %

Width

2000 mm

Differential nut tightening torque


Wheel hub grooved nut tightening torque
Wheel lug tightening torque
Wheel lug spanner size

3.89

Wheel hub transmission

6.0
23.33
816 kg

L556 - 454 / from 15653

Description

Value Unit

Type

MT-L 3095

Self-locking differential

45 %

Width

2000 mm

Differential nut tightening torque


Wheel hub grooved nut tightening torque
Wheel lug tightening torque
Wheel lug spanner size

700 Nm
3000+500 Nm
750 Nm
30 mm

Differential transmission

3.89

Wheel hub transmission

6.0

Overall transmission

23.33

Weight

924 kg

L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 473 / from 14171

Description

Value Unit

Type

MT-L3105

Self-locking differential

45 %

Width

2230 mm

Differential nut tightening torque


Wheel hub grooved nut tightening torque
Wheel lug tightening torque

2.1-26 o f 3 8

750 Nm

Differential transmission

Weight

Valid for:

2000+500 Nm
30 mm

Overall transmission

Valid for:

700 Nm

700 Nm
3000+500 Nm
750 Nm

Wheel lug spanner size

30 mm

Differential transmission

4.1

Wheel hub transmission

6.0

Overall transmission

24.66

Weight

1174 kg

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Valid for:

Service Manual

Production description
Technical data

Valid for:

L580 - 459 / from 14171

Description

Value Unit
SA 197 337 43 R 175

Type
Self-locking differential

45 %

Width

2230 mm

Differential nut tightening torque

1200 Nm

Wheel hub grooved nut tightening torque


Wheel lug tightening torque

2000+200 Nm
750 Nm

Wheel lug spanner size

32 mm

Differential transmission

4.1

Wheel hub transmission

6.0

Overall transmission

24.60

Weight

1180 kg

Rear axle
Valid for:

L550 - 456 / from 16978

Description

Value Unit

Type

MT-L 3085 -

Self-locking differential

45 %

Width

2000 mm

Differential nut tightening torque


Wheel hub grooved nut tightening torque
Wheel lug tightening torque

30 mm

Differential transmission

3.89

Wheel hub transmission

6.0

Overall transmission

23.33

Weight

816 kg

L556 - 454 / from 15653

Description

Value Unit

Type

MT-L 3085

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Self-locking differential

45 %

Width

2000 mm

Differential nut tightening torque

1200 Nm

Wheel hub grooved nut tightening torque


Wheel lug tightening torque

2000+500 Nm
750 Nm

Wheel lug spanner size

30 mm

Differential transmission

3.89

Wheel hub transmission

6.0

Overall transmission

23.33

Weight

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

2000+500 Nm
750 Nm

Wheel lug spanner size

Valid for:

700 Nm

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

816 kg

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

2.1-27 o f 3 8

Production description

Service Manual

Technical data

L566 - 460 / from 14171

Description

Value Unit

Type

MT-L 3095 -

Self-locking differential

45 %

Width

2230 mm

Differential nut tightening torque

1200 Nm

Wheel hub grooved nut tightening torque


Wheel lug tightening torque

30 mm

Differential transmission

4.1

Wheel hub transmission

6.0
24.66

Swing angle

13

Weight

975 kg

L576 - 473 / from 14171

Description

Value Unit

Type

MT-L 3105 -

Self-locking differential

45 %

Width

2230 mm

Differential nut tightening torque

1200 Nm

Wheel hub grooved nut tightening torque


Wheel lug tightening torque

750 Nm
30 mm

Differential transmission

4.1

Wheel hub transmission

6.0
24.66

Swing angle

13

Weight

1174 kg

L580 - 459 / from 14171

Description

Value Unit
SA 197 478 37 R 118

Type
Self-locking differential

45 %

Width

2230 mm

Differential nut tightening torque

1200 Nm

Wheel hub grooved nut tightening torque


Wheel lug tightening torque

1300+200 Nm
750 Nm

Wheel lug spanner size

32 mm

Differential transmission

4.1

Wheel hub transmission

6.0

Overall transmission

24.60

Swing angle

13

Weight

2.1-28 o f 3 8

3000+500 Nm

Wheel lug spanner size

Overall transmission

Valid for:

750 Nm

Wheel lug spanner size

Overall transmission

Valid for:

3000+500 Nm

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

1090 kg

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Valid for:

Service Manual

Production description
Technical data

Front drive shaft


Valid for:

L550 - 4456 / from 16978

Description

Value Unit

Min. length

1310 mm

Max. length

1500 mm

Flange tightening torque

125 Nm

Weight
Valid for:

38 kg

L556 - 454 / from 15653

Description

Value Unit

Min. length

1430 mm

Max. length

1440 mm

Flange tightening torque

285 Nm

Weight
Valid for:

72 kg

L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171

Description

Value Unit

Min. length

1500 mm

Max. length

1610 mm

Flange tightening torque

285 Nm

Weight
Valid for:

73 kg

L580 - 459 / from 14171

Description

Value Unit

Min. length

1545 mm

Max. length

1555 mm

Flange tightening torque

285 Nm

Weight

75 kg

Rear drive shaft


Valid for:

L550 - 4456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Description

Value Unit

Min. length

600 mm

Max. length

710 mm

Flange tightening torque

125 Nm

Weight
Valid for:

16 kg

L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171

Description

Value Unit

Min. length

765 mm

Max. length

875 mm

Flange tightening torque

125 Nm

Weight

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

24 kg

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

2.1-29 o f 3 8

Production description

Service Manual

Technical data

2.1.11

Machine frame and ballast weight


Ballast weight

Valid for:

L550 - 456 / from 16978

Description

Value Unit

Weight per ballast weight

614 kg

Material

GG 10

M24 10.9 screw tightening torque


Valid for:

960 Nm

L556 - 454 / from 15653

Description

Value Unit

Weight per ballast weight

901 kg

Material

GG 10

M24 10.9 screw tightening torque


Valid for:

960 Nm

L566 - 460 / from 14171

Description

Value Unit

Weight per ballast weight

950 kg

Material

GG 10

M24 10.9 screw tightening torque


Valid for:

960 Nm

L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171

Description

Value Unit

Weight per ballast weight

1540 kg

Material

GG 10

M24 10.9 screw tightening torque

2.1.12

960 Nm

Automatic central lubrication system


Central lubrication pump EP1
Description

Value Unit
120 mm
Greases up to
NLGI class 2

Transfer medium
Maximum flow pressure

280 bar

Operating temperature

min. - 35 C
max. + 80 C

Power supply

24 V

Protection class

IP 65

Container size

2.1-30 o f 3 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

4 kg

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Flow per stroke

Service Manual

Production description
Technical data

Progressive distributor
MX-F
Description

Value Unit

Maximum operating pressure at input


Temperature range

300 bar
min. -35 C
max. +100 C
Greases up to
NLGI class 2

Transfer medium

MX-F 25
Description

Value Unit

Flow per outlet

25 mm

Flow per element

50 mm

Piston diameter

3 mm

MX-F 45
Description

Value Unit

Flow per outlet

45 mm

Flow per element

90 mm

Piston diameter

4 mm

MX-F 75
Description

Value Unit

Flow per outlet

75 mm

Flow per element

150 mm

Piston diameter

5 mm

MX-F 105
Description

Value Unit

Flow per outlet

105 mm

Flow per element

210 mm

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Piston diameter

6 mm

Central lubrication pump controller EP-1


Description

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

Value Unit

Default lubrication (cycles)

24 Cycles

Default cycle time 75%

40 min

Default cycle time 100%

30 min

Default cycle time 125%

20 min

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

2.1-31 o f 3 8

Production description

Service Manual

Technical data

2.1.13

Cab, heating and air-conditioning


Heating and ventilation
Description

Value Unit

Rated voltage

24 V

Number of blower levels

Maximum fan current consumption

15.7 A

Maximum air flow

600 m/h

Heating power

11 kW

Air conditioning system


Description

Value Unit

Refrigerant

R134a

Refrigerant oil (PAG oil)

ZXL 100 PG

Coolant quantity

1250+50 g

Cooling power

9.710% kW

Air conditioning compressor


Description

Value Unit

Type

SD7H15

Capacity

154.9 cm
ZXL 100 PG
(SP 10)

Refrigerant oil (PAG oil)


Filling quantity

200 cm

Maximum current consumption

2.63 A

Weight without oil

6.9 kg

Condenser
Description

Value Unit

Maximum air flow

4000 m/h

Heating power

9.71 kW
35 bar

Dryer collector unit


Description

Value Unit

Contents

0.70 l

Filtration grade

7 m

Leak test

30 bar

Dryer water consumption

16 g

Burst pressure

2.1-32 o f 3 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

130 bar

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Test pressure

Service Manual

Production description
Technical data

Pressure switch
Description

Value Unit

Low pressure OFF

1.50.5 bar

Low pressure ON

3.5 bar

High pressure OFF

252 bar

High pressure ON

181.5 bar

Evaporator
Description

Value Unit

Cooling power

2.1.14

9.7 kW
10%

Temperature sensor activation


temperature

5.5

Temperature sensor deactivation


temperature

4.510% C

Lift arms and quick-change device


Lift arm

Main dimensions
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Valid for:

L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653

Description

Value Unit

Length 1 bucket arm

2600 mm

Length 2 linkage

1267 mm

Length 3 connecting link assembly


Weight of complete lift arms
(without cylinder)

1380 kg

Bucket arm weight

928 kg

Linkage weight

318 kg

Weight of connecting link assembly

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

718 mm

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

56 kg

2.1-33 o f 3 8

Production description

Service Manual

Technical data

Valid for:

L566 - 460 / from 14171

Description

Value Unit

Length 1 bucket arm

2920 mm

Length 2 linkage

1267 mm

Length 3 connecting link assembly


Weight of complete lift arms
(without cylinder)

2090 kg

Bucket arm weight

1345 kg

Linkage weight

508 kg

Weight of connecting link assembly


Valid for:

80 kg

L576 - 457 / from 14171

Description

Value Unit

Length 1 bucket arm

2920 mm

Length 2 linkage

1401 mm

Length 3 connecting link assembly

855 mm

Weight of complete lift arms


(without cylinder)

2200 kg

Bucket arm weight

1435 kg

Linkage weight

508 kg

Weight of connecting link assembly


Valid for:

718 mm

80 kg

L580 - 459 / from 14171

Description

Value Unit

Length 1 bucket arm

3050 mm

Length 2 linkage

1401 mm

Length 3 connecting link assembly

855 mm

Weight of complete lift arms


(without cylinder)

2250 kg

Bucket arm weight

1500 kg

Linkage weight

508 kg
80 kg

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Weight of connecting link assembly

2.1-34 o f 3 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Production description
Technical data

Quick-change device

Main dimensions
Valid for:

L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653

Description

Valid for:

Value Unit

A system connection size

1000 mm

B width

1200 mm

H height

820 mm

T depth

450 mm

Weight

430 kg

L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 4573 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171

Description

Value Unit
1100 mm

B width

1370 mm

H height

1100 mm

T depth

620 mm

Weight

830 kg

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

A system connection size

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

2.1-35 o f 3 8

Production description

Service Manual

Technical data

2.1.15

Equipment and accessories


Standard bucket

L550 - 456 / from 16978

Description

Value Unit

B bucket width

2700 mm

H height

1475 mm

L length with teeth

1630 mm

Specific material weight

1.8 t/m

Bucket capacity

3.2 m

Weight

1305 kg

Teeth UNI-Z-2000 III


Valid for:

8 Pc.

L556 - 454 / from 15653

Description

Value Unit

B bucket width

2700 mm

H height

1520 mm

L length with teeth

1630 mm

Specific material weight

1.8 t/m

Bucket capacity

3.6 m

Weight

1365 kg

Teeth UNI-Z-2000 III


Valid for:

8 Pc.

L566 - 460 / from 14171

Description

Value Unit

B bucket width

3000 mm

H height

1610 mm

L length with teeth

1805 mm

Specific material weight

1.8 t/m

Bucket capacity

4.0 m

Weight

2080 kg

Teeth UNI-Z-2000 IV

2.1-36 o f 3 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

9 Pc.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Valid for:

Service Manual

Production description
Technical data

Valid for:

L576 - 457 / from 14171

Description

Value Unit

B bucket width

3000 mm

H height

1575 mm

L length with teeth

1905 mm

Specific material weight

1.8 t/m

Bucket capacity

4.5 m

Weight

2150 kg

Teeth UNI-Z-2000 IV
Valid for:

9 Pc.

L580 - 459 / from 14171

Description

Value Unit

B bucket width

3300 mm

H height

1675 mm

L length with teeth

1900 mm

Specific material weight

1.8 t/m

Bucket capacity

5.0 m

Weight

2340 kg

Teeth UNI-Z-2000 IV

9 Pc.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Forklift

Valid for:

L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653

Description

Value Unit

Prong length

1500 mm

L Length (fork carrier + prongs)

1860 mm

K Fork carrier width

2000 mm

H Height (fork carrier + prongs)

1040 mm

Weight (fork carrier + prongs)


Valid for:

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

740 kg

L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171

Description

Value Unit

Prong length

1800 mm

L Length (fork carrier + prongs)

2220 mm

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

2.1-37 o f 3 8

Production description

Service Manual

Technical data

Description

Value Unit
2050 mm

H Height (fork carrier + prongs)

1270 mm

Weight (fork carrier + prongs)

1160 kg

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

K Fork carrier width

2.1-38 o f 3 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

3 Maintenance
3.0
Chapter contents
3

Maintenance........................................................................ 3.0-1
3.1

Maintenance and inspection schedule ...........................................3.1-1

3.2

Testing and adjustment plan...........................................................3.2-1

3.3

Testing and adjustment checklists..................................................3.3-1

3.4

Lubrication chart and filling quantities ............................................3.4-1


3.4.1

Table of filling quantities .......................................................3.4-1

3.4.2

Lubrication charts .................................................................3.4-5

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

3.5

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

Maintenance tasks..........................................................................3.5-1
3.5.1

Preparatory tasks for maintenance ......................................3.5-1

3.5.2

Removing loose parts, dirt, ice and snow from the


machine ................................................................................3.5-5

3.5.3

Checking the machine for external damage.........................3.5-6

3.5.4

Making sure the bolted connections are tight.......................3.5-6

3.5.5

Sealing leaks ........................................................................3.5-6

3.5.6

Checking the engine oil level................................................3.5-6

3.5.7

Changing the engine oil........................................................3.5-7

3.5.8

Changing the diesel engine oil filter .....................................3.5-8

3.5.9

Checking / replacing the V-ribbed belt .................................3.5-9

3.5.10

Checking / adjusting the engine valve play ..........................3.5-9

3.5.11

Checking the diesel engine heating flange ........................3.5-11

3.5.12

Greasing the ring gear on the engine starter flywheel .......3.5-12

3.5.13

Changing the engine oil separator filter insert....................3.5-12

3.5.14

Checking the bearings and condition of the engine


control units ........................................................................3.5-13

3.5.15

Checking the state of sensors and cable connections .......3.5-13

3.5.16

Changing the fuel pre-filter .................................................3.5-13

3.5.17

Changing the fuel fine filter.................................................3.5-15

3.5.18

Draining off condensate from the fuel pre-filter (the


corresponding service code appears) ................................3.5-16

3.5.19

Bleeding the fuel system ....................................................3.5-16

3.5.20

Draining off condensate and sediment from the fuel


tank .....................................................................................3.5-18

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.0-1 o f 4

3.0-2 o f 4

Service Manual
3.5.21

Cleaning the air filter service cap and dust extraction


valve................................................................................... 3.5-19

3.5.22

Testing the air filter vacuum switch ................................... 3.5-19

3.5.23

Changing the air filter primary element when indicated


by the vacuum switch ........................................................ 3.5-20

3.5.24

Changing the air filter secondary element ......................... 3.5-21

3.5.25

Checking the air intake hoses for leaks and tight fitting .... 3.5-22

3.5.26

Checking the exhaust lines for leaks and tight fitting ........ 3.5-22

3.5.27

Check the oil level in the pump distributor gear................. 3.5-23

3.5.28

Changing the splitter box oil .............................................. 3.5-24

3.5.29

Checking the soot particle filter pressure monitor for


function, leaks and blockages............................................ 3.5-24

3.5.30

Checking and draining the soot particle filter


condensate separator ........................................................ 3.5-25

3.5.31

Changing the soot particle filter condensate separator ..... 3.5-26

3.5.32

Cleaning the soot particle filter .......................................... 3.5-27

3.5.33

Checking the coolant antifreeze and corrosion inhibitor


concentration ..................................................................... 3.5-28

3.5.34

Cleaning the cooling system.............................................. 3.5-32

3.5.35

Changing the coolant......................................................... 3.5-33

3.5.36

Checking the oil level in the hydraulic tank........................ 3.5-35

3.5.37

Draining off condensate and sediment from the


hydraulic tank..................................................................... 3.5-36

3.5.38

Changing the oil in the hydraulic tank and checking the


return strainer..................................................................... 3.5-36

3.5.39

Checking and cleaning the magnetic rod on the


hydraulic tank..................................................................... 3.5-37

3.5.40

Changing the hydraulic tank return suction filter ............... 3.5-38

3.5.41

Changing the hydraulic tank bleeder filter ......................... 3.5-38

3.5.42

Lubricating the pilot control device solenoids, universal


joints and tappets............................................................... 3.5-39

3.5.43

Testing the steering ........................................................... 3.5-39

3.5.44

Lubricating the bearing points on the steering cylinders ... 3.5-39

3.5.45

Testing the service brake and parking brake..................... 3.5-40

3.5.46

Checking the gap and wear on the parking brake linings.. 3.5-41

3.5.47

Checking the indicator lamps and lighting ......................... 3.5-42

3.5.48

Checking the batteries, fluid level and terminals ............... 3.5-43

3.5.49

Checking the transmission oil level ................................... 3.5-44

3.5.50

Changing the transmission oil............................................ 3.5-44

3.5.51

Changing the transmission oil filter.................................... 3.5-44

3.5.52

Checking the tightness of the wheels (once after 50,


100 and 250 h)................................................................... 3.5-45

3.5.53

Checking the axle oil level ................................................. 3.5-45

3.5.54

Checking the axle oil level ................................................. 3.5-46

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Maintenance

Service Manual

Maintenance
3.5.55

Changing the axle oil ..........................................................3.5-46

3.5.56

Changing the axle oil ..........................................................3.5-47

3.5.57

Lubricating the bevel gear seal ..........................................3.5-48

3.5.58

Checking and lubricating the front drive shaft ....................3.5-48

3.5.59

Checking and lubricating the rear drive shaft.....................3.5-48

3.5.60

Testing and setting the tyre pressure for the machine's


use and attachments ..........................................................3.5-49

3.5.61

Lubricating the articulated bearing and the rear


oscillating bearing...............................................................3.5-49

3.5.62

Checking the lubrication system grease reservoir level .....3.5-50

3.5.63

Checking the pipes, hoses and lubrication points of the


lubrication system...............................................................3.5-51

3.5.64

Checking whether metered quantities are adequate at


the bearing points (grease collars) of the central
lubrication system...............................................................3.5-51

3.5.65

Lubricating the door hinges ................................................3.5-51

3.5.66

Cleaning the fresh air and recirculated air filter..................3.5-51

3.5.67

Changing the fresh air and recirculated air filter ................3.5-53

3.5.68

Checking the indicator beads in the dryer-collector unit ....3.5-54

3.5.69

Lubricating the lift arms and attachment ............................3.5-54

3.5.70

Checking the bucket bearing seals and the bearing


bushings on the lift arms.....................................................3.5-55

3.5.71

Check the lift arms and bucket stops .................................3.5-57

3.5.72

Testing the quick-change device (optional)........................3.5-58

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

3.6

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

Testing and adjustment tasks .........................................................3.6-1


3.6.1

Preparing for testing and adjustment ...................................3.6-1

3.6.2

Safety precautions for testing and adjustment .....................3.6-1

3.6.3

Bringing the machine up to operating temperature ..............3.6-2

3.6.4

Checking the diesel engine speed .......................................3.6-2

3.6.5

Check the fan motor and fan control pressure relief


valve .....................................................................................3.6-3

3.6.6

Calibrating the pedals...........................................................3.6-4

3.6.7

Checking the replenishing pressure of the variable


displacement pump ..............................................................3.6-5

3.6.8

Checking the pressure relief and replenishing valve of


the variable displacement pump...........................................3.6-5

3.6.9

Checking the pressure cut-off of the variable


displacement pump ..............................................................3.6-6

3.6.10

Calibrating the block curve ...................................................3.6-7

3.6.11

Calibrating the variable displacement motors ......................3.6-8

3.6.12

Checking the engine output..................................................3.6-9

3.6.13

Checking the flow controller (delta p) of the working


hydraulics pump .................................................................3.6-10

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.0-3 o f 4

Maintenance

Service Manual
3.6.14

Checking the flow controller (start of delivery) of the


working hydraulics pump ................................................... 3.6-10

3.6.15

Checking the secondary pressure relief valves on the


control block....................................................................... 3.6-11

3.6.16

Checking the primary pressure relief valves on the


control block....................................................................... 3.6-12

3.6.17

Checking the LS pressure cut-off on the control block...... 3.6-12

3.6.18

Depressurising ride control and the hydro accumulators .. 3.6-13

3.6.19

Checking the cut-off pressure in the stabilisation


module ............................................................................... 3.6-13

3.6.20

Checking the nitrogen in the ride control hydro


accumulator ....................................................................... 3.6-13

3.6.21

Check the pressure cut-off of the steering pump............... 3.6-14

3.6.22

Checking the flow controller (delta p) of the steering


pump .................................................................................. 3.6-14

3.6.23

Checking the brake pressure of the compact brake


valve................................................................................... 3.6-15

3.6.24

Checking the brake pressure at the axles ......................... 3.6-15

3.6.25

Checking the capacity of the brake accumulator............... 3.6-16

3.6.26

Checking the accumulator charge pressure ...................... 3.6-17

3.6.27

Checking the brake light pressure switch and brake


lights................................................................................... 3.6-17

3.6.28

Checking the transmission shift pressure.......................... 3.6-17

3.6.29

Checking the nitrogen in the transmission hydro


accumulator ....................................................................... 3.6-18

3.7

Lubricants and fuels ....................................................................... 3.7-1


Diesel fuels .......................................................................... 3.7-2

3.7.2

Lubricating oils for diesel engines ....................................... 3.7-3

3.7.3

Coolant for the diesel engine ............................................... 3.7-5

3.7.4

Hydraulic oils........................................................................ 3.7-8

3.7.5

Lubricating oils for the transmission .................................... 3.7-9

3.7.6

Grease for general lubrication points................................... 3.7-9


LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

3.7.1

3.0-4 o f 4

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Maintenance
Maintenance and inspection schedule

3.1 Maintenance and inspection schedule


The following abbreviations are used in this section:
h = service hours
Various symbols (solid or empty circles, boxes and stars) are used to
indicate the maintenance tasks, which fall into two main types.
The symbols have the following meanings:
Table with solid circle, box or star
Responsibility for carrying out the maintenance work lies with the machine
operator or his maintenance personnel.
This affects the maintenance intervals every 10 and 50 service hours (h)
and non-scheduled intervals.
The symbols have the following meanings:
Table with empty circle, box or star, or service hours (h)
The maintenance and inspection work must be performed or supervised
by authorised engineers from LIEBHERR or its authorised dealers.
This affects the maintenance intervals on delivery, every 500, 1000, 2000
service hours (h), and at unscheduled times.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

You will find a list of the spare parts needed for maintenance and inspection
work in the service package of the spare parts list.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.1-1 o f 4

Maintenance

Service Manual

Maintenance and inspection schedule

Customer:

Machine type: ...

Serial no.: . Service hours: .. Date: ..

Special intervals

Every 2000

Every 1000

Every 500

Every 50

Every 10

On handover

Maintenance / inspection after


service hours

z
z

z
z

TASKS TO BE PERFORMED
By maintenance staff
Once-only activity
zRepeat interval
As necessary
7Annually before the winter

By authorised specialist staff


Once-only activity
Repeat interval
As necessary

Have the driver lubricate the machine in accordance with the lubrication chart
and instruct him on proper maintenance
Instruct the driver in the operation of all functions
Remove loose parts, dirt, ice and snow from the machine
Check the machine for external damage
Make sure the bolted connections are tight
Seal any leaks
Check the hydraulic pressure according to the testing and adjustment plan

z
z
z

3.1-2 o f 4

Check the engine oil level


Change the engine oil (at least once a year): CAUTION See the section on
lubricants and fuels for the engine oil quality and complicating factors.
Change the engine oil filter (at least once a year)
Check the V-ribbed belt and replace it if necessary
Check / adjust the engine valve play
Check the diesel engine heating flange
Lightly grease the ring gear on the engine starter flywheel
Change the engine oil separator filter insert
Check the bearings and and condition of the engine control units
Check the state of sensors and cable connections
Replace the fuel pre-filter (or in the event of a lack of output)
Replace the fuel fine filter (or in the event of a lack of output)
Drain off condensate from the fuel pre-filter (or if the corresponding service
code appears)
Bleed air from fuel system (CAUTION: do not loosen injection lines)
Drain off condensate and sediment from the fuel tank
Clean the air filter service cap and dust extraction valve
Test the air filter vacuum switch
Change the main air filter element when indicated by the vacuum switch (or
every year at the latest)
Clean or replace the air filter secondary element (after replacing the main
element 3 times or every year at the latest)
Check the air intake hoses for leaks and tight fitting
Check the exhaust lines for leaks and tight fitting
Check the oil level in the pump distributor gear
Change the splitter box oil

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Diesel engine and pump distributor gear

Service Manual

Maintenance
Maintenance and inspection schedule

Customer:

Machine type: Serial no.: .... Service hours: .

Special intervals

Every 2000

Every 1000

Every 500

Every 50

Every 10

On handover

Maintenance / inspection after


service hours

Date: ..

TASKS TO BE PERFORMED
By maintenance staff
Once-only activity
Repeat interval
As necessary
7 Annually before the winter

By authorised specialist staff


Once-only activity
Repeat interval
As necessary

Diesel particle filter (optional)

Check the diesel particle filter pressure monitor for function, leaks and blockages
Check and drain the diesel particle filter condensate separator
Change the diesel particle filter condensate separator
Clean the diesel particle filter (at least once a year):

Cooling system

3000

Check the coolant antifreeze concentration


Clean the cooling system
Replace the coolant (at least every 2 years)
Working hydraulics

250

Check the oil level in the hydraulic tank


Drain off condensate and sediment from the hydraulic tank
Change the oil in the hydraulic tank and check the return strainer
Check the oil in the hydraulic tank (affects all environmentally compatible
hydraulic fluids)
Check and clean the magnetic rod on the hydraulic tank
Change the hydraulic tank return suction filter insert
Change the hydraulic tank bleeder filter
Lubricate the pilot control device solenoids, universal joints and tappets
Steering system

z
z

Test the steering


Lubricate the bearing points on the steering cylinders
Brake system

Check the service brake and parking brake


Check the gap and wear on the parking brake linings

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/26/02/2007

Electrical system

Check the indicator lamps and lighting


Check the batteries, fluid level and terminals
Transmission

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

Check the transmission oil level


Change the transmission oil
Change the transmission oil filter

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.1-3 o f 4

Maintenance

Service Manual

Maintenance and inspection schedule

Customer:

Machine type: ...

Serial no.: .... Service hours: .. Date: ..

TASKS TO BE PERFORMED
Special intervals

Every 2000

Every 1000

Every 500

Every 50

Every 10

On handover

Maintenance / inspection
after service hours

By maintenance staff
Once-only activity
zRepeat interval
As necessary
7Annually before the winter

By authorised specialist staff


Once-only activity
Repeat interval
As necessary

Axles and tyres

Checking the tightness of the wheels (once after 50, 100 and 250 h)
Checking the axle oil levels
Changing the axle oil
Lubricate the bevel gear seal on the front and rear axles (if necessary, for
example, if used in water every day) (only applies to L580 - 459)
Check and lubricate the cardan shaft(s)
Check the tyre pressure
Machine frame and ballast weight

Lubricate the articulated bearing and the rear oscillating bearing


Grease the rear section cover lower hinges
Lubrication system (optional)

z
z

Check the lubrication system grease reservoir level


Check the pipes, hoses and lubrication points of the lubrication system
Check whether metered quantities are adequate at the bearing points (grease
collars) of the central lubrication system
Cab, heating and air-conditioning

Grease the cab door hinges


Clean the fresh air and recirculated air filter
Change the fresh air and recirculated air filter
Check the indicator and filling level beads in the dryer-collector unit of the
air conditioner

3.1-4 o f 4

Lubricate the lift arms and attachment


Check the bucket bearing seals and the bearing bushings on the lift arms
Check the lift arms and bucket stops
Lubricate and test the quick-change device

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Lift arms and quick-change device

Service Manual

Maintenance
Testing and adjustment plan

3.2 Testing and adjustment plan


The tasks in the testing and adjustment plan may only be carried out by
authorised specialist staff of LIEBHERR or its contractual agents.
You can find brief instructions on performing these tasks in the section on
testing and adjustment checklists.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Detailed instructions can be found in the section on testing and adjustment tasks.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.2-1 o f 2

Maintenance

Service Manual

Testing and adjustment plan

Machine type: ...

Serial no.: . Service hours: .

TASKS TO BE PERFORMED
Special intervals

Every 2000

Every 1000

Every 500

Every 50

Every 10

On handover

Maintenance / inspection
after service hours

Cooling system
Check the fan motor and fan control pressure relief valve

Travel hydraulics
Synchronise pedals
Check the replenishing pressure of the variable displacement pump
Check the pressure relief and replenishing valve of the variable displacement
pump
Check the pressure cut-off of the variable displacement pump
Calibrate the block curve
Calibrate the variable displacement motors
Check the engine output
Working hydraulics
Check the flow controller (delta p) of the working hydraulics pump
Check the flow controller (start of delivery) of the working hydraulics pump
Check the secondary pressure relief valves on the control block
Check the primary pressure relief valves on the control block
Check the LS pressure cut-off on the control block
Check the cut-off pressure in the stabilisation module
Check the nitrogen in the ride control hydro accumulator

Steering system
Check the pressure cut-off of the steering pump
Check the flow controller (delta p) of the steering pump

Brake system
Check the opening and closing pressure of the compact brake valve
Check the brake pressure of the compact brake valve
Check the capacity of the brake accumulator
Check the accumulator charge pressure
Check the brake light pressure switch and brake lights
Transmission
Check the transmission shift pressure
Check the nitrogen in the transmission hydro accumulator

3.2-2 o f 2

By authorised specialist staff


Once-only activity
Repeat interval
As necessary
Diesel engine
Check the diesel engine speed

Date: ..

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Customer:

Service Manual

Maintenance
Testing and adjustment checklists

3.3 Testing and adjustment checklists

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

The testing and adjustment checklists contain all testing and adjustment
tasks. You can find detailed descriptions of each activity in the section on
testing and adjustment tasks.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.3-1 o f 2

L550, L556 Ser. Nr.

Customer:

Operating hours:
Type of application:
Checked by:

Job site:

Check / Adjustment

2000 Bh.

1000 Bh.

Checked on date:
Unit

Adjust.
values

58

Value
before
adjust.

Value
after
adjust.

Adjust.
point

Test
point

Operating temperature
Operating temperature
(Temperature sensor hydraulic oil)

Cooling system
Cooling System (fan control)
Fan at high Diesel engine RPM /
Sensor unplugged

bar

110

10

Fan at high Diesel engine RPM /


Prop. solenoid valve current less

bar

220

10

P
1

Diesel engine
S
C
U
L
I

Adjustment - pedals
Gas pedal angle sensor
Inching pedal angle sensor
Diesel engine RPM
Low idle RPM
High idle RPM

min

-1

900

min

-1

2065

10
10

Travel hydraulic
Replenishing pressure
At high idle RPM

10

MA

10

MB

MA (MB)

bar

31

Forward

bar

470

Reverse

bar

470

bar

430

High pressure relief valves

Pressure cut off


High pressure
Engine speed drop, max. difference
to high idle RPM

min

-1

Display

30

-1

Block curve at 930 min


Diesel engine RPM

min

High pressure
Block curve at 1200 min

bar

930
50

930

930

10

-1

Diesel engine RPM

min

High pressure
Block curve at 1400 min

-1

-1

bar

1200
290

1200

1200

10

-1

Diesel engine RPM

min

High pressure

-1

bar

1400
350

1400

1400

10

S
C
U
L
I

MA (MB)

S
C
U
L
I

MA (MB)

S
C
U
L
I

MA (MB)

S
C
U
L
I

Adjustment var. displ. motor


Automatically adjustment of the
variable displacement motors
Engine performance at 13 km/h
High pressure

L550

bar

300

10

MA

High pressure

L556

bar

330

10

MA

Diesel engine RPM

min

-1

1980

30

= Blocked Machine

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L576 - 454 / from 15653

copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.3

2000 Bh.

1000 Bh.

Check / Adjustment

Unit

Adjust.
values

Value
before
adjust.

Value
after
adjust.

Adjust.
point

Test
point

Working hydraulic
Control valve block
5

10

10

10

M / M1

M / LS

Secondary pressure relief valve, lift

bar

Secondary pressure rel. valve, tilt in

bar

380

Secondary pressure rel. valve, tilt out

bar

380

Primary pressure relief valve

380

bar

360

290

Control valve block


LS-Pressure cut off

L550

bar

LS-Pressure cut off

L556

bar

330

bar

180

bar

22

bar

120

bar

25

Working hydraulic pump


Power regulator
Working hydraulic pump
Flow regulator-Pressure difference
Stabilization module
Shut off pressure (LFD turned off)

20

MX

Hydro accumulator LFD


Pretension pressure (nitrogen filling)

P / LS

M3

M3

M4 / M5

Steering system
Variable displacement pump
Pressure cut off

bar

210

bar

22

Variable displacement pump


Flow regulator Pressure difference

Brake system
Compact brake valve
Cut in pressure

bar

Cut out pressure

bar

Brake pressure in axles

bar

95

bar

> 50

bar

120

180
210

Accumulator
After 9 braking actions

M4 / M5

Pressure switch - brake system


Switching point

M3

Transfer gear
Transfer gear
Switching pressure

bar

20

bar

12

Transmission - hydro accumulator


Preload pressure (nitrogen filling)

Remarks:

Signature:

Check and adjust only if required

3.3

copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566, L576, L580 Ser. Nr.

Customer:

Operating hours:
Type of application:
Checked by:

Job site:

Check / Adjustment

2000 Bh.

1000 Bh.

Checked on date:
Unit

Adjust.
values

58

Value
before
adjust.

Value
after
adjust.

Adjust.
point

Test
point

Operating temperature
Operating temperature
(Temperature sensor hydraulic oil)

Cooling system
Cooling System (fan control)
Fan at high Diesel engine RPM /
Sensor unplugged

bar

165

Fan at high Diesel engine RPM /


Prop. solenoid valve current less

bar

220

10

Diesel engine
Adjustment - pedals

S
C
U
L
I

Gas pedal angle sensor


Inching pedal angle sensor
Diesel engine RPM
Low idle RPM
High idle RPM

min

-1

min

-1

900
2065

10

10

Travel hydraulic
Replenishing pressure
At high idle RPM

bar

34

bar

470

10

MA

10

MB

MA (MB)

High pressure relief valves


Forward
Reverse

bar

470

bar

430

Pressure cut off


High pressure
Engine speed drop, max. difference
to high idle RPM

min

-1

min

-1

Display

30

-1

Block curve at 930 min


Diesel engine RPM
High pressure

Block curve at 1200 min

bar

50

930

930

10

-1

Diesel engine RPM

min

High pressure
Block curve at 1400 min

930

-1

bar

1200
230

1200

1200

10

-1

Diesel engine RPM

min

High pressure

-1

bar

1400
330

1400

1400

10

S
C
U
L
I

MA (MB)

S
C
U
L
I

MA (MB)

S
C
U
L
I

MA (MB)

S
C
U
L
I

Adjustment var. displ. motor


Automatically adjustment of the
variable displacement motors
Engine performance at 13 km/h
High pressure

L566

High pressure

L576, L580

Diesel engine RPM

bar
bar
min

-1

340
350

10

MA

10

MA

1980

30

= Blocked Machine

L566 - 460 / ab 14171


L576 - 456 / ab 14171
L580 - 459 / ab 14171

copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.3

2000 Bh.

1000 Bh.

Check / Adjustment

Unit

Adjust.
values

Value
before
adjust.

Value
after
adjust.

Adjust.
point

Test
point

Working hydraulic
Control valve block
Secondary pressure relief valve, lift

bar

420

Secondary pressure rel. valve, tilt in

bar

400

Secondary pressure rel. valve, tilt out

bar

400

Primary pressure relief valve

10

M / M1

M / LS

bar

380

bar

350

bar

180

bar

22

bar

120

bar

25

Control valve block


LS-Pressure cut off
Working hydraulic pump
Power regulator
Working hydraulic pump
Flow regulator-Pressure difference
Stabilization module
Shut off pressure (LFD turned off)

20

MX

Hydro accumulator LFD


Pretension pressure (nitrogen filling)

P / LS

180

M3

M3

M4 / M5

M4 / M5

Steering system
Variable displacement pump
Pressure cut off

bar

210

bar

22

Variable displacement pump


Flow regulator Pressure difference

Brake system
Compact brake valve
Cut in pressure

bar

Cut out pressure

bar

210

Brake pressure in axles

L566, L576

bar

95

Brake pressure in axles

L580

bar

70

bar

> 50

M4 / M5

bar

120

M3

5
5

Accumulator
After 9 braking actions
Pressure switch - brake system
Switching point

Transfer gear
Transfer gear
Switching pressure

bar

20

bar

12

Transmission - hydro accumulator


Preload pressure (nitrogen filling)

Remarks:

Signature:

Check and adjust only if required

3.3

copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L566 - 460 / ab 14171


L576 - 457 / ab 14171
L580 - 459 / ab 14171

Maintenance

Service Manual

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Testing and adjustment checklists

3.3-2 o f 2

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Maintenance
Lubrication chart and filling quantities

3.4 Lubrication chart and filling quantities


3.4.1

Table of filling quantities


Specifications in the medium column:
The standard lubricants and fuels required for central European climate
conditions are stated here.
Before you change or top up the oil in the hydraulic system (hydraulic
tank), always check if it is filled with petroleum or bio oil.
For more detailed information about the required lubricants and service
fuels, see the section on lubricants and fuels.
Specifications in the dosage column:
The values stated for the filling quantities in the table are only guidelines.
The dipstick and level markings are always mandatory.
Each time the oil is replaced or topped up, check the level in the unit in
question.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Valid for:

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L550 - 456 / from 16978

Description

Medium

Hydraulic system
Total capacity

Engine oil
SAE 20W - 20

240 l

Diesel engine (with filter


change)

Engine oil
SAE 10W - 40

31 l

Pump distributor gear

Gear oil
SAE 90

2.5 l

Cooling system
Diesel engine

Coolant

45 l

Hydraulic tank

Engine oil
SAE 20W - 20

135 l

Transmission

ATF oil

11.5 l

Front axle

Gear oil
SAE 90 LS

30 l

Rear axle

Gear oil
SAE 90 LS

30 l

Fuel tank

Diesel

Air conditioning system

Refrigerant
R 134a

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

Dosage Unit

300 l

1250+50 g

3.4-1 o f 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Lubrication chart and filling quantities

L556 - 454 / from 15653

Description

Medium

Dosage

Unit

Hydraulic system
Total capacity

Engine oil
SAE 20W - 20

240 l

Diesel engine (with filter


change)

Engine oil
SAE 10W - 40

31 l

Pump distributor gear

Gear oil
SAE 90

2.5 l

Cooling system
Diesel engine

Coolant

45.0 l

Hydraulic tank

Engine oil
SAE 20W - 20

135 l

Transmission

ATF oil

11.5 l

Front axle

Gear oil
SAE 90 LS

38 l

Rear axle

Gear oil
SAE 90 LS

30 l

Fuel tank

Diesel

Air conditioning system

Refrigerant
R 134a

300 l

1250+50 g

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Valid for:

3.4-2 o f 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Maintenance
Lubrication chart and filling quantities

Valid for:

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Valid for:

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171

Description

Medium

Dosage

Unit

Diesel engine (with filter


change)

Engine oil
SAE 10W - 40

Pump distributor gear

Gear oil
SAE 90 LS

Diesel engine cooling


system total capacity

Coolant

52.0 l

Hydraulic system
Total capacity

Engine oil
SAE 20W - 20

260 l

Hydraulic tank

Engine oil
SAE 20W - 20

135 l

Transmission

ATF oil

11.5 l

Front axle

Gear oil
SAE 90 LS

47.0 l

Rear axle

Gear oil
SAE 90 LS

L566: 45.0 l
L576: 47.0 l

Fuel tank

Diesel

Air conditioning system

Refrigerant
R 134a

43.0 l

2.5 l

400 l

1250+50 g

L580 - 459 / from 14171

Description

Medium

Diesel engine (with filter


change)

Engine oil
SAE 10W - 40

Pump distributor gear

Gear oil
SAE 90 LS

Diesel engine cooling


system
Total capacity

Coolant

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

Dosage

Unit
43.0 l

2.5 l

52.0 l

3.4-3 o f 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Lubrication chart and filling quantities

Description

Medium

Dosage

Unit

Hydraulic system
Total capacity

Engine oil
SAE 20W - 20

260 l

Hydraulic tank

Engine oil
SAE 20W - 20

135 l

Transmission

ATF oil

11.5 l

Front axle

Gear oil
SAE 90 LS

48.0 l

Rear axle

Gear oil
SAE 90 LS

50.0 l

Fuel tank

Diesel

400 l

Air conditioning system

Refrigerant
R 134a

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

1250+50 g

3.4-4 o f 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Maintenance
Lubrication chart and filling quantities

3.4.2

Lubrication charts
The lubrication chart provides an overview of the location of the maintenance points on the machine and of the maintenance intervals.
You will find detailed information in the maintenance and inspection
schedule, as well as in the individual descriptions in the section on maintenance tasks.
For more detailed information about the required lubricants and service
fuels, see the section on lubricants and fuels.
For information about the required filling quantities, see the tables of filling
quantities.
Key:
1 = transmission
2 = front axle
3 = rear axle
1) = central lubricating rail, front section

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

2) = central lubricating rail, rear section

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.4-5 o f 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Lubrication chart and filling quantities

Symbol

L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 1565


L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171;

Description

Symbol

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Valid for:

Description

General lubrication points

Lubrication

Check the oil level

Oil change

First oil change

3.4-6 o f 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Maintenance
Lubrication chart and filling quantities

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Valid for:

Symbol

L580 - 459 / from 14171

Description

Symbol

Description

General lubrication points

Lubrication

Check the oil level

Oil change

First oil change

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.4-7 o f 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Lubrication chart and filling quantities

3.4-8 o f 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Maintenance
Maintenance tasks

3.5 Maintenance tasks


On completion of servicing, the machine should be returned to the operating position.

Make sure you are wearing safe working clothing.


Certain jobs not only require a hard hat and safety boots, but also goggles
and safety gloves.

3.5.1

Preparatory tasks for maintenance


Before performing the various maintenance tasks, move the machine to
maintenance position unless otherwise explicitly specified in the description.
The various maintenance tasks include:
Lubricating the lift arms
Checking the oil level or changing the oil in the engine, gears, axles,
hydraulic tank, etc.
Replacing filters as well as adjustment and repair work on the hydraulic system
Safety precautions for maintenance
Always observe the accident prevention regulations during maintenance work.
Make sure that visual contact between the operator in the cab and maintenance personnel is always maintained.

Visual contact
Danger
There is a risk of accidents for maintenance personnel.
The presence of unauthorised persons on the machine can place the
maintenance personnel in extreme danger.

! Never enter a dangerous area of the machine without making your preLBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

sence known.

Wheel wedges

Make sure you can be clearly seen before entering one of the machine's
danger areas.
Secure the machine against rolling away with wheel wedges.
Maintenance positions
The maintenance position depends on the maintenance task to be performed.
The two basic maintenance positions 1 and 2 are described below.
They enable you to access the individual maintenance points.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.5-1 o f 5 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Maintenance tasks

Maintenance position 1

To move the machine into maintenance position 1 proceed as follows.

Maintenance position 2

Maintenance position 1
Park the machine on level ground.
Lower the lift arms.
Set the bucket down flat on the ground.
Engage the parking brake.
Turn off the diesel engine.
Take out the ignition key.

To move the machine into maintenance position 2 proceed as follows.

Maintenance position 2
Park the machine on level ground.
Engage the articulation lock.
Lower the lift arms.
Tilt the bucket out and set it down on the ground on its teeth or
cutting edge.
Engage the parking brake.
Turn off the diesel engine.
Take out the ignition key.

Opening the service hatches, doors and hoods


Open the door if you need to access the following units or components:
Hydraulic pumps
Hydraulic tank
Hydraulic tank shut-off valve
Air filter
Battery main switch

Engine compartment hatch


1 Engine compartment hatch
2 Handle with lock

3.5-2 o f 5 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3 Gas-filled springs

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Opening the engine


compartment hatch

Service Manual

Maintenance
Maintenance tasks

Warning
There is a risk of injury if the engine compartment door falls shut.

! Check that the gas-filled springs securely hold the hood fully open.
Open the lock with the ignition key.
Completely open the hatch 1 using the handle 2.
Two gas-filled springs 3 hold the opened hatch in this position.
Opening the engine
compartment hatch

When the hood is open, you can access the following units:
Diesel engine
Pump distributor gear
Cooling system
Hydraulic tank

Engine compartment hatch and hood cable


Open the engine compartment hatch.

Warning
Engine parts which are in motion can cause injury.
Rotating or moving engine parts, such as the fan blades or V-belts, can
cause injury.

! Only open the engine compartment hood when the engine is shut down.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Pull the cable 1 for unlocking the engine compartment hood until the lock
is open.

Engine compartment hood


1 Engine compartment hood
2 Gas-filled springs
3 Engine compartment hatch
L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

4 Cable lock
5 Hydraulic tank cover

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.5-3 o f 5 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Maintenance tasks

The lock 4 unlocks the engine compartment hood 1.


The hood is automatically opened and held in position by two gas-filled
springs 2.

Turn the securing pipe 2 in the direction of the arrow (position shown).
The gas-filled spring 1 is now blocked.
The engine compartment hood cannot be opened.
Warning
There is a risk of injuries if the hood falls shut.

! Check that the gas-filled springs securely hold the hood fully open.
Check the function.
Open the hydraulic tank over 5 as required.
Unlock the cover and open it.
Opening the engine
compartment hatch

When the hood is open, you can access the cooling system.
Make sure that the cab door is closed.
When opening or closing the hood, climb onto the machine via the cab
access, making sure that you have secure footing.

1 Left cooling system hood


3 Gas-filled springs
2 Right cooling system hood
4 Handle
Completely open the hood 1 and/or 2 by pulling up the handle.
The hood is held in this position by the gas-filled spring 3.
Warning
There is a risk of injuries if the hood falls shut.

! Check that gas-filled spring holds it completely open.


Check the function.

3.5-4 o f 5 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Cooling system hood

Service Manual

Maintenance
Maintenance tasks

Turning off the battery main switch


The battery main switch is located at the rear left of the engine
compartment.
For certain maintenance jobs, the battery main switch must first be
turned off.
Find out from the descriptions of the relevant maintenance tasks whether the
battery main switch must be turned on or off. See the section on maintenance tasks.
Switch on the battery main switch after completing these maintenance tasks.
Caution
There is a risk of damaging the electrical system.
! Do not turn off the battery main switch while the engine is running.

Battery main switch


1 Battery main switch

2 Main switch key

Danger
There is a risk of accidents for maintenance personnel.
If unauthorised people are on the machine it can put the maintenance
personnel in extreme danger.

! For safety reasons, it is essential that the battery main switch is turned off.
! Pull out the key for safety reasons.
Turn off the battery main switch 1 by turning the key 2 to the 0 position.

3.5.2

Removing loose parts, dirt, ice and snow from the machine
Make sure that the machine is in maintenance position 1.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Procedure
Note
To ensure safe machine transport and easy maintenance: Clean the
machine after everyday work and before starting maintenance tasks.

! Remove any loose parts, coarse dirt, mud, ice, snow etc.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

Be careful when cleaning the machine with a high-pressure cleaner. See


the section on cleaning the machine.

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.5-5 o f 5 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Maintenance tasks

3.5.3

Checking the machine for external damage


Make sure that the machine is in maintenance position 1.
Procedure
Before starting up the machine, check for external damage which might
impair safe operation.
Repair any damage with safety implications immediately.

3.5.4

Making sure the bolted connections are tight


Make sure that:
The machine is in maintenance position 2.
The service doors and hoods are open.
Procedure
Check that all bolts and screws are tight.
Tighten any loose screws or bolts with the required tightening torque.

3.5.5

Sealing leaks
Make sure that:
The machine is in maintenance position 2.
The service doors and hoods are open.
Procedure

3.5.6

Check the entire hydraulic system for leaks.


Replace any damaged hydraulic seals.
Tighten any loose hydraulic couplings.
See also the section on safe maintenance of hydraulic hoses and
hose lines.

Checking the engine oil level


Make sure that:
The machine is in maintenance position 1.
The engine compartment hood is open.
The engine is level and has not been running for 2 - 3 minutes.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Procedure

Diesel engine
Pull out the dipstick 1, wipe it clean, and re-insert it.
Pull out the dipstick once again and read off the oil level.
The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX markings.

3.5-6 o f 5 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Maintenance
Maintenance tasks

If the oil level is too low:


Remove the sealing cap from the filler neck 2 and top up with oil.
For the oil quality, see the section on lubricants and fuels.
Clean the sealing cap, place it on the filler neck 2 and tighten it.

3.5.7

Changing the engine oil


Make sure that:
The machine is in maintenance position 1.
The engine compartment hood is open.
The engine is level.
The engine is warm.
A suitable receptacle, an oil drain hose and the specified engine oil are
at hand.
See the table of filling quantities for the required capacity of the receptacle.
Procedure

1 Oil drain hose


3 Oil drain valve
2 Cap
Unscrew the cap of the oil drain valve on the oil pan.
Screw the oil drain hose to the oil drain valve.
Drain off the oil into the receptacle.
Unscrew the oil drain hose.
Screw the cap onto the oil drain valve.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

When changing the engine oil and the oil filter:


Change the filter as described in the section on changing the engine oil filter.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

Diesel engine
Pour the new oil into the filler neck 2 to between the MIN and MAX
markings on the dipstick 1.
Clean the filler cap, place it on the filler neck 2 and tighten it.
Start the engine and check the oil pressure.
Turn off the engine and after 1 or 2 minutes and check the oil level on
the dipstick.
Top up with oil if necessary.

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.5-7 o f 5 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Maintenance tasks

3.5.8

Changing the diesel engine oil filter


Make sure that:
The machine is in maintenance position 1.
The engine compartment hood is open.
The engine oil has been drained off.
A strap wrench and a suitable container are in place.
Only use genuine LIEBHERR spare parts (2 oil filter cartridges).
Procedure

Place a suitable container under the diesel engine.

Release the filter cartridges 1 with a strap wrench and unscrew them.
Clean the seals on the filter bracket.
Lightly coat the rubber gaskets on the new oil filter cartridges with
engine oil.
Screw on the new oil filter cartridge until the sealing ring touches the
filter bracket.
When the sealing ring touches the filter bracket:
Tighten the oil filter cartridge by a half to three-quarter turn. (Do not use a
tool for tightening).
Start the diesel engine:
Check the oil pressure in the engine oil pressure display (see
display unit).
Shut down the diesel engine:
Check the seals on the oil filters and the oil level.
After 2 to 3 minutes, check the oil level on the dipstick.

3.5-8 o f 5 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Note
Protect the V-ribbed-belt against emerging oil when changing the oil
filter cartridge.
! After changing the oil filter, remove all traces of oil on the diesel engine,
also behind the vibration damper so that this is not diagnosed as a leak
in the leakage in the radial shaft seal at a later stage.

Service Manual

Maintenance
Maintenance tasks

3.5.9

Checking / replacing the V-ribbed belt


The V-ribbed belt is on the front of the engine, protected by a cover.
The engine has a tensioning device for the V-ribbed belt. This tensions itself
and requires no maintenance. Check the V-ribbed belt for wear.
Checking the V-ribbed belt
Take off the V-ribbed belt guard.
Check the V-ribbed belt for damage.
Damage to the V-ribbed belt can include:
Torn belt
Tears in several ribs
Lumps of rubber on the base of the belt
Accumulations of dirt and grit
Ribs coming loose from the belt base
Cracks on the back

V-ribbed belt guard

Replacing the V-ribbed belt


Make sure you have a DIN 3122 D 12.5 mm (1/2") ratchet wrench and a
new V-ribbed belt.
Pull back the tensioning device 5 against the spring force anticlockwise
as far as it will go and take off the belt.
With the tensioning device 5 swung back, put the new belt on the pulleys
of the crankshaft 6, air conditioning compressor 1, alternator 3 and
deflector roller 2, 4. Then return the tensioning device 5 to the tensioning
position.

Belt run

Note
When changing the belt, make sure the deflector roller 2, 4 and the tensioning roller 5 move freely. If the tensioning roller or
! deflector roller is defective, replace it.

3.5.10

Checking / adjusting the engine valve play

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Check the valve play with the engine cold.


Make sure that:
The machine is in maintenance position 1.
The engine compartment hood and door are open.
You have the special cranking device, a feeler gauge and cylinder head
seals ready.

Valve overlap cranking device


L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.5-9 o f 5 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Maintenance tasks

Unscrew the service cap from the flywheel housing.


Remove the valve cover, attach the cranking device (ID no. 0524045) to
the flywheel housing and insert a standard ratchet.
For reasons of space, use extensions on the cranking device to the rear
towards the ratchet.
Turn the crankshaft in the direction of rotation until the valves of the
cylinder to be adjusted overlap (see the table).

Cylinder valves
A Outlet valve

E Inlet valve

Engine D 934

Engine D 936

Cylinder

Cylinder
Adjust

Overlap

Adjust

4
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Overlap

Checking and adjusting the inlet valve play

3.5-10 o f 5 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Maintenance
Maintenance tasks

Checking and adjusting the outlet valve play


Push a feeler gauge between the valve and the rocker arm and check the
valve play.
Valve play
Inlet valve (cold)

0.30 mm

Outlet valve (cold)

0.40 mm

If it is not correct:
Loosen the nut on the adjusting bolt for the rocker arm and adjust it.
Tighten the counter nut to 40 Nm.
Check the adjustment again.
After checking and adjusting all the valves, put on the cylinder head
covers with new seals.
Remove the cranking device.

3.5.11

Checking the diesel engine heating flange


Make sure that:
The machine is in maintenance position 1.
The engine compartment hood is open.
You have an ohmmeter or a multimeter ready.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Procedure

Turn off the battery main switch.


Disconnect the electric connection cable 2 on the heating flange 1.
Connect the ohmmeter or multimeter to the terminal and check the
resistance (0.25 Ohm +/-10% at 20 C).
Disconnect the electric connection cable on the heating flange.
Turn on the battery main switch

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.5-11 o f 5 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Maintenance tasks

3.5.12

Greasing the ring gear on the engine starter flywheel


The service cap is on the right side of the engine, on the flywheel housing.
Make sure that:
The engine is in the maintenance position.

Starter ring gear service cap


Unscrew the service cap 1 from the flywheel housing.
Only grease the starter ring gear 2; there may not be any grease on the
sensor gear ring 3.
Check the ring gear and apply a light coating of standard grease
if necessary.
Screw on the service cap again.

3.5.13

Changing the engine oil separator filter insert

Oil separator
Carefully clean the oil separator and the area around it.
Unscrew the oil separator cap and take it off, using a screwdriver
if necessary.

3.5-12 o f 5 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

The oil separator is on the flywheel side, on the right side of the engine.
Make sure that:
The engine is in maintenance position 1.
You have a genuine LIEBHERR oil separator filter insert ready.

Service Manual

Maintenance
Maintenance tasks

3.5.14

Checking the bearings and condition of the engine control


units
Make sure that the machine is in maintenance position 1.
Procedure
Check that the bearings are properly seated and undamaged.
If you find damaged bearings:
do not start the engine, replace all the bearings

3.5.15

Checking the state of sensors and cable connections


Make sure that the machine is in maintenance position 1.
Procedure
Check that all the sensors and cable connections are properly seated
and in good condition.
Check that none of the cables and wiring harnesses are damaged, rub or
not properly fastened.
If you find any damaged cables, wiring harnesses or sensors:
Do not start the engine until you have replaced the defective parts.

3.5.16

Changing the fuel pre-filter

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

On the right side of the diesel engine you can find:


The fuel pre-filter with water separator and depending on the engine
type fuel pre-heater (optional)
Water level probe
Integrated fuel hand pump
Bleeding the water of the fuel prefilter must be conducted after the water
level probe activates.
Make sure that:
The machine is in maintenance position 1.
The engine compartment hood is open.
You have a suitable receptacle ready.
Only use genuine LIEBHERR spare parts.
(1 fuel pre-filter cartridge)
Procedure
Danger
There is a risk of fire and explosions.

! Do not smoke.
! Avoid naked flames.
! Only work with the engine switched off and cooled down.
Place a receptacle under the fuel pre-filter.
Carefully clean the fuel pre-filter and the area around it.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.5-13 o f 5 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Maintenance tasks

3.5-14 o f 5 8

Fuel water separator container


Unscrew the water separator container 4 from the filter cartridge 3.
Dispose of the old filter cartridge.
Wash the water separator container and dry it with compressed air.
Lightly oil the O-ring 9 of the water separator container.
Screw the water separator container to the new filter cartridge until the
O-ring touches the filter cartridge.
Tighten the water separator container half a turn by hand.
Screw in the drain plug 5.
Check the filter head is clean and ensure that the thread adapter is firmly
in the filter head.
If the filter head is dirty:
Clean the filter head.
Lubricate the sealing ring 10 of the new filter cartridge with clean fuel.
Fill the filter cartridge via the holes on the outside and screw it on until the
sealing ring lies on the filter head.
Tighten the filter cartridge 3 half a turn by hand.
Reconnect the electrical connections of the water level probe 8 and the
fuel preheater 7 (optional).
Close the bleeder screw 6.

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Fuel prefilter cartridge


Disconnect the electrical connections of the water level probe 8 and the
fuel preheater 7 (optional).
Drain the fuel:
Unscrew the bleeder screw 6 and drain plug 5.
Release the filter cartridge 3 with a strap wrench or similar tools and
unscrew it.

Service Manual

Maintenance
Maintenance tasks

Bleed the fuel system.


See the section on bleeding the fuel system.

3.5.17

Changing the fuel fine filter


Make sure that:
The machine is in maintenance position 1.
The engine compartment hood is open.
You have a suitable receptacle ready.
Only use genuine LIEBHERR spare parts.
(1 fuel filter cartridge)
Procedure
Danger
There is a risk of fire and explosions.

! Do not smoke.
! Avoid naked flames.
! Only work with the engine switched off and cooled down.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Place a receptacle under the fuel fine filter.


Carefully clean the fuel fine filter and the area around it.
Unscrew the fuel fine filter 1.
(Use a suitable filter strap)
Dispose of the old filter cartridge.
Check the filter base is clean and ensure that the thread adapter is firmly
in the filter base.
If the filter base is dirty:
Clean the filter base.
Lubricate the sealing ring 2 of the new filter cartridge with clean fuel.
Fill the filter cartridge and screw it on until the sealing ring lies on the
filter head.
Tighten the filter cartridge 1/2 a revolution by hand with a filter wrench.
Bleed the fuel system.
See the section on bleeding the fuel system.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.5-15 o f 5 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Maintenance tasks

3.5.18

Draining off condensate from the fuel pre-filter (the


corresponding service code appears)
After integrated water level probe in the fuel pre-filter activates (service code
on the display), the water collector tank must be drained.
Danger
There is a risk of fire and explosions.

! Do not smoke.
! Avoid naked flames.
! Only work with the engine switched off and cooled down.

Draining the fuel pre-filter


Place a receptacle under the fuel pre-filter.
If necessary attach a drainage hose.
Open the drain plug, drain the water until fuel emerges without bubbles.
When fuel emerges:
Tighten the drain plug.
Bleed the fuel system.
See the section on bleeding the fuel system.

3.5.19

Bleeding the fuel system


Danger
There is a risk of fire and explosions.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

! Do not smoke.
! Avoid naked flames.
! Only work with the engine switched off and cooled down.

Bleeder screw on the head of the fuel prefilter


Unscrew the bleeder screw 1 on the head of the fuel prefilter by 2 to
3 turns.

3.5-16 o f 5 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Maintenance
Maintenance tasks

Operate the hand pump 2.


If fuel flows out of the bleeder screw without bubbles:
Tighten the bleeder screw 1.
Continue to operate the hand pump until you feel strong resistance.

Bleeder screw on the head of the fuel fine filter


Unscrew the bleeder screw 1 on the head of the fuel fine filter by 2 to
3 turns.
Operate the hand pump 2.
If fuel flows out of the bleeder screw without bubbles:
Tighten the bleeder screw 1.
Continue to activate the hand pump until you feel strong resistance.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Bleeder screw on the crankcase


Unscrew the bleeder screw 1 on the crankcase (if present) by 2 to
3 revolutions.
Operate the hand pump 2.
If fuel flows out of the bleeder screw without bubbles:
Tighten the bleeder screw 1.
Continue to activate the hand pump until you feel strong resistance.
Bleeding the fuel filter with the engine bleeding function
It is necessary when the fuel tank has run completely empty.
When the fuel tank is empty there is air in the fuel system.
You can remove some of the air from the fuel system by bleeding the
fuel filter.
You can bleed the air between the injection pump and the injection nozzle
by activating engine bleeding mode.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.5-17 o f 5 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Maintenance tasks

Procedure
Danger
There is a risk of fire and explosions.

! Do not smoke.
! Avoid naked flames.
! Only work with the engine switched off and cooled down.
Bleed the fuel filter:
See the section on bleeding the fuel filter.
Activate the engine bleeding function.
Activation sequence:
Turn the ignition on
With the engine not running, press the button for 10 seconds.
All 3 LEDs on the button light up when the engine bleeding function is
activated.
Turn the ignition key to position II and keep it in there until the
engine starts.
Do not hold the key in the starting position for more than
20 seconds at a time.
The ECU ends the engine bleeding function automatically as soon as the
engine starts again.
If the engine does not start:
Wait a minute and repeat the procedure.
In the meantime, continue to operate the hand pump until you feel
strong resistance.

3.5.20

Draining off condensate and sediment from the fuel tank


Make sure that the machine is in maintenance position 1.

Unscrew the sealing cap 1 on the drain valve 2 on the bottom of the
diesel tank.
Screw the drain hose 3 onto the drain valve 2.
Drain the condensation and sediment into a suitable receptacle until
clean fuel begins to flow.
Unscrew the oil drain hose.
Screw the cap 1 onto the drain valve 2 and tighten it.

3.5-18 o f 5 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Procedure

Service Manual

Maintenance
Maintenance tasks

3.5.21

Cleaning the air filter service cap and dust extraction valve
Note
If the valve is damaged, the dust extraction function is impaired and the
filters become clogged more quickly.

! With the engine running at lower idle speed, you should clearly feel air
pulsating at the dust extraction valve.

Make sure that:


The machine is in maintenance position 1.
The engine compartment hatch is open.
The battery main switch is switched off and the main switch key
is removed.
Cleaning the dust extraction valve

Press the rubber seal on the dust extraction valve 5 several times to
remove the dust from the service cap 3.
When working in dusty conditions, check and empty the dust extraction
valve 5 more often.
If the dust extraction valve is damaged or stays open:
Replace the dust extraction valve.
Cleaning the service cap
Open the fixing clips 4 on the service cap 3 and take the cap off.
Clean the service cap 3.
Put the service cap 3 back on the filter housing 6.
The dust extraction valve 5 must face down.
Make sure the cap is placed properly on the filter housing 6.
Close the fixing clips 4.

3.5.22

Testing the air filter vacuum switch

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Make sure that:


The machine is in maintenance position 1.
You have a big enough plate available.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.5-19 o f 5 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Maintenance tasks

Procedure

3.5.23

Testing the vacuum switch


Take the rain cap 1 off the intake pipe 2 of the filter housing.
Start the engine.
Slowly and carefully push the plate over the opening of the intake pipe.
At the same time, check whether the indicator lamp in the cab lights up
or the warning buzzer sounds.
If you hear or see no warning signal when the intake pipe is just sealed,
check the vacuum switch and the wiring, and replace it if necessary.

Changing the air filter primary element when indicated by the


vacuum switch
The primary element 2 should be replaced when the air filter contamination
symbol field on the display unit lights up.
If the air filter contamination symbol field remains lit after the primary
element 2 has been serviced then the secondary element 1 must also
be replaced.
Make sure that:
The machine is in maintenance position 1.
The engine compartment hood is open.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Procedure

Air filter
1 Secondary element
2 Primary element
3 Service cap

4 Fixing clips
5 Dust extraction valve
6 Air filter housing

Open the fixing clips 4 on the service cap 3 and take the cap off.
Remove the primary element 2. To do this pull or turn the element gently
upwards, downwards or to the side in order to release the seal.

3.5-20 o f 5 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Maintenance
Maintenance tasks

Ensure that all dirt is removed from the filter housing before inserting a
new filter element.
The secondary element 1 should be replaced every third time the primary
element 2 is replaced.
Lightly oil the seal surfaces before installing the filter elements (for the
primary element 2 this is on the inside, for the secondary element 1 on
the outside). Re-insert filter elements 1 and 2 and make sure that they
are correctly fitted.
Clean the service cap 3 and put it on the filter housing with the dust
extraction valve 5 facing down.
Only when the lid completely covers the filter housing can you close the
fixing clips without excessive force.
Close the fixing clips 4.

3.5.24

Changing the air filter secondary element


If the air filter contamination symbol field remains lit after the primary
element 2 has been serviced then the secondary element 1 must also
be replaced.
Change the secondary element:
After replacing the primary element three times
Otherwise, at least once a year
Make sure that:
The machine is in maintenance position 1.
The engine compartment door is open.
The battery main switch is switched off and the main switch key
is removed.
Procedure

Air filter

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

1 Secondary element
4 Fixing clips
2 Primary element
5 Dust extraction valve
3 Service cap
6 Air filter housing
Open the fixing clips 4 on the service cap 3 and take the cap off.
Remove the secondary element 1.
To loosen the seal: Pull or twist the element slightly up, down
or sideways.
Ensure that all dirt is removed from the filter housing before inserting a
new or cleaned filter element.
Lightly oil the seal surfaces before installing the filter elements (for the
secondary element 1 this is the outside).
Re-insert the filter elements 1 make sure that it is correctly fitted.
Clean the service cap 3 and put it on the filter housing with the dust
extraction valve 5 facing down.
Only when the lid completely covers the filter housing can you close the
fixing clips without excessive force.
Close the fixing clips 4.
L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.5-21 o f 5 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Maintenance tasks

3.5.25

Checking the air intake hoses for leaks and tight fitting

Turbo hose 1 between the air filter and the turbocharger


You can check the air intake hose 1 for cracks from the inside after
removing the air filter. It is not possible to check the air intake hose all round
from outside.
Make sure that:
The machine is in maintenance position 1.
The engine compartment door is open.
The battery main switch is turned off.
Procedure
Caution
A damaged or leaky air hose will damage the engine.
! Check the air hose for cracks or pitting.
Take the service cap off the air filter housing, then take the primary and
secondary elements out of the air filter housing.
Check the air hose all the way round for cracks and pitting. Use a torch
to light up the hose.
Check the clip fastenings on the air intake hose.

3.5.26

Checking the exhaust lines for leaks and tight fitting


Make sure that:
The machine is in maintenance position 1.
The engine compartment hood is open.

3.5-22 o f 5 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

If you find cracks or pitting on the hose:


Replace the hose.

Service Manual

Maintenance
Maintenance tasks

Procedure

Check that the fixing screws 1 and clip 3 on the exhaust pipe between
the turbocharger and the silencer are tightly fastened and do not leak.
Check that the flexible pipe 2 of the exhaust pipe is laid straight.
Check that the spacer 3 is tight.
Check that the fastening clip 6 of the tail pipe 7 is tight.

3.5.27

Check the oil level in the pump distributor gear


The dipstick 3 and the oil filling tube 2 are located in the engine compartment directly beside the hydraulic tank.
Access is from above the engine on the right-hand side.
Make sure that:
The machine is in maintenance position 1.
The engine compartment hood is open.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Procedure

Pump distributor gear


Pull out the dipstick 3, wipe it clean, and re-insert it.
Pull out the dipstick 3 once again and read off the oil level.
L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.5-23 o f 5 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Maintenance tasks

The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX markings.
If the oil level is too low:
Remove the sealing cap from the oil filling tube 2 and top up with oil.
For the oil quality, see the section on lubricants and fuels.
Clean the sealing cap for the oil filling tube 2, put it on the oil filling tube
2 on the splitter box, and then tighten it up.

3.5.28

Changing the splitter box oil


Make sure that:
The machine is in maintenance position 1.
The engine compartment hood is open.
The cover plate under the engine is open.
You have a suitable oil receptacle (capacity approx. 3 l) and the drain
hose with valve connection ready.
For the oil quality and quantity, see the section on lubricants and fuels.

Pull out the dipstick 3 slightly (to read off the oil level more easily).
Unscrew the sealing cap on the oil drain valve 5 and screw the drain
hose onto the oil drain valve 5.
Drain the oil into the receptacle.
Unscrew the drain hose from the oil drain valve 5 and screw on the
sealing cap.
Unscrew the sealing cap from the oil filling tube 2 and top up with
fresh oil.
Clean the sealing cap 2, screw it on and tighten it.
Check the oil level on the dipstick 3.
The oil level must be up to the MAX mark.

3.5.29

Checking the soot particle filter pressure monitor for function,


leaks and blockages
This equipment is optional.
Make sure that:
The machine is in maintenance position 1.
The engine compartment hood is open.

3.5-24 o f 5 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Procedure

Service Manual

Maintenance
Maintenance tasks

1 Soot particle filter


2 Temperature sensor

3 Counterpressure line connection

Procedure
Unscrew the counterpressure line from the DPX particle filter at position 3
and blow air into it with a compressed air gun.
There must be sufficient distance to the entrance of the counterpressure
line, so that the counterpressure of 150 mbar or 200 mbar is only
slightly exceeded.
Caution
First adjust the air pressure down to no more than 0.5 bar, as otherwise the
electronic counterpressure monitor will be irreparably damaged.
Check the electronic counterpressure monitor while blowing in air.

3.5.30

Checking and draining the soot particle filter condensate


separator

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

This equipment is optional.


Make sure that:
The machine is in maintenance position 1.
The engine compartment hood is open.
Procedure
The condensate separator is mounted on the rear left in the engine
compartment.

Main components
L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.5-25 o f 5 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Maintenance tasks

1
2
3
4

Filter/drain unit
5 Exhaust gas counterpressure
Counterpressure line
display line
Condensate container
6 Data logger line
Drain plug
At regular intervals (daily or as required):
Check the filling level of the filter/drain unit.
If the condensate container is over half full with condensation water:
Drain off the accumulated condensation water.
To do this, open the drain plug 4 of the condensate container 3.
Drain the water from the condensate container.
Tighten the drain plug 4 again.
Check the filter insert (visible in the sight glass) of the filter/drain unit 1 for dirt.
If the filter insert is too dirty:
The filter insert must be replaced.

Note
The condensate separator should be completely replaced after 1000 operating hours.
! This must be done when cleaning the filter (every 1000 operating hours
as prescribed).

3.5.31

Changing the soot particle filter condensate separator

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

This equipment is optional.


The condensate separator must be changed when cleaning the filter (every
1000 operating hours as prescribed).
Make sure that:
The machine is in maintenance position 1.
The engine compartment hood is open.
The condensate separator 1 is mounted on the rear left in the engine
compartment on the fuse panel.

1 Condensate separator
2 PDL data logger

3.5-26 o f 5 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3 Fuse panel

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Maintenance
Maintenance tasks

Procedure
Release the hose connections of the counterpressure line of the
condensate separator 1.
Unscrew the condensate separator 1 from the fuse panel 3.
Screw the new condensate separator 1 into the fuse panel 3 and fasten
the two hose connections back onto the condensate separator.

3.5.32

Cleaning the soot particle filter


This equipment is optional.
The cleaning process removes oil residue from the filter module. This oil
residue comes from the combustion of engine oil and is visible as white ash
(metal oxide).
Before cleaning, completely regenerate the particle filter (operate the wheel
loader for at least 10 minutes at the maximum possible engine load to burn
off any soot sediment on the filter surface).
Make sure that:
The machine is in maintenance position 1.
The engine compartment hood is open.
You have a suitable extraction system or industrial vacuum cleaner.

Compressed air cleaning

Procedure
Caution
Running at full load makes the filter housing very hot!
! When removing and cleaning it, always wear gloves, a dust mask
and goggles.
Remove the filter module by releasing the V clips.
Clean the inlet side of the filter with compressed air and a vacuum
cleaning system.
Caution
Protect the filter module from external contamination.
- Never clean the filter module with steam or cleaning agents.
- Use non-oiled compressed air for cleaning.
Clean the outlet side of the filter with compressed air and a vacuum
cleaning system. Aim the air jet at each channel of the outlet side, until
you cannot see any more particles.
Install the filter module again.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Note
If the machine has been idling too long to regenerate the particle filter, the
filter must be burned out.
! Put it in a furnace for at least 5 hours at 680 C or use a hot air blower.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.5-27 o f 5 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Maintenance tasks

3.5.33

Checking the coolant antifreeze and corrosion inhibitor


concentration

Coolant equalizing reservoir


1 Filler neck
2 Cap

3 Coolant equalizing reservoir


4 Coolant level sensor

All year round, the coolant must contain at least 50% by volume of concentrated antifreeze, but not more than 60% by volume.
This protects against freezing down to around -37 C.
Make sure that:
The machine is in maintenance position 1.
You have the optical density tester kit or antifreeze tester ready.
Checking the antifreeze concentration

See the coolant temperature on the display unit.


The coolant temperature should be in the bottom third of the display.
Carefully open the sealing cap on the filler neck 1.
Take a sample of the coolant and check the antifreeze concentration
using the test tool.
If the antifreeze concentration is too low:
Refill with pure antifreeze until the required value is attained.
See the section on correcting the antifreeze concentration.

3.5-28 o f 5 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Caution
There is a danger of scalding due to coolant escaping under pressure.
! Only open the cap on the filler neck once the engine has cooled down.
! Check the coolant temperature.

Service Manual

Maintenance
Maintenance tasks

Correcting the antifreeze concentration

1 Cooler drain valve


2 Diesel engine drain plug
If the antifreeze concentration is too low:
Drain off the coolant and top up with pure antifreeze according to the
following diagram.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Caution
There is a risk of damage to the diesel engine.
Too much antifreeze and corrosion protection agent impairs the cooling effect.
This eventually causes damage to the diesel engine.
! Never use more than 60% antifreeze and corrosion protection agent.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.5-29 o f 5 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Maintenance tasks

1 Amount of pure antifreeze to be


added in litres
2 Identified line - top-up quantity

3 Help line(s) example -15 C


4 Measured coolant freezing point
in C

5 Total capacity of cooling


system in litres (example
25 litres)

Example procedure
Assumption:
25 litres total filling quantity of the cooling system
-15 C coolant temperature, measured in the cooling system
In the diagram, go to the line showing the overall cooling system filling
quantity 5 at 25 litres, and move vertically upwards.
Carry on along the help line 3, starting from the temperature -15 C, and
move diagonally to the bottom left.
Finally, starting from the point where the lines cross, go horizontally along
the (identified) line 2 to the far left.

3.5-30 o f 5 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Selection for antifreeze concentration

Service Manual

Maintenance
Maintenance tasks

This gives you the topping up quantity of pure antifreeze and corrosion
protection agent 1 (7.6 litres in this example) to be added in order to achieve
protection down to -37 C.
To restore the correct mixing ratio, you must drain off at least the previously calculated quantity (the top-up quantity) from the cooling system.
Top up with the correct quantity of pure antifreeze and corrosion protection agent.
The coolant previously drained off can be used if necessary to restore the
required coolant level.
Using anti-corrosion agent without antifreeze
In exceptional cases and when outside temperatures never fall below
freezing, such as tropical zones, where it is demonstrable that no approved
antifreeze and corrosion protection agent is available, corrosion inhibitors
may be used.
The coolant must be changed once a year.
The mixing ratio must consist of 7.5% corrosion inhibitor and 92.5% water.
The Gefo 2710 refractometer is recommended for testing.
Checking the coolant and anti-corrosion concentration

Caution
There is a danger of scalding due to coolant escaping under pressure.
Only open the cap on the filler neck once the engine has cooled down.
! Check the coolant temperature.
See the coolant temperature on the display unit.
The coolant temperature display should be in the bottom third of
the display.
Carefully open the sealing cap on the filler neck.
Check the antifreeze concentration with a 2710 refractometer from the
GEFO company.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Checking the mixing ratio with a refractometer

Gefro refractometer no. 2710


1 Refractometer
2 Eyepiece
Brix value: The measure for soluble dry substance in a liquid.
Clean the cover and the prism carefully.
Place 1 or 2 drops of test fluid on the prism.
L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.5-31 o f 5 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Maintenance tasks

The fluid is distributed by closing the prism.


Look through the eyepiece 2 against a light background and focus
the scale.
The focus is set by turning the eyepiece 2.
Read off the value on the blue line in the eyepiece.

Conversion diagram from Brix to corrosion


inhibitor concentration (%vol)
Convert the Brix value using the conversion diagram to find the actual
corrosion inhibitor concentration.

3.5.34

Cleaning the cooling system

Cooling system hood


3 Gas-filled springs

Clean the cooler whenever necessary in order to ensure proper cooling. In


dusty environments, check the cooler every day and clean it if necessary.
Dirty cooler units result in overheating. The consequence is an audible and
visual warning with simultaneous power reduction of the travel drive.
Dust and other contaminants can be removed from the cooling fins with
water jets, steam or compressed air. Compressed air is preferable.
Make sure that:
The machine is in maintenance position 1.
The left and right cooling system hoods are open.

3.5-32 o f 5 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

1 Left cooling system hood


2 Right cooling system hood

Service Manual

Maintenance
Maintenance tasks

Procedure

Cooling system
Swing out the condenser 1.
Swing out the fuel cooler 2.
Caution
Risk of damage to the cooling system
Careless handling can damage the cooler fins.

! Do not use hard objects or excessive water pressure for cleaning.

3.5.35

Clean the cooler units with compressed air, steam or water.


Close the condenser 1 again.
Close the fuel cooler 2 again.
Close any cab doors which are open.
Close the cooling system hood(s) (left/right) again.

Changing the coolant


Use clean, fresh water with a Ph value between 6.5 and 8.5 and a low
sulphate / chlorine content for preparing the coolant.
The coolant must be prepared outside the cooling system.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Always dispose of any coolant which you have drained off but no longer
need according to the applicable regulations.
Make sure that:
The machine is in maintenance position 1.
A receptacle with a minimum capacity of 25 litres is available for the used
coolant, along with a drain hose.
The mixing ratio of the new coolant must be correct.
See also the section on checking the coolant antifreeze concentration.
The shut-off valves on the heating hoses are open.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.5-33 o f 5 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Maintenance tasks

Procedure

Cooling system
1 Filler neck
2 Coolant equalizing reservoir
3 Coolant level sensor

4 Diesel engine drain plug


5 Cooler drain valve

See the coolant temperature on the display unit.


The coolant temperature should be in the bottom third of the display.
Open the sealing cap on the filler neck 1.
Unscrew the sealing cap on the cooler drain valve 5 and unscrew the
drain hose. Drain the coolant into the receptacle.
Take off the drain hose, screw the sealing cap onto the cooler drain valve
5 and tighten it.
Also drain the coolant from the diesel engine:
Open the drain plug 4 and let the coolant flow into the receptacle.
Screw the drain plug 4 back in and tighten it.

3.5-34 o f 5 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Caution
There is a danger of scalding due to coolant escaping under pressure.
Only open the cap on the filler neck once the engine has cooled down.
! Check the coolant temperature.

Service Manual

Maintenance
Maintenance tasks

Cooling system equalizing reservoir

3.5.36

1 Cap
3 Filler neck
2 Coolant equalizing reservoir
Top up the coolant in the equalizing reservoir 2 until you can see the
coolant in the filler neck 3.
Screw the cap 1 onto the filler neck 3.
Start the engine.
Allow the engine to run at lower idling speed.
Set the heater to warm.
Top up the coolant in the equalizing reservoir 2 until you can see the
coolant in the filler neck 3.
If the coolant level is correct:
Screw the cap 1 onto the filler neck 3.

Checking the oil level in the hydraulic tank


Note
When using bio oil, take an oil sample every 500 hours.
! See the hydraulic oil section under lubricants and fuels.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Make sure that:


The machine is cold.
The machine is in maintenance position 1.
The engine compartment hood is open.
Checking the hydraulic oil level

Hydraulic tank
L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.5-35 o f 5 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Maintenance tasks

The red maximum oil level marking shows the correct oil level.
Check the oil level in the sight glass 1.
If the oil level is too low:
Top up with hydraulic oil.
Topping up with hydraulic oil

Connect the plug 3 to the bleeder filter (to protect against vandalism).
The anti-twist lock of the bleeder filter is released.
Release the tank pre-pressure:
Unscrew the bleeder filter 2 on the hydraulic tank by two turns.
Note
The hydraulic oil may only be poured in through the return strainer.
! For oil specifications, see the section on lubricants and fuels.

3.5.37

Open the cover 1 of the return strainer.


Top up with hydraulic oil up to the oil level marking 4.
Put the cover 1 on the housing and tighten it up.
Screw on the bleeder filter 2 tightly and remove the connector 3 (keep it
somewhere safe).

Draining off condensate and sediment from the hydraulic tank


Make sure that:
The machine has not been used for at least 3 hours.
The machine is in maintenance position 1.
The engine compartment door is open.
You have a receptacle ready for water and oil.

3.5.38

Changing the oil in the hydraulic tank and checking the return
strainer
Make sure that:
The machine is at operating temperature.
The machine is in maintenance position 1.
The engine compartment hood and door are open.
You have a receptacle of around 200 l capacity for the used oil.

3.5-36 o f 5 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Procedure
Release the tank pre-pressure:
Unscrew the bleeder filter 1 on the hydraulic tank by two turns.
Unscrew the plug 2 from the drain valve.
Connect the drain hose 3 and let the water and sediment flow into
the receptacle.
Take off the drain hose and screw the plug into the drain valve.
Screw in the bleeder filter 1.

Service Manual

Maintenance
Maintenance tasks

Procedure
Release the tank pre-pressure:
Unscrew the bleeder filter 1 on the hydraulic tank by two turns.
Unscrew the plug 2 from the drain valve.
Connect the drain hose 3 and let the oil flow into the receptacle.
Take off the drain hose and screw the plug into the drain valve.
Open the cover 4 of the return strainer.
Take the snap ring 5 off the return strainer.
Take out the return strainer 6 and check it for dirt (clean it if necessary).

Note
Serious contamination or large metal fragments in the return strainer may
indicate damage to the hydraulic system.

! In this event, locate the problem and rectify it.


The hydraulic oil may only be poured in through the return strainer.
Top up with hydraulic oil up to the oil level marking 3.
Put the cover 2 on the housing and tighten it up.
Screw in the bleeder filter 1.
Start the diesel engine and let it run briefly at low idling speed.
Turn off the diesel engine and then check the oil level in the sight glass,
topping up if necessary.

3.5.39

Checking and cleaning the magnetic rod on the hydraulic tank


Make sure that:
The machine is in maintenance position 1.
The engine compartment hood is open.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Procedure

Connect the plug 4 to the bleeder filter (to protect against vandalism).
The anti-twist lock of the bleeder filter is released.
Release the tank pre-pressure:
Unscrew the bleeder filter 3 on the hydraulic tank by two turns.
Unscrew the plug 2.
The oil level sinks.
Release the bolts on the lid and slowly lift the lid with the magnetic rod 1.
L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.5-37 o f 5 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Maintenance tasks

Note
Serious contamination or large metal fragments on the magnetic rod may
indicate damage to the hydraulic system.

! In this event, locate the problem and rectify it.


Carefully clean the magnetic rod 1.
After cleaning:
Place the O-ring and cover with the magnetic rod on the housing.
Tighten the screws on the cover.
Screw in the plug 2.
Screw on the bleeder filter 4 tightly and remove the connector 3 (keep it
somewhere safe).

3.5.40

Changing the hydraulic tank return suction filter


Make sure that:
The machine is in maintenance position 1.
The engine compartment hood is open.
Procedure
Release the tank pre-pressure: Unscrew the bleeder filter 1 on the
hydraulic tank by two turns.
Unscrew the plug 2 (the oil level sinks).
Release the bolts on the lid 3 and slowly lift the lid with the magnetic rod.
Take out the filter element 4.
Put in a new filter element.
Carefully clean the magnetic rod.
Place the O-ring and cover with the magnetic rod on the housing and
tighten the screws on the cover.
Screw in the plug 2.
Screw in the bleeder filter 1.
Note
Serious contamination or large metal fragments in the filter element or on
the magnetic rod may indicate damage to the hydraulic system.

! In this event, locate the problem and rectify it.


Changing the hydraulic tank bleeder filter
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

3.5.41

Make sure that:


The machine is in maintenance position 1.
The engine compartment hood is open.
Procedure

3.5-38 o f 5 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Maintenance
Maintenance tasks

You cannot clean the bleeder filter. The bleeder filter 1 and its plastic
housing must be changed at the intervals in the maintenance schedule.
Connect the plug 2 to the bleeder filter (to protect against vandalism).
The anti-twist lock of the bleeder filter is released.
Unscrew the old bleeder filter.
Screw in the new bleeder filter and remove the connector 2 (keep it
somewhere safe).

3.5.42

Lubricating the pilot control device solenoids, universal joints


and tappets
Make sure that the machine is in maintenance position 1.
Procedure
Take the rubber sleeve 5 of the control lever off the retaining plate 4.
Move the control lever in the appropriate direction for better access.
Clean the retaining solenoids 1 with a brush.
Lubricate the universal joints 2 and the discs 3 with a brush.
Start the machine and check the retaining function of the solenoids.
Fit the rubber sleeve of the control lever on the retaining plate.

3.5.43

Testing the steering


Make sure that:
The working attachment is in the transport position.
The articulation lock is open.
There is enough space to test the steering.
Procedure
Warning
Beware of accidents

! Do not allow anyone into the danger area while these tests are
being conducted.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

! Perform the test on level ground with no obstacles.

Start the engine.


Without moving the machine, turn the steering in both directions and
check that it is functioning properly.

3.5.44

Lubricating the bearing points on the steering cylinders


Make sure that:
The machine is in maintenance position 1.
The articulation lock is engaged if possible.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.5-39 o f 5 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Maintenance tasks

Procedure

1 Lubrication point at base of right3 Lubrication point on the piston rod


hand steering cylinder
end of left-hand steering cylinder
2 Lubrication point at base of left4 Lubrication point on the piston rod
hand steering cylinder
end of right-hand steering cylinder
Lubricate the bearing points on the steering cylinders.

3.5.45

Testing the service brake and parking brake


Make sure that there is enough room to check the service brake and
parking brake.
Warning
Beware of running over bystanders or obstacles.

! Do not allow anyone into the danger area while these tests are
being conducted.

! Perform the test on level ground with no obstacles.

1 Inch/brake pedal
3 Braking range
2 Inching range
Start the machine, and drive it forwards at around 8 km/h.
Push the inch/brake pedal all the way down. The machine must come to
an abrupt stop.
Checking the parking brake
Start the machine, and drive it forwards at around 5 km/h.
Press the parking brake button while travelling.
The machine must come to an abrupt halt.

3.5-40 o f 5 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Checking the service brake

Service Manual

Maintenance
Maintenance tasks

3.5.46

Checking the gap and wear on the parking brake linings


Friction can change the gap X1 and X2 and the thickness of the brake lining.
Make sure that the machine is in maintenance position 2.
Procedure

Warning
There is a risk of injuries due to machine rolling away.

! Make sure that the machine is secured against rolling away when carrying out work on the parking brake.

Secure the machine against rolling away with wheel wedges.

Disc brake (shown in open position)


1
2
3
4
5

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

Lock nut
6 Counter nut
Plug
7 Hex bolt
Adjusting screw
8 X1 Gap
Brake disc
9 X2 Gap
Brake lining
Start the diesel engine and press the button to release the parking brake.
Test the brake lining thickness:
If the brake linings are thinner than 1.0 mm, they must be replaced.
Check the gap X1 and X2:
If the gap X1 + X2 is more than 1.5 mm:
Adjust the gap.
Loosen the counter nut 6 and adjust the gap X1 to 0.3 mm using an allen
key 7.
Tighten the counter nut 6.
Unscrew the sealing cap 2 and loosen the lock nut 1.
Use the adjusting screw 3 to set the gap X2 to 0.3 mm.
Tighten the lock nut 1.
Engage the parking brake several times and test it again.
Screw on the sealing cap 2 and tighten it.

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.5-41 o f 5 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Maintenance tasks

3.5.47

Checking the indicator lamps and lighting


Make sure that:
The machine is in maintenance position 1.
The machine's electrical system is switched on.
Checking the indicator lamps and lighting
When you switch on the ignition, the lamps on the display unit are tested.
All symbol fields light up for three seconds.

Switch on the ignition.


Check that the symbol fields on the display unit light up.
Check that all lights are working.
Adjusting the working floodlights
Note: The front working floodlights cannot be adjusted.
The rear working floodlights are optional.
Adjust the rear working floodlights as required:
Either for close range lighting
or for long range lighting.

1 Floodlight
4 Bracket
2 Fixing screw
5 Adjusting screw
3 Fixing screws
Horizontal Y axis adjustment:
Loosen the screw 2.
Move the left and right floodlights as required.
Tighten the screw again.
Vertical X axis adjustment:
Loosen the screw 5.
Move the left and right floodlights as required.
Tighten the screw again.

3.5-42 o f 5 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Rear working floodlights

Service Manual

Maintenance
Maintenance tasks

3.5.48

Checking the batteries, fluid level and terminals

The batteries are housed in the right ballast weight and can be accessed by
opening the covers.
The batteries must always be in perfect condition in order for the machine to
work reliably.
Make sure that:
The machine is in maintenance position 1.
The battery main switch is switched off and the main switch key is
taken out.
The covers on the ballast are bolted on.
Warning
Batteries give off explosive gases. Battery acid is highly corrosive.

! Do not smoke. Avoid naked flames when handling, servicing or recharging batteries.

Caution
Beware of sparks and explosions!

! Use a special terminal brush.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Wipe the battery with a clean cloth.


Clean the terminals and the connectors.
To guarantee a good connection, check that the connectors are tight on
the terminals, and tighten them if necessary.
Smear the terminals and connectors with acid-proof grease such
as vaseline.
At very high temperatures, the acid level in the individual cells can drop due
to different rates of evaporation.
Open the plugs on each cell and check the acid level.
Check the charge using an acid density tester.
If the charge is too low (acid density below 1.26 kg/l):
Recharge the batteries.
If there is a risk of frost, it is important that the batteries are not discharged.
Otherwise the electrolyte can freeze and irreparably damage the battery.
If the acid level is too low:
Top up with distilled water to around 10 mm above the plates.
L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.5-43 o f 5 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Maintenance tasks

3.5.49

Checking the transmission oil level


Make sure that:
The machine is in maintenance position 1.
The articulation lock is engaged.
Procedure
Check the oil level with the engine running and at a gear oil temperature of
2010 C.
Start the engine and let it run at low idling speed.
Check the oil level in the sight glasses 3 and 4.
The oil level must be within the bottom sight glass 4.
If the oil level is too low:
Switch off the engine and top up with the required amount of gear oil. For
the oil quality, see the section gear lubricants in the lubricants and
fuels section.
Repeat the check.
If the oil level is too high:
Have LIEBHERR CUSTOMER SERVICE identify the problem and
rectify it.

3.5.50

Changing the transmission oil


Make sure that:
The machine is in maintenance position 1.
You have a sufficient quantity of the gear oil prescribed in the section on
lubricants and fuels.
The oil in the gearbox is warm.
You have a suitable oil receptacle ready for disposal.
Procedure

3.5.51

Changing the transmission oil filter


Make sure that:
The machine is in maintenance position 1.
You have a genuine LIEBHERR oil cartridge ready.
Procedure
Start the engine. Turn and steer the machine to the left as far as it
will go.
Turn off the diesel engine.
Release the filter cartridge with a strap wrench and unscrew it.
Clean the seals on the filter bracket.
Lightly coat the rubber seal ring on the new oil filter cartridge with
gear oil.
Screw the new filter cartridge onto the filter bracket and tighten it
by hand.

3.5-44 o f 5 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Open the cap on the filler neck.


Open the plug 1 on the gearbox and drain the oil into a suitable receptacle.
Then screw the plug 1 in again.
Top up gear oil the filler neck of the plug 2.
Replace the gear oil filter as described in the separate instructions.
Check the oil level in the transmission and top it up if necessary (see the
section on checking the oil level in the transmission).

Service Manual

Maintenance
Maintenance tasks

Check the oil level in the transmission and top it up if necessary (see the
section on checking the oil level in the transmission).
Check the oil filter for leaks.

3.5.52

Checking the tightness of the wheels (once after 50, 100


and 250 h)
Make sure that:
The machine is in maintenance position 1.
A torque wrench with a measuring range of over 650 Nm is available.

Procedure
Note
Check the tightness of the wheels according to the specified intervals.
! This one-off maintenance task scheduled for 50, 100 and 250 service
hours must be performed every time the wheels are changed.
Check that the nuts on all four wheels have been tightened with the
required torque of 750 Nm.

3.5.53
Valid for:

Checking the axle oil level


L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653; L566 - 460 / from 14171;
L576 - 457 / from 14171

The differential and the wheel hubs have a common oil system.
Make sure that the machine is in maintenance position 1.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Procedure

Open the plug 4 and check the oil level in the axle.
If the oil level is too low:
Top up with the axle oil prescribed in the section on lubricants and fuels.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.5-45 o f 5 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Maintenance tasks

3.5.54
Valid for:

Checking the axle oil level


L580 - 459 / from 14171

The differential and the wheel hubs have a common oil system.
Make sure that the machine is in maintenance position 1.
Procedure

Open the plug 1 and check the oil level in the axle.
If the oil level is too low:
Top up with the axle oil prescribed in the section on lubricants and fuels.

3.5.55
Valid for:

Changing the axle oil


L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653; L566 - 460 / from 14171;
L576 - 457 / from 14171

Draining oil
Caution
Running the engine makes the gear oil very hot!
! Always wear suitable gloves and goggles.
Open the plugs 2 and 4.
Open the plugs 1 and 3 on the wheel hubs and drain the oil into
a receptacle.
Close the plugs 1 and 3 again.

3.5-46 o f 5 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Make sure that:


The machine is in maintenance position 1.
You have a sufficient quantity of the axle oil prescribed in the section on
lubricants and fuels.
You have a suitable oil receptacle ready for disposal.

Service Manual

Maintenance
Maintenance tasks

Topping up oil
The wheel hubs and the differential have a common oil system. This means
the oil can flow back and forth between the differential and the wheel hubs.
Top up oil at the filling inlet 2 up to the plug 4.
Check the oil level at the plug 4 and top up if necessary.
Close the plugs 2 and 4 again.

3.5.56
Valid for:

Changing the axle oil


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Make sure that:


The machine is in maintenance position 1.
You have a sufficient quantity of the axle oil prescribed in the section on
lubricants and fuels.
You have a suitable oil receptacle ready for disposal.
Draining oil

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Caution
Running the engine makes the gear oil very hot!
! Always wear suitable gloves and goggles.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.5-47 o f 5 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Maintenance tasks

Open the plug 1.


Open the plugs 2 and 3 on the wheel hubs and drain the oil into
a receptacle.
Close the plugs 2 and 3 again.
Topping up oil
The wheel hubs and the differential have a common oil system. This means
the oil can flow back and forth between the differential and the wheel hubs.
Top up oil at the filling inlet 1.
Check the oil level at the filling inlet 1 and top up if necessary.
Close the plug 1 again.

3.5.57
Valid for:

Lubricating the bevel gear seal


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Make sure that:


The machine is in maintenance position 1.
Procedure
Lubricate at the grease fitting 1 on the front and rear axles.
If necessary, such as when operating the machine in water, lubricate
every day.

3.5.58

Checking and lubricating the front drive shaft


Make sure that the machine is in maintenance position 1.
Procedure
Lubricate the drive shaft at both universal joints.
Check the play of the drive shaft in the bearings.
Check the rubber sleeve for leaks and damage.

3.5.59

Checking and lubricating the rear drive shaft


LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Make sure that the machine is in maintenance position 1.


Procedure
Lubricate the drive shaft at both universal joints.
Check the play of the drive shaft in the bearings.

3.5-48 o f 5 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Maintenance
Maintenance tasks

3.5.60

Testing and setting the tyre pressure for the machine's use
and attachments
Make sure the air pressure in the tyres on both axles is correct for the tyre
type, the way the machine is used and the working attachments fitted.
The reference values can be found in the operating manual, in the technical
data section.
Procedure
The air pressure in the tyres has a significant influence on the overall
operating performance of the machine.
Warning
Exploding tyres can cause serious injury.
If the tyre inflation equipment is incorrectly or carelessly used or if the tyre
pressure is too high, the tyres may burst or the rims may come off, causing
severe, or possibly even fatal injuries.
! Use a sufficiently long hose with a self-locking adapter for pumping
the tyres.
! Always keep outside the danger zone when tyres are being pumped up.
Check the air pressure in all the tyres and correct it if necessary.

3.5.61

Lubricating the articulated bearing and the rear oscillating


bearing
Make sure that:
The machine is in maintenance position 1.
The articulation lock is engaged.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Lubricating the articulation bearing

Articulation bearing lubrication points


1 Top articulation bearing
2 Bottom articulation bearing
Lubricate the articulation bearing lubrication points.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.5-49 o f 5 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Maintenance tasks

Lubricating the rear oscillating bearing

Lubricating points on the rear oscillating bearing, right central lubrication rail
1 Rear axle oscillating bearing
2 Front axle oscillating bearing
Lubricate the lubricating points on the rear axle oscillating bearing.

3.5.62

Checking the lubrication system grease reservoir level


Make sure that the machine is in maintenance position 1.
Procedure

It the grease in the reservoir container is too low, all 3 LEDs on the central
lubrication system button light up.
Caution
There is a risk of damaging the system.
! Pay attention to cleanliness when filling.
If necessary, fill the reservoir via the filling coupling 1 (fast filling) or the
grease fitting 2.
Grease specifications: See the lubricants and fuels listed in chapter 5.

3.5-50 o f 5 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Regularly check the grease quantity in the reservoir.


Stay within the minimum and maximum lubricant levels.
The reservoir has a sight glass where the rubber stripper on the agitator can
be seen.
Look through the sight glass to check the level in the grease reservoir.

Service Manual

Maintenance
Maintenance tasks

3.5.63

Checking the pipes, hoses and lubrication points of the


lubrication system
Make sure that the machine is in maintenance position 1.
Procedure
Visually examine the hose lines for defects.
In case of any defects, locate and rectify the problem.

3.5.64

Checking whether metered quantities are adequate at the


bearing points (grease collars) of the central lubrication
system
Make sure that the machine is in maintenance position 1.
Procedure
Visually examine whether metered quantities are adequate at the
bearing points.
If the bearing points are not sufficiently lubricated, locate the problem and
rectify it.
Regularly check the grease quantity in the reservoir.
See the section on checking the lubrication system grease reservoir level,

3.5.65

Lubricating the door hinges


Procedure
Lubricate the door hinges with a grease gun.

3.5.66

Cleaning the fresh air and recirculated air filter


Make sure that the machine is in maintenance position 1.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Cleaning the fresh air filter

Fresh air filter


1 Door
3 Ventilation lint filter
2 Fresh air filter
Open the door 1.
Pull out the fresh air filter 2 by the protruding lug on the bottom.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.5-51 o f 5 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Maintenance tasks

Fresh air filter


Clean (blow out) or replace the fresh air filter 2.
Remove the lint filter 3.
Clean (blow out or wash) the lint filter or change it if necessary.

Fresh air filter


Insert the cleaned or new filters, making sure they are correctly fitted (the
arrows moulded on the filter frame point towards the air taken in).
Close the door again.

Recirculation filter

3.5-52 o f 5 8

1 Door
3 Recirculation filter
2 Pin
Remove the pin 2.
Open the door 1.
Take out the recirculated air filter 3 and clean it (blow it out) or replace it.
Put in a clean or new filter.
Close the door again.

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Cleaning the recirculated air filter

Service Manual

Maintenance
Maintenance tasks

3.5.67

Changing the fresh air and recirculated air filter


Make sure that the machine is in maintenance position 1.
Changing the fresh air filter

Fresh air filter


1 Door
3 Ventilation lint filter
2 Fresh air filter
Open the door 1.
Pull out the fresh air filter 2 by the protruding lug on the bottom.

Fresh air filter


Insert the new filter 1, making sure it is correctly fitted (the arrows
moulded on the filter frame point towards the air taken in).
Close the door again.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Changing the recirculated air filter

Recirculation filter
1 Door
2 Pin
Remove the pin 2.
Open the door 1.
L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

3 Recirculation filter

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.5-53 o f 5 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Maintenance tasks

Take out the recirculated air filter 3.


Put in a new filter.
Close the door again.

3.5.68

Checking the indicator beads in the dryer-collector unit


The dryer-collector unit is located on the right under the cooling system hood.

Sight glass in the dryer-collector unit


Check the orange bead 2 (moisture indicator).
If the orange bead 2 has turned transparent:
There is moisture in the refrigerant circuit. You must replace the dryercollector and the compressor oil and refill the system.
The white bead 1 shows the filling level of R134a refrigerant in the circuit
and acts as an indicator during initial filling. The white bead 1 must be at
the top of the sight glass.
The filling level can vary due to temperature fluctuations. It also sinks in time
due to natural leakage. This does not impair operation.
If the cooling performance deteriorates, one of the causes can be a low
refrigerant level.
In normal circumstances, one filling lasts for three to five years.

3.5.69

Lubricating the lift arms and attachment


This also applies to optional equipment, for example:
High dump bucket, timber grabber etc.
Make sure that the machine is in maintenance position 2.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Lubricating standard lift arms and attachment

Bearing and lubrication points on the lift arms


Move the lift arms and the bucket to the position shown.

3.5-54 o f 5 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Maintenance
Maintenance tasks

Secure the machine against rolling away with wheel wedges.


Grease all the bearing and lubrication points on the lift arms.
If fitted, lubricate the quick-change device.
If fitted, grease the lubrication points on the attachment.
The lower bucket bearings should be lubricated daily if necessary.

Lubricating the tilt cylinder support for timber transfer


This equipment is optional.

Tilt cylinder support


1 Grease fitting
3 Lubricating line
2 Distributor block
Grease the lubrication points via the grease fitting 1.
The lubricant is pumped via the distributor block 2 and the lubricating lines 3
to the lubricating points.
If fitted, grease the lubrication points on the timber grabber. For detailed
information on maintenance for the attachment, see the manufacturer's instructions.

3.5.70

Checking the bucket bearing seals and the bearing bushings


on the lift arms
Checking the bucket bearing seal
The bucket bearing seal 3 prevents dirt from entering the bearing, thus
increasing the lifetime of the bearing bushings.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Depending on the type of application, wear occurs on the sealing lips 5 and
on the dirt guard 6. If the bucket bearing seal 3 is in any way damaged or
worn, it must be replaced.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.5-55 o f 5 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Maintenance tasks

Checking the bucket bearing seal


1 Bucket bearing plate
2 Bucket arm

3 Bucket bearing seal


4 Bearing bushing

5 Sealing lips
6 Dirt guard

Move the lift arms and the bucket to the position shown.
Clean the bucket bearing seals 3 using a steam jet.
Visually check whether the sealing lips 5 touch the sides of the lift arms
and the bucket.
If there is a gap between the sealing lips 5 and the bucket arm 2 or the
bucket bearing plate 1, or if the bucket bearing seal is damaged:
Replace the bucket bearing seal as described in section 17.2.5.
Checking the bearing bushings for wear

Replace the bearing bushings in good time to prevent damage to the


material of the bucket arm.

3.5-56 o f 5 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Dirt or insufficient lubrication can cause wear on the bearing bushings. The
increased play between the pin and bearing bushing causes noises.

Service Manual

Maintenance
Maintenance tasks

Move the lift arms and the bucket to the position shown.
Gently and rapidly tilt the bucket in and out, and check the bearing points
for noise and play.
If there is significant play at the bearing points or loud noise:
Replace the bearing bushings as described in section 17.2.4.

3.5.71

Check the lift arms and bucket stops


There are two ways to attach the equipment to the lift arms: directly or using
the quick-change device.
It is important that the limits stops and the sequence of stops are as
specified. Failure to comply can reduce the lifetime of the equipment and the
lift arms.
Checking the bucket stops without a quick-change device
This is how to check the bucket stops properly:
Secure the machine against rolling away (using the parking brake or
wheel wedges).
Move the lift arms and the bucket to the position shown.
Retract the tilt cylinders until the bucket stops 1 touch the bucket arm.
Check the dimension 2 according to the following table.
Dimensions

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Description
Dimensions L550 - L580

Dimension 1
0

Dimension 2 Unit
mm
32

If there are deviations from the table above, contact LIEBHERR customer
service about corrective action.
Checking the bucket stops with a quick-change device
This is how to check the bucket stops properly:
Secure the machine against rolling away (using the parking brake or
wheel wedges).
Move the lift arms and the quick-change device to the position shown.
Retract the tilt cylinders until the linkage stop touches the cross tube stop.
Check the dimension 1 according to the following table.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.5-57 o f 5 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Maintenance tasks

Dimensions
Description
Dimensions L550 - L580

Dimension 1
5

Dimension 2

Unit

mm

If there are deviations from the table above, contact LIEBHERR customer
service about corrective action.

3.5.72

Testing the quick-change device (optional)


Make sure that:
The lift arms have been lowered.
The working attachment is tilted in.
Procedure
The operation of the quick-change device can vary according to the version
or the type of machine.
To check that it is working properly:
Unlock the quick-change device and lock it again.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

This prevents the locking pins from jamming and preventing the quickchange device from being released.
To make sure, check:
That the quick-change device is properly locked again.

3.5-58 o f 5 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Maintenance
Testing and adjustment tasks

3.6 Testing and adjustment tasks


3.6.1

Preparing for testing and adjustment


During the warranty period, only trained and authorised specialist staff may
carry out adjustments on the machine.
Make sure that:
The machine is in maintenance position 2.
The machine is at operating temperature (except when testing the air
conditioning).
The adjustment data for the machine is available or known.
Seals and safety caps are at hand.
The following special tools are available.
Special tools
Number Description
USB dongle for SCULI
1

3.6.2

ID no.
1033 3608

Data lead for SCULI

1003 5410

Manometer, 0 - 40 bar, class 1.0

7361 288

Manometer, 0 - 600 bar, class 1.0

5002 866

4000 mm test leads

7009 134

1500 mm test leads

7002 475

Safety precautions for testing and adjustment


Always observe the accident prevention regulations during maintenance work.
See the safety regulations section for measures to ensure safe maintenance.
Make sure that visual contact between the operator in the cab and
maintenance personnel is always maintained.
Only carry out adjustments on valves etc. with the machine not running.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Visual contact

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.6-1 o f 1 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Testing and adjustment tasks

3.6.3

Bringing the machine up to operating temperature


During testing and adjustment, the machine must be at an operating temperature of 585 C. The temperature is measured by the hydraulic oil sensor
and can be seen in SCULI.
Procedure
Insert a piece of card or similar material between the fuel cooler 1 and the
hydraulic oil cooler 2.
Connect your laptop, start the engine and run the SCULI program.
In the variables editor in the group structure, select the Adjustment
Block Curve folder.
The cooling system - temperature hydraulic oil variable shows the
hydraulic oil temperature during the adjustment.

58.1

Bring the machine up to operating temperature as follows:


Run the engine at around 2000 rpm.
Activate the tilt-in function as far as it will go and hold the control lever in
this position.
At the same time, move the lift arms up and down with the lever halfway out.
Operate the travel hydraulics in fixed gear 1.
Bring the machine up to operating temperature until the hydraulic oil
temperature is 585 C.
When working on the hydraulic system, the hydraulic oil temperature
must be within the prescribed range.
After finishing the adjustment, take the piece of card out of the oil cooler.

Checking the diesel engine speed


You can read the engine speed from the RPM segment indicator in the
display unit or use a standard engine speed tester.
The engine speed cannot be mechanically adjusted; it is determined directly
by the engine control unit.

Cab display unit

Procedure
Start up the engine.
Check that the top and bottom engine speeds are correct.
If it is not correct:
Calibrate the gas pedal using the SCULI program and service the engine.
Check the top and bottom idle speeds again.

3.6-2 o f 1 8

Description

Value Unit

Lower idle speed

90010 min-1

Upper idle speed

206510 min-1

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

3.6.4

Service Manual

Maintenance
Testing and adjustment tasks

3.6.5

Check the fan motor and fan control pressure relief valve
Make the following checks on the fan motor:
These tests must be performed at upper engine speed.
Test the fan according to the temperature (temperature sensor 1 or
2 disconnected).
Test the pressure relief valve 7 on the fan motor 5 (with the plug on the
proportional valve disconnected).

Fan drive components


1 Hydraulic oil temperature sensor
2 Coolant temperature sensor
3 Fan pressure test connection

4 Fan gear pump


5 Fan gear motor
6 Fan proportional valve cap

7 Fan proportional valve


8 Fan proportional solenoid
9 Proportional solenoid connector

You can check the fan using the system pressure, measured at the test
connection 3 of the gear pump 4.
Make sure that:
The hydraulic oil temperature is less than 88 C.
The coolant temperature is below 97 C.
If the hydraulic temperature is over 88 C or the coolant temperature is
above 97 C, the fan speeds up. This makes it impossible to test the
fan control.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Checking the fan according to the temperature


The fan speed (system pressure) is tested here in the stated temperature range.
Connect a manometer (250 bar) to the test connection 3 on the gear
pump 4.
Disconnect the hydraulic oil temperature sensor 1 or coolant temperature
sensor 2.
Start the engine and bring it to top idle speed.
Check whether the pressure is correct at top engine idle speed.
Valid for:

L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653

Description

Value Unit

Fan pressure

11010 bar
1650 min-1

Fan speed

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.6-3 o f 1 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Testing and adjustment tasks

Valid for:

L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171

Description

Value Unit

Fan pressure

17510 bar
1400 min-1

Fan speed
If it is not correct:
Check the fan motor pressure relief valve.
Checking the fan motor pressure relief valve

Connect a manometer (250 bar) to the test connection 3 on the gear


pump 4.
Pull out the plug 9 on the proportional solenoid 8.
Start the engine and bring it to top idle speed.
Check whether the pressure is correct at top engine idle speed.
If it is not correct:
Adjust the pressure relief valve 7 on the fan motor 5 (using the adjusting
screw and a 5 mm open-end spanner - the lock nut is a round nut).
Turn clockwise to increase the pressure and anticlockwise to reduce it.
Remove the cap 6.
Adjust the screw on the proportional valve.
Valid for:

L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653

Description

Value Unit

Fan pressure

22010 bar
approx. 2050 min-1

Fan speed
Valid for:

L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171

Description

Value Unit

Fan pressure

22010 bar
approx. 1600 min-1

Fan speed
Plug in the disconnected plug again.

3.6.6

Calibrating the pedals


The pedals can only be calibrated using the SCULI software.
During calibration, the MIN and MAX positions of the gas pedal and inch
pedal are stored in the master electronics.

Connect your laptop, turn on the start switch and run the SCULI program.
In the variables editor in the group structure, select the Adjustment
Pedals folder.
Set Throttle - start adjustment to 1.
Push the gas pedal all the way down.
The MIN and MAX positions of the gas pedal are stored. After 15 seconds
the value automatically returns to 0 and calibration is finished.
Check that Throttle - guide value is 0% when the pedal is not pressed
and 100% when the pedal is pressed all the way down.

3.6-4 o f 1 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/19/03/2007

Procedure

Service Manual

Maintenance
Testing and adjustment tasks

Set Inch pedal - start adjustment to 1.


Push the inch pedal all the way down.
The MIN and MAX positions of the gas pedal are stored. After 15 seconds
the value automatically returns to 0 and calibration is finished.
Check that Inch pedal - guide value is 0% when the pedal is not
pressed and 100% when the pedal is pressed all the way down.

3.6.7

Checking the replenishing pressure of the variable


displacement pump
Measure the replenishing pressure at the test connection G.
Procedure

Valid for:

Connect a manometer (40 bar) to the test connection G.


Start the machine and let the engine run at top idling speed.
Check that the replenishing pressure is correct.
If it is not correct:
Turn the adjusting screw on the replenishing pressure relief valve 1 until
the replenishing pressure is correct.

L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653

Description

Value Unit
311 bar

Replenishing pressure
Valid for:

L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171

Description

Value Unit
341 bar

Replenishing pressure

3.6.8

Checking the pressure relief and replenishing valve of the


variable displacement pump

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

The pressure relief and replenishing valves protect the variable displacement
pump from pressure peaks. These can occur when braking the machine.
When a pressure peak occurs, oil flows from the high pressure side via
the pressure relief and replenishing valve to the low pressure side in a
closed circuit.
Procedure
To attain the set value for the pressure relief and replenishing valves, the
pressure cut-off must be set to a higher value.
Screw in the adjusting screw 1 on the pressure cut-off by one turn.
Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the test connections MA and MB.
Use SCULI to set the Inch pedal - function OFF variable to 1 the
inching function is disabled.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.6-5 o f 1 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Testing and adjustment tasks

Check the pressure relief and replenishing valve 2 for forward travel on the
manometer MA.
Check the pressure relief and replenishing valve 3 for reverse travel on the
manometer MB.
Select fixed gear 2 and forward or reverse travel, and hold the machine in
the blocked condition using the service brake.
Caution
Heat is quickly generated when you test the pressure relief and replenishing valves.
Excessive heat can irreparably damage the pump.

! Only test the pressure relief and replenishing valves for a short time.
In the blocked condition, increase the engine speed to the maximum.
Check that the high pressure at the two pressure relief and replenishing
valves is correct.
If it is not correct:
Turn the adjusting screw on the pressure relief and replenishing valve
until the high pressure is correct.
Loosen the adjusting screw 1 on the pressure cut-off by one turn and
check the pressure cut-off.
Use SCULI to set the Inch pedal - function OFF variable back to 0
the inching function is enabled.

3.6.9

Description

Value Unit

High pressure

47010 bar

Checking the pressure cut-off of the variable displacement


pump
The pressure cut-off limits the maximum pressure of the variable
displacement pump.
When this pressure is reached, the pump flow is automatically reduced in
order to maintain the maximum permitted pressure.

Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the test connection MA.


Use SCULI to set the Inch pedal - function OFF variable to 1 the
inching function is disabled.
Select fixed gear 2 and forward travel, and hold the machine in the
blocked condition using the service brake.
In the blocked condition, increase the engine speed to the maximum.
Check that the high pressure on the manometer MA is correct.
Check that the engine suppression is below the threshold.
If it is not correct:
Turn the adjusting screw 1 on the pressure cut-off 1 until the manometer
MA reaches the correct value.
Use SCULI to set the Inch pedal - function OFF variable back to 0
the inching function is enabled.
Description

Value Unit

High pressure

4305 bar

Maximum engine suppression at top idle


speed

3.6-6 o f 1 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

30 min-1

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Procedure

Service Manual

Maintenance
Testing and adjustment tasks

3.6.10

Calibrating the block curve


The block curve can only be calibrated using the SCULI software.
During calibration, the current to the proportional valve on the variable
displacement pump is adjusted so that the pump reaches a set pressure at a
set engine speed.
Procedure
Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the test connection MA.
Connect your laptop, start the engine and run the SCULI program.
In the variables editor in the group structure, select the Adjustment
Block Curve folder.
Set the Inch pedal - function OFF variable to 1 the inching function is
disabled.
Select fixed gear 2 and forward travel, and hold the machine in the
blocked condition using the service brake.
Increase the engine speed to the levels shown in the table (930 min-1,
1200 min-1, 1400 min-1) and test the high pressure.
If it is not correct:
Adjust the parameter Travel pump - current at 930, 1200, 1400 rpm
until the set value is reached.
Set the Inch pedal - function OFF variable back to 0 the inching
function is enabled.

Valid for:

L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653

Description

Value Unit
-1

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Valid for:

High pressure at 930 min engine speed

5010 bar

High pressure at 1200 min-1 engine speed

29010 bar

High pressure at 1400 min-1 engine speed

35010 bar

L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171

Description

Value Unit
-1

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

High pressure at 930 min engine speed

5010 bar

High pressure at 1200 min-1 engine speed

23010 bar

High pressure at 1400 min-1 engine speed

33010 bar

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.6-7 o f 1 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Testing and adjustment tasks

3.6.11

Calibrating the variable displacement motors


The variable displacement motors are calibrated automatically by the
master electronics.
Automatically calibrating the variable displacement motors
Connect your laptop, start the engine and run the SCULI program.
In the variables editor in the group structure, select the Adjustment
Travel motor folder.
Set the parameter Travel motor - start motor adjustment to 1.
The engine speed is automatically increased to 1000 min-1. After this the
motors are successively calibrated across the entire speed range.
After calibration, set the parameter Travel motor - start motor adjustment
back to 0.

Note: Once the automatic calibration of the motors is complete, a service


code appears in the display.
This can happen if the variable displacement motor current is too high or
low. In this case, the variable displacement motors must be manually
checked and adjusted to 60030 mA.
Setting VG max manually

Adjusting variable displacement motor 1:


In the blocked condition, slowly increase the engine speed until the
manometer MA shows exactly 300 bar.
Lower the current at Travel motor - motor 1 maximal current until the
manometer at M1 shows 155 bar less than manometer MA.
When the manometers MA and M1 show the correct levels, increase the
current at Travel motor - motor 1 maximal current by 10 mA.
Adjusting variable displacement motor 2:
In the blocked condition, slowly increase the engine speed until the
manometer MA shows exactly 300 bar.
Lower the current at Travel motor - motor 2 maximal current until the
manometer at M1 shows 155 bar less than manometer MA.
When the manometers MA and M2 show the correct levels, increase the
current at Travel motor - motor 2 maximal current by 10 mA.

3.6-8 o f 1 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the test connection MA.


Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the test connections M1 and M2.
In the variables editor in the group structure, select the Adjustment
Travel motor folder.
Set the Inch pedal - function OFF variable to 1 the inching function is
disabled.
Select fixed gear 1 and forward travel, and hold the machine in the blocked
condition using the service brake.

Service Manual

Maintenance
Testing and adjustment tasks

Note: The current for both motors must be in the range of 60030 mA. If there
is any deviation, correct it using the adjusting screws 1 or 2.
Set the Inch pedal - function OFF variable back to 0 the inching
function is enabled.
Repeat the automatically calibration of the variable displacement motors.

3.6.12

Checking the engine output


Before you check the power of the engine, you must carry out the following
tasks:
Tasks in maintenance schedule (air filter, fuel filter etc.)
Check the operating pressures according to the adjustment checklist
The machine must be at operating temperature.
At maximum engine power consumption, the variable displacement motor
power limiting control is activated. It regulates the pivot angle of the motors
so that the engine runs at rated speed. This results in a set high pressure in
the closed circuit.
If the high pressure is is above the set value, the engine power is good.
If the high pressure is is below the set value, the engine power is poor.
If the engine speed reaches the set value, power limiting control is
working correctly.
Procedure

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the test connection MA.


In the variables editor in the group structure, select the Check
Dieselengine folder.
Set the Inch pedal - function OFF variable to 1 the inching function is
disabled.
Start the machine, select fixed gear 2 and forward travel direction.
Hold the machine with the service brake and run it at full throttle.
Slowly release the service brake until the machine moves at 13 km/h.
Check that the set values are reached.
If they are not correct:
Troubleshoot the engine: air filters, fuel filters etc.
Troubleshoot the travel hydraulics: check the operating pressure etc.

Set the Inch pedal - function OFF variable back to 0 the inching
function is enabled.
Valid for:

L550 - 456 / from 16978

Description

Value Unit

High pressure

30010 bar
198030 min-1

Diesel engine speed

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.6-9 o f 1 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Testing and adjustment tasks

Valid for:

L556 - 454 / from 15653

Description

Value Unit

High pressure

33010 bar
198030 min-1

Diesel engine speed


Valid for:

L566 - 460 / from 14171

Description

Value Unit

High pressure

34010 bar
198030 min-1

Diesel engine speed


Valid for:

L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171

Description

Value Unit

High pressure

34010 bar
198030 min-1

Diesel engine speed

3.6.13

Checking the flow controller (delta p) of the working


hydraulics pump
Make sure you have a differential pressure gauge and two pressure sensors
for the range up to 600 bar.
Procedure
Measure the difference in pressure between the test connections P and LS.
You can measure the differential pressure, for example by slowly raising the
lift arms.
Connect 600 bar pressure sensors to test connections P and LS.
Start the engine and let it run at low idling speed.
Slowly raise the lift arms and check whether the differential pressure
is correct.
If it is not correct:
Turn the adjusting screw on the flow controller 1 until the differential
pressure is correct.
Description

Value Unit
222 bar

Differential pressure

Checking the flow controller (start of delivery) of the working


hydraulics pump
The flow controller determines the maximum output of the variable displacement pump. At the start of delivers, the indicator on the manometer M1
moves away from 0 bar. The set value on the manometer P should
be reached.
Procedure
Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the variable displacement pump at
test connections M1 and P.
Start the engine, tilt the bucket all the way out and move the lift arms to
the bottom position.
At idle speed, raise the lift arms all the way and check that the start of
delivery shown on the manometer M1 is correct.
If it is not correct:
Turn the adjusting screw on the power controller 1 until the pressure
is correct.

3.6-10 o f 1 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

3.6.14

Service Manual

Maintenance
Testing and adjustment tasks

3.6.15

Description

Value Unit

Start of regulation

18010 bar

Checking the secondary pressure relief valves on the control


block
Procedure
To check the secondary pressure relief valve, you must increase the setting
of the LS pressure cut-off 5 and the primary pressure relief valve 3.
Screw in the adjusting screw on the LS pressure cut-off 5 on the control
block by two turns.
Tighten the adjusting screw on the primary pressure relief valve 3 by
two turns.
Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the test connection P on the
control block.
Caution
The pump can be irreparably damaged if you lower the lift arms. This
function has no secondary pressure relief valve.
! Do not lower the lift arms.
Start the machine and let the engine run at lower idling speed.
Raise the lift arms, tilt out the bucket and tilt in the bucket, each to the limit.
Check that the pressure at each secondary pressure relief valve is correct.
If it is not correct:
Turn the adjusting screw on the secondary pressure relief valve until it
is correct.
Adjust the primary pressure relief valve 3 and the LS pressure cut off 5
back to the set value. See the sections on testing the primary pressure
relief valve and LS pressure cut-off.

Valid for:

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Valid for:

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653

Description

Value Unit

Tilt-in function (2)

3805 bar

Tilt-out function (4)

3805 bar

Lifting function (1)

3805 bar

L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171

Description

Value Unit

Tilt-in function (2)

4005 bar

Tilt-out function (4)

4005 bar

Lifting function (1)

4205 bar

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.6-11 o f 1 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Testing and adjustment tasks

3.6.16

Checking the primary pressure relief valves on the control


block
Procedure
To check the primary pressure relief valve 3, you must increase the setting
of the LS pressure cut-off 5.
Screw in the adjusting screw on the LS pressure cut-off 5 on the control
block by two turns.
Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the test connection P.
Start the machine and let the engine run at lower idling speed.
Raise the lift arms to the limit.
Check that the pressure is correct.
If it is not correct:
Turn the adjusting screw on the primary pressure relief valve 3 until the
pressure is correct.
Return the LS pressure cut-off 5 to its normal value. See the section on
testing the LS pressure cut-off.

Valid for:

Valid for:

3.6.17

L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653

Description

Value Unit

Primary valve (3)

3605 bar

L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171

Description

Value Unit

Primary valve (3)

3805 bar

Checking the LS pressure cut-off on the control block


Procedure

Valid for:

Valid for:

3.6-12 o f 1 8

L550 - 456 / from 16978

Description

Value Unit

LS pressure cut-off (5)

2905 bar

L556 - 454 / from 15653

Description

Value Unit

LS pressure cut-off (5)

3305 bar

L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171

Description

Value Unit

LS pressure cut-off (5)

3505 bar

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Valid for:

Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the test connection P.


Start the machine and let the engine run at lower idling speed.
Raise the lift arms to the limit.
Check that the pressure is correct.
If it is not correct:
Turn the adjusting screw on the LS pressure cut-off 5 until the pressure
is correct.

Service Manual

Maintenance
Testing and adjustment tasks

3.6.18

Depressurising ride control and the hydro accumulators


You must depressurise the system before checking and filling the hydro
accumulators or making repairs to the ride control system.
This is how to depressurise the ride control system:
Procedure
Caution: Perform the following actions in the correct sequence.
Put the machine and the lift arms in maintenance position 2.
The working attachment and lift arms must lie on the ground under their
own weight.
Turn off the diesel engine.
Connect a manometer (40 bar) to the test connection M4 on the
front axle.
Connect the same test line to the test connection MX.
The pressure can then be relieved through this line to the tank. This takes
around 10 minutes.
After 10 minutes, take the test line off test connection M4 and drain the
remaining fluid into a suitable receptacle.
Leave the test line connected during the testing and repair work.
After servicing, remove the test line from test connection MX.

3.6.19

Checking the cut-off pressure in the stabilisation module


The cut-off function limits the pressure in the hydro accumulators when ride
control is deactivated. This is how to check and correct the cut-off pressure:
The cut-off pressure is fixed by the spring force. This means the cut-off
pressure cannot be adjusted.
Procedure

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the test connection MX on the stabilisation module.
Start the diesel engine (with ride control deactivated).
With the engine idling, raise the lift arms to their full height and accumulate pressure.
Check that the high pressure on the manometer is correct (reading the
highest value).
If it is not correct:
Find the cause and rectify the fault.

3.6.20

Description

Value Unit

High pressure

12020 bar

Checking the nitrogen in the ride control hydro accumulator


Make sure that you have a charging and testing device with a
nitrogen bottle.
The hydro accumulators can only be tested or filled when they
are depressurised.
Note: The nitrogen chamber of the hydro accumulator has around 350 cm
of oil in it to protect the membrane.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.6-13 o f 1 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Testing and adjustment tasks

Procedure
Depressurise the ride control system as described in the section on
depressurising ride control and the hydro accumulators.

Take off the cap and slightly loosen the plug 2 of the hydro accumulator
using a 6 mm allen key.
Connect the charging and testing device 4 to the hydro accumulator you
want to test.
Open the valve 6 and check whether the nitrogen filling is correct.
If it is not correct:
Slowly open the valve 8 on the nitrogen bottle 9 until the pressure
is correct.
You can reduce the pressure in the hydro accumulator using the relieve
valve 5. The nitrogen escapes to the open air.
Description

Value

Hydro accumulator temperature

Unit

Nitrogen for filling the hydro accumulator


Minimum hydro accumulator nitrogen filling

3.6.21

10

25

23

26

24

20
27
25

2
2

30

28

bar

26

bar

Check the pressure cut-off of the steering pump


Procedure

3.6.22

Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the test connection P.


Start the engine and let it run at low idling speed.
Turn the steering fully to the left or right.
Check that the pressure at the test connection P is correct.
If it is not correct:
Turn the adjusting screw on the pressure controller 2 until the pressure
is correct.

Description

Value Unit

High pressure

2105 bar

Checking the flow controller (delta p) of the steering pump


Make sure you have a differential pressure gauge and two pressure sensors
for the range up to 600 bar.
Procedure
Measure the difference in pressure between the test connections P and LS.
You can only measure the differential pressure when the flow controller is
activated. This is best done when slowly steering.
Fit a test connection between the hose line and the connection LS.
Connect 600 bar pressure sensors to test connections P and LS.
Start the engine and let it run at low idling speed.
Slowly steer the machine to the left or right and check whether the
differential pressure on the measuring device is correct.

3.6-14 o f 1 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Service Manual

Maintenance
Testing and adjustment tasks

If it is not correct:
Turn the adjusting screw on the flow controller 1 until the differential
pressure is correct.
Description

Value Unit
22 2 bar

Differential pressure

3.6.23

Checking the brake pressure of the compact brake valve


The compact brake valve fills the brake accumulator until the shut-off
pressure is reached.
When you repeatedly press the inch-brake pedal, the pressure in the brake
accumulators falls until the opening pressure is reached. The brake
accumulator charging function then begins.
Procedure
You can check the cut-off pressure of the brake accumulator charging
function using the test connection M3 on the compact brake valve.
Connect a manometer (600 bar) with a short test line to the test
connection MA.
Start the engine and let it run at low idling speed.
Push the inch/brake pedal all the way down several times.
Look at the manometer M3 to check that the correct opening pressure
is reached.
When the opening pressure is reached, the pressure on the manometer
begins to rise. The pressure then increases to the closing pressure.
Check the test connection M3 to see if the closing pressure is correct.
If it is not correct:
Turn the adjusting screw 1 on the compact brake valve until the closing
pressure is correct.

3.6.24

Description

Value Unit

Opening pressure

1805 bar

Closing pressure

2105 bar

Checking the brake pressure at the axles


You can check the brake pressure on the wet disk brakes in the wheel hubs
at the test connection M4 on the front axle 1 and M5 on the cut-in block 2.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Procedure

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

Connect manometers (600 bar) to the test connections M4 and M5.


Start the engine and let it run at low idling speed.
Push the inch/brake pedal all the way down.
Check that the pressure on both manometers is correct.
If it is not correct:
Adjust the pedal stop screw 3 so that the brake pressure is correct when

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.6-15 o f 1 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Testing and adjustment tasks

the pedal is all the way down. Remove the seal 4, loosen the counter nut
and adjust the bottom screw.
Valid for:

L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653;


L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171

Description

Value Unit

Brake pressure with the pedal fully


pressed
Valid for:

L580 - 459 / from 14171

Description

Value Unit

Brake pressure with the pedal fully


pressed

3.6.25

95 5 bar

70 5 bar

Checking the capacity of the brake accumulator


Test the capacity of the brake accumulators 1 and 2 for the front and rear
axles respectively by pressing the inch/brake pedal nine times. Before the
test, the pressure in the brake accumulators must be 180 bar.
After pressing the inch/brake pedal nine times, the pressure should not be
below the correct level.

Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the test connection M3 on the


compact brake valve.
Connect manometers (600 bar) to the test connections M4 and M5 on the
cut-in block 2.
Push the inch/brake pedal all the way down several times to lower the
brake accumulator pressure to 180 bar.
Slowly press the inch/brake all the way down nine times, keeping it down
the final time.
Check that the correct pressure is reached on the manometers M4
and M5.
If the brake pressure on either manometer falls below the correct level:
Replace the brake accumulator if necessary.
Description

Value Unit

Lower brake pressure tolerance

3.6-16 o f 1 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

50 bar

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Procedure

Service Manual

Maintenance
Testing and adjustment tasks

3.6.26

Checking the accumulator charge pressure


The pressure switch generates a warning if the brake accumulator pressure
is too low. When the pressure in the brake accumulators is reached, the
symbol field 2 goes out and the brake system is ready for operation.
Procedure
You can check the switching point of the pressure switch 1 using the test
connection M3 on the compact brake valve and the symbol field 2 on the
display unit.
Connect a manometer (600 bar) with a short test line to the test connection MA.
Turn on the starter switch.
Gently push the inch/brake pedal to slowly lower the pressure in the
brake accumulators.
Check that the symbol field 2 lights up when the correct pressure is
shown on the manometer M3.
If it is not correct:
Replace the brake accumulator pressure switch 1.

3.6.27

Description

Value Unit

Pressure switch activation point

1205 bar

Checking the brake light pressure switch and brake lights


This check tests the brake lights.
Procedure
Turn on the starter switch.
Slowly and gently press the inch/brake pedal and watch the brake lights
light up.
If the brake lights do not light up:
Check the brake lights; replace the brake light pressure switch 1
if necessary.

3.6.28

Checking the transmission shift pressure


Procedure

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Connect a manometer (40 bar) to the test connection P.


Start the engine and bring it to top idle speed.
Check that the pressure at the test connection P is correct.
If it is not correct:
The shift pressure relief valve is inside the control valve block. You can
only adjust the shift pressure by adding or removing shims. For a
sectional view view of the control valve block, see section on electrohydraulic pressure modulation.

Description

Value Unit
20 3 bar

Shift pressure

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.6-17 o f 1 8

Maintenance

Service Manual

Testing and adjustment tasks

3.6.29

Checking the nitrogen in the transmission hydro accumulator


Make sure that you have a charging and testing device with a nitrogen bottle.

Procedure
Take off the cap and slightly loosen the plug 2 of the hydro accumulator
using a 6 mm allen key.
Connect the charging and testing device 4 to the hydro accumulator.
Open the valve 6 and check whether the nitrogen filling is correct.
If it is not correct:
Slowly open the valve 8 on the nitrogen bottle 9 until the nitrogen pressure is correct.
You can reduce the pressure in the hydro accumulator using the relieve
valve 5. The nitrogen escapes to the open air.
Description

Value Unit
122 bar

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Nitrogen filling

3.6-18 o f 1 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Maintenance
Lubricants and fuels

3.7 Lubricants and fuels


Conscientious observance of the regulations for handling lubricants and
fuels will increase the reliability and service life of the machine.
It is especially important that the specified lubricant qualities are observed.
You can find the various specifications about the prescribed intervals in the
maintenance and inspection schedule and the lubrication chart.
You can find details on lubrication, checking the oil level and changing
operating fluids in the maintenance section under maintenance tasks.
Follow the rules on handling lubricants and fuels, especially the environmental regulations.
Filling quantities and specifications:
The filling quantities listed in the tables are only guidelines. The dipstick
and level markings are always mandatory.
Each time the lubricant or fuel is replaced or topped up, check the level in
the unit in question.
For more detailed information about the required lubricants, fuels and
filling quantities, see the filling quantities in the lubrication chart and the
section on lubricants and fuels.

Environmental protection
Always implement and observe environmental protection measures.
Observe national regulations.
Ensure that liquids can be properly disposed of before draining them.

Disposing of used materials


This applies to the following types of used materials and hazardous waste:
Oils, lubricants, brake fluids, etc.
Coolant
Fuels
Filters, oil cartridges etc.
Rubber, tyres, insulating materials etc.
Batteries

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Procedure

Note
Environmental and health hazard
! Observe the local regulations for protecting the environment when disposing of used materials!
Always collect and store used materials separately in suitable containers.
Dispose of used materials properly at the official collection points.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.7-1 o f 1 0

Maintenance

Service Manual

Lubricants and fuels

Converting the hydraulic system from petroleum to


environmentally compatible hydraulic fluids
For the operation of LIEBHERR earth moving machines with environmentally
compatible hydraulic fluids we recommend PANOLIN HLP SYNTH 46.
Machines filled at factory with environmentally compatible hydraulic
fluids have an appropriate sign (CAUTION) attached to the driver's cab
and hydraulic tank.
Procedure for conversion:
Caution
Beware of damaging the machine's hydraulic system.
Mixing environmentally harmless hydraulic fluids with mineral oils produces a
vigorous reaction that can damage the hydraulic system.

! Do not mix environmentally harmless hydraulic fluids with mineral oil.


If you intend to convert the machine to environmentally-compatible
hydraulic fluid, you must first consult LIEBHERR CUSTOMER
SERVICE.
Ask LIEBHERR for the instruction sheet and conversion guidelines and
be sure to follow them.

3.7.1
Specification

Diesel fuels
The diesel fuels must comply with the minimum requirements of the fuel
specifications prescribed as follows.
Authorised fuel specifications:
DIN EN 590
ASTM D 975 (89a) 1D and 2D
Further fuel specifications only upon consultation with the Diesel Engine
Development Department, LIEBHERR Machines Bulle S.A.

Sulphur content in
the diesel fuel

For worldwide markets except the USA:


In DIN EN 590 the maximum sulphur content is 50 mg/kg = max. 0.005 %
by weight.
For the USA:
In ASTM D 975 (89a) 1D and 2D, the maximum sulphur content is 10 ppm.

The diesel fuel lubricating proficiency must be a max. 460 m in accordance


with the HFRR (60) test.
For diesel fuels featuring a sulphur content above / more than
0.5 weight%, the oil-change intervals are to be halved.
Diesel fuels featuring a sulphur content above / more than 1 weight%
are not permissible.

3.7-2 o f 1 0

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Low-sulphur diesel fuels featuring a sulphur content of below / less than


0.05 weight% are only applicable if lubricity can be ensured with the
admixture of additives.

Service Manual

Maintenance
Lubricants and fuels

Note
In some cases, approval may be given, depending on the quality of the
diesel engine lubricating oil.
! Fuel standard ASTM D 975 does not stipulate that fuels must pass a fuellubricity test. A written confirmation of the fuel supplier must be requested. The additives should be added by the supplier in his capacity as
agent responsible for fuel quality. The addition of secondary-lubricity-additives by the customer is not recommended.
A cetane number of at least 45 is required for fuels in accordance with
ASTM D975. A cetane number above 50 is preferable, especially with
temperatures below 0C.
Diesel fuel at low temperatures
(winter operation)

Diesel fuel precipitates paraffin crystals as the temperature drops. This


increases flow-resistance in the fuel filter to such an extent that a sufficient
supply of fuel to the diesel engine can no longer be guaranteed.
In temperate climates, cold flow is guaranteed up to:
0 C from 15/04. to 30/09
-10 C from 01/10. to 14/11 / 1.3. - 14.04.
-20 C from 16/11 to 29/02
according to DIN EN 590.
If the cold-flow properties of the diesel fuel are insufficient or with lower
ambient temperatures than -20C, we recommend using a fuel filter heater.
Other approved diesel fuels:
Diesel fuel complying with DIN EN 590 with up to 5% vol. FAME.

3.7.2
Lube oil specifications

Lubricating oils for diesel engines


Only high-alloy lube-oils are used nowadays for modern diesel engines.
They are comprised of base oils which feature combined admixtures (additives).
The lubricating oil regulation for LIEBHERR diesel engines is based on the
following specifications and regulations.
Description

Specification

ACEA classification (Association des E4, E5, E6, E7


Constructeurs Europens de
Caution: particle filter operation is
l'Automobile)
only possible with E6

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

API classification (American


Petroleum Institute)

CH-4, CI-4, CJ-4 observe special oilchange interval


Caution: observe the reduced oilchange interval

Lube-oil viscosity

Selection of lube-oil viscosity in accordance with the SAE-classification


(Society of Automotive Engineers).
The ambient temperature is definitive for the correct selection of
the SAE-class.
Selection of the SAE-classification gives no indication of the quality of
a lube-oil.
Too high a viscosity can lead to starting difficulties, and too low a viscosity
could jeopardise the lubricating efficiency.
The temperature ranges specified in the diagram are guidelines and can be
briefly exceeded or fallen short of.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.7-3 o f 1 0

Maintenance

Service Manual

Lubricants and fuels

Temperature-dependent selection of the SAE-class


The following engine oil is recommended (for outside temperatures of -20C
to +45C):
Liebherr Motoroil 10W-40
Specification ACEA E4
Liebherr Motoroil low ash
Specification ACEA E6
Lube-oil change intervals

Changing intervals:
Oil change and filter replacement: see the maintenance and inspection schedule
Oil-change respective of climatic zone, sulphur content in the fuel and oil
quality in accordance with the following table.
If the prescribed operating hours (h) have not expired within one year, the
diesel engine oil and filter must be replaced at least once a year.

Difficulty factors

Various difficulty factors or more difficult operating conditions reduce maintenance intervals.
Difficulty factors or difficult conditions include for example.:
frequent cold-starts
sulphur content in the fuel over 0.5%
Outside operating temperatures below -10 C
Should difficulty factors or tougher operating conditions arise, oil-change and
filter replacement must be carried out in accordance with the specifications
in the following table.
Difficulty factor

Oil quality
CH-4
CJ-4
E4
E5
E6
E7

Outside
temperature

Sulphur content
in the fuel

Normal climate,
up to -10 C

up to 0.5%

250 h

500 h

over 0.5%

125 h

250 h

up to 0.5%

125 h

250 h

over 0.5%

not
permissible

125 h

Below -10 C

Interval

Oil-change intervals in operating hours (h)

3.7-4 o f 1 0

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

CI-4

Service Manual

Maintenance
Lubricants and fuels

3.7.3
General recommendations

Coolant for the diesel engine


The cooling system will only function reliably if it is working under pressure. It
is therefore imperative that it is kept clean and watertight, that the radiator
cap valve and working valves are functioning correctly and the necessary
coolant level is maintained.
The corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze authorised by LIEBHERR guarantees
sufficient protection against cold, corrosion and cavitation, do not corrode
seals and hoses and do not foam up.
Coolants which contain inadequate or ill-prepared corrosion inhibitor/
antifreeze could cause a malfunctioning of aggregates or parts in the cooling
circuit as a result of cavitational or corrosive damage. Furthermore, heatinsulating sedimentation can result at heat-exchanging parts, leading to
overheating, and then to malfunctioning, of the engine.
Note
Emulsifiable corrosion inhibition oils may are impermissible.
! In special cases, it is permissible to use corrosion inhibitors.

Water (fresh water)

Suitable water is colourless, clear, free of mechanical contamination,


drinkable tap water featuring the following restricted analysis values.
Sea water, brackish water, salt water and industrial waste water is
not suitable.
Fresh water quality
Description

Value and unit

Total of alkaline earths (water hardness)

0.6 to 3.6 mmol/l (3 to 20d)

pH value at 20 C

6.5 to 8.0

Chloride-ion content

max. 80 mg/l

Sulphate-ion content

max. 100 mg/l

Fresh water quality when using DCA 4


Description

Value and unit

Total of alkaline earths (water hardness)

0.6 to 2.7 mmol/l (3 to 15d)

pH value at 20 C

6.5 to 8.0

Chloride-ion content

max. 80 mg/l

Sulphate-ion content

max. 80 mg/l

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Water analyses can be applied for from the communal authorities responsible.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

All year roundto

Water %

Corrosion inhibitor /
antifreeze %

Outside
temperature

-37

-34

50

50

Outside
temperature

-50

-58

40

60

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.7-5 o f 1 0

Maintenance

Service Manual

Lubricants and fuels

Temperature-dependent selection of mix ratio for corrosion


inhibitor/antifreeze
A = ratio of corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze in the coolant as a percentage
Product designation

Manufacturer

Liebherr Antifreeze
Concentrate

Country

Liebherr

Addinol Antifreeze Super

Addinol Lube Oil GmbH,


Leuna

Agip Antifreeze Plus

Aral AG, BochumEni S.p.A.,


Rome

Agip Langzeit-Frostschutz

Eni S.p.A., Wrzburg

Antigel DB 486

Sotragal SA, St-Priest

Aral Antifreeze Extra

Aral AG, Hamburg

Avia Antifreeze APN G48

Avia Minerall AG, Munich

BP Isocool

BP p.l.c. London

GB

Caltex Extended Life


Coolant

Chevron Texaco

Castrol Antifreeze NF

Castrol, London

GB

Chevron Extended Life


Coolant

Chevron Texaco

DEUTZ Khlerschutzmittel 0101 1490

DEUTZ Service International


GmbH, Cologne

ESA Frostschutz G48

ESA Burgdorf

Fuchs Fricofin
Khlerfrostschutz

Fuchs Petrolub AG,


Mannheim

Glacelf Auto Supra


(antifreeze)

Total, Paris

GlycoShell Longlife

Shell International Petroleum


Company, London

GB

GlycoShell N

Shell International Petroleum


Company, London

GB

Glysantin G48

BASF AG,
Ludwigshafen/Germany

Havoline Extendend Life


Antifreeze / Coolant

Chevron Texaco

Havoline XLC

Arteco

Motorex Antifreeze
Protect G48

Bucher AG, Langenthal

Motul Inugel Optimal Ultra

Motul SA, Aubervilliers Cedex

OMV Khlerfrostschutz /
Coolant Plus

OMV Refining & Marketing


GmbH, Vienna

CH

CH

Do not mix products with one another!


* = global / worldwide

3.7-6 o f 1 0

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Corrosion inhibitor / antifreeze


permitted for diesel engine
cooling syst

Service Manual

Maintenance
Lubricants and fuels

Corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze
premixes (50% water: 50%
corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze)
permitted for diesel engine
cooling systems

Product designation

Manufacturer

Country

Liebherr Antifreeze Mix

Liebherr

Caltex Extended Life Coolant


Pre-Mixed 50/50 (ready-touse version)

Chevron Texaco

Chevron
DEX-COOL
Extended Life Pre-Diluted
50/50 Antifreeze Coolant

Chevron Texaco

Coolelf Auto Supra -37 C

Total, Paris

Havoline XLC, 50/50

Arteco

Havoline
DEX-COOL
Extended Life Pre-Diluted
50/50 Antifreeze
Coolant

Chevron Texaco

Do not mix products with one another!


* = global / worldwide
Corrosion inhibitors
without antifreeze

In exceptional cases and if outside temperatures constantly remain


above freezing, for example in the tropics, where it can be proven that no
approved corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze is available, the following may
be used as coolant:
Product DC4 (Diesel Coolant Additives 4)
Product Caltex / Chevron / Havoline / Total
When carrying out maintenance tasks, the concentration must be tested and
rectified as necessary.
The coolant must be changed once a year.
Note
The entire amount of coolant must be drained.
! When changing from corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze to pure corrosion
inhibitor, or vice versa.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Approved water-soluble
corrosion inhibitors
(concentrates) for diesel engine
cooling systems

Product designation

Manufacturer

Countr
y

DCA 4 Diesel Coolant Additives

Fleetguard / Cummins
Filtration

Caltex XL Corrosion Inhibitor


Concentrate

Chevron Texaco

Chevron Heavy Duty Extended


Life Corrosion Inhibitor Nitrite
Free (ELC)

Chevron Texaco

Havoline Extended Life Corrosion


Inhibitor (XLI)

Chevron Texaco

Total WT Supra

Total, Paris

Do not mix products with one another!


* = global / worldwide

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.7-7 o f 1 0

Maintenance

Service Manual

Lubricants and fuels

3.7.4

Specification

Hydraulic oils

Only engine oils (mineral oils) meeting the following specifications and
regulations are permitted.
Description

Specification

API classification (American


Petroleum Institute)

CF-4, CG-4, CH-4

ACEA classification (Association des


Constructeurs Europens de
E2 , E3 , E4
l'Automobile)
Specifications and regulations for hydraulic oil
Viscosity

The viscosity is selected according to the SAE (Society of Automotive


Engineers) classification.
The decisive factor for the selection of the correct SAE class is the ambient temperature.
The selection of the SAE classification has no bearing on the quality of a
hydraulic oil.
The temperature ranges presented in the diagram are merely guidelines.

Temperature-dependent selection of the SAE-class


For temperatures up to 10 C below the specified limit:
Adjust the diesel engine to roughly half speed after starting.
Activate the hydraulic cylinders and engines and briefly move the cyliners
to their stops.
Warming up takes roughly 10 minutes.
At even lower temperatures:
Before starting the engine, prewarm the oil tank.
Environmentally compatible
hydraulic fluids

When operating LIEBHERR earth moving machines with environmentally


compatible hydraulic fluids, we recommend PANOLIN HLP SYNTH 46 with
the viscosity specified by LIEBHERR.
Converting the hydraulic system to environmentally harmless
hydraulic fluid:
See the section on conversion from mineral oils to environmentally
harmless hydraulic fluids.
Note
Environmentally-compatible hydraulic fluids must be checked every 500
operating hours at regular intervals.
! LIEBHERR recommends that oil analysis is carried out by WEAR-CHECK.

3.7-8 o f 1 0

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Warming up

Service Manual

Maintenance
Lubricants and fuels

Oil change:
At the interval stated in the maintenance and inspection schedule.
At the interval specified by WEAR-CHECK.
Note
Do not mix environmentally-compatible hydraulic fluid from different manufacturers or with mineral oils.
! See also the customer service information.
Monitoring hydraulic oil - changing according to oil samples - analysis
and laboratory report:

Oil change intervals according to sample analysis and laboratory report


1 Service hours
2 First oil sample

3.7.5

Pump distributor gear and axles

3 Second oil sample


4 Further oil samples every 500 operating hours

Lubricating oils for the transmission


Gear oils must comply with the API GL-5 and MIL-L 2105 B, C or D specifications and the viscosity class SAE 90 LS *.
* = Gear oil with limited slip additives for disc brakes and self-locking
differentials.
LS = limited slip additive:
Not required for pump distributor gears
Required for axles
For the viscosity class SAE 90 LS, an oil of the viscosity class SAE 80 W 90
LS can also be used.

Transmission

An ATF oil compliant with the DEXTRON II D specification should be used


as lubrication oil for the transmission.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Factory filling:
ATF 86 AVIA-FLUID DEXRON II D

3.7.6

Description

ID no.

Quantity

ATF 86 AVIA-Fluid DEXRON II D

861012601

210 l

ATF 86 AVIA-Fluid DEXRON II D

10009964

20 l

Grease for general lubrication points


This grease must meet the KP2k specification consistency 2 of the NL
GI class according to DIN 51818 and DIN 51825 or EP 2 according to
NF-T-60 132.
The grease must be made of a lithium complex with a four ball tester (VKA)
value of at least 2300 N according to DIN 51350 or ASTM D 2596.
Application:
Grease for all lubrication points (according to the lubrication schedule)
Lubricant grease for bolt fitting
Lubricant grease for automatic central lubrication systems

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

3.7-9 o f 1 0

Maintenance

Service Manual

Lubricants and fuels

Approved greases

LIEBHERR 9610 special grease is a milling-resistant, ageing-resistant lithium


grease, providing protection against corrosion with excellent lubricity over a
wide temperature range.
Its molecular composition yields high degrees of shearing and milling stability and good flow properties in long pipes.
Description

Lubricant grease for automatic


central lubrication systems

ID no.

Quantity

LH 9610 special grease 861302908

400 g (cartridge)

LH 9610 special grease 861301308

10 kg (drum)

LH 9610 special grease 861304508

25 kg (drum)

Greases with high-pressure additives (EP greases) are recommended.


Only use greases with the same type of saponification.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Note
Greases with solid lubricant particles such as graphite are not suitable.
! Do not use this type of grease.

3.7-10 o f 1 0

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

4 Diesel engine, Splitter box


4.0
Chapter contents
4

Diesel engine, Splitter box................................................... 4.1-1


4.1

Diesel engine ..................................................................................4.1-1


4.1.1

Electrical engine components ..............................................4.1-6

4.1.2

Crankshaft flywheel speed sensors B711/B712................4.1-7

4.1.3

Camshaft speed sensor B713 ...........................................4.1-8

4.1.4

Coolant temperature sensor B708 Fuel temperature


sensor B709 ......................................................................4.1-9

4.1.5

Charge air temperature sensor B707 ..............................4.1-10

4.1.6

Charge air pressure sensor B703 ...................................4.1-11

4.1.7

Oil pressure sensor B701................................................4.1-12

4.2

Fuel system.....................................................................................4.2-1
4.2.1

Fuel level sensor ..................................................................4.2-2

4.2.2

Fuel pre-filter ........................................................................4.2-3

4.2.3

Fuel fine filter ........................................................................4.2-4

4.2.4

Refuelling pump (optional) ...................................................4.2-5

4.3

Air filter system ...............................................................................4.3-1


4.3.1

Air filter .................................................................................4.3-1

4.3.2

Vacuum switch .....................................................................4.3-2


Coupling..........................................................................................4.4-1

4.5

Splitter box ......................................................................................4.5-1

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007

4.4

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

4.1-1 o f 2

Service manual

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007

Diesel engine, Splitter box

4.1-2 o f 2

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service manual

Diesel engine, Splitter box


Diesel engine

4.1

Diesel engine
Technical data
See section 2.1

Design
The diesel engine is a water-cooled, four-stroke in-line engine with pumpline-nozzle (PLD) direct injection, turbocharging and charge air cooling.
The engine is fitted lengthways in the rear section and elastically supported
on rubber elements. The flywheel end faces to the rear.
Valid for:

L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653

Diesel engine components / right view

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

Flywheel housing
Flywheel
Opening for cranking device
Auxiliary drives
Fuel pre-filter
Crankcase bleeder
Bleeder filter with oil separator
Hand pump
Cylinder head
Fuel fine filter
Charge air pipe
Lube oil filler neck
Air intake pipe

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

14 Flame glow plug


15 Engine electronics
(LH-ECU)
16 Air conditioning compressor
17 Alternator
18 Fuel line connections
19 Auxiliary drive
20 Engine block
21 Dipstick
22 Oil separator return line
23 Oil pan
24 Fuel pump

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

4.1-1 o f 1 2

Diesel engine, Splitter box

Service manual

Diesel engine

Diesel engine components / left view


Water pump
Belt drive cover
Thermostat housing
Oil filter
Charge air pipe
Housing bleeder
Turbocharger compressor

8
9
10
11
12
13

Turbocharger turbine
Starter
Oil cooler
Cooling water supply to cooler
Cooling water return from cooler
Crankshaft / vibration damper

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

4.1-2 o f 1 2

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service manual

Diesel engine, Splitter box


Diesel engine

Valid for:

L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 453 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171

Diesel engine components / right view


Flywheel
Flywheel housing
Opening for cranking device
Auxiliary drives
Crankcase bleeder
Bleeder filter with oil separator
Cylinder head
Lube oil filler neck
Combustion air intake manifold
Flame glow plug
Air conditioning compressor
Pump element with magnetic coil

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23

Alternator
Engine electronics (LH-ECU)
Auxiliary drive
Hand pump
Fuel pre-filter
Fuel line connections
Fuel fine filter
Engine bearing
Oil pan
Engine block
Fuel pump

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

4.1-3 o f 1 2

Diesel engine, Splitter box

Service manual

Diesel engine

Diesel engine components / left view


Water pump
Tension pulley apparatus
Oil filter
Air intake pipe
Housing bleeder
Charge air pipe
Turbocharger compressor

8
9
10
11
12
13
14

Turbocharger turbine
Crankcase
Exhaust pipe
Cooling water supply to cooler
Cooling water return from cooler
Thermostat housing
Crankshaft / vibration damper

Design features of the diesel engine:


Water-cooled four-stroke diesel engine with pump-line-nozzle (PLD)
direct injection
Turbocharger and charge air cooling
Maintenance-free gear drive for camshaft, fuel pump, lubricant pump on
flywheel end and coolant pump on motor end, as well as power take-off for
gear pumps
Individual cylinder heads with cast integral vortex intake duct
Replaceable wet bushings
Small number of parts due to lubricant and coolant lines integrated in crankcase
Oil spray-cooled three-ring piston made of light alloy (D934S)
Oil spray-cooled three-ring piston made of monotherm steel (D934L/D936L)
Engine oil cooler
Double lube oil filter
Large, tilt-proof oil pan
5-bearing (4-cylinder) or 7-bearing (6-cylinder) steel crankshaft with forged
counterweights and diagonal cracked piston rods. Lead bronze triple
composite bearings.

4.1-4 o f 1 2

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Service manual

Diesel engine, Splitter box


Diesel engine

Function description
Basic function
The diesel engine converts the chemical energy in the fuel into kinetic
energy, which it provides to the flywheel via the torsion absorber and the
pump distributor gear to the travel hydraulics, working hydraulics and
steering hydraulics pumps.
A small portion of the power is taken off at the accessory drive side of the
diesel engine to drive the gear pumps.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007

These are the single gear pump for the transmission shift pressure, and the
triple gear pump for the hydrostatically driven fan, the accumulator pressure
brake system and the leak oil scavenging in the variable displacement motor.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

4.1-5 o f 1 2

Diesel engine, Splitter box

Service manual

Diesel engine

4.1.1

Electrical engine components


Design

Valid for:

L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653; L566 - 460 / from 14171;
L576 - 453 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171;

Electrical engine components


7 Alternator G700
8 Engine electronics (LH-ECU)
A700
9 Pump element magnetic coil
Y711 Y716
10 Water sensor on fuel pre-filter
B710
11 Oil pressure sensor B701

12 Crankshaft 2 flywheel speed


sensor B712
13 Camshaft speed sensor
B713
14 Crankshaft 1 flywheel speed
sensor B711

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007

1 Heating flange R701


2 Starter M700
3 Coolant temperature indicator +
thermostat B708
4 Charge air pressure sensor B703
5 Charge air temperature sensor B707
6 Air conditioning compressor magnetic
coupling M710

4.1-6 o f 1 2

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service manual

Diesel engine, Splitter box


Diesel engine

4.1.2

Crankshaft flywheel speed sensors B711/B712


For safety reasons, two identical speed sensors are used on the crankshaft.
The two speed sensors, B711 and B712, are attached to the engine flywheel
housing and their job is to record the speed and position of the crankshaft.
The first sensor (B711) is the working sensor; if it fails, the system
automatically switches to the second backup sensor (B712).
The signal voltage, whose frequency is proportional to the speed, is used
for:
Controlling the fan drive
Starting the emergency steering pump check
Controlling the diesel engine
Indicating the engine speed
Power limiting control
Overspeed protection
0-inching control

Design
The speed sensors are Hall-effect sensors. Hall-effect sensors are electromagnetic components with a permanent magnet and a Hall element (Hall IC).
The distance between the sensor and the flywheel ring gear is fixed.
Distance a = 0.5 - 2 mm

Function description
Speed sensor location

Basic function
If a Hall-effect sensor has voltage supplied and is put vertically into a
magnetic field, it provides an output voltage. This signal voltage modulates
proportionally to the speed of the ring gear on the flywheel and is provided to
the engine electronics as a frequency signal.
Attention
Never measure resistance on a Hall-effect sensor.

! Malfunctions are indicated by service codes in display.


Plug assignment

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007

1 Weight
2 Frequency signal (output voltage)
3 12 V power supply

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

4.1-7 o f 1 2

Diesel engine, Splitter box

Service manual

Diesel engine

4.1.3

Camshaft speed sensor B713


The speed sensor B713 is attached to the crankshaft housing of the engine;
its job is to detect the phase of the engine while starting.
If the camshaft sensor fails while the engine is running, the engine
continues turning.
When the engine is turned off and started again, its running is restricted.
The signal voltage, whose frequency is proportional to the speed, is used
for:
Controlling the diesel engine

Design
The speed sensor is a Hall-effect sensors. Hall-effect sensors are electromagnetic components with a permanent magnet and a Hall element (Hall IC).
The distance between the sensor and the flywheel ring gear is fixed.
Distance a = 0.5 - 2 mm

Function description
Speed sensor location

Basic function
If a Hall-effect sensor has voltage supplied and is put vertically into a
magnetic field, it provides an output voltage. This signal voltage modulates
proportionally to the speed of the ring gear on the flywheel and is provided to
the engine electronics as a frequency signal.
Attention
Never measure resistance on a Hall-effect sensor.

! Malfunctions are indicated by service codes in display.


Plug assignment

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007

1 Weight
2 Frequency signal (output voltage)
3 12 V power supply

4.1-8 o f 1 2

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service manual

Diesel engine, Splitter box


Diesel engine

4.1.4

Coolant temperature sensor B708


Fuel temperature sensor B709
The coolant temperature sensor B708 is attached to the thermostat housing of
the engine, while the fuel temperature sensor B709 is fitted in the fuel supply
line. Both have the task of signalling the temperature to the engine control unit
(ECU) in the form of an electrical resistance. The ECU uses this signal for:
Coolant temperature:
Indicating the coolant temperature in the cab
Controlling the fan drive
Preglow control
Engine power limiting control
Coolant temperature [C]
Power reduction [%]

-100

-15

100

101

120

150

10

50

50

Controlling the engine to increase the idling speed


Coolant temperature [C]

-100

-90

-40

-10

20

200

200

100

Idling speed increase [rpm]


Fuel temperature:
Controlling the fan drive
Engine power limiting control
Fuel temperature [C]

-100

-5

75

80

85

100

Power reduction
[%]

10

10

30

Design
The temperature sensor is a resistance thermometer which operates with an
NTC characteristic (semiconductor).

Function description
Basic function
The resistance in the sensor decreases as the temperature rises. The curve is not
a straight line. If the sensor is defective, a temperature of -100 C is assumed.
Coolant resistance characteristic B708

Temperature (C)

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007

Coolant and fuel


temperature sensor

105
100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
50
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
0

12

15

18

21

24

27

30

33

36

39

42

45

48

51

54

57

60

Resistance (kOhm )

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

4.1-9 o f 1 2

Diesel engine, Splitter box

Service manual

Diesel engine

4.1.5

Charge air temperature sensor B707


The charge air temperature sensor B707 is attached to the air intake pipe of
the engine and has the task of signalling the charge air temperature to the
engine control unit (ECU) in the form of an electrical resistance. The ECU
uses this signal for:
Controlling the fan drive
Preglow control
Engine power limiting control
Charge air
temperature [C]
Power reduction [%]

-100

-15

75

80

85

100

10

10

30

Design
The temperature sensor is a resistance thermometer which operates with an
NTC characteristic (semiconductor).

Function description
Basic function
Charge air temperature sensor

The resistance in the sensor decreases as the temperature rises. The curve is not
a straight line. If the sensor is defective, a temperature of 100 C is assumed.

Temperature (C)

Charge air resistance characteristic B707


105
100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
50
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
0

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

55

60

65

70

75

80

85

90

95

100

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007

Resistance (kOhm )

4.1-10 o f 1 2

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service manual

Diesel engine, Splitter box


Diesel engine

4.1.6

Charge air pressure sensor B703


The charge air pressure sensor B703 is attached to the air intake pipe of the
engine and has the task of signalling the charge air pressure to the engine control
unit (ECU) in the form of an electrical voltage. The ECU uses this signal for:
Engine power limiting control
Power reduction (%)

Atmospheric
pressure
(mbar)
Height above sea
level*
(m)

Speed (rpm)
1000

1300

1600

1900

2100

550
4850*

23.1

24.1

24.4

24.4

23.3

620
3950*

19.5

19.6

19.1

19.1

18.0

690
3100*

14.2

14.8

13.9

13.6

12.6

770
2250*

10.0

10.1

8.9

8.4

7.2

840
1550*

0.0

0.0

0.0

Design
The charge air pressure sensor is an absolute pressure sensor with a
membrane and an evaluation circuit. At atmospheric pressure, an absolute
pressure sensor is subject to approximately 1 bar (at sea level 1030 mbar).
1 Electrical connections
2 Evaluation circuit
3 Membrane with sensor element
4 Pressure port
5 Fixing thread

Function description
Basic function
Cross section of speed sensor

The electrical resistance varies on the layers applied to the membrane as


they change shape. This deformation due to the accumulating system
pressure alters the electrical resistance and causes a change in the voltage
of the resistance bridge, which has a 5 V supply.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007

This voltage is in the range of 0 to 70 mV (depending on the pressure) and is


amplified in the evaluation circuit to between 0.5 and 4.5 V.
Attention
Never measure resistance on a pressure sensor.

! Malfunctions are indicated by service codes in display.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

4.1-11 o f 1 2

Diesel engine, Splitter box

Service manual

Diesel engine

4.1.7

Oil pressure sensor B701


The oil pressure sensor B701 is attached to the crankcase of the engine and
has the task of signalling the oil pressure to the engine control unit (ECU) in
the form of an electrical voltage. The ECU uses this signal for:
Indication in the cab
Controlling the engine as a function of the safety curve:
300

1000

1400

1800

2100

Design
The oil pressure sensor is a relative pressure sensor with a membrane and
an evaluation circuit. At atmospheric pressure, a relative pressure sensor is
subject to 0 bar.
1 Electrical connections
2 Evaluation circuit
3 Membrane with sensor element
4 Pressure port
5 Fixing thread

Function description

Cross section of speed sensor

Basic function
The electrical resistance varies on the layers applied to the membrane as
they change shape. This deformation due to the accumulating system
pressure alters the electrical resistance and causes a change in the voltage
of the resistance bridge, which has a 5 V supply.
This voltage is in the range of 0 to 70 mV (depending on the pressure) and is
amplified in the evaluation circuit to between 0.5 and 4.5 V.
Attention
Never measure resistance on a pressure sensor.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007

! Malfunctions are indicated by service codes in display.

4.1-12 o f 1 2

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service manual

Diesel engine, Splitter box


Fuel system

4.2

Fuel system
Technical data
See section 2.1

Design

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007

The fuel tank is located behind the right cab access.

Fuel system
1
2
3
4

Tank cap
Filler strainer
Fuel level sensor
Distributor port

5 Intake line
6 Return line
7 Diesel engine

8 Fuel cooler
9 Drain valve
10 Fuel tank

Function description
The fuel is drawn up by the fuel pump via the intake line and fuel pre-filter (water
and dirt separator) and is delivered to the injection elements via a fine filter.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

4.2-1 o f 6

Diesel engine, Splitter box

Service manual

Fuel system

4.2.1

Fuel level sensor


Design
The fuel level sensor is fitted vertically in the tank.
It is connected via a lead and plugs to the display unit.
The sensor tube contains two electrodes to transmit the fuel level in the tank.

Function description
The fuel level sensor tube 2 contains electrodes 3 which measure the fuel
level using a capacitive resistor.
The electronics in the head of the fuel level sensor 1 transmit a corresponding
voltage signal of 1 V 4 V to input module 1 A16a pin 23.
Input module 1 converts the signal to a digital signal and forwards it via the
master electronics to the fuel level display in the display unit A13.
The fuel level sensor is earthed via input module 1 pin 65.

Fuel level display


The lower the fuel level the higher the voltage and thus the level shown on
the fuel level display.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007

The reserve fuel level is shown by the fuel level symbol field flashing.

4.2-2 o f 6

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service manual

Diesel engine, Splitter box


Fuel system

4.2.2

Fuel pre-filter
The fuel pre-filter protects the engine's fuel system (pump, pump elements,
injection valves, valves and pistons) from dirt and water penetration.

Design
The fuel pre-filter acts as both a water separator and a filter. It is fitted in the
fuel intake line between the engine control unit and the fuel pump.
The intake line is connected via the engine control unit (cooler) to the fuel
tank. The outlet line is connected to the fuel pump.
The water probe in the water collector monitors the condensate in the fuel
pre-filter; if the water level is too high, it generates a service code via the
engine control unit to the display unit.

Fuel pre-filter
1 Hand pump
2 Filter head
3 Filter cartridge

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007

4 Water collector
5 Drain cock
6 Water sensor

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

4.2-3 o f 6

Diesel engine, Splitter box

Service manual

Fuel system

4.2.3

Fuel fine filter


Technical data
See section 2.1

The filter can be serviced without any tools. The filter can be removed and
replaced by hand during a service.

Design
The fuel filter is a fine filter with a water drain valve and is fitted between the
fuel pump and the injection pump.
It has a disposable filter cartridge which must be replaced each time it
is serviced.

Fuel fine filter


1 Filter head

2 Filter cartridge

Function description
The fuel fine filter protects the fuel system from contamination.

The pressure of the fuel pump forces the fuel through the filter membrane.
The filtered fuel then flows through the outlet in the filter head via the fuel
line to the injection pump.
The water in the fuel system is separated by the impregnation of the filter
insert, and then settles in the filter at the bottom.
The filter can be emptied during maintenance by opening the drain valve.

4.2-4 o f 6

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007

The diesel fuel is pumped under pressure from the fuel pump through the
filter intake into the filter insert.

Service manual

Diesel engine, Splitter box


Fuel system

4.2.4

Refuelling pump (optional)


Technical data
See section 2.1

The refuelling pump is mounted on the right of the rear section.


The refuelling pump is only suitable for diesel fuel.
The refuelling system is designed to assist filling the diesel fuel from the
container to the fuel tank.

Design

Main components of the refuelling pump

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007

1 Intake connection
2 Pressure port
3 Supply pump

4 DC motor
5 Electrical connection

Components of the refuelling pump


1
2
3
4

Snap ring
Check valve
Intake housing
Impeller

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

5
6
7
8

Seal
Discharge housing
Feather key
DC motor

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

9 Electrical connection
10 Carbon brush

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

4.2-5 o f 6

Diesel engine, Splitter box

Service manual

Fuel system

Function description
Refuelling system

Refuelling pump
The refuelling pump 5 is a rotary vane pump which draws in fuel via the
intake line 6 and the intake line extension 7 with suction strainer 8, from the
container 9 and pumps it through the discharge line 4 to the fuel tank 3 of
the machine.
The refuelling pump 5 can be switched on and off using the removable key 2.
The refuelling pump 5 is filled with fuel via the discharge line before it is first
used. This means it is self-priming. The diesel fuel also lubricates the
mechanical seals in the pump.
A check valve in the intake port prevents the refuelling pump 5 from running
empty. This means the pump remains self-priming.
The DC motor does not have internal thermal protection; it is designed to run
for a maximum of 15 minutes.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007

The external 20 amp fuse F05 (fitted in the instrument panel) protects the
pump from short-circuits and overload.

4.2-6 o f 6

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service manual

Diesel engine, Splitter box


Air filter system

4.3

Air filter system


Design

Air filter system


1 Rain cap
2 Fixing clips
3 Air filter

4 Vacuum switch
5 Filtered air intake manifold
6 Fixing clips

Function description
The engine takes in fresh air via the rain cap 3 and the air filter 5. The
filtered air is provided to the engine via the turbocharger.

4.3.1

Air filter

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007

Design

Air filter
1 Secondary element
2 Primary element
3 Service cap

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

4 Fixing clips
5 Dust extraction valve
6 Air filter housing

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

4.3-1 o f 2

Diesel engine, Splitter box

Service manual

Air filter system

Function description
Air filter unit
The primary element 2 and the secondary element 1 of the dry air filter
are designed to ensure maximum protection for the engine at very long
service intervals.
The primary element 2 with radial sealing at the filtered air connection in the
filter housing 6 is subject to scheduled and non-scheduled maintenance.
The secondary element 1 acts as a back-up if the primary element 2 is damaged.
The secondary element 1 is not a service filter. It must be replaced if necessary.
The dust extraction valve 5 automatically removes dust from the service cap 3.
The tangential arrangement of the intake port sets the air into fast rotation,
so that large dust particles are thrown by centrifugal force against the
housing and accumulate in the service cap 3 due to the air flow.
At idle speed, the accumulated dust particles in the service cap 3 are carried
outside via the dust extraction valve 5 by the vibrations in the intake air.
The service cap 3 must be fitted so that the dust extraction valve 5 points down.
With the engine running at lower idle speed, you should clearly feel air
pulsating at the dust extraction valve 5.

4.3.2

Vacuum switch
(ID 6906001)

Technical data
See section 2.1

Design

Vacuum switch arrangement


2 Air filter

Function description
The vacuum switch 1 monitors the pressure ratio between the turbocharger
and the air filter 2.
If the filters are dirty (excessive vacuum) it activates the air contamination
symbol field on the display unit.

4.3-2 o f 2

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007

1 Vacuum switch

Service manual

Diesel engine, Splitter box


Coupling

4.4

Coupling
Technical data
See section 2.1

Design
The coupling is an elastic torsion and vibration absorber between the
flywheel on the engine and the splitter box.

Position of the coupling


LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007

1 Torsion absorber

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

2 Flywheel

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

4.4-1 o f 4

Diesel engine, Splitter box

Service manual

Coupling

1
2
3
4

Torsion absorber assembly


Hub
Pressure springs
Disc

5
6
7
8

Disc
Fixing screw
Flywheel housing
Flywheel

The disc 5 is bolted to the flywheel 8 of the engine. The hub 2 is axially guided
by circular discs riveted to the hub. The hub 2 can move radially on the disc 4.
The springs 3 are arranged in a ring and form an elastic connection which
transfers the torque between the disc 5 and the hub 2. The drive shaft of the
splitter box is connected to the hub 2 by a spline shaft gearing.

4.4-2 o f 4

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007

Main components of the torsion absorber

Service manual

Diesel engine, Splitter box


Coupling

Function description
Basic function
The coupling is an elastic connection which also absorbs torque peaks
between the engine and the driven splitter box.
The coupling transmits the engine torque to the splitter box.

Power transmission
The following components transmit the engine torque to the splitter box:
Flywheel 8
Fixing screws 6
Discs 4 and 5
Pressure springs 3
Hub 2

Damping

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007

The springs 3 absorb load fluctuations and torque peaks on the engine
crankshaft. The vibrations of the crankshaft are greatly reduced as torque is
transmitted to the splitter box.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

4.4-3 o f 4

Diesel engine, Splitter box

Service manual

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007

Coupling

4.4-4 o f 4

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service manual

Diesel engine, Splitter box


Splitter box

4.5

Splitter box
Technical data
See section 2.1

Design
The splitter box is a single-stage spur gear transmission attached to the
flywheel housing of the diesel engine.

Location of the splitter box

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007

1 Working hydraulics pump


2 Steering hydraulics pump

3 Travel hydraulics pump


4 Pump distributor gear

Splitter box, rear view


1
2
3
4

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

Housing
Dipstick
Oil filler tube
Pump connection for working and
steering hydraulics

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

5 Pump connection for travel


hydraulics
6 Oil drain valve

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

4.5-1 o f 4

Diesel engine, Splitter box

Service manual

Splitter box

Splitter box, front view


Housing
Dipstick
Oil filler tube
Pump connection for working and
steering hydraulics

5 Oil drain valve


6 Pump connection for travel
hydraulics

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007

1
2
3
4

4.5-2 o f 4

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service manual

Diesel engine, Splitter box


Splitter box

Cross section of the splitter box

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

Housing
Stud screw
Disc
Hex nut
O-ring
Ball bearing
Spur gear for working and
steering pump
Bearing flange
O-ring
Cylindrical roller bearing
Bearing flange
O-ring
Spur gear for travel pump

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

Ball bearing
O-ring
Stud screw
Hex nut
Disc
Ball bearing
Cylindrical roller bearing
Drive shaft
Shaft seal ring
Bearing flange
O-ring
Ball bearing

4.5-3 o f 4

Diesel engine, Splitter box

Service manual

Splitter box

Function description
Power transmission
The splitter box transfers and distributes the engine torque to the hydraulic
pumps for:
Travel hydraulics
Working hydraulics
Steering hydraulics

Input

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007

The splitter box is directly driven by the flywheel of the engine via the
elastic coupling.

4.5-4 o f 4

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

5 Cooling system
5.0
5

Cooling system.................................................................... 5.0-1


Gear pump ......................................................................................5.1-1

5.2

Gear motor......................................................................................5.2-1

5.3

Temperature sensor .......................................................................5.3-1

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007

5.1

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

5.0-1 o f 8

Cooling system

Service manual

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007

Cooling system

5.0-2 o f 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service manual

Cooling system
Cooling system

Design
The cooling system is fitted on the rear section between the diesel engine
and the driver's cab.

Cooler unit components


Air conditioning condenser
Diesel fuel cooler
Hydraulic oil cooler
Gear oil cooler
Water cooler

6 Intercooler
7 Cooler support, cooler unit frame
8 Fan motor with proportional
pressure relief valve
9 Fan blade

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007

1
2
3
4
5

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

5.0-3 o f 8

Cooling system

Service manual

Cooling system

Cooling system components


4
5
6
7
8

Fan motor pressure line


Fan pump intake line
Fan pump
Hydraulic tank
Fan blade

9 Suction and return filter


10 Fan motor leak oil line / variable
displacement motor bearing
lubrication
11 Variable displacement motor 2
12 Cooler unit

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007

1 Gear motor with proportional


pressure relief valve
2 Fan motor in-line filter
3 Fan motor shaft seal leak oil
line relief

5.0-4 o f 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service manual

Cooling system
Cooling system

Function description
Basic function
The fan takes in air from the outside of the cooler units, and blows it over the
cooling fins of the cooler units, through the engine and out again.
The cooler system cools:
The engine coolant
The hydraulic oil
The engine charge air
The air conditioning condenser
The gear oil
The diesel fuel

Hydraulic fan speed control

Hydraulic plan of fan drive


1
2
3
4

Cooler unit
Fan
Gear motor
Proportional pressure relief
valve assembly

5
6
7
8
9

Triple pump
Return strainer
Ventilation and bleeder filter
Suction and return filter
Hydraulic tank

10
11
12
13
14

Bearing lubrication orifice


Variable displacement motor 2
Bearing lubrication orifice
Variable displacement motor 1
Collector pipe with safety valve

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007

The speed of the hydrostatically driven fan depends on the engine


speed (pump flow) and the fluid temperatures or the status of the air
conditioning system.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

5.0-5 o f 8

Cooling system

Service manual

Cooling system

Electric fan speed control

Block diagram of cooling system


1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Engine electronics (LH-ECU)


Input module 1
Main electronics (master)
Output module 1
Cooler unit
Gear motor in-line filter
Fan

8 Proportional pressure relief


valve Y13
9 Gear motor
10 Coolant temperature sensor
(B708)
11 Gear pump

12 Diesel engine
13 Charge air temperature
sensor (B707)
14 Hydraulic oil temperature
sensor (B8)
15 Hydraulic tank

The main electronics (master) A15 process the following parameters:


The values of the hydraulic oil temperature sensor B8
The values of the coolant temperature sensor B708
The values of the charge air temperature sensor B707
The signals are provided by the engine controller (LH-ECU) and input
module 1 of the main electronics (master) A15 via CAN bus.
The main electronics (master) A15 calculate the current for the proportional
pressure relief valve Y13 and generate a signal via output module 1.
When the air conditioning system is on, the main electronics (master) A15
regulate the fan current to the value set using SCULI.
This current controls the proportional pressure relief valve Y13 on the gear
motor and therefore the fan speed.
A high temperature means a low current at the proportional pressure relief
valve Y13.

5.0-6 o f 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007

The fan speed is controlled by:


The charge air temperature sensor B707 in the intake pipe
The coolant temperature sensor B708 in the cooling water circuit
The hydraulic oil temperature sensor B8 in the hydraulic oil circuit
The proportional pressure relief valve Y13 on the gear motor
The status of the air conditioning system
The main electronics (master) A15

Service manual

Cooling system
Cooling system

If the hydraulic oil sensor B8 records overheating, the following functions


are activated:
Above 88 C the current to the proportional pressure relief valve Y13 is
reduced to 0 mA. This turns the fan motor M1 at maximum speed.
Above 90 C the display unit shows service code E A02A, a warning tone
sounds every 10 seconds and the hydraulic oil overheating warning lamp
H23 is activated.
From 90 C to 100 C the current to the control pressure proportional
valve is reduced gradually to 40 % (tractive force reduction).
If the coolant sensor B708 records overheating, the following functions
are activated:
Above 97 C the current to the proportional pressure relief valve Y13 is
reduced to 0 mA. This turns the fan motor M1 at maximum speed. In addition,
the display unit shows service code E A02A, a warning tone sounds every
10 seconds and the coolant overheating symbol field (H13) is activated.
From 100 C to 105 C the current to the control pressure proportional
valve is reduced gradually to 40 % (tractive force reduction).
If the charge air sensor B707 records overheating, the following
functions are activated:
Above 75 C the service code E6001 appears in the display unit, accompanied
by a warning tone. The engine power is reduced in increments.

Diagram of electric current and fan speed

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007

1
2
3
4

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

Fan speed
Current to proportional valve (mA)
Engine speed
Fan speed (rated speed)

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

5 Fan speed with no current to


proportional pressure relief
valve Y13
6 Fan speed at low temperature
(minimum speed)

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

5.0-7 o f 8

Cooling system

Service manual

Cooling system

Tables of system pressure, electric current and fan speed


Valid for:

L550 - 456 / from 14171; L556 - 454 / from 14171;

Fan control
At upper engine speed
Hydraulic oil up to 55 C, coolant up to 88 C
At upper engine speed
Hydraulic oil 55 - 73 C, coolant 88 - 93 C
At upper engine speed
Hydraulic oil 73 - 88 C, coolant 93 - 97 C
Temperature sensor unplugged
At upper engine speed, hydraulic oil above 88 C, coolant
above 97 C, proportional solenoid de-energised.
Also suitable for setting the pressure relief valve

System pressure

Current

Fan speed

30 bar

900 mA

500 rpm

30 - 110 bar

900 - 580 mA

500 - 1650 rpm

110 10 bar

580 mA

1650 rpm

220 10 bar

De-energised

2050 rpm

When the air conditioning system is on and the air conditioning compressor
coupling is on, the current is reduced from 900 mA to 750 mA.
Valid for:

L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 457 / from 14171

Fan control
At upper engine speed
Hydraulic oil up to 55 C, coolant up to 88 C
At upper engine speed
Hydraulic oil 55 - 73 C, coolant 88 - 93 C
At upper engine speed
Hydraulic oil 73 - 88 C, coolant 93 - 97 C
Temperature sensor unplugged
At upper engine speed, hydraulic oil above 88 C, coolant
above 97 C, proportional solenoid de-energised.
Also suitable for setting the pressure relief valve

System pressure

Current

Fan speed

40 bar

850 mA

250 rpm

40 - 175 bar

850 - 360 mA

250 - 1400 rpm

175 10 bar

360 mA

1400 rpm

220 10 bar

De-energised

1600 rpm

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/19.03.2007

When the air conditioning system is on and the air conditioning compressor
coupling is on, the current is reduced from 850 mA to 650 mA.

5.0-8 o f 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service manual

Cooling system
Gear pump

5.1 Gear pump


Technical data
See section 2.1

Design

Gear pump arrangement


1 Fan circuit test connection
2 Cooling system gear pump

3 Brake system gear pump


4 Motor scavenging pump

The gear pumps are fitted on the auxiliary drive of the engine and is driven
by the engine at a specific transmission ratio via a spur gear.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007

The pumps are connected to each other on the shaft via actuator rings. The
pumps are sealed against each other. The intake side of the cooler gear
pump 2 is connected to the hydraulic tank, and the discharge side is
connected to the gear motor on the fan housing.

Gear pump components


1
2
3
4

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

Shaft seal ring


Flange
Seals
Bearing bushings

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

5 Gears
6 Housing
7 Housing cover

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

5.1-1 o f 2

Cooling system

Service manual

Gear pump

Function description
Basic function
The gear pump consists of two intermeshing gears enclosed in a housing.
One of the two gears is driven via the outgoing shaft (driving gear), and the
other driven by the gear teeth (driven gear).
The fluid taken in is injected into the gaps between the teeth and pumped
outside along the housing from the intake port to the pressure port.

Pressure cut-off

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007

The cooling system gear pump pressure cut-off is performed by the pressure
relief valve on the gear motor.

5.1-2 o f 2

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service manual

Cooling system
Gear motor

5.2 Gear motor


Technical data
See section 2.1

The gear motor is fitted to the fan housing. The gear motor drives the fan
blades via a shaft.
The proportional pressure relief valve attached to the gear motor controls the
fan speed.

Design

Gear motor with proportional pressure relief valve

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007

1 Gear motor
2 Fan drive shaft

3 Proportional pressure relief


valve

Gear motor with proportional pressure relief valve


1
2
3
4
5
6

Bearing cover
Seal kit
Bearing bushing
Gears
Bearing bushing
Motor housing

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

7 Seal kit
8 Proportional pressure relief valve
connecting housing
9 Proportional pressure relief valve
10 O-ring

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

11
12
13
14
15

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

O-ring
Shaft
Roller bearing
Shaft seal ring
Bearing cover

5.2-1 o f 4

Cooling system

Service manual

Gear motor

Proportional pressure relief valve


1
2
3
4
5

Pressure relief adjusting screw


Counter nut
Cap
Electromagnet
Electromagnet connection

6
7
8
9

Secondary spring
Housing
Secondary piston
Secondary restrictor

10
11
12
13

Housing
Primary spring
Main piston
Primary restrictor

Function description
Basic function
The gear motor 1 is powered by the current from the gear pump.

Diagram of fan motor


1 Gear motor
2 Proportional pressure relief
valve assembly
3 Proportional pressure relief valve
4 Main piston

5.2-2 o f 4

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

P Pump intake
T1 Return line to variable
displacement motors
(bearing flushing)
T2 Relief seal (return to tank)

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007

The gear motor 1 has a proportional pressure relief valve 3, which controls
the speed of the gear motor and therefore the fan speed.

Service manual

Cooling system
Gear motor

Pressure regulation by the proportional pressure relief


valve

How the proportional pressure relief valve works


When the solenoid 1 is not energised, the proportional pressure relief valve
acts like a pilot-controlled pressure relief valve.
The pressure acting at P passes through the primary restrictor 8 to the
spring chamber of the main piston 7 and acts via the secondary restrictor 5
on the secondary piston 4. The pressure equalisation on the main piston 7
causes the primary spring 6 to close it.
If the pressure on the secondary piston 4 becomes so high that the set force
of the secondary spring 2 is exceeded, the secondary piston 4 opens,
allowing oil to flow into the tank chamber. This gives rise to a difference in
pressure in front of and behind the main piston 7, causing it to open.
If the solenoid 1 is energised, a magnetic force is generated depending on
the current.
The magnetic force acts on the iron core 3, pulling it back according to the
current strength.
This magnetic force reduces the set spring force of the secondary spring 2
accordingly. This causes the proportional valve to open at a lower
system pressure.

Fan speed regulation


The proportional pressure relief valve acts as a bypass on the gear motor.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007

At low temperature the bypass is almost fully open. Most of the pump flow
goes through the bypass valve to the tank. The fan turns at low speed
(minimum speed = dragging speed).
As the temperature rises, the bypass valve closes proportionally. The gear
motor turns the fan faster.

Failsafe function
The failsafe function is as follows: if the power supply to the proportionally
controlled pressure relief valve fails, the bypass closes. The full flow of the
gear pump drives the gear motor. The fan turns at maximum speed.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

5.2-3 o f 4

Cooling system

Service manual

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007

Gear motor

5.2-4 o f 4

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service manual

Cooling system
Temperature sensor

5.3 Temperature sensor


(ID 10043264)

Technical data
See section 2.1

The temperature sensor is used for measuring the temperature of the


hydraulic oil.

Design
The sensor element of the temperature sensor consists of an encapsulated
thin-layer nickel resistor.

Temperature sensor

Function description
Temperature measurement

Temperature/resistance curve
The sensor is a temperature sensor with an NTC characteristic.
This means, the resistance in the sensor rises along with the temperature.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007

The resistance curve of the temperature sensor is almost linear.


For the coolant and charge air temperature sensors, see the section on
the ENGINE.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

5.3-1 o f 2

Cooling system

Service manual

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007

Temperature sensor

5.3-2 o f 2

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

6 Travel Hydraulics
6.0
Chapter contents
6

Travel Hydraulics ................................................................ 6.0-1


6.0.1

Travel hydraulics L550, L556 ............................................6.0-1

6.0.2

Travel hydraulics L566, L576, L580 ..................................6.0-9

6.1

Variable displacement pump ..........................................................6.1-1

6.2

Variable displacement motors ........................................................6.2-1


Variable adjustment motor ...................................................6.2-3

6.2.2

Motor scavenging pump .......................................................6.2-8

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

6.2.1

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

6.0-1 o f 2

Service Manual

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

Travel Hydraulics

6.0-2 o f 2

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Travel Hydraulics
6.0.1
Valid for:

Travel hydraulics L550, L556


L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653

Design

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

Main components of the travel hydraulics


1
2
3
4

Hydraulic tank
Variable displacement pump
Overspeed protection solenoid valve
Collector pipe

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

5 Oil cooler
6 Variable displacement motor 1
7 Variable displacement motor 2

8 Scavenging pump
9 Fan pump
10 Fan motor

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

6.0-1 o f 1 6

Travel Hydraulics

PowerPoint

Service Manual
Function description

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

Basic function

Hydraulic plan of the travel hydraulics

6.0-2 o f 1 6

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

Service Manual

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

Hydraulic tank
Bleeder filter
Return strainer
Bypass valve
Return suction filter
Pre-tension valve
Replenishing valve with strainer
Working hydraulics pump
leak oil
Solenoid valve block return oil
Compact brake pump leak oil
Control block return oil
Shut-off valve
Working hydraulics pump
intake port
Steering pump intake port
Emergency steering pump
intake port
Hydraulic oil temperature sensor
Gear pump fan
Brake system gear pump
Motor scavenging pump
Variable displacement pump
assembly
Axial piston pump
Travel direction valve

Travel Hydraulics

23 Servo cylinder
24 Restrictor 1.8 mm
25 Pressure relief and replenishing
valve A
26 Pressure relief and replenishing
valve B
27 Replenishing pressure relief valve
28 Pressure cut-off
29 Control pressure proportional valve
30 Replenishing pump
31 To working hydraulics pilot control
32 Bypass valve
33 Variable displacement motor 1
assembly
34 Axial piston drive unit
35 Check valves
36 Proportional valve and piston rod
37 Servo piston
40 Variable displacement motor 2
assembly
41 Axial piston drive unit
42 Check valves
43 Proportional valve and piston rod
44 Servo piston
45 Discharge valve

46 Pressure relief valve


with orifice
47 Orifice 4.2 mm
50 Fan motor assembly
51 Main piston
52 Pressure relief and
proportional valve
53 Gear motor
54 Fan blade
55 Oil cooler
56 Bypass valve
57 Collector pipe
58 Return oil from servostat
Test connections:
PST Control pressure / variable
displacement pump
G Replenishing pressure
MA High pressure / forward
travel direction
MB High pressure / reverse
travel direction
M1 Servo pressure / variable
displacement motor 1
M2 Servo pressure / variable
displacement motor 2
P High pressure / fan

The hydrostatic travel drive operates in a closed circuit. The variable


displacement pump 20 pumps oil directly to the variable displacement
motors 33 and 40. The oil returning from the variable displacement motors is
pumped back to the intake side of the variable displacement pump.
1st gear: At low speed or high tractive force, both motors pivot out to a wide
angle. This provides a low output speed and a high torque to the motors. If
the travel speed is increased, both motors pivot inwards.
2nd gear: Motor 33 is uncoupled (not turning) and at an angle of 0. Motor
40 moves to a certain angle depending on the travel speed.
3rd gear: Motor 40 is uncoupled (not turning) and at an angle of 0. Motor
33 moves to a certain angle depending on the travel speed. Maximum travel
speed is achieved at an angle of approximately 15.

Variable displacement pump


LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

The variable displacement pump operates in a closed circuit. It pumps the oil
directly to the variable displacement motors. The oil flowing back from the
motors is fed back to the intake side of the pump.
The main electronics (master) control the pump. Depending on the operating
state of the machine, the control pressure proportional valve 5 is activated by
the main electronics. The proportional valve regulates the control pressure and
therefore the pump flow.
At high load, the pump is adjusted to a lower displacement by the reaction
forces from the high pressure.
The travel direction valve 3 determines the direction in which the
displacement pump operates and thus the travel direction of the machine.
The pressure cut-off 2 limits the maximum operating pressure within the
closed circuit.
The pressure relief valves 4 for forward and reverse travel direction protect
the travel drive from excessive pressure peaks.
L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

6.0-3 o f 1 6

Travel Hydraulics

Service Manual
See the detailed description in the section on the variable displacement pump.
Variable displacement pump regulation
The main electronics (master) control the variable displacement pump.
The following parameters affect the control of the pump:
Gas pedal position
Inching function
Tractive force control
Excess hydraulic oil or coolant temperature
Engine overspeed or excessive road speed

Gas pedal position

When gas pedal is depressed, the current to the control pressure proportional valve is increased and the variable displacement pump pivots out.
The control pressure proportional valve is only energised when the engine
speeds exceeds 930 rpm. The current is then increased to the set value
according to the engine speed.

Inching function

When the inch/brake pedal is depressed, the main electronics (master)


reduce the current to the control pressure proportional valve and hydrostatic
braking takes place.
At excess engine speeds of 2450 rpm and above, the inching function is
gradually reduced, and at 2600 rpm it is completely deactivated. This
prevents engine overspeed when travelling downhill.
If the inching angle sensor fails, the inching function is gradually deactivated
within 20 seconds.

Tractive force adjustment

If tractive force control is activated, the main electronics (master) reduce the
maximum current to the control pressure proportional valve. This restricts the
tractive force to the set level.
The following parameters are required for tractive force control:
The tractive force control button must be switched on
The machine must be moving forward
The machine must be in 1st gear (even with kickdown)
You can use the two buttons to adjust the tractive force as required in a
range of 100% to 70%.

Overheating

If the hydraulic oil (90 - 95 C) or the coolant (90 - 100 C) overheats, the
main electronics (master) reduce the current to the control pressure proportional valve. The current is reduced gradually to 40% of the maximum level.
The control pressure proportional valve is energised normally again when
the temperature falls back below the threshold.

Engine overspeed or excessive


road speed

Above a certain speed in each gear, the main electronics (master) starts
gradually reducing the current to the control pressure proportional valve to
200 mA.
At even higher road speeds or engine or motor overspeed, the overspeed
protection function is activated. The rear axle is braked using replenishing
pressure from the variable displacement pump.

6.0-4 o f 1 6

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

Tractive force control is gradually disabled as the speed increases from 0.3
to 4 km/h.

Service Manual

Travel Hydraulics
Variable displacement motors
The variable displacement motors drive the transmission. A higher or
lower torque is transferred to the transmission, depending on the pivot angle
and pressure.

The flow from the displacement pump reaches the variable displacement
motor via pressure connection A or B. In the process, the regulating pistons
which move along the cylinder of the rotary group are subjected to pressure.
The resulting force turns the drive shaft and generates a certain torque.
The main electronics (master) control the motors. Depending on the
operating state of the machine, the proportional valves 3 on the variable
displacement motors are activated by the main electronics. This adjusts the
pivot angle and displacement to the current operating condition.
The discharge valve 4 in the variable displacement motor 2 is employed in
the closed circuit to avoid heat build-up. In the process, oil is discharged
from the low pressure side of the closed circuit and fed to the hydraulic tank.
The replenishing pump replaces this oil with cooled oil.
Variable displacement motor regulation

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

The main electronics (master) control the variable displacement motors.


The following parameters affect the control of the motors:
Road speed
Gas pedal position
Variable displacement motor power limiting control (excessive
engine suppression)
Inching function
Tempomat
Engine overspeed or excessive road speed

Road speed

The proportional valves on the motors are energised according to the speed.
The lower the current at the proportional valve of the motors, the smaller the
pivot angle and the displacement of the motor.

Gas pedal position

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

The gas pedal governs how the motors pivot to a smaller angle. This
accelerates the machine.

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

6.0-5 o f 1 6

Travel Hydraulics

Service Manual

Variable displacement motor


power limiting control

Power limiting control comes into affect when the engine is excessively
suppressed due to load. This can occur while driving and additionally
operating the working hydraulics or steering.
The main electronics (master) increase the current at the proportional valve
of the motors until the engine speed is back in the normal range. The motors
then pivot out again.

Inching function

When the inch/brake pedal is depressed, the main electronics (master)


increase the current to the motor proportional valve and hydrostatic braking
takes place.

Vmax function

With the Vmax function, the motors move towards a set displacement which
corresponds to the preselected speed at full throttle. This means that the
road speed decreases as the engine speed is reduced.
The function is only activated when travelling forward in first or second
fixed gear.
The current speed when the Vmax button is pressed is stored. The machine
then reaches this speed at full throttle.

Engine overspeed or excessive


road speed

If the engine overrevs when travelling downhill, the motors pivot to a smaller
angle. If the engine speed exceeds a critical level, overspeed protection is
activated. The rear axle is braked.
Overspeed protection is also activated if the variable displacement
motors overrev.

During bearing flushing, fresh, cooled oil is directed to the tapered roller
bearings and into the housing of the variable displacement motors. The hot
oil is pumped out.
The return oil from the fan motor 1 is pumped to the port U of the motors.
The orifice 10 ensures that the oil is distributed evenly to both motors.

6.0-6 o f 1 6

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

Variable displacement motor bearing flushing

Service Manual

Travel Hydraulics
The scavenging pump 2 draws oil from the connection T on both variable
displacement motors. The hot oil flows to the collector pipe 7 and the oil
cooler 6, and through the return suction filter 4 back to the hydraulic tank 5.

Hydraulic tank
The hydraulic tank provides filtered oil for the replenishing pump of the travel
hydraulics. The replenishing pump draws up oil from the hydraulic tank via
the connection 1.
A pre-tension valve in the return suction filter 3 preloads the suction side of
the replenishing pump with a pressure of 0.5 bar. The replenishing pump is
better able to draw up the oil for cold starts. This means that the pressure in
the hydrostatic control circuit increases more quickly and a better drive
performance is achieved.
The oil returning from the travel hydraulics is directed over the oil cooler.
The oil is then pumped back through the connection 2 and the return suction
filter 3 to the hydraulic tank.
The bleeder filter 4 compensates for pressure differences inside the
hydraulic tank by providing appropriate ventilation.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

See the detailed description in the section on the hydraulic tank.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

6.0-7 o f 1 6

Service Manual

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

Travel Hydraulics

6.0-8 o f 1 6

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

Service Manual

Travel Hydraulics
6.0.2
Valid for:

Travel hydraulics L566, L576, L580


L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 457 / from 14171

Design

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

Main components of the travel hydraulics


1
2
3
4

Hydraulic tank
Variable displacement pump
Overspeed protection solenoid valve
Collector pipe

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

5 Oil cooler
6 Variable displacement motor 1
7 Variable displacement motor 2

8 Scavenging pump
9 Fan pump
10 Fan motor

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

6.0-9 o f 1 6

Travel Hydraulics
PowerPoint

Service Manual
Function description

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

Basic function

Hydraulic plan of the travel hydraulics

6.0-10 o f 1 6

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23

Hydraulic tank
Bleeder filter
Return strainer
Bypass valve
Return suction filter
Pre-tension valve
Replenishing valve with strainer
Working hydraulics pump
leak oil
Solenoid valve block return oil
Compact brake pump leak oil
Control block return oil
Shut-off valve
Working hydraulics pump
intake port
Steering pump intake port
Emergency steering pump
intake port
Hydraulic oil temperature sensor
Gear pump fan
Brake system gear pump
Motor scavenging pump
Variable displacement
pump assembly
Axial piston pump
Travel direction valve
Servo cylinder

Travel Hydraulics

24 Restrictor 1.8 mm
25 Pressure relief and replenishing
valve A
26 Pressure relief and replenishing
valve B
27 Replenishing pressure relief
valve
28 Pressure cut-off
29 Control pressure proportional valve
30 Replenishing pump
31 To working hydraulics pilot control
32 Bypass valve
33 Variable displacement motor 1
assembly
34 Axial piston drive unit
35 Check valves
36 Proportional valve and piston rod
37 Servo piston
38 Discharge valve
39 Pressure relief valve with orifice
40 Variable displacement motor 2
assembly
41 Axial piston drive unit
42 Check valves
43 Proportional valve and piston rod
44 Servo piston

45 Discharge valve
46 Pressure relief valve
with orifice
47 Orifice 4.2 mm
50 Fan motor assembly
51 Main piston
52 Pressure relief and
proportional valve
53 Gear motor
54 Fan blade
55 Oil cooler
56 Bypass valve
57 Collector pipe
58 Return oil from servostat
Test connections:
PST Control pressure / variable
displacement pump
G Replenishing pressure
MA High pressure / forward
travel direction
MB High pressure / reverse
travel direction
M1 Servo pressure / variable
displacement motor 1
M2 Servo pressure / variable
displacement motor 2
P High pressure / fan

The hydrostatic travel drive operates in a closed circuit. The variable displacement pump 20 pumps oil directly to the variable displacement motors
33 and 40. The oil returning from the variable displacement motors is
pumped back to the intake side of the variable displacement pump.
1st gear: At low speed or high tractive force, both motors pivot out to a wide
angle. This provides a low output speed and a high torque to the motors. If
the travel speed is increased, both motors pivot inwards.
2nd gear: Motor 33 is uncoupled (not turning) and at an angle of 0. Motor
40 moves to a certain angle depending on the travel speed.
3rd gear: Motor 40 is uncoupled (not turning) and at an angle of 0. Motor
33 moves to a certain angle depending on the travel speed. Maximum travel
speed is achieved at an angle of approximately 15.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

Variable displacement pump


The variable displacement pump operates in a closed circuit. It pumps the oil
directly to the variable displacement motors. The oil flowing back from the
motors is fed back to the intake side of the pump.
The main electronics (master) control the pump. Depending on the operating
state of the machine, the control pressure proportional valve 5 is activated
by the main electronics. The proportional valve regulates the control
pressure and therefore the pump flow.
At high load, the pump is adjusted to a lower displacement by the reaction
forces from the high pressure.
The travel direction valve 3 determines the direction in which the displacement pump operates and thus the travel direction of the machine.
The pressure cut-off 2 limits the maximum operating pressure within the
closed circuit.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

6.0-11 o f 1 6

Travel Hydraulics

Service Manual
The pressure relief valves 4 for forward and reverse travel direction protect
the travel drive from excessive pressure peaks.
See the detailed description in the section on the variable displacement pump.
Variable displacement pump regulation
The main electronics (master) control the variable displacement pump.
The following parameters affect the control of the pump:
Gas pedal position
Inching function
Tractive force control
Excess hydraulic oil or coolant temperature
Engine overspeed or excessive road speed

Gas pedal position

When gas pedal is depressed, the current to the control pressure proportional valve is increased and the variable displacement pump pivots out.
The control pressure proportional valve is only energised when the engine
speeds exceeds 930 rpm. The current is then increased to the set value
according to the engine speed.

Inching function

When the inch/brake pedal is depressed, the main electronics (master)


reduce the current to the control pressure proportional valve and hydrostatic
braking takes place.
At excess engine speeds of 2450 rpm and above, the inching function is
gradually reduced, and at 2600 rpm it is completely deactivated. This
prevents engine overspeed when travelling downhill.
If the inching angle sensor fails, the inching function is gradually deactivated
within 20 seconds.

Tractive force adjustment

If tractive force control is activated, the main electronics (master) reduce the
maximum current to the control pressure proportional valve. This restricts the
tractive force to the set level.
The following parameters are required for tractive force control:
The tractive force control button must be switched on
The machine must be moving forward
The machine must be in 1st gear (even with kickdown)
You can use the two buttons to adjust the tractive force as required in a
range of 100% to 70%.

Overheating

If the hydraulic oil (90 - 95 C) or the coolant (90 - 100 C) overheats, the main
electronics (master) reduce the current to the control pressure proportional
valve. The current is reduced gradually to 40% of the maximum level.
The control pressure proportional valve is energised normally again when
the temperature falls back below the threshold.

Engine overspeed or excessive


road speed

Above a certain speed in each gear, the main electronics (master) starts
gradually reducing the current to the control pressure proportional valve to
200 mA.
At even higher road speeds or engine or motor overspeed, the overspeed
protection function is activated. The rear axle is braked using replenishing
pressure from the variable displacement pump.

6.0-12 o f 1 6

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

Tractive force control is gradually disabled as the speed increases from 0.3
to 4 km/h.

Service Manual

Travel Hydraulics
Variable displacement motors
The variable displacement motors drive the transmission. A higher or lower
torque is transferred to the transmission, depending on the pivot angle
and pressure.

The flow from the displacement pump reaches the variable displacement
motor via pressure connection A or B. In the process, the regulating pistons
which move along the cylinder of the rotary group are subjected to pressure.
The resulting force turns the drive shaft and generates a certain torque.
The main electronics (master) control the motors. Depending on the
operating state of the machine, the proportional valves 3 on the variable
displacement motors are activated by the main electronics. This adjusts the
pivot angle and displacement to the current operating condition.
The discharge valve 4 in the variable displacement motors 1 and 2 is
employed in the closed circuit to avoid heat build-up. In the process, oil is
discharged from the low pressure side of the closed circuit and fed to the
hydraulic tank. The replenishing pump replaces this oil with cooled oil.
Variable displacement motor regulation

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

The main electronics (master) control the variable displacement motors.


The following parameters affect the control of the motors:
Road speed
Gas pedal position
Variable displacement motor power limiting control (excessive engine
suppression)
Inching function
Tempomat
Engine overspeed or excessive road speed

Road speed

The proportional valves on the motors are energised according to the speed.
The lower the current at the proportional valve of the motors, the smaller the
pivot angle and the displacement of the motor.

Gas pedal position

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

The gas pedal governs how the motors pivot to a smaller angle. This
accelerates the machine.

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

6.0-13 o f 1 6

Travel Hydraulics

Service Manual

Variable displacement motor


power limiting control

Power limiting control comes into affect when the engine is excessively
suppressed due to load. This can occur while driving and additionally
operating the working hydraulics or steering.
The main electronics (master) increase the current at the proportional valve
of the motors until the engine speed is back in the normal range. The motors
then pivot out again.

Inching function

When the inch/brake pedal is depressed, the main electronics (master)


increase the current to the motor proportional valve and hydrostatic braking
takes place.

Vmax function

With the Vmax function, the motors move towards a set displacement which
corresponds to the preselected speed at full throttle. This means that the
road speed decreases as the engine speed is reduced.
The function is only activated when travelling forward in first or second
fixed gear.
The current speed when the Vmax button is pressed is stored. The machine
then reaches this speed at full throttle.

Engine overspeed or excessive


road speed

If the engine overrevs when travelling downhill, the motors pivot to a smaller
angle. If the engine speed exceeds a critical level, overspeed protection is
activated. The rear axle is braked.
Overspeed protection is also activated if the variable displacement
motors overrev.

During bearing flushing, fresh, cooled oil is directed to the tapered roller
bearings and into the housing of the variable displacement motors. The hot
oil is pumped out.
The return oil from the fan motor 1 is pumped to the port U of the motors.
The orifice 10 ensures that the oil is distributed evenly to both motors.

6.0-14 o f 1 6

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

Variable displacement motor bearing flushing

Service Manual

Travel Hydraulics
The scavenging pump 2 draws oil from the connection T on both variable
displacement motors. The hot oil flows to the collector pipe 7 and the oil
cooler 6, and through the return suction filter 4 back to the hydraulic tank 5.

Hydraulic tank
The hydraulic tank provides filtered oil for the replenishing pump of the travel
hydraulics. The replenishing pump draws up oil from the hydraulic tank via
the connection 1.
A pre-tension valve in the return suction filter 3 preloads the suction side of
the replenishing pump with a pressure of 0.5 bar. The replenishing pump is
better able to draw up the oil for cold starts. This means that the pressure in
the hydrostatic control circuit increases more quickly and a better drive
performance is achieved.
The oil returning from the travel hydraulics is directed over the oil cooler. The
oil is then pumped back through the connection 2 and the return suction filter
3 to the hydraulic tank.
The bleeder filter 4 compensates for pressure differences inside the
hydraulic tank by providing appropriate ventilation.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

See the detailed description in the section on the hydraulic tank.

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

6.0-15 o f 1 6

Service Manual

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

Travel Hydraulics

6.0-16 o f 1 6

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Travel Hydraulics
Variable displacement pump

6.1 Variable displacement pump


Technical data
See section 2.1

Design

Main components of the variable displacement pump


1 Drive shaft
2 Pump housing
3 Servo cylinder

4 Travel direction valve


5 Connection housing

The variable displacement pump is flange-mounted to the splitter box and is


driven by the diesel engine via this unit.
The variable displacement pump is an axial piston pump with a swash plate
design. The variable displacement pump contains proportional valves for the
control pressure and pressure cut-off, as well as a replenishing pressure
valve, pressure relief and replenishing valve, and a replenishing pump.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

The following diagrams illustrate the design of the variable displacement pump:

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

6.1-1 o f 1 0

Travel Hydraulics

Service Manual

Variable displacement pump

Components of the variable displacement pump, side view


Drive shaft
Shaft seal ring
Snap ring
Pump housing
Servo piston
Travel direction valve
Control pressure proportional valve
Pressure cut-off
Connection housing
Disc
Replenishing pump housing
Coupling hub

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23

Bearing bushing
Internal gear
External gear
Bearing bushing
Bearing bushing
Bushing
Control lens
Snap ring
Pressure spring
Bushing
Cylinder

24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34

Piston
Return ball
Return plate
Glide shoe
Disc springs
Swash plate
Guide pin
Pin
Swash plate bearing
Roller bearing
Snap ring

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

6.1-2 o f 1 0

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Travel Hydraulics
Variable displacement pump

Components of the variable displacement pump, servo cylinder and servo valve view
Servo piston
Pump housing
Spring cup
Pressure spring
Pressure spring
Turcon-Glyd seal
Guide ring
Solenoid

9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Pressure cut-off
Travel direction valve
Control pressure proportional valve
Connection housing
Pressure relief and replenishing valve
Replenishing pressure relief valve
Twist screw
Solenoid

17 Receptacle ring
18 Adjusting screw for the
pump zero position
19 Counter nut
20 Spring cup
21 Snap ring
22 Cover

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

6.1-3 o f 1 0

Travel Hydraulics

Service Manual

Variable displacement pump

Components of the variable displacement pump, front view


4 Restrictor
5 Plug
6 Replenishing pressure
relief valve

7 Pressure relief and


replenishing valve

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

1 Pressure cut-off
2 Connection housing
3 Pressure relief and
replenishing valve

6.1-4 o f 1 0

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Travel Hydraulics
Variable displacement pump

Function description
Basic function

Hydraulic plan of the variable displacement pump


1
2
3
4
5

Variable displacement pump


Servo cylinder
Travel direction valve
Restrictor
Pressure relief and
replenishing valve A
6 Pressure relief and
replenishing valve B

7 Replenishing pressure relief valve


8 Pressure cut-off
9 Control pressure proportional
valve
10 Replenishing pump
11 Suction line from replenishing
pump
12 To working hydraulics pilot control
13 To the oil cooler

The variable displacement pump is designed for hydrostatic drives in a closed


circuit. The pump delivers directly to the variable displacement motors. The oil
flowing back from the motors is fed back to the opposite side of the pump.
The main electronics (master) control the pump. Depending on the operating
state of the machine, the control pressure proportional valve 9 is activated
by the main electronics (master). The proportional valve regulates the
control pressure and therefore the pump flow.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

At high load, the pump is adjusted to a lower displacement by the reaction


forces from the high pressure.
The travel direction valve determines the direction in which the displacement
pump operates and the travel direction of the machine.
The pressure relief and replenishing valves A and B protect the travel drive
from excessive pressure peaks. At the same time, the valves act as
replenishing valves for the closed circuit.
The pressure cut-off limits the maximum operating pressure within the
closed circuit.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

6.1-5 o f 1 0

Travel Hydraulics

Service Manual

Variable displacement pump

Control of the pump


The main electronics (master) control the pump. Depending on the operating
state of the machine, the control pressure proportional valve is activated by
the main electronics. The proportional valve regulates the control pressure
and therefore the pump flow.
The following parameters affect the control of the pump:
Gas pedal position
Inching function
Tractive force control
Excess hydraulic oil or coolant temperature
Engine overspeed or excessive road speed

Control pressure proportional valve


Depending on the operating state of the machine, the control pressure
proportional valve is activated by the main electronics (master). The valve
reduces the pressure in the PST channel in proportion to the magnet
current. It operates largely independently of the PSP control pressure.

In the de-energised state, the PST control pressure duct is connected to the
tank T. The more the current increases, the higher the control pressure. The
maximum level is limited by the replenishing pressure.
Depending on the current to the proportional valve 3, the control piston 2 is
moved closer to or further from the regulating springs 1. This adjusts the
pressure in the PST duct.

Servo piston and swash plate

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

The servo piston 3 turns the swash plate 2 mounted on roller bearings and
thus changes the pump flow rate of the pump.

Servo piston and swash plate

6.1-6 o f 1 0

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Travel Hydraulics
Variable displacement pump

1 Swash plate bearing


2 Swash plate

3 Servo piston
4 Cylinder with piston

As the swivel angle increases, the pump flow is increased. The drive torque
is increased.
When the swivel angle is reduced, the flow rate of the pump is also reduced.
The drive torque is reduced.
When in the zero position, the pump flow is also zero. The strong spring
centring in the servo cylinder keeps the swash plate in the zero position if no
control signals are present. The zero position can be mechanically adjusted.

Sectional view of the servo cylinder


1
2
3
4

Pump housing
Pressure spring
Servo cylinder
Forward travel direction servo
oil supply

5 Reverse travel direction servo


oil supply
6 Pressure spring
7 Zero position adjusting screw

On traversing the zero position, the flow direction of the hydraulic oil is
smoothly reversed.

Travel direction valve


The travel direction valve determines the direction in which the pump
swivels out.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

The travel direction valve directs the control pressure into one of the two
servo chambers in the servo cylinder. The opposite chamber remains
connected to the drain.

Sectional view of the travel direction valve


1
2
3
4

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

Forward travel direction solenoid


Servo oil supply
Reverse travel direction solenoid
Forward travel direction servo
oil supply

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

5 Reverse travel direction servo


oil supply
6 Servo piston

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

6.1-7 o f 1 0

Travel Hydraulics

Service Manual

Variable displacement pump

Replenishing pump
The replenishing pump is an internal gear pump. The replenishing pump
draws up oil from the hydraulic tank. The delivery volume of the pump is
proportional to the drive speed.

Front view of the replenishing pump


1 Internal gear pump

2 Suction side of the


replenishing pump

The replenishing pump supplies the closed circuit with fresh, cooled oil. The
replenishing pump also provides oil for the control circuit (control pressure).
The maximum replenishing pressure is limited by the replenishing pressure
relief valve.

Replenishing pressure relief valve

Cross section of the replenishing pressure relief valve


1 Tank outlet
2 Oil from the replenishing pump
3 Adjusting screw

4 Oil to the pressure relief and


replenishing valve
5 Valve piston

Excess oil that is not fed into the closed circuit flows via the replenishing
pressure relief valve to the pump housing. At the same time, this oil cools
the rotary group of the variable displacement pump.

6.1-8 o f 1 0

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

This directly actuated pressure relief valve protects the replenishing pump
against excess pressure.

Service Manual

Travel Hydraulics
Variable displacement pump

Pressure cut-off
The pressure cut-off valve limits the operating pressure in the closed circuit.
When the maximum operating pressure is reached, the flow of the variable
displacement pump is reduced so that the maximum operating pressure is
just maintained.

Hydraulic diagram of active/inactive pressure cut-off


1 Variable displacement pump
2 Travel direction valve
3 Control pressure proportional
valve

4 Pressure cut-off
5 Nozzle
6 Replenishing pump

Pressure cut-off active: when the maximum operating pressure is reached in


the closed circuit, the pressure cut-off is activated. Control oil flows into the
tank duct.
Sufficient oil from the replenishing pump 6 can no longer flow through the
nozzle 5. Up to the nozzle 5 the replenishing pressure acts; after it, only the
reduced control pressure.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

Pressure cut-off inactive: the control pressure acts in the duct up to the
control pressure proportional valve 3 and the pressure cut-off 4.

Sectional view of the pressure cut-off


1
2
3
4

Pressure spring
Valve piston
Servo oil supply
Control edge

5 Tank outlet
6 Tappet
7 Low pressure / closed circuit

8 Check valve
9 Bore hole
10 High pressure / closed circuit

The operating pressure controls the valve. When the maximum operating
pressure has been reached, the tappet 6 and the valve piston 2 are pushed
against the pressure spring 1. The control pressure channel 3 is linked to the
tank outlet 5, and servo oil drains off. The control pressure drops and the variable displacement pump swivels to a smaller flow rate. The variable displacement
pump then delivers just enough oil to attain the maximum pressure.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

6.1-9 o f 1 0

Travel Hydraulics

Service Manual

Variable displacement pump

Pressure relief and replenishing valve


The pilot-controlled pressure relief and replenishing valves prevent excess
pressure from forming in the closed circuit.
The high pressure from the system acts via the nozzle 6 on the pilot control
piston 2. It the set value is exceeded, the pilot control piston opens. The rear
piston chamber 3 is opened via the relief duct 8 to the low pressure side.
The main piston 4 then opens and the high pressure oil can flow to the low
pressure side 5.

Pressure relief and replenishing valve at high pressure


1
2
3
4

Pressure spring
Pilot control piston
Rear piston chamber
Main piston

5
6
7
8

Low pressure side


Nozzle
High pressure
Relief duct

At the same time, the valves act as replenishing valves for the closed circuit.

Pressure relief and replenishing valve during replenishment


1 Main piston
2 Pressure spring
3 Main piston control edge

6.1-10 o f 1 0

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

4 Replenishing oil intake


5 Closed circuit replenishment

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

Oil leaks in the closed circuit reduce the pressure on the low pressure side.
This opens the main piston and oil from the replenishing pump can flow into
the closed circuit.

Service Manual

Travel Hydraulics
Variable displacement motors

6.2 Variable displacement motors


Function description
Basic function

Variable displacement motor arrangement


1
2

Variable displacement motor 2


Variable displacement motor 1

3
4

Proportional valve
Discharge valve

The variable displacement motors drive the transmission. A higher or


lower torque is transferred to the transmission, depending on the pivot angle
and pressure.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

The main electronics (master) control the motors. Depending on the


operating state of the machine, the proportional valves 3 on the variable
displacement motors are activated by the main electronics. This adjusts the
pivot angle and displacement to the current operating condition.

Regulation of the variable displacement motors during acceleration


1st gear: At low speed, both motors pivot to a 25 angle. The greatest torque
is transferred to the transmission.
If the travel speed is increased, the motors simultaneously pivot inwards.
The shift range is reached at around 6 km/h. Motor 1 moves back towards 0
and motor 2 towards 23. Motor 1 reduces its torque and motor 2 increases
its torque.
L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

6.2-1 o f 8

Travel Hydraulics

Service Manual

Variable displacement motors

Once motor 1 reaches an angle of 0, the coupling 1 opens in a loadfree condition.


2nd gear: In 2nd gear, only variable displacement motor 2 is active. Motor 1
is uncoupled and at an angle of 0.
As the speed is increased, motor 2 gradually reduces its angle. The next
shift range is reached at around 17 km/h.
Motor 1 is coupled again and moves to a wide angle. At the same time,
motor 2 moves to 0. Motor 2 is then uncoupled.
3rd gear: In 3rd gear, only variable displacement motor 1 is active. Initially,
motor 1 is at an angle of 25. In this range, the variable displacement pump
takes control. At speeds higher than 23 km/h, motor 1 moves towards a
smaller angle.

Variable displacement motor bearing flushing

The return oil from the fan motor 1 is pumped to the port U of the motors.
The orifice 10 ensures that the oil is distributed evenly to both motors.
The scavenging pump 2 draws oil from the connection T on both variable
displacement motors. The hot oil flows to the collector pipe 7 and the oil
cooler 6, and through the return suction filter 4 back to the hydraulic tank 5.

6.2-2 o f 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw26/01/2007

During bearing flushing, fresh, cooled oil is directed to the tapered roller
bearings and into the housing of the variable displacement motors. The hot
oil is pumped out.

Service Manual

Travel Hydraulics
Variable displacement motors

6.2.1

Variable adjustment motor


Technical data
See section 2.1

Design

Main components of the variable displacement motor


1 Drive shaft
2 Housing
3 Discharge valve

4 Control unit
5 Regulating unit
6 Proportional valve

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

The variable displacement motor is flange-mounted on the transfer gear.


The inclined axial tapered piston rotary group and the variable displacement
are all integrated in the variable displacement motor.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

6.2-3 o f 8

Travel Hydraulics

Service Manual

Variable displacement motors

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

Drive shaft
Snap ring
Shaft seal ring
U-connection
Motor housing
Piston
Cylinder
Control lens
Q min adjusting screw
Bolt connection
Pressure spring
Pressure relief valve
Discharge valve

6.2-4 o f 8

14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26

Orifice
Valve piston
Socket-head screw
Servo piston seal
Servo piston
Threaded pin
Control pin
Regulating spring 1
Connecting plate
Spring cup
Spring cup
Regulating spring 2
Control bushing

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38

Control piston
Proportional magnet
Regulation adjusting screw
Installation pin
O-ring
Q max adjusting screw
Adjusting washer
Pressure spring
Centre pin
Drive shaft bearing
Check valve
Valve insert

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw26/01/2007

Components of the variable displacement motor

Service Manual

Travel Hydraulics

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

Variable displacement motors

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

6.2-5 o f 8

Travel Hydraulics

Service Manual

Variable displacement motors

Function description
Basic function

Hydraulic plan of the variable displacement motor


1
2
3
4
5
6

Variable adjustment motor


Check valves
Proportional valve
Control piston
Servo piston
Discharge valve

7
8
9
10
11
M1

Orifice
Pressure relief valve
Bearing lubrication oil
Return oil from discharge valve
Housing scavenging connection
Servo pressure test connection

The flow from the displacement pump reaches the variable displacement
motor via pressure connection A or B. In the process, the regulating pistons
which move along the cylinder of the rotary group are subjected to pressure.
The resulting force turns the drive shaft and generates a certain torque. The
torque at the drive shaft depends on the swivel angle and on the operating
pressure in the closed circuit. The speed of the drive shaft depends on the
pump flow and on the swivel angle of the variable displacement motor.
As the swivel angle decreases, the speed increases and the potential
torque is reduced.
As the swivel angle increases, the torque increases and the potential
speed is reduced.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw26/01/2007

The regulation and control unit installed in the connecting housing adjusts
the swivel angle of the motor. The main electronics (master) control the
position of the motor.

6.2-6 o f 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Travel Hydraulics
Variable displacement motors

Electro-proportional control (EP)


Depending on the energisation of the proportional magnet 7, the variable
displacement motor is moved to the required angle.
When the proportional magnet not energized, the motor is held at the 0
angle by the high pressure acting on the small servo piston face 2.
When the proportional magnet is energised, above a certain current the
control piston 6 is pushed up against the regulating springs 5 and 4. Highpressure oil flows via the control piston 6 to the large piston face 1 and the
variable displacement motor moves out to a wider angle.
During regulation, the control piston 3 is pushed down, increasing the
tension in the regulating spring 4. This stops the regulation process if the
current at the proportional magnet is not further increased.
If the current is increased, the force of the two regulating springs is
overcome and the motor continues moving to a wider angle.
The maximum pivot angle is reached at a current of around 600 mA. The
force of the proportional magnet is go great that it overcomes the spring
force even at a wide pivot angle.
The adjusting screw 8 is used for adjusting the regulating springs 5 (basic
setting). Adjust the regulating springs 5 so that the motor is moved to a 25
angle at 600 mA on the proportional magnet.
The main electronics (master) control the speed with which the variable
displacement motor is moved. This means no swivel restrictors are required.

Cooling by the discharge valve


The discharge valve is used in the closed circuit to avoid excessive heat
build-up. In the process, oil is discharged from the low pressure side of the
closed circuit and fed to the hydraulic tank. The replenishing pump replaces
this oil with cooled oil.
When the machine is at rest, the pressure is the same on both faces of the
valve piston 4. The two return springs 5 push the valve piston 4 to the centre
position. No oil is discharged in this position.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

When the machine moves, the pressure in the duct 6 or 7 increases and
moves the valve piston 4 towards one of the return springs 5. The low
pressure side is opened and a defined quantity of oil flows via the orifice 1
and the pressure relief valve 2 to the hydraulic tank.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

6.2-7 o f 8

Travel Hydraulics

Service Manual

Variable displacement motors

6.2.2

Motor scavenging pump


Design

Scavenging pump arrangement


1 Motor scavenging pump

2 Brake system gear pump


3 Cooling system gear pump

The gear pumps are fitted on the auxiliary drive of the engine and is driven
by the engine at a specific transmission ratio via a spur gear.

1
2
3
4

Flight
O-ring
Flange
Seals

5
6
7
8

Bearing bushings
Gears
Housing
Housing cover

Function description
Scavenging from the variable displacement motor housing
The pump actively draws up hot oil from the housing of the variable displacement motors and pumps it through the oil cooler to the hydraulic tank.

6.2-8 o f 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw26/01/2007

Motor scavenging pump components

7 Working hydraulics
7.0
Chapter contents
7

Working hydraulics.............................................................. 7.0-1


7.0.1

Working hydraulics - L550, L556..........................................7.0-1

7.0.2

Working hydraulics - L566, L576, L580................................7.0-7

7.1

Working hydraulics pump ...............................................................7.1-1

7.2

Control block ...................................................................................7.2-1

7.3

Pilot control unit ..............................................................................7.3-1


7.3.1

Pilot control unit ....................................................................7.3-5

7.3.2

Pilot control solenoid valve ...................................................7.3-9

7.3.3

Pilot control hydro accumulator ..........................................7.3-10

7.3.4

Float position pressure switch ............................................7.3-11

7.4

Ride control.....................................................................................7.4-1
7.4.1

Ride control L550, L556 ....................................................7.4-1

7.4.2

Ride control L566, L576, L580 ..........................................7.4-7

7.4.3

Stabilisation module ...........................................................7.4-13

7.4.4

Hydro accumulator unit.......................................................7.4-15

7.4.5

Ride control pressure switch ..............................................7.4-17

7.5

Lift and tilt cylinders ........................................................................7.5-1


7.5.1

Lift cylinder ...........................................................................7.5-1

7.5.2

Tilt cylinder ...........................................................................7.5-3

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

7.6

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

Hydraulic tank .................................................................................7.6-1


7.6.1

Filter unit...............................................................................7.6-3

7.6.2

Bleeder filter .........................................................................7.6-8

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

7.0-1 o f 2

Service Manual

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

Working hydraulics

7.0-2 o f 2

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Working hydraulics
7.0.1
Valid for:

Working hydraulics - L550, L556


L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

Design

Main components of the working hydraulics


1
2
3
4

Lift cylinder
Tilt cylinder
Pilot control unit
Hydraulic tank

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

5 Working hydraulics pump


6 Travel hydraulics variable displacement pump with replenishing pump
7 Pilot control solenoid valve

8
9
10
11
12

Pilot control hydro accumulator


Compact brake valve
Hydro accumulator unit
Stabilisation module
Control block

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

7.0-1 o f 1 2

Working hydraulics

PowerPoint

Service Manual
Function description

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

Basic function

Hydraulic diagram of the working hydraulics

7.0-2 o f 1 2

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

Service Manual

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31

Hydraulic tank
Bleeder filter
Return strainer
Bypass valve
Return suction filter
Pre-tension valve
Replenishing valve with strainer
Travel pump return line
Fan motor leak oil
Compact brake pump leak oil
Return line from oil cooler
Shut-off valve
Emergency steering pump intake port
Replenishing pump
Hydraulic oil temperature sensor
Steering pump intake port
Working hydraulics pump
Axial piston pump
Return cylinder
Restrictor
Servo cylinder
Power regulator
Restrictor
Flow controller
Steering pump return line
Pilot control unit
Tilt-out valve

Working hydraulics

32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59

Bucket return-to-dig solenoid


Tilt-in valve
Lifting valve
Lift kick-out solenoid
Lowering valve
Float position solenoid
Float position pressure switch,
26 bar
Ride control pressure switch,
10 bar
Stabilisation module
Ride control spool valve
Restrictor check valve
Ride control solenoid valve
Safety valve
Hydro accumulator unit
Check valve
Control block assembly
Pre-tension valve
Primary pressure relief valve
LS pressure cut-off
Flow control valve
Tilt cylinder pressure balance
Tilt cylinder spool valve
Lift cylinder pressure balance
Lift cylinder spool valve
Load valve

60 Lifting pressure relief valve


61 Restrictor check valve
62 Float position / ride control solenoid valve
63 Check valve
64 Tilt-in pressure relief valve
65 Tilt-out pressure relief valve
66 Orifice 1 mm
67 Lift cylinder
68 Tilt cylinder
69 Oil from compact brake valve
(housing preheating)
70 Cut-in block
71 Overspeed protection solenoid valve
72 Pilot control solenoid valve
73 Check valve
74 Pilot control hydro accumulator
Test connections:
P Working hydraulics pump
high pressure
M1 Working hydraulics pump servo pressure
LS LS signal pressure
MX Ride control accumulator pressure

The working hydraulics are equipped with the following standard functions:
Working movements for the lift and tilt cylinders
Ride control
Float position
Automatic bucket return-to-dig function
Lift kick-out
The working hydraulics system operates in an open circuit. The working
hydraulics pump 20 draws up oil from the hydraulic tank 1 and pumps it to
the control block 50. The returning oil is pumped through the return suction
filter 5 back to the hydraulic tank 1.
The control block is activated via the hydraulic pilot control unit. The control
block contains the spool valves for the lift and tilt cylinders. The LS system in
the control valve block distributes the flow of the working hydraulics pump to
the consumer units independently of load.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

The ride control system attenuates the bouncing and pitching vibrations of
the machine while it is travelling, thus greatly increasing comfort and safety.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

7.0-3 o f 1 2

Working hydraulics

Service Manual
Hydraulic tank
The hydraulic tank provides filtered oil for the working hydraulics. The
working hydraulics pump draws up oil from the hydraulic tank via the shut-off
connection 1. The returning oil is pumped back through the connection 2 and
the return suction filter 3 to the hydraulic tank.
The bleeder filter 4 compensates for pressure differences inside the hydraulic
tank by providing appropriate ventilation.
See the detailed description in the section on the hydraulic tank.

Working hydraulics pump


The working hydraulics pump draws up oil from the hydraulic tank and pumps
it to the control block.
The flow regulator 2 (load sensing) ensures that the working hydraulics pump
only delivers as much oil from the hydraulic tank as the working hydraulics
currently need.
The power regulator 1 ensures that the maximum current consumption of the
variable displacement pump is never exceeded.
See the detailed description in the section on the working hydraulics pump.

Control block
The control block contains the spool valves for the lift cylinder 3 and the tilt
cylinder 4.
The LS pressure relief valve 7 limits the maximum pressure of the working
hydraulics pump. The primary pressure relief valve 5 additionally limits the
maximum pressure of the working hydraulics pump.
The secondary pressure relief valves 2 protect the hydraulic system against
pressure peaks from the consumer units. The float position/ride control
solenoid valve 6 is activated for the float position and ride control.
See the detailed description in the section on the control block.

The working hydraulics are actuated by a separate control circuit. The spool
valves in the control block 1 are hydraulically actuated by the pilot control unit 2.
The variable displacement pump 5 (replenishing pump) of the travel hydraulics takes the required servo oil and pumps it through the pilot control
solenoid valve 4 to the pilot control unit 2.
See the detailed description in the section on the pilot control unit.

7.0-4 o f 1 2

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

Pilot control unit

Service Manual

Working hydraulics
Ride control

The ride control system attenuates the bouncing and pitching vibrations of
the machine while it is travelling, thus greatly increasing comfort and safety.
The lift cylinders are connected at the base end via the control valve block 3
and the stabilisation module 2 to the hydro accumulators 1. The rod end of
the lift cylinders is connected to the hydraulic tank via the float position/ride
control solenoid valve 4 in the control valve block.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

See the detailed description in the section on ride control.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

7.0-5 o f 1 2

Service Manual

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

Working hydraulics

7.0-6 o f 1 2

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

Service Manual

Working hydraulics
7.0.2
Valid for:

Working hydraulics - L566, L576, L580


L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

Design

Main components of the working hydraulics


1
2
3
4

Lift cylinder
Tilt cylinder
Pilot control unit
Hydraulic tank

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

5 Working hydraulics pump


6 Travel hydraulics variable displacement pump with replenishing pump
7 Pilot control solenoid valve

8
9
10
11
12

Pilot control hydro accumulator


Compact brake valve
Hydro accumulator unit
Stabilisation module
Control block

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

7.0-7 o f 1 2

Working hydraulics
PowerPoint

Service Manual
Function description

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

Basic function

Hydraulic diagram of the working hydraulics

7.0-8 o f 1 2

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31

Hydraulic tank
Bleeder filter
Return strainer
Bypass valve
Return suction filter
Pre-tension valve
Replenishing valve with strainer
Travel pump return line
Fan motor leak oil
Compact brake pump leak oil
Return line from oil cooler
Shut-off valve
Emergency steering pump intake port
Replenishing pump
Hydraulic oil temperature sensor
Steering pump intake port
Working hydraulics pump
Axial piston pump
Return cylinder
Restrictor
Servo cylinder
Power regulator
Restrictor
Flow controller
Steering pump return line
Pilot control unit
Tilt-out valve

Working hydraulics
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59

Bucket return-to-dig solenoid


Tilt-in valve
Lifting valve
Lift kick-out solenoid
Lowering valve
Float position solenoid
Float position pressure switch,
26 bar
Ride control pressure switch,
10 bar
Stabilisation module
Ride control spool valve
Restrictor check valve
Ride control solenoid valve
Safety valve
Hydro accumulator unit
Check valve
Control block assembly
Pre-tension valve
Primary pressure relief valve
LS pressure cut-off
Flow control valve
Tilt cylinder pressure balance
Tilt cylinder spool valve
Lift cylinder pressure balance
Lift cylinder spool valve
Load valve

60 Lifting pressure relief valve


61 Restrictor check valve
62 Float position / ride control solenoid valve
63 Check valve
64 Tilt-in pressure relief valve
65 Tilt-out pressure relief valve
66 Orifice 1 mm
67 Lift cylinder
68 Tilt cylinder
69 Oil from compact brake valve
(housing preheating)
70 Cut-in block
71 Overspeed protection solenoid valve
72 Pilot control solenoid valve
73 Check valve
74 Pilot control hydro accumulator
Test connections:
P Working hydraulics pump
high pressure
M1 Working hydraulics pump servo pressure
LS LS signal pressure
MX Ride control accumulator pressure

The working hydraulics are equipped with the following standard functions:
Working movements for the lift and tilt cylinders
Ride control
Float position
Automatic bucket return-to-dig function
Lift kick-out
The working hydraulics system operates in an open circuit. The working
hydraulics pump 20 draws up oil from the hydraulic tank 1 and pumps it to the
control block 50. The returning oil is pumped through the return suction filter 5
back to the hydraulic tank 1.
The control block is activated via the hydraulic pilot control unit. The control
block contains the spool valves for the lift and tilt cylinders. The LS system in
the control valve block distributes the flow of the working hydraulics pump to
the consumer units independently of load.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

The ride control system attenuates the bouncing and pitching vibrations of
the machine while it is travelling, thus greatly increasing comfort and safety.

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

7.0-9 o f 1 2

Working hydraulics

Service Manual
Hydraulic tank
The hydraulic tank provides filtered oil for the working hydraulics. The
working hydraulics pump draws up oil from the hydraulic tank via the shut-off
connection 1. The returning oil is pumped back through the connection 2 and
the return suction filter 3 to the hydraulic tank.
The bleeder filter 4 compensates for pressure differences inside the hydraulic
tank by providing appropriate ventilation.
See the detailed description in the section on the hydraulic tank.

Working hydraulics pump


The working hydraulics pump draws up oil from the hydraulic tank and pumps
it to the control block.
The flow regulator 2 (load sensing) ensures that the working hydraulics
pump only delivers as much oil from the hydraulic tank as the working
hydraulics currently need.
The power regulator 1 ensures that the maximum current consumption of the
variable displacement pump is never exceeded.
See the detailed description in the section on the working hydraulics pump.

Control block
The control block contains the spool valves for the lift cylinder 3 and the tilt
cylinder 4.
The LS pressure relief valve 7 limits the maximum pressure of the working
hydraulics pump. The primary pressure relief valve 5 additionally limits the
maximum pressure of the working hydraulics pump.
The secondary pressure relief valves 2 protect the hydraulic system against
pressure peaks from the consumer units. The float position/ride control
solenoid valve 6 is activated for the float position and ride control.
See the detailed description in the section on the control block.

The working hydraulics are actuated by a separate control circuit. The spool
valves in the control block 1 are hydraulically actuated by the pilot control unit 2.
The variable displacement pump 5 (replenishing pump) of the travel hydraulics takes the required servo oil and pumps it through the pilot control
solenoid valve 4 to the pilot control unit 2.
See the detailed description in the section on the pilot control unit.

7.0-10 o f 1 2

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

Pilot control unit

Service Manual

Working hydraulics
Ride control

The ride control system attenuates the bouncing and pitching vibrations of
the machine while it is travelling, thus greatly increasing comfort and safety.
The lift cylinders are connected at the base end via the control valve block 3
and the stabilisation module 2 to the hydro accumulators 1. The rod end of
the lift cylinders is connected to the hydraulic tank via the float position/ride
control solenoid valve 4 in the control valve block.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

See the detailed description in the section on ride control.

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

7.0-11 o f 1 2

Service Manual

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

Working hydraulics

7.0-12 o f 1 2

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Working hydraulics
Working hydraulics pump

7.1 Working hydraulics pump


Technical data
See section 2.1

Design

Main components of the working hydraulics pump


1 Drive shaft
2 Pump housing
3 Connection housing

4 Power regulator
5 Flow controller

The working hydraulics pump is flange-mounted to the splitter box and is


driven by the diesel engine via this unit.
The working hydraulics pump is an axial piston pump with a swash plate design.
The rotary group cylinder contains seven pistons in a circular arrangement
which can move back and forward.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

Two power regulator and a flow controller are attached to the pump housing.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

7.1-1 o f 8

Working hydraulics

Service Manual

Working hydraulics pump

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

Drive shaft
Shaft seal ring
Snap ring
Cover
Pump housing
Swash plate
Glide shoe
Piston
Adjusting pin
Q min adjusting screw
Pressure spring
O-ring
Valve housing

7.1-2 o f 8

14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26

Control lever
Restrictor
Piston with roller
Control bushing
Sleeve
Servo piston
Cylindrical roller bearing
Control plate
Restrictor
Connection housing
Pressure spring
Return piston
Return pin

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

O-ring
Cylinder
Q max adjusting screw
Bushing
Return plate
Disc springs
Return ball
Swash plate bearing
Guide pin
Snap ring
Cylindrical roller bearing

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

Components of the working hydraulics pump

Service Manual

Working hydraulics
Working hydraulics pump

Components of the regulator unit


Valve piston
Plug
Valve insert
Adjusting screw
Counter nut
Spring cup
O-ring
Regulating springs
Spring cup

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

LS connection
Valve piston
Regulator housing
Adjusting screw
Counter nut
Spring cup
Regulating spring
Spring cup
Control lever

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26

Pin
Valve piston
Spring cup
Pressure spring
Spring cup
O-ring
Brace
Valve insert

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

7.1-3 o f 8

Working hydraulics

Service Manual

Working hydraulics pump

Function description
Basic function

Hydraulic diagram of the working hydraulics pump


1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Rotary group
Return cylinder
Restrictor
Servo cylinder
Restrictor
Power regulator
Flow controller

8
9
10
11
M1
LS
P

Connection to hydraulic tank


Oil to control valve block
LS signal from control valve block
Intake connection
Servo pressure test connection
LS signal pressure
Working hydraulics pump
high pressure

The working hydraulics pump operates in an open circuit. It draws up oil


directly from the hydraulic tank and pumps it to the control block. The flow of
the of the working hydraulics pump is determined by the angle and speed of
the pump.
The governors fitted to the working hydraulics pump determine the angle of
the pump and therefore the pump flow.

Pump control

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

The swash plate 1 of the working hydraulics pump is moved out by the control
piston 2. The operating pressure constantly acts in the piston chamber 3. This
causes the pump to swivel out.

Working hydraulics pump with control unit

7.1-4 o f 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Working hydraulics
Working hydraulics pump

The swash plate is returned to its initial position by the return piston 5.
Pressure oil is pumped into the piston chamber 4. The return piston is
controlled by the governors fitted on the working hydraulics pump.
The working hydraulics pump flow is controlled by the following governors:
Flow controller
Power regulator
The operating state of the working hydraulics system governs which
governor is currently activated.
If the working hydraulics demand only a small amount of oil or none at all, the
flow regulator restricts the working hydraulics pump to the required amount.
If the set power limit is reached at a certain flow and increasing pressure, the
flow regulator reduces the working hydraulics pump flow.

Flow regulation
The load sensing system ensures that the working hydraulics pump only
delivers as much oil from the hydraulic tank as the working hydraulics
currently need.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

When the working hydraulics are not in use, the oil flow is blocked by the
spool valves in the control block and the working hydraulics pump is reduced
to minimum flow (leak flow). Connection 2 is depressurised. The high
pressure pushes the piston 3 against the pressure springs 1 which
determine the standby pressure in the system. The control piston 3 opens
the high pressure duct 4 to the duct 5 and the return cylinder reduces the
pump to leak flow.

Flow controller when the working hydraulics do not need oil


1 Pressure springs
2 LS connection X
3 Control piston

4 High pressure duct


5 Duct to return cylinder
6 Flow controller

If the working hydraulics need oil, the pressure at the connection 2 increases.
The pressure and force of the springs 1 move the control piston 3 against the
high pressure. The duct 5 opens to the tank connection 7. The open duct
relieves the return cylinder and the pump delivers the required oil quantity.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

7.1-5 o f 8

Working hydraulics

Service Manual

Working hydraulics pump

Flow controller when the working hydraulics need oil


1
2
3
4

Pressure springs
LS connection X
Control piston
High pressure duct

5 Duct to return cylinder


6 Flow controller
7 To the pump housing

Pump pressure limitation


The maximum operating pressure in the system is limited by the LS
pressure cut-off valve 1 in the control block. The LS pressure, which affects
the flow regulator 2, is set to a particular value.

LS pressure cut-off in the control block

The power regulator controls the displacement of the working hydraulics


pump according to the operating pressure, so that a specific drive power is
never exceeded.
The power regulator works on the principle of hyperbolic control. It regulates
the pump exactly along the preset power curve 1 (flow x high pressure).

7.1-6 o f 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

Pump output regulation

Service Manual

Working hydraulics
Working hydraulics pump

Pump output diagram


The operating pressure acts via the ring face 8 of piston on the control lever 11.
This produces a variable levering force depending on the position of the control
cylinder (flow) and acts on the externally adjustable spring 6. If the force on the
lever 11 generated by the operating pressure exceeds the set spring force, the
valve piston 5 is moved. Pressure oil flows through the duct 3 to the return
cylinder and the working hydraulics pump displacement is reduced.

Power regulator in the control phase


LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

1
2
3
4
5
6

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

Power regulator
Pressure spring
Duct to return cylinder
High pressure duct
Valve piston
Regulating spring

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

7
8
9
10
11

Tank connection
Piston ring face
Servo piston
Piston with roller
Control lever

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

7.1-7 o f 8

Working hydraulics

Service Manual

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

Working hydraulics pump

7.1-8 o f 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Working hydraulics
Working hydraulics pump

7.2 Control block


Technical data
See section 2.1

Design

Main components of the control block


1
2
3
4
5
6

Closing element
Lifting pressure relief valve
Tilt-in pressure relief valve
Pressure balances
Main block housing
Primary pressure relief valve

7
8
9
10

Tilt-out pressure relief valve


Tilt cylinder spool valve
Lift cylinder spool valve
Float position / ride control solenoid valve
11 LS pressure cut-off

The control block is mounted in the front section. It consists of the main block
housing 5 and the closing element 1. Additional segments for a 3rd and 4th
control circuit can be installed if needed between the main block housing and
the closing element.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

The control block contains all the pressure cut-off valves and the valves for
the float position and ride control.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

7.2-1 o f 6

Working hydraulics

Service Manual

Working hydraulics pump

Components of the control block


Main block housing
Pre-tension valve
Primary pressure relief valve
Tilt-out replenishing valve
Lowering replenishing valve

6
7
8
9
10

Closing plate
Lift cylinder spool valve
Counter nut
Cap nut
Spool valve stroke adjusting screw

11
12
13
14

Cover
Pressure spring
Spring cup
Tilt cylinder spool valve

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

1
2
3
4
5

Components of the control block

7.2-2 o f 6

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Working hydraulics
Working hydraulics pump

Cross section A-A of control block with spool valves for lift cylinder

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

Cross section B-B of control block with spool valves for tilt cylinder
1
2
3
4
5

Main block housing


Pressure spring
Cover
Restrictor check valve
Spool valve stroke adjusting screw
6 Cap nut

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

7 Counter nut
8 Float position / ride control solenoid valve
9 Control piston
10 Valve insert
11 Main piston
12 Pressure balance

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

13
14
15
16
17
18

Lifting pressure relief valve


Spring cup
Lift cylinder spool valve
Tilt-out pressure relief valve
Tilt-in pressure relief valve
Tilt cylinder spool valve

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

7.2-3 o f 6

Working hydraulics

Service Manual

Working hydraulics pump

Function description
Basic function

Hydraulic plan of the control valve block


Primary pressure relief valve
LS pressure cut-off
Flow control valve
Tilt cylinder load valve
Tilt cylinder pressure balance
Tilt cylinder spool valve
Restrictor check valve
Lift cylinder load valve
Lift cylinder pressure balance
Lift cylinder spool valve
Lifting pressure relief valve
Float position / ride control solenoid valve
13 Replenishing valve

14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Tilt-in pressure relief valve


Tilt-out pressure relief valve
Pre-tension valve
Orifice 1.0 mm
Lift cylinder connection
Housing preheating connection
Tank connection from stabilization module
Hydraulic tank connection
LS connection
Working hydraulics pump connection
Tilt cylinder connection

The control block contains the spool valves for the lift cylinder 10 and the tilt
cylinder 6.
The spool valves are supplied with oil by the pilot control unit. The restrictor
check valves 7 in the control valve block allow sensitive control of the
individual functions.
The LS control and the pressure balances 5 and 9 divide the oil among the
individual consumer units.
The float position or ride control function is activated by the solenoid valve 12.
Secondary pressure relief valves for each function protect the working
attachment, cylinders, hose lines and the control block from overload. At the
same time, the secondary pressure relief valves act as replenishing valves.
The LS pressure cut-off 2 protects the working hydraulics pump from
excess pressure.

7.2-4 o f 6

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Service Manual

Working hydraulics
Working hydraulics pump

Working hydraulics in active state


The spool valves in the control block are hydraulically actuated by the pilot
control unit.

Control block in active state


When the tilt-in function is actuated, oil flows from the pilot control unit to the
connection a1. This pushes the spool valve 2 to the left.
The spool valve 2 opens the pump duct P to the pressure balance 3 via the
control notches 1. If the pump pressure exceeds the pressure at the tilt
cylinder, the pressure balance in the load valve opens and oil flows through
the connection A1 to the tilt cylinder.
The oil returning from the tilt cylinder flows through the connection B1 and
the spool valve to the tank channel T.

Working hydraulics in float position

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

In the float position, the working attachment lies on the ground under its own
weight. The lift arms can move up and down freely to compensate for
uneven ground.

Control block in float position


L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

7.2-5 o f 6

Working hydraulics

Service Manual

Working hydraulics pump

At the maximum deflection of the LH control lever for lowering the lift arms,
there is maximum control pressure at the connection b2. This pushes the
spool valve 1 all the way to the right against the regulating spring 3 and the
limit screw 2.
When the spool valve 1 is in this position, the base end B2 of the lift cylinder
is connected to the tank channel T.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

The float position solenoid valve 4 is also energised. The rod ends of the lift
cylinder A2 is also connected to the tank duct T. The lift arms can now move
up and down freely.

7.2-6 o f 6

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Working hydraulics
Working hydraulics pump

7.3 Pilot control unit


Design

Main components of the pilot control unit


3 Pilot control unit
4 Variable displacement pump with
replenishing pump
5 Overspeed protection solenoid valve

6
7
8
9

Pilot control solenoid valve


Solenoid valve block
Pilot control hydro accumulator
Control block

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

1 Float position pressure switch,


26 bar
2 Ride control pressure switch,
10 bar

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

7.3-1 o f 1 2

Working hydraulics

Service Manual

Working hydraulics pump

Function description
Basic function

Hydraulic plan of the pilot control unit


1
2
3
4

Hydraulic tank
Replenishing pump
Solenoid valve block
Overspeed protection solenoid valve
5 Pilot control solenoid valve
6 Check valve
7 Pilot control hydro accumulator

8 Float position pressure switch,


26 bar
9 Ride control pressure switch,
10 bar
10 Pilot control unit
11 Tilt-in valve
12 Bucket return-to-dig solenoid
13 Tilt-out valve

14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Lifting valve
Lift kick-out solenoid
Lowering valve
Float position solenoid
Control block assembly
Lift cylinder spool valve
Tilt cylinder spool valve
Restrictor valve

The pilot control solenoid valve 5 is installed for the safety of the machine.
The working hydraulics lockout button must be activated to prevent
accidental movements of the working attachment during maintenance, road
travel and when the driver leaves the machine. The operation of the working
hydraulics is disabled.
The pilot control hydro accumulator 7 with check valve 6 on the solenoid
valve block 3 allows the lift arms to be lowered or the bucket to be tilted out,
even when the engine is not running.
The bucket return-to-dig, lift kick-out and float position functions are controlled
via retaining solenoids in the pilot control unit and proximity switches.

7.3-2 o f 1 2

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

The working hydraulics are actuated by a separate control circuit. The spool
valves are hydraulically actuated by the pilot control unit 10. The required
control oil is taken from the replenishing pump 2 of the travel hydraulics. The
replenishing pressure relief valve limits the pilot control pressure to the
specified level.

Service Manual

Working hydraulics
Working hydraulics pump

Pilot control unit


The pilot control unit controls the spool valves in the control block. The
control pressure increases smoothly according to the deflection of the lever.
The pilot control unit contains retaining solenoids for the bucket return-to-dig,
lift kick-out and float position functions. These solenoids hold the control
lever in the maximum position until the solenoid current is switched off.
See the detailed description in the section on the pilot control unit.

Variable displacement pump with replenishing pump


The replenishing pump 1 is part of the variable displacement pump 2 of the
travel hydraulics. The replenishing pump delivers oil for the following components and functions:
Travel hydraulics control circuit
Replenishing oil in the closed circuit
Pilot control of the working hydraulics
Overspeed protection (rear axle braking function)
The maximum pressure of the replenishing pump is limited by the replenishing pressure relief valve.
The design and functions are described in the sections on the travel
hydraulics and the variable displacement pump.

Solenoid valve block


The solenoid valve block 4 contains the pilot control solenoid valve 2 and
the pilot control hydro accumulator 1.
When the machine is started or when the starter switch is in position 1, the
pilot control solenoid valve is activated automatically. Control oil flows to the
pilot control unit and the working hydraulics can be operated.
The hydro accumulator 1 and check valve (starter switch in position 1) allow
the lift arms to be lowered and the working attachment to be tilted out, even
when the engine is not running.
The working hydraulics lockout button deactivates the pilot control solenoid
valve. The P connection in the pilot control unit is relieved towards the
hydraulic tank and the working hydraulics cannot be used.
See the detailed description in the section on the pilot control unit solenoid valve.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

Control block
The control block contains the spool valves for the tilt cylinder 1 and the lift
cylinder 2.
The spool valves for the lift and tilt cylinders are supplied with oil by the pilot
control unit.
The restrictors in the control valve block allow sensitive control of the
individual functions.
The float position/ride control solenoid valve relieves the lift cylinder rod end
to the hydraulic tank when it is activated.
See the detailed description in the section on the control block.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

7.3-3 o f 1 2

Working hydraulics

Service Manual

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

Working hydraulics pump

7.3-4 o f 1 2

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Working hydraulics
Working hydraulics pump

7.3.1

Pilot control unit


Technical data
See section 2.1

Design

Main components of the pilot control device


1 Housing
2 Control valve
3 Electromagnetic locking

4 Control plate
5 Control lever

The pilot control device is fitted in the operating panel to the right of the
driver's seat.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

An additional pilot control unit for special functions (3rd control circuit) can
be fitted on the side of the existing pilot control unit.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

7.3-5 o f 1 2

Working hydraulics

Service Manual

Working hydraulics pump

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

7.3-6 o f 1 2

Pressure spring
Spring sleeve
O-ring
Brass bushing
Sealing ring
O-ring
Plastic bushing
O-ring
Tappet guide
Retaining ring
Electromagnet with sockets
Threaded rod with universal joint
Ring
Tappet with universal joint
Disc
Lock nut
Connector piece
Counter nut
Control lever
Control plate

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39

Shim
Adjusting bushing
Nut
Counter nut
Adjusting screw
Snap ring
Tappet
Guide bushing
Tappet
Retaining plates
Spring cup
Return spring
Regulating spring
Regulating piston
Plug
Bore hole
Housing
Connection 2
Connection 4

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

Components of the pilot control device

Service Manual

Working hydraulics
Working hydraulics pump

Function description
Basic function

Hydraulic plan of the pilot control unit


1
2
3
4

Lowering valve
Lifting valve
Tilt-out valve
Tilt-in valve

5 Float position solenoid


6 Lift kick-out solenoid
7 Bucket return-to-dig solenoid

The pilot control device activates the pistons in the control block hydraulically.
It works on the basis of directly controlled pressure relief valves. When the
control lever is moved, it supplies oil to the appropriate connection.
The pressure regulation of the valves in the pilot control device depends on:
The position of the control lever
The properties of the individual regulating springs
The retaining solenoids allow each function to be electromagnetically locked.
Its magnetic force holds the control lever in its end position.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

Idle state

In the idle state, the control lever is held in the zero position by the return spring
2. The connection 6 is connected via the hole 5 to the tank connection T.

Control valve in idle state / Control valve in active state


Regulating phase

When the control lever is moved, the tappet 7 pushes against the return
spring 8 and the regulating spring 9. The regulating spring 9 pushes down
the regulating piston 10 and closes the connection of the port 12 and the
tank connection T. At the same time, the connection 12 is connected via the
hole 11 to the connection P.
The control phase begins as soon as the force of the regulating spring 9 and
the force of the hydraulic pressure at the connection 12 are equal. The
regulating piston 10 is in equilibrium.
The interaction of the regulating piston 10 and the regulating spring 9 means
that the pressure at the connection 12 is proportional to the stroke of the

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

7.3-7 o f 1 2

Working hydraulics

Service Manual

Working hydraulics pump

tappet 7 and therefore to the position of the control lever. The pressure
regulation which is proportional to the position of the control lever allows the
spool valves in the control block to be moved proportionally to the pressure.

Electromagnetic locking
The following functions have electromagnetic locking:
Lift kick-out
Bucket return-to-dig
Float position
The pressure spring 1 is attached under the tappet 3 and the spring sleeve
2. Just before the end of the stroke of the tappet and the control lever, the
operator must apply additional force to tension the pressure spring 1.
This shows the operator that the control lever is at its end position / maximum deflection.
At the end position (maximum deflection) of the control lever, the ring 5
comes into contact with the anchor magnet 4. When the solenoid is
activated, its magnetic force holds the control lever in its end position.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

Unlocking takes place automatically by switching off the solenoid current


using the proximity switch or by pulling back the control lever.

7.3-8 o f 1 2

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Working hydraulics
Working hydraulics pump

7.3.2

Pilot control solenoid valve


Technical data
See section 2.1

Design

Solenoid valves in the cut-in block


1 Pilot control hydro accumulator
2 Pilot control solenoid valve

3 Overspeed protection solenoid


valve
4 Solenoid valve block assembly

The cut-in block is fitted on left of the rear section beside the engine.

Function description
Basic function
The cut-in block includes the following components in a single housing:
Pilot control solenoid valve (working hydraulics)
Overspeed protection solenoid valve (rear axle braking function)

Pilot control solenoid valve

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

When the engine is running or when the starter switch is in position 1, the
pilot control solenoid valve 5 is activated automatically. Control oil flows to
the pilot control unit 1 and the working hydraulics can be operated.

Hydraulic plan of the solenoid valve block


1
2
3
4

Pilot control unit


Pilot control hydro accumulator
Solenoid valve block assembly
Check valve

5 Pilot control solenoid valve


6 Overspeed protection solenoid
valve
7 Replenishing pump

The on-road travel button deactivates the pilot control solenoid valve 5. The
P connection in the pilot control unit 1 is relieved towards the hydraulic tank
and the working hydraulics cannot be used.
The pilot control hydro accumulator 3 with check valve 4 allows the working
hydraulics to be used even when the engine is not running (starter switch in
position 1). The lift arms can be lowered and the working attachment tilted out.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

7.3-9 o f 1 2

Working hydraulics

Service Manual

Working hydraulics pump

7.3.3

Pilot control hydro accumulator


(ID 7622 448)

Technical data
See section 2.1

Design

Components of the hydro accumulator


1 Plug
2 Membrane

3 Closing head
4 Accumulator

The elastic partition between the fluid and the nitrogen is a membrane 2,
which is stretched in the accumulator 4. The closing head 3 prevents the
membrane from being pressed into the inlet opening when the hydro
accumulator is completely empty.
The plug 1 allows the accumulator to be checked and topped up using the
filling and testing device.

Function description
Basic function

It has the following applications:


To act as an attenuator for pressure peaks, for example for the ride
control system or steering attenuation.
As an energy reserve to supply energy when needed, for example for the
brake system.

Storing pressure for the pilot control


The hydro accumulator 1 allows the working hydraulics to be used even
when the engine is not running (starter switch in position 1). The lift arms
can be lowered and the working attachment tilted out.

7.3-10 o f 1 2

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

The purpose of the hydro accumulator is to store hydraulic energy and


supply it when needed.

Service Manual

Working hydraulics
Working hydraulics pump

7.3.4

Float position pressure switch


(ID 6905 869)

Technical data
See section 2.1

Design

Components of the pressure switch


1 Connection contact
2 Adjusting screw
3 Pressure spring

4 Switch contact
5 Membrane
6 Housing

The float position pressure switch is installed under the pilot control unit in
the control line for lowering the lift arms.

Function description
Basic function
The membrane pressure switches are for switching electric circuits on and off.
The hydraulic pressure acts via a membrane on an adjustable spring. When a
set value is reached, the electric contact opens and the circuit is interrupted.
This type of membrane pressure switch is known as normally open.

Activating the float position function


LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

The float position pressure switch activates the float position function.

Layout of pressure switches and solenoid valve


1 Float position / ride control solenoid valve
2 Float position pressure switch

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

3 Ride control pressure switch


4 Float position retaining solenoid

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

7.3-11 o f 1 2

Working hydraulics

Service Manual

Working hydraulics pump

When the float position pressure switch 2 reaches a set pilot control
pressure, its electrical contact closes. If the float position/ride control button
is switched on, the float position/ride control solenoid valve 1 (on the control
valve block) and the float position retaining solenoid 4 (in the pilot control
unit) are activated.
When float position retaining solenoid 4 is activated, its magnetic force holds
the control lever in its end position.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

The float position/ride control solenoid valve 1 (on the control valve block)
relieves the lift cylinder rod end to the hydraulic tank. The working attachment
lies on the ground under its own weight.

7.3-12 o f 1 2

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Working hydraulics
Ride control

7.4 Ride control


7.4.1
Valid for:

Ride control L550, L556


L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653

Design

Main components of the ride control system


1 Lift cylinder
2 Control block

3 Float position / ride control solenoid valve

4 Stabilisation module
5 Hydro accumulator

The stabilisation module 4, hydro accumulator 5 and control valve block 2


are installed in the front section.

Function description

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

Basic function
The wheel loader is an unsprung earth-moving machine and therefore tends
towards bouncing and pitching vibrations. These vibrations are uncomfortable
for the driver, reduce drive performance and machine safety.
The ride control system is a hydropneumatic spring support between the lift
arms and the chassis. It reduces bouncing and pitching vibrations.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

7.4-1 o f 1 8

Working hydraulics

Service Manual

Ride control

Hydraulic diagram of the ride control system


Stabilisation module
Ride control spool valve
Restrictor check valve
Ride control solenoid valve
Safety valve
Hydro accumulator unit
Check valve
Pilot control unit

14 Lowering valve
15 Lifting valve
16 Float position pressure switch,
26 bar
17 Ride control pressure switch,
10 bar
18 Lift cylinder

19 Control block assembly


20 Lift cylinder spool valve
21 Float position / ride control solenoid valve
22 Lifting pressure relief valve
23 Replenishing valve
24 Tilt cylinder spool valve

When ride control is activated, the lift cylinders 15 are connected at the base
end to the hydro accumulators 6. The hydro accumulators are filled with
nitrogen and absorb pressure peaks at the base end of the lift cylinders.
The lift cylinders are connected at the rod end to the hydraulic tank. This
allows the lift arms to move up freely.

7.4-2 o f 1 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

Service Manual

Working hydraulics
Ride control

Stabilisation module
The stabilisation module protects the hydro accumulator from overload.
If the pressure is too high, the stabilisation module stops the oil flow to the
hydro accumulators.
The solenoid valve 7 is for activating and deactivating ride control.
The safety valve 2 opens if the pressure to the tank connection is too high.
This protects the hydro accumulator from overload.
See the detailed description in the section on the stabilisation module.

Hydro accumulator unit


The stabilisation module protects the hydro accumulator 1 from overload.
If the pressure is too high, the stabilisation module stops the oil flow to the
hydro accumulators.
The hydro accumulators absorb bouncing and pitching vibrations.
The vibration damping effect is achieved using a nitrogen filling in the
hydro accumulators.
See the detailed description in the section on the hydro accumulator unit.

Control valve block


The control block contains the spool valves for the lift cylinder 2 and the tilt
cylinder 1.
The lift cylinder base end is connected to the control valve block and the
stabilisation module.
The float position/ride control solenoid valve 3 connects the lift cylinder rod
end to the hydraulic tank when it is activated.
See the detailed description in the section on the control block.

Ride control pressure switch


The ride control pressure switch 1 prevents ride control from being activated
at the same time as the float position or lift arm lowering function.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

When the float position or lift arm lowering function is not activated, the
contact in the ride control pressure switch 1 is closed. This means that ride
control can be activated.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

7.4-3 o f 1 8

Working hydraulics

Service Manual

Ride control

Ride control deactivated


When ride control is deactivated, the spool valve 2 is in the second position.
Oil can flow through the check valve from the spool valve 2 to hydro
accumulators 6. This means the hydro accumulators already have the load
pressure of the working attachment.
If the pressure is too high, the spool valve 2 blocks the connection to the hydro
accumulators. This pushes the spool valve to the left into the closed position.
The connection between the lift cylinder rod end and the hydraulic tank is
interrupted. The pressure generated at the lift cylinder rod end prevents the
working attachment from vibrating. This makes it easier to pick up material.

Hydraulic diagram with ride control deactivated


4
5
6
7

Ride control solenoid valve


Safety valve
Hydro accumulator unit
Check valve

8 Lift cylinder
9 Float position / ride control solenoid valve
10 Lift cylinder spool valve

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

1 Stabilisation module
2 Ride control spool valve
3 Restrictor check valve

7.4-4 o f 1 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

Service Manual

Working hydraulics
Ride control

Ride control activated


Ride control can only be activated when:
The ride control button is activated
The travel speed is above 9.1 km/h (adjustable)
The contact on the ride control pressure switch is closed
When ride control is activated, the float position/ride control solenoid valve 9
and the ride control solenoid valve 4 are energised.
The float position/ride control solenoid valve 9 opens the lift cylinder rod end
to the hydraulic tank.
The ride control solenoid valve 4 directs the pressure of the hydro accumulator
to the left side of the spool valve 2. This pushes the spool valve 2 right, fully
opening the connection to the hydro accumulators.
The safety valve 5 is installed to relieve the pressure. If there are excess
pressure peaks, the safety valve opens to the hydraulic tank.
If the speed falls below 9.1 km/h the two solenoid valves are switched off
again. The lift arms can no longer vibrate.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

The activation speed of 9.1 km/h can be adjusted using the SCULI software.

Hydraulic diagram with ride control activated


1 Stabilisation module
2 Ride control spool valve
3 Restrictor check valve

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

4
5
6
7

Ride control solenoid valve


Safety valve
Hydro accumulator unit
Check valve

8 Lift cylinder
9 Float position / ride control solenoid valve
10 Lift cylinder spool valve

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

7.4-5 o f 1 8

Working hydraulics

Service Manual

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

Ride control

7.4-6 o f 1 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

Service Manual

Working hydraulics
Ride control

7.4.2
Valid for:

Ride control L566, L576, L580


L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171

Design

Main components of the ride control system


1 Lift cylinder
2 Control block

3 Float position / ride control solenoid valve

4 Stabilisation module
5 Hydro accumulator

The stabilisation module 4, hydro accumulator 5 and control valve block 2


are installed in the front section.

Function description
Basic function
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

The wheel loader is an unsprung earth-moving machine and therefore tends


towards bouncing and pitching vibrations. These vibrations are uncomfortable
for the driver, reduce drive performance and machine safety.
The ride control system is a hydropneumatic spring support between the lift
arms and the chassis. It reduces bouncing and pitching vibrations.

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

7.4-7 o f 1 8

Working hydraulics

Service Manual

Ride control

Hydraulic diagram of the ride control system


Stabilisation module
Ride control spool valve
Restrictor check valve
Ride control solenoid valve
Safety valve
Hydro accumulator unit
Check valve
Pilot control unit

9 Lowering valve
10 Lifting valve
11 Float position pressure switch,
26 bar
12 Ride control pressure switch,
10 bar
13 Lift cylinder

20 Control block assembly


21 Lift cylinder spool valve
22 Float position / ride control solenoid valve
23 Lifting pressure relief valve
24 Replenishing valve
25 Tilt cylinder spool valve

When ride control is activated, the lift cylinders 15 are connected at the base
end to the hydro accumulators 6. The hydro accumulators are filled with
nitrogen and absorb pressure peaks at the base end of the lift cylinders.
The lift cylinders are connected at the rod end to the hydraulic tank. This
allows the lift arms to move up freely.

7.4-8 o f 1 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Service Manual

Working hydraulics
Ride control

Stabilisation module
The stabilisation module protects the hydro accumulator from overload.
If the pressure is too high, the stabilisation module stops the oil flow to the
hydro accumulators.
The solenoid valve 7 is for activating and deactivating ride control.
The safety valve 2 opens if the pressure to the tank connection is too high.
This protects the hydro accumulator from overload.
See the detailed description in the section on the stabilisation module.

Hydro accumulator unit


The stabilisation module protects the hydro accumulator 1 from overload.
If the pressure is too high, the stabilisation module stops the oil flow to the
hydro accumulators.
The hydro accumulators absorb bouncing and pitching vibrations.
The vibration damping effect is achieved using a nitrogen filling in the
hydro accumulators.
See the detailed description in the section on the hydro accumulator unit.

Control valve block


The control block contains the spool valves for the lift cylinder 2 and the tilt
cylinder 1.
The lift cylinder base end is connected to the control valve block and the
stabilisation module.
The float position/ride control solenoid valve 3 connects the lift cylinder rod
end to the hydraulic tank when it is activated.
See the detailed description in the section on the control block.

Ride control pressure switch


The ride control pressure switch 1 prevents ride control from being activated
at the same time as the float position or lift arm lowering function.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

When the float position or lift arm lowering function is not activated, the
contact in the ride control pressure switch 1 is closed. This means that ride
control can be activated.

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

7.4-9 o f 1 8

Working hydraulics

Service Manual

Ride control

Ride control deactivated


When ride control is deactivated, the spool valve 2 is in the second position.
Oil can flow through the check valve from the spool valve 2 to hydro
accumulators 6. This means the hydro accumulators already have the load
pressure of the working attachment.
If the pressure is too high, the spool valve 2 blocks the connection to the hydro
accumulators. This pushes the spool valve to the left into the closed position.
The connection between the lift cylinder rod end and the hydraulic tank is
interrupted. The pressure generated at the lift cylinder rod end prevents the
working attachment from vibrating. This makes it easier to pick up material.

Hydraulic diagram with ride control deactivated


4
5
6
7

Ride control solenoid valve


Safety valve
Hydro accumulator unit
Check valve

8 Lift cylinder
9 Float position / ride control solenoid valve
10 Lift cylinder spool valve

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

1 Stabilisation module
2 Ride control spool valve
3 Restrictor check valve

7.4-10 o f 1 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Working hydraulics
Ride control

Ride control activated


Ride control can only be activated when:
The ride control button is activated
At a travel speed above 9.1 km/h (adjustable)
The contact on the ride control pressure switch is closed
When ride control is activated, the float position/ride control solenoid valve 9
and the ride control solenoid valve 4 are energised.
The float position/ride control solenoid valve 9 opens the lift cylinder rod end
to the hydraulic tank.
The ride control solenoid valve 4 directs the pressure of the hydro accumulator to the left side of the spool valve 2. This pushes the spool valve 2 right,
fully opening the connection to the hydro accumulators.
The safety valve 5 is installed to relieve the pressure. If there are excess
pressure peaks, the safety valve opens to the hydraulic tank.
If the speed falls below 9.1 km/h the two solenoid valves are switched off
again. The lift arms can no longer vibrate.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

The activation speed of 9.1 km/h can be adjusted using the SCULI software.

Hydraulic diagram with ride control activated


1
2
3
4

Stabilisation module
Ride control spool valve
Restrictor check valve
Ride control solenoid valve

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

5
6
7
8

Safety valve
Hydro accumulator unit
Check valve
Lift cylinder

9 Float position / ride control solenoid valve


10 Lift cylinder spool valve

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

7.4-11 o f 1 8

Working hydraulics

Service Manual

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

Ride control

7.4-12 o f 1 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Working hydraulics
Ride control

7.4.3

Stabilisation module
Technical data
See section 2.1

Design

Main components of the stabilisation module


1
2
3
4

Housing
Safety valve
Ride control piston
Lift cylinder connection

5 Hydro accumulator connection


6 Tank connection
7 Ride control solenoid valve

The stabilisation module is mounted under the steering cylinder in the


front section.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

It consists of the housing 1, which contains the safety valve 2 and the ride
control piston 3. The ride control solenoid valve 7 is for activating and deactivating ride control.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

7.4-13 o f 1 8

Working hydraulics

Service Manual

Ride control

Components of the stabilisation module


1
2
3
4
5

Plug
Socket-head screw
Spacer bushing
Spring cup
Regulating spring

6
7
8
9

Regulating spring
Ride control spool valve
Regulating piston
Ride control solenoid valve

10
11
12
13

Outer restrictor screw


Restrictor check valve
Inner restrictor screw
Housing

Function description
Basic function

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

The stabilisation module protects the hydro accumulator from excessive


pressure peaks.

Hydraulic diagram of the stabilisation module

7.4-14 o f 1 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Working hydraulics
Ride control

7.4.4

Hydro accumulator unit


Technical data
See section 2.1

Design

Components of the hydro accumulator unit


1 Housing
2 Stabilisation module connection

3 Hydro accumulator

The hydro accumulator unit is mounted in the front section. The hydro
accumulators are mounted on the housing.
The housing is connected to the stabilisation module.

L550, L556
L566, L576, L580
Hydro accumulator unit

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

Function description
Function
The hydro accumulator unit is connected via the stabilisation module to the
base end of the lift cylinders. If the maximum pressure is reached, the
stabilisation module stops the oil flow to the hydro accumulators. This
protects the hydro accumulator from overload.
The hydro accumulators absorb bouncing and pitching vibrations. The vibration
damping effect is achieved using a nitrogen filling in the hydro accumulators.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

7.4-15 o f 1 8

Working hydraulics

Service Manual

Ride control

Oil filling on the nitrogen side of the hydro accumulator

Cross section of the hydro accumulator


1 Plug
2 Nitrogen filling
3 Oil filling

4 Membrane
5 Closing head
6 Accumulator

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

The hydro accumulators have a small amount of oil in them to protect the
membrane on the nitrogen side. When sudden pressure peaks occur, such
as when driving over rough ground, the oil prevents the membrane from
hitting the inside of the accumulator too hard.

7.4-16 o f 1 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Working hydraulics
Ride control

7.4.5

Ride control pressure switch


(ID 6905 893)

Technical data
See section 2.1

Design

Components of the pressure switch


1 Connection contact
2 Adjusting screw
3 Pressure spring

4 Switch contact
5 Membrane
6 Housing

The ride control pressure switch is installed under the pilot control unit in the
control line for lowering the lift arms.

Function description
Basic function
The membrane pressure switches are for switching electric circuits on and off.
The hydraulic pressure acts via a membrane on an adjustable spring. When a
set value is reached, the electric contact opens and the circuit is interrupted.
This type of membrane pressure switch is known as "normally closed".

Deactivating the ride control function


The ride control pressure switch prevents ride control from being activated at
the same time as the float position or lift arm lowering function.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

When the float position or lift arm lowering function is not activated, the
contact in the ride control pressure switch is closed. This means that ride
control can be activated.
When the float position or lift arm lowering function is activated, the pressure
on the ride control pressure switch increases and the electrical contact in the
switch opens. This prevents ride control from being activated at the same time.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

7.4-17 o f 1 8

Working hydraulics

Service Manual

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

Ride control

7.4-18 o f 1 8

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Working hydraulics
Lift and tilt cylinders

7.5 Lift and tilt cylinders


7.5.1

Lift cylinder
Technical data
See section 2.1

Design

Main components of the lift cylinder


1 Rod-end cylinder bearing
2 Piston rod bearing
3 Cylinder tube

4 Piston rod
5 Piston
6 Base-end cylinder bearing

7 Hex screw

The cylinder base is welded to the cylinder tube 3.


The rod-end cylinder bearing 1 is forked.
The base-end cylinder bearing 6 is a lug with a bearing bushing.
The piston rod bearing 2 is pushed on and screwed to the cylinder tube 3.
The piston 5 and the piston rod bearing 2 are fitted with Glyd Seal, Rimseal
and Stepseal sealing rings.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

The O rings are equipped with support rings.

Function description
Extension and retraction
The hydraulic cylinder is a double-action cylinder with a piston at one end.
The maximum forces in the cylinder depend on the maximum operating
pressure and the active surfaces.
When extending, the piston face is active; when retracting, the smaller ring
face is active.
This means the force when extending is greater than when retracting.
The piston speed is inversely proportional to the force. It is faster when
retracting than extending.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

7.5-1 o f 4

Working hydraulics

Service Manual

Lift and tilt cylinders

Piston rod guide


The piston rod is guided by the guide rings on the piston and in the piston
rod bearing.

Sealing
The scraper ring in the piston rod bearing prevents dirt from penetrating the
piston rod.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

The O-rings and the Glyd Seal, Rimseal and Stepseal sealing rings seal the
pressure chambers inside and out.

7.5-2 o f 4

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Working hydraulics
Lift and tilt cylinders

7.5.2

Tilt cylinder
Technical data
See section 2.1

Design

Main components of the tilt cylinder


1 Rod-end cylinder bearing
2 Piston rod bearing
3 Cylinder tube

4 Piston rod
5 Piston
6 Base-end cylinder bearing

7 Hex screw

The cylinder base is welded to the cylinder tube 3.


The rod-end cylinder bearing 1 and the base-end cylinder bearing 6 form a
lug with a bearing bushing.
The piston rod bearing 2 is pushed on and screwed to the cylinder tube 3.
The piston 5 and the piston rod bearing 2 are fitted with Glyd Seal, Rimseal
and Stepseal sealing rings.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

The O rings are equipped with support rings.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

7.5-3 o f 4

Working hydraulics

Service Manual

Lift and tilt cylinders

Function description
Extension and retraction
The hydraulic cylinder is a double-action cylinder with a piston at one end.
The maximum forces in the cylinder depend on the maximum operating
pressure and the active surfaces.
When extending, the piston face is active; when retracting, the smaller ring
face is active.
This means the force when extending is greater than when retracting.
The piston speed is inversely proportional to the force. It is faster when
retracting than extending.

Piston rod guide


The piston rod is guided by the guide rings on the piston and in the piston
rod bearing.

Sealing
The scraper ring in the piston rod bearing prevents dirt from penetrating the
piston rod.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

The O-rings and the Glyd Seal, Rimseal and Stepseal sealing rings seal the
pressure chambers inside and out.

7.5-4 o f 4

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Working hydraulics
Hydraulic tank

7.6 Hydraulic tank


Design

Main components of the hydraulic tank


1 Shut-off valve
2 Working hydraulics pump intake port
3 Emergency steering pump intake port
4 Steering pump intake port
5 Suction line from replenishing pump

6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Steel container
Gear pump intake connection
Oil level sight glass
Return and suction filter
Return strainer
Bleeder filter
Fixing panels for air filter and exhaust system

The hydraulic tank is fitted on the rear section. The fittings for fastening the
exhaust and air filter are on the steel part of the hydraulic tank.

Function description
Basic function
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

The hydraulic tank contains the oil required by the hydraulic system. It
supplies oil to the travel hydraulics, working hydraulics, brake system and
steering system.
When the machine moves, a plate inside the hydraulic tank calms the
hydraulic oil. This moderating plate divides the hydraulic tank into a return
chamber and an intake chamber.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

7.6-1 o f 1 0

Working hydraulics

Service Manual

Hydraulic tank

Filter unit
The filter unit consists of the following components:
1 Return suction filter
2 Return strainer
3 Bleeder filter
4 Suction line from replenishing pump
The return suction filter 1 filters the oil flowing back from the working and
travel hydraulics. The oil flows from the inside outwards through the filter.
At the same time the filter acts as a suction filter for the replenishing pump of
the hydrostatic travel drive. The replenishing pump draws up the filtered oil
via the connection 4.
To prevent excessive changes of pressure inside the hydraulic tank, air must
be exchanged with the atmosphere outside. The bleeder filter 2 provides the
connection to the outside.
To prevent contamination, the air taken in from outside passes through a
fine filter. A valve with a spring provides a slight pressure inside the
hydraulic tank.
The return strainer 3 filters some of the oil returning from the entire hydraulic
system. The filtered oil then flows back to the hydraulic tank.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

See the detailed description in the section on the filter unit and bleeder filter.

7.6-2 o f 1 0

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Working hydraulics
Hydraulic tank

7.6.1

Filter unit
Technical data
See section 2.1

Design

Main components and connections of the filter unit


13 Return and suction filter
14 Integrated bypass valve
15 Bleeder filter

16 Return strainer
17 Filter housing
18 Suction line from replenishing pump

The filter unit is contained in the hydraulic tank.


LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

The steel vessel is sealed with an O-ring.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

7.6-3 o f 1 0

Working hydraulics

Service Manual

Hydraulic tank

Components of the filter unit


Filter housing
Return suction filter cover
Return strainer cover
Duct to bypass valve
Bleeder filter

6
7
8
9
10

Bypass valve
Pre-tension valve
Suction line from replenishing pump
Replenishing strainer
Return strainer

11
12
13
14
15

Return pipe
Replenishing valve
Filter element
Magnetic rod
Filter casing
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

1
2
3
4
5

7.6-4 o f 1 0

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Working hydraulics
Hydraulic tank

Function description
Basic function
The return suction filter 1 acts as a return filter for oil flowing back from the
working and travel hydraulics, and as a suction filter for the replenishing
pump of the hydrostatic travel drive.
Some of oil flowing back from the various consumer units is pumped through
the return suction filter 3 back to the hydraulic tank.
The bleeder filter 2 prevents inadmissible pressure changes inside the hydraulic tank. This means air can be exchanged with the atmosphere outside.
Connections on the filter unit:
Compact brake pump leak oil
Fan motor leak oil
Suction line from replenishing pump
Working hydraulics pump leak oil
Solenoid valve block return line
Working hydraulics pump leak oil
Return line from control block
Return line from oil cooler

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

Basic function of the filter unit


1 Control block oil cooler connection
2 Magnetic rod
3 Return and suction filter
L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

6 Replenishing strainer
7 Pre-tension valve
8 Return strainer

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

7.6-5 o f 1 0

Working hydraulics

Service Manual

Hydraulic tank

4 Lower chamber
5 Suction line from replenishing pump

9 Return pipe

The oil flowing back from the working and travel hydraulics is pumped
through the connection 1 to the return suction filter 3. The oil flows from the
inside outwards through the return suction filter 3 and is cleaned.
The magnetic rod 2 attracts larger metal particles from the oil flowing past.
This also increases the lifetime of the filter.
The outside of the filter is connected to intake connection 5 of the replenishing pump.
More oil flows from the working and travel hydraulics to the return and
suction filter than is drawn up by the replenishing pump. The excess oil flows
through the pre-tension valve 7 to the hydraulic tank.

Oil supply to the replenishing pump


The returning oil flows from the inside outwards through the return suction
filter 1.
The replenishing pump of the travel hydraulics draws up some of the oil from
the lower chamber 2 via the intake connection 4.
The pre-tension valve 3 preloads the intake connection 4 of the replenishing
pump with a pressure of 0.5 bar. The excess oil flows through the pretension valve 3 to the hydraulic tank.

Replenishing pump oil supply


1 Return and suction filter
2 Lower chamber
3 Pre-tension valve

Replenishing function
4 Suction line from replenishing pump
5 Replenishing strainer
6 Replenishing valve

If there is insufficient oil to supply the replenishing pump, it can draw up oil
from the hydraulic tank. Oil flows through the replenishing strainer 5 and the
replenishing valve 6 to the intake connection 4 of the replenishing pump.
There may be too little oil in the filter element, for instance after it is changed.

7.6-6 o f 1 0

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

The pressure of the intake connection 4 allows the replenishing to draw up oil
more easily for cold starts. This increases the pressure in the hydrostatic control circuit increases more quickly and a better drive performance is achieved.

Service Manual

Working hydraulics
Hydraulic tank

Bypass valve for pressure relief


The bypass valve 4 prevents excess pressure in the return system.
Excess pressure can arise if the filter element 1 is dirty or if the oil is not sufficiently viscous.
If a certain pressure is reached, the bypass valve 4 opens. The oil then flows
through the duct 3, the bypass valve 4 and the return strainer 5 to the
hydraulic tank.

Return suction filter with bypass valve and return strainer


1 Return and suction filter
2 Connections to the filter unit:
3 Duct to bypass valve

4 Bypass valve
5 Return strainer

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

The return strainer 5 catches dirt particles. This prevents soiling of the
hydraulic tank.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

7.6-7 o f 1 0

Working hydraulics

Service Manual

Hydraulic tank

7.6.2

Bleeder filter
Technical data
See section 2.1

Design

Components of the bleeder filter


1
2
3
4
5

Filter housing
Inlet valve
Pressure spring
Outlet valve
Pressure spring

6
7
8
9

O-ring
Fine filter
O-ring
Inner housing

The bleeder filter consists of an oil-resistant, corrosion-proof plastic housing


in which a filter element folded in a star shape is inserted. The bleeder filter
contains an inlet and outlet valve.

Function description
Function

To prevent contamination, the air taken in from outside passes through the
fine filter.
The spring-loaded outlet valve 2 and inlet valve 3 reduce the exchange of
air. This minimises the oil contamination and increases the service life of the
fine filter element.

7.6-8 o f 1 0

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

To prevent excessive changes of pressure inside the hydraulic tank, air must
be exchanged with the atmosphere outside.

Service Manual

Working hydraulics
Hydraulic tank

Excess pressure in the hydraulic tank


Excess pressure in the hydraulic tank can be caused by increased oil
temperature or by the hydraulic cylinders retracting.
At a certain excess pressure, the outlet valve 2 opens. This allows air to
escape through the fine filter 1 and the opening 3.

Insufficient pressure in the hydraulic tank


Insufficient pressure in the hydraulic tank can be caused by decreasing oil
temperature or by the hydraulic cylinders extending.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

At a certain low pressure, the inlet valve 4 opens. This allows air to flow in
through the opening 3 and the fine filter 1.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

7.6-9 o f 1 0

Working hydraulics

Service Manual

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

Hydraulic tank

7.6-10 o f 1 0

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

8 Steering System
8.0
Chapter contents
8

Steering System.................................................................. 8.0-1


8.0

Steering system ..............................................................................8.0-1

8.1

Steering pump ................................................................................8.1-1

8.2

Servostat.........................................................................................8.2-1

8.3

Steering cylinder .............................................................................8.3-1


8.3.1

8.4

Steering damper hydro accumulator ....................................8.3-3


Emergency steering........................................................................8.4-1
Emergency steering pump ...................................................8.4-5

8.4.2

Emergency steering pressure switch ...................................8.4-7

8.4.3

Emergency steering check pressure switch .........................8.4-8

8.4.4

Valve block ...........................................................................8.4-9

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

8.4.1

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

8.0-1 o f 2

Service Manual

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

Steering System

8.0-2 o f 2

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Steering System

8.0 Steering system

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

Design

Main components of the steering system


1
2
3
4

Servostat
Oil cooler
Collector pipe
Hydraulic tank

5
6
7
8

Variable displacement pump


Valve block
Emergency steering pump
Left steering cylinder

9 Steering damper hydro


accumulator
10 Right steering cylinder

The machine has articulated steering. Two steering cylinders move the front
section and the rear section to each other using the articulated joint.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

8.0-1 o f 4

Steering System
PowerPoint

Service Manual
Function description

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

Basic function

Hydraulic diagram of the steering system

8.0-2 o f 4

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

Steering System

Hydraulic tank
Bleeder filter
Return strainer
Bypass valve
Return suction filter
Pre-tension valve
Replenishing valve with strainer
Travel pump return line
Fan motor leak oil
Compact brake pump leak oil
Solenoid valve block leak oil
Return line from oil cooler
Shut-off valve
Working hydraulics pump
intake port
15 Hydraulic oil temperature sensor
16 Right steering cylinder
17 Right steering damper hydro
accumulator

18 Left steering cylinder


19 Left steering damper
hydro accumulator
20 Variable displacement pump
21 Axial piston pump
22 Servo cylinder
23 Return cylinder
24 Restrictor
25 Restrictor
26 Pressure cut-off
27 Flow controller
28 Working hydraulics pump
return line
30 Servostat
31 Left replenishing valve
32 Left pressure relief valve
33 Right replenishing valve
34 Right pressure relief valve
35 Metering pump

36
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
50
51
52

Valve slider
Valve block
Check valve
Check valve
Variable displacement pump
pressure switch B3
Emergency steering pump
pressure switch B3a
Emergency steering pump
Electric motor
Gear pump
Pressure relief valve
Oil cooler
Collector pipe
Bypass valve

Test connections:
P High pressure / steering pump
M High pressure / steering pump
or emergency steering pump

The steering system operates in an open circuit. The variable displacement


pump 20 draws up oil from the hydraulic tank 1 and pumps it through the
valve block 40 to the servostat 30. The servostat supplies oil to the two
steering cylinders when the steering wheel is moved.
The load sensing system ensures that the pump 20 only pumps as much oil
as is actually required.
The emergency steering system allows steering movement if the variable
displacement pump fails. The emergency steering pump 45 delivers oil via
the valve block 40 to the servostat 30.
The hydro accumulators 17 and 18 on the steering cylinders absorb steering
movements. The absorber system in the steering cylinder prevents the front
and rear sections from bumping other at full articulation.

Hydraulic tank
The hydraulic tank provides filtered oil for the steering system. The variable
displacement pump draws up oil from the hydraulic tank via the connection 1.
The returning oil from the servostat is pumped back through the oil cooler
and the connection 3 via the return suction filter 4 to the hydraulic tank. Leak
oil from the variable displacement pump is directed through the connection 2
via the return strainer 5 to the hydraulic tank. The bleeder filter 6 compensates for pressure differences inside the hydraulic tank by providing
appropriate ventilation.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

See the detailed description in the section on the hydraulic tank.

Variable displacement pump


The pump draws up oil directly from the hydraulic tank and pumps it through
the valve block to the servostat.
The load sensing system ensures that the variable displacement pump only
provides as much oil as the steering system currently needs.
The pressure cut-off valve 2 limits the maximum pressure of the pump.
See the detailed description in the section on the variable displacement pump.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

8.0-3 o f 4

Steering System

Service Manual
Valve block
The valve block directs the oil from the variable displacement pump or the
emergency steering pump to the servostat.
The emergency steering pressure switch 1 monitors the pressure of the
variable displacement pump. If the pressure at the emergency steering
pressure switch 1 is too low, the emergency steering pump is automatically
activated. This can happen if the diesel engine shuts down or if the variable
displacement pump fails.
The check valves 2 and 3 prevent the oil from flowing back to the pumps.
See the detailed description in the section on the valve block.

Servostat
The servostat is connected to the steering column. The steering wheel
actuates the metering pump and valve slider in the servostat, causing the
steering system to move.
If the steering wheel is moved quickly, the flow booster system pumps some
of the oil via the spool directly to the steering cylinders. This facilitates fast
steering on rough terrain.
When the steering wheel is moved slowly, the flow booster is not activated.
All the oil is pumped through the spool and the metering pump to the steering cylinders. This facilitates sensitive steering on roads.
Two pressure relief valves protect the steering cylinder and servostat from
excessive pressure peaks.
See the detailed description in the section on the servostat.

Steering cylinder
The steering cylinders are connected to the front and rear sections.
The servostat supplies oil to the steering cylinders during steering.
The hydro accumulators on the steering cylinders absorb steering movements. The absorber system in the steering cylinder prevents the front and
rear sections from bumping other at full articulation.
See the detailed description in the section on the steering cylinder.

The emergency steering function allows the steering system to be operated


if the engine or the variable displacement pump fails. The emergency
steering pump is activated by the main electronics (master).
See the detailed description in the section on emergency steering.

Emergency steering pump


The gear pump 4 of the emergency steering pump is powered by the electric
motor 2. The electric motor is switched on when necessary via the relay 1.
In emergency steering mode the emergency steering pump draws up oil from
the hydraulic tank and pumps it through the valve block to the servostat.
The pressure relief valve 3 protects the pump from excess pressure.
See the detailed description in the section on the emergency steering pump.

8.0-4 o f 4

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

Emergency steering function

Service Manual

Steering System

Steering pump

8.1 Steering pump


Technical data
See section 2.1

Design

Main components of the steering pump


1 Drive shaft
2 Pump housing
3 Flow controller

4 Pressure cut-off
5 Connection housing

The steering pump is an axial piston pump with a swash plate design. The
steering pump is flange-mounted to the working hydraulics pump and is
driven by the diesel engine via this unit.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

The pressure and flow controller attached to pump housing affect the control
unit of the pump.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

8.1-1 o f 6

Steering System

Service Manual

Steering pump

Components of the steering pump


Drive shaft
Snap ring
Shaft seal ring
Pump housing
Bearing casing
Swash plate
Return plate
Piston

9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Cylinder
Control plate
O-ring
P connection
Valve housing
Shim
Tapered roller bearing
Shim

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Intake connection
Snap ring
Support ring
Pressure spring
Support ring
Glide shoe
Return ball
Tapered roller bearing

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

8.1-2 o f 6

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Steering System

Steering pump

Components of the steering pump


Ball journal
Glide shoe
Servo piston
Regulating spring
Piston guide

6
7
8
9
10

Test connection P
Plug
Pressure cut-off
Flow controller
LS connection

11
12
13
14

Guide piston
Return cylinder
Glide shoe
Ball journal

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

1
2
3
4
5

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

8.1-3 o f 6

Steering System

Service Manual

Steering pump

Function description
Basic function

Hydraulic plan of the variable displacement pump


1
2
3
4
5
6

Rotary group
Servo cylinder
Return cylinder
Restrictor
Restrictor
Pressure cut-off

7
8
9
10
11
12

Flow controller
High pressure test connection
Oil to servostat
LS signal from servostat
Return line to hydraulic tank
Intake connection

The steering pump operates in an open circuit. During operation, the pump
delivers oil from the hydraulic tank through the valve block to the steering.
The displacement of the steering pump is proportional to the input speed
and the variable cylinder volume.
The pressure cut-off valve 6 and flow controller 7 attached to pump housing
affect the control unit of the pump. The pump control unit pivots the swash
plate out of the zero position. When the swash plate pivots out, the piston
stroke in the rotary group 1 increases and the pump starts delivering oil.

Control unit

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

The control unit continuously regulates the steering pump flow. The angle of
the swash plate 3 is changed from 0 towards 15 and vice versa.

Control unit with return cylinder and actuating cylinder

8.1-4 o f 6

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Steering System

Steering pump

The system pressure constantly acts on the actuating cylinder 1. The


actuating cylinder 1 pushes the swash plate 3 towards a wider angle and
pump delivers oil.
The return cylinder 2 moves the swash plate 3 against the actuating cylinder
1 to a smaller angle. The effective piston face of the return cylinder 2 is
larger than that of the actuating cylinder 1.
The oil pressure acting on the return cylinder 2 is controlled by the flow
controller or pressure cut-off valve. In the pump control range, the oil
pressure on the return cylinder is just enough to keep the forces of the
actuating and return cylinders in equilibrium. This means the pump can
maintain a specific pivot angle and pump a corresponding amount of oil.

Flow controller (load sensing)


The load sensing system ensures that the variable displacement pump
only provides as much oil from the hydraulic tank as the steering system
currently needs.
If the steering system needs oil, the load pressure at the connection 4 increases.
The pressure and the force of the springs 5 push the piston 2 against the pump
pressure. The duct A opens to the tank connection T. The open duct A relieves
the return cylinder 3 and the pump delivers the required quantity of oil.

Flow controller during steering (pump delivers oil)


Flow controller
Valve piston
Plug
Connection X
Pressure springs

6
7
T
A
P

Adjusting screw
Pressure cut-off
Pump housing return line
To the return cylinder
High pressure

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

1
2
3
4
5

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

8.1-5 o f 6

Steering System

Service Manual

Steering pump

If the steering wheel is not moved, the load pressure at the connection 4
decreases. The pump pressure moves the piston 2 against the springs 5.
The piston 2 opens the pump pressure duct P to the duct A and the return
cylinder regulates the pump to the minimum flow.

Flow controller with no steering movement (pump does not deliver oil)

Pressure cut-off
When the maximum operating pressure in the system has been reached, the
pump moves back to the smallest angle and only delivers leak oil. The
maximum operating pressure remains constant.
When the pump reaches its maximum operating pressure, the piston 3 in the
pressure cut-off valve 1 moves against the spring 4. This opens the duct A
and pressure oil flows to the return cylinder.

Pressure cut-off valve at maximum system pressure


1
2
3
4

8.1-6 o f 6

Pressure cut-off
Effective face
Valve piston
Pressure spring

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

5
P
A
T

Adjusting screw
High pressure
To the return cylinder
Pump housing return line

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

The return cylinder moves the swash plate and regulates the pump to the
smallest angle.

Service Manual

Steering System

Servostat

8.2 Servostat
Technical data
See section 2.1

Design

Main components of the servostat


1 Left pressure relief valve
2 Inner rotary slide valve with teeth

3 Right pressure relief valve


4 Housing with spool valve
5 Metering pump

The servostat is fastened on rubber fittings at the front under the cab. The
rubber fittings prevent noise from the hydraulics from being transferred to the
steel cab frame.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

The steering column meshes with the teeth of the internal rotary slider 2.
The internal rotary slider in the servostat is actuated by the steering wheel
and the steering column.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

8.2-1 o f 6

Steering System

Service Manual

Servostat

Components of the servostat


Closing plate
Metering pump
Internal gear
O-ring
Intermediate flange
Outer valve sleeve

7
8
9
10
11
12

Internal rotary slider


Flight
Actuator journal
Housing
Needle bearing
Guide ring

13
14
15
16
17

Shaft seal ring


Right pressure relief valve
Leaf springs
Left pressure relief valve
Replenishing valve

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

1
2
3
4
5
6

8.2-2 o f 6

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Steering System

Servostat

Function description
Basic function

Hydraulic diagram of the servostat


1
2
3
4
5
6

Left replenishing valve


Left pressure relief valve
Right replenishing valve
Right pressure relief valve
Metering pump
Valve slider

7
8
9
10
11

Return line to hydraulic tank


Steering cylinder connection
Steering cylinder connection
Oil from valve block
Load sensing signal

When it is actuated, the servostat directs oil from the variable displacement
pump to the steering cylinders. The oil supply to the steering cylinders is
precisely metered according to the speed of the steering wheel.
When the steering wheel is turned, the position of the internal rotary slider is
turned in relation to the outer valve sleeve. This opens the valve, allowing a
certain amount of oil to flow through the metering pump to the steering cylinder.

Flow booster

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

The flow booster allows the small servostat to supply oil from two cylinders.
A specific portion of the flow is directed through the metering pump, and
another portion is pumped through the spool directly to the cylinders.

Diagram of flow booster


1 Boost ratio
2 Turns of steering wheel

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

3 Oil via the metering pump


4 Oil via the spool

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

8.2-3 o f 6

Steering System

Service Manual

Servostat

If the steering wheel is moved slowly, the entire flow is directed through the
metering pump 3. The oil flowing to the steering system depends on the size of
the metering pump. This allows very sensitive steering for travelling on roads.
At faster steering speeds of more than 10 turns of the steering wheel per
minute, additional holes in the spool open. Some of the oil flows through the
metering pump 3, and more oil flows the spool 4 directly to the cylinders. The
volumetric flow ration is 1:1.6. This allows very fast steering for rough terrain.

Flow regulation (load sensing)


Load sensing ensures that the variable displacement pump only supplies the
amount of oil currently needed by the steering system. The servostat reports the
required amount of oil via the LS connection to the variable displacement pump.
Steering system in inactive state

When the steering is not actuated, the duct P on the variable displacement
pump 3 is blocked. The LS connection for controlling the pump is relieved
via the spool to the tank connection T. The LS depressurised connection adjusts the variable displacement pump minimum flow.

Steering system in active state

When the steering is actuated, the spool 2 is moved. The connection P is


connected to the connection LS and to the steering cylinder. The increase
pressure at the LS connection causes the flow controller 4 to regulate the
variable displacement pump 3 to the required oil quantity.

Pressure cut-off
The pressure relief valves prevent excessive pressure peaks in the steering
system. Pressure peaks can be caused by sudden loads while driving.
Depending on the direction of the load, either the pressure relief valve 1 on the
left steering cylinder or the pressure relief valve 2 for the right cylinder opens.

8.2-4 o f 6

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

The variable displacement pump 3 is adjusted until there is a specific


pressure difference between the connection P and the connection LS.

Service Manual

Steering System

Servostat

When the set pressure is reached, the valve cone 6 opens against the pressure spring 4. Oil flows from the consumer unit 7 to the tank connection 5.
The opening pressure of the pressure relief valve can be set using the
adjusting screw 3.

Replenishing function
The servostat has two replenishing valves: one for steering to the left and
one for steering to the right.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

The replenishing valves prevent vacuums from forming in the steering


cylinder under certain operating conditions. Oil flows through the check valve
2 from the tank duct 1 to the steering cylinder (duct 3). The pin 4 prevents
the check valve 2 from moving too far from the valve insert.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

8.2-5 o f 6

Steering System

Service Manual

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

Servostat

8.2-6 o f 6

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Steering System
Steering cylinder

8.3 Steering cylinder


Technical data
See section 2.1

Design

Main components of the steering cylinder


1 Rod-end cylinder bearing
2 Piston rod bearing
3 Cylinder tube

4 Piston rod
5 Piston
6 Damper bushing

7 Base-end cylinder bearing

The cylinder base is welded to the cylinder tube 3.


The rod-end cylinder bearing 1 and the base-end cylinder bearing 7 form a
lug with a swivel bearing.
The piston rod bearing 2 is screwed into the cylinder tube 3.
The piston 5 and the piston rod bearing 2 are fitted with Glyd Seal, Rimseal
and Stepseal sealing rings.

Function description
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

Extension and retraction


The hydraulic cylinder is a double-action cylinder with a piston at one end.
The maximum forces in the cylinder depend on the maximum operating
pressure and the active surfaces.
When extending, the piston face is active; when retracting, the smaller ring
face is active.
This means the force when extending is greater than when retracting.
The piston speed is inversely proportional to the force. It is faster when
retracting than extending.

Piston rod guide


The piston rod is guided by the guide rings on the piston and in the piston
rod bearing.
L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

8.3-1 o f 4

Steering System

Service Manual

Steering cylinder

Sealing
The scraper ring in the piston rod bearing prevents dirt from penetrating the
piston rod.
The O-rings and the Glyd Seal, Rimseal and Stepseal sealing rings seal the
pressure chambers inside and out.

Stroke end shock absorber

Stroke end shock absorber


1 Piston rod
2 Piston

3 Damper bushing
4 Damper notch

The piston rod is slowed down before it is fully retracted.


Just before the piston 2 hits the cylinder base, it enters the damper bushing
3 in the cylinder base.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

The oil can only flow through the damper notch 4. This decreases the flow
diameter for the displaced oil and the speed of the piston is reduced.

8.3-2 o f 4

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Steering System
Steering cylinder

8.3.1

Steering damper hydro accumulator


Technical data
See section 2.1

Design

Components of the hydro accumulator


1 Plug for test and filling valve
2 Membrane

3 Closing head
4 Accumulator

The elastic partition between the fluid and the nitrogen is a membrane 2,
which is stretched in the accumulator 4. The closing head 3 prevents the
membrane from being pressed into the inlet opening when the hydro
accumulator is completely empty.
The plug 1 allows the accumulator to be checked and topped up using the
filling and testing device.

Function description
Basic function
The purpose of the hydro accumulator is to store hydraulic energy and
supply it when needed.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

It has the following applications:


To act as an attenuator for pressure peaks, for example for the ride
control system or steering attenuation.
As an energy reserve to supply energy when needed, for example for the
brake system.

Steering damper
The hydro accumulators on the steering cylinders absorb steering movements when changing direction quickly. Also, the damping effect absorbs
external influences on the machine, for example if the working attachment is
driven against an obstacle.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

8.3-3 o f 4

Steering System

Service Manual

Steering cylinder

Oil filling on the nitrogen side of the hydro accumulator

Cross section of the hydro accumulator


1 Plug for test and filling valve
2 Nitrogen filling
3 Oil filling

4 Membrane
5 Closing head
6 Accumulator

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

The hydro accumulator has a small amount of oil in it to protect the membrane on the nitrogen side. When sudden pressure peaks occur, such as
when driving on rough terrain or suddenly moving the steering wheel, the oil
prevents the membrane from hitting the inside of the accumulator too hard.

8.3-4 o f 4

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Steering System
Emergency steering

8.4 Emergency steering


Design

Main components of the emergency steering


1 Emergency steering button
2 Emergency steering check
symbol field
3 Emergency steering symbol field
4 Main electronics (master)
5 Input module 1
6 Emergency steering pressure
switch B3

7 Valve block
8 Emergency steering check
pressure switch B3a
9 Emergency steering pump
10 Emergency steering pump relay
11 Output module 2

The emergency steering pump 9, the emergency steering pump relay 10 and
the emergency steering check pressure switch 8 are mounted on the right of
the rear section.
The valve block 7 and the emergency steering pressure switch 6 are
mounted on the left of the rear section.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

The main electronics (master) 4 are located in the cab behind the driver's seat.
The input module 1 and the output module 2 are fitted in the right cab access.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

8.4-1 o f 1 0

Steering System

Service Manual

Emergency steering

Function description
Basic function

Functional diagram of the emergency steering


1 Emergency steering button
2 Emergency steering check
symbol field
3 Emergency steering symbol field
4 Main electronics (master)
5 Input module 1
6 Emergency steering pressure
switch B3

7 Valve block
8 Emergency steering check
pressure switch B3a
9 Emergency steering pump
10 Emergency steering pump relay
11 Output module 2

The emergency steering system allows continued steering if the variable


displacement pump or the diesel engine fails. The emergency steering pump
9 delivers oil via the valve block 7 to the servostat.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

The emergency steering pump is regulated by the main electronics (master)


4. The emergency steering check pressure switch 8, and the emergency
steering pressure switch 5 provide the main electronics with the necessary
signals. The emergency steering button 1 is for restarting the emergency
steering pump.

8.4-2 o f 1 0

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Steering System
Emergency steering

Pressure switch test


When you switch on the ignition, the pressure switches are tested. The pressure
switch is powered (24 V) via the fuse F11. When the system is OK, no signal is
returned to the input module 1. This tells the main electronics (master) 2 that the
pressure switch is working properly. The symbol fields 3 and 4 do not light up.
If the pressure switch is defective or if there is moisture in the plug or cable,
a positive signal is sent to the input module 1.
If the emergency steering pressure switch 5 is defective, the emergency
steering symbol field 4 lights up. If the emergency steering pressure check
switch 6 is defective, the emergency steering check symbol field 3 lights up.

Function diagram of the emergency steering


when the pressure switch is defective
(ignition on, engine off, both pressure switches
closed in the depressurised state)
1 Input module 1
2 Main electronics (master)
3 Emergency steering check
symbol field
4 Emergency steering symbol field

5 Emergency steering pressure


switch
6 Emergency steering check
pressure switch
7 Emergency steering pump

Emergency steering check


Every time the machine is started up the system performs a brief safety test.
This safety test is not performed until the engine is running. This is to
prevent the high current consumption of the emergency steering pump from
impairing the starting procedure.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

During the safety test, the emergency steering pump is activated. The pump
runs for 2 to 3 seconds. A pressure of 16 bar must be reached within this
time. The contact on the emergency steering check pressure switch 6
closes. During the safety test, the emergency steering check symbol field 3
lights up. The emergency steering system is then operational and the
emergency steering check symbol field goes out.
If the pressure at the emergency steering check pressure switch 6 does not
reach 16 bar, the check symbol field stays lit until the ignition is switched off.
The safety test is interrupted after 3 seconds. The emergency steering field
check symbol field indicates to the driver that the emergency steering
system is defective.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

8.4-3 o f 1 0

Steering System

Service Manual

Emergency steering

Activated emergency steering system

Functional diagram of the emergency steering


1 Input module 1
2 Output module 2
3 Emergency steering check
pressure switch
4 Emergency steering
pressure switch
5 Electric motor

6
7
8
9
10

Valve block
Oil from the steering pump
To servostat
Emergency steering button
Main electronics (master)

If the diesel engine or the steering pump 7 fails, the emergency steering function
is started automatically. If the pressure drops, the emergency steering pressure
switch 4 sends a signal via the input module 1 to the main electronics (master)
10. The main electronics give the start command to the output module 2 and the
emergency steering pump starts pumping oil. At the same time the emergency
steering symbol field lights up, accompanied by an audible signal. The
emergency steering function is provided for 40 seconds. The electric motor 5 of
the emergency steering pump is automatically switched off.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

The emergency steering pump can only started manually using the emergency steering button 9. This function is only available for 10 seconds if the
ignition is on.

8.4-4 o f 1 0

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Steering System
Emergency steering

8.4.1

Emergency steering pump


Technical data
See section 2.1

Design

Main components of the emergency steering pump


1 Relay
2 Electric motor

3 Pressure relief valve


4 Gear pump

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

The emergency steering pump is mounted on the right of the rear section.

Components of the emergency steering pump


1
2
3
4

Relay
Electric motor
Connector piece
Sealing ring

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

5
6
7
8

Flange
Seals
Bushing
Gears

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

9 Housing
10 Valve housing
11 Pressure relief valve

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

8.4-5 o f 1 0

Steering System

Service Manual

Emergency steering

Function description
Basic function
The gear pump of the emergency steering pump is powered by the electric
motor. The electric motor is switched on and off via a relay.
The gear pump draws up oil from the hydraulic tank as needed. The oil is
pumped via the valve block to the servostat. A pressure relief valve protects
the pump from excess pressure.

Gear pump with pressure relief valve


The gear pump 1 of the emergency steering pump is protected by a pressure
relief valve. By restricting the maximum pressure, this also prevents the
electric motor from consuming too much current.
The system pressure pushes the valve piston 2 against the spring 3.
If the maximum pressure is reached, the valve piston 2 opens. This allows
hydraulic oil to flow out to the intake side of the gear pump.
The maximum pressure is determined by the pressure spring 3 and the
adjusting disc 4.

Emergency steering pump relay

Emergency steering pump with electric diagram


1 Relay
2 Positive current supply
3 Relay activation

8.4-6 o f 1 0

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

4 Output module 2
5 Electric motor
6 Main earth connection

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

The electric motor 5 of the emergency steering pump is switched on and off
via the relay 1. The relay 1 is activated by the main electronics (master) and
the output module 2. The relay is designed to switch large currents.

Service Manual

Steering System
Emergency steering

8.4.2

Emergency steering pressure switch


ID 1029 4440

Technical data
See section 2.1

Design

Components of the pressure switch


1 Connection contact
2 Adjusting screw
3 Pressure spring

4 Switch contact
5 Membrane
6 Housing

The emergency steering pressure switch 1 is mounted on the valve block 2.

Function description
Basic function
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

Membrane pressure switches are for switching electric circuits on and off.
The hydraulic pressure acts via a membrane on an adjustable spring. When
a set value is reached, the electric contact closes and the circuit is closed.
This type of membrane pressure switch is known as normally open.

Activating the emergency steering function


The emergency steering pressure switch monitors the steering system
pressure.
If the diesel engine or the steering fails, the pressure at the emergency
steering pressure switch drops. If the pressure drops, the switch contact
opens. This interrupts the positive signal to the input module 1 and the
emergency steering system is activated.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

8.4-7 o f 1 0

Steering System

Service Manual

Emergency steering

8.4.3

Emergency steering check pressure switch


ID 1029 4440

Technical data
See section 2.1

Design

Components of the pressure switch


1 Connection contact
2 Adjusting screw
3 Pressure spring

4 Switch contact
5 Membrane
6 Housing

The emergency steering pressure switch 2 is mounted on the emergency


steering pump 1.

Function description

Membrane pressure switches are for switching electric circuits on and off.
The hydraulic pressure acts via a membrane on an adjustable spring. When
a set value is reached, the electric contact closes and the circuit is closed.
This type of membrane pressure switch is known as normally open.

Activating the emergency steering function


The job of the emergency steering check pressure switch is to test the emergency steering system.
When the diesel engine is started, the emergency steering pump begins to
pump oil. If the pressure rises to the set level, the switch contact closes. A
positive signal to the input module 1 is activated and the emergency steering
check is successfully completed.

8.4-8 o f 1 0

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

Basic function

Service Manual

Steering System
Emergency steering

8.4.4

Valve block
Design

Components and connections on the valve block


1 Oil from the emergency
steering pump
2 Oil from the variable
displacement pump
3 Emergency steering
pressure switch
4 Variable displacement pump
check valve

5
6
7
8

To servostat
Housing
Steering test connection
Emergency steering pump
check valve

The valve block is fitted on left of the rear section.

Function description
Basic function

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

The valve block connects the oil from the variable displacement pump or the
emergency steering pump to the servostat.

Hydraulic plan of the valve block


1 Oil from the variable displacement pump
2 Emergency steering pressure switch
3 Oil from the emergency
steering pump
4 Emergency steering pump
check valve

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

5 Variable displacement pump


check valve
6 To servostat
7 Steering pressure test
connection

8.4-9 o f 1 0

Steering System

Service Manual

Emergency steering

The emergency steering pressure switch 2 monitors the pressure of the


variable displacement pump. If the pressure at the switch 2 is too low, the
emergency steering pump is automatically activated. This can happen if the
diesel engine fails or if the variable displacement pump pressure drops.
The check valves 4 and 5 prevent oil from flowing back to the pump.
Valve block during normal
steering function

Valve block during normal steering function


When the steering is activated, the variable displacement pump delivers oil
to the connection 2 and via the check valve 4 to the servostat. The check
valve 8 prevents oil from flowing back to the emergency steering pump.

Valve block during emergency steering function


The emergency steering pump delivers oil to the connection 1 and via the
check valve 8 to the servostat. The check valve 4 prevents oil from flowing
back to the variable displacement pump.

8.4-10 o f 1 0

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

Valve block during emergency


steering function

9 Brake system
9.0
Chapter contents
9

Brake system ...................................................................... 9.0-1


9.0.1
9.1

Brake system........................................................................9.0-1
Service brake ..................................................................................9.1-1

9.1.1

Brake system gear pump......................................................9.1-1

9.1.2

Compact brake valve............................................................9.1-3

9.1.3

Service brake hydro accumulator.........................................9.1-7

9.1.4

Brake light pressure switch ..................................................9.1-9

9.1.5

Accumulator charge pressure switch .................................9.1-10

9.2

Parking brake..................................................................................9.2-1
9.2.1

Disc brake.............................................................................9.2-2

9.2.2

Parking brake hydro accumulator.........................................9.2-4

9.3

Overspeed protection .....................................................................9.3-1


Overspeed protection solenoid valve ...................................9.3-3

LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

9.3.1

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

9.0-1 o f 2

Service Manual

LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

Brake system

9.0-2 o f 2

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Brake system
9.0.1

Brake system
Design

LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

Main components of the brake system


1 Compact brake valve
2 Front axle service brake
hydro accumulator
3 Rear axle service brake
hydro accumulator
4 Parking brake hydro accumulator
5 Brake system gear pump
6 Hydraulic tank

7 Rear axle
8 Pilot control solenoid valve
9 Overspeed protection
solenoid valve
10 Pilot control hydro accumulator
11 Oil from the replenishing pump
12 Transmission with parking brake

13 Front axle
Test connections:
M3 Accumulator charge
pressure
M4 Front axle brake pressure
M5 Rear axle brake pressure
M6 Parking brake pressure

The gear pump 5 is flange-mounted on the engine. Together with the compact
brake valve 1, its job is to charge the hydro accumulators of the brake system.
The hydro accumulators for the service brake are fitted outside on the cab floor.
The hydro accumulator for the parking brake mounted directly on the compact
brake valve.
The service brake is a wet disc brake mounted in the wheel hubs of both axles.
The parking brake is a disc brake attached to the transmission 12.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

9.0-1 o f 6

Brake system

Service Manual

PowerPoint

Function description
Basic function

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Hydraulic tank
Return strainer
Brake system gear pump
Replenishing pump
Solenoid valve block
Overspeed protection
solenoid valve
Pilot control solenoid valve
Check valve
Pilot control hydro accumulator
Compact brake valve assembly
Accumulator charge valve
Pressure balance pilot valve

9.0-2 o f 6

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23

Check valve
Inverted shuttle valve
Check valve
Parking brake solenoid valve
Inching angle sensor
Pressure control piston for
st
1 circuit
Pressure control piston for
2nd circuit
Accumulator charge
pressure switch
Front axle disc brakes
Front axle hydro accumulator
Parking brake hydro accumulator

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

24
25
26
27
28
29

Transfer gear
Parking brake
Brake light pressure switch
Rear axle disc brakes
Rear axle hydro accumulator
Control valve block
(housing spreheating)

Test connections:
M3 Accumulator charge pressure
M4 Front axle brake pressure
M5 Rear axle brake pressure
M6 Parking brake pressure

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

Hydraulic diagram of the brake system

Service Manual

Brake system
The service brake is a hydraulic 2-circuit brake system. It acts on the wet
discs in the front and rear axles.
The brake system gear pump 3 draws up oil from the hydraulic tank 1 and
pumps it to the compact brake valve 10. The accumulator charge valve 11 in the
compact brake valve fills the hydro accumulators to a specified oil pressure.
When the inch/brake pedal is slightly depressed (up to 2/3 of the way down),
only the hydraulic inching function is activated via the inching angle sensor 17.
When the inch/brake pedal is fully depressed (in the last third), oil flows from the
hydro accumulators 22 and 28 via the pressure control pistons 18 and 19 to the
brake pistons in the front and rear axles. This activates the wet disc brakes. At
the end of the braking procedure, the oil flows into the hydraulic tank.
The parking brake 25 is opened by oil pressure and closed by spring force. When
the parking brake solenoid valve 16 is energised, oil flows from the parking brake
hydro accumulator 23 to the parking brake and opens the callipers.

Hydraulic tank
The hydraulic tank provides filtered oil for the brake system. The gear pump
draws up oil from the hydraulic tank via the connection 1. The returning oil is
pumped back through the return strainer 3 to the hydraulic tank.
The bleeder filter 4 compensates for pressure differences inside the
hydraulic tank by providing appropriate ventilation.
See the detailed description in the section on the hydraulic tank.

Brake system gear pump


The brake system gear pump 2 draws up oil from the hydraulic tank and
pumps it through the connection 4 to the compact brake valve.
The cooling system gear pump 3 and the brake system gear pump 2 have a
shared intake port.
See the detailed description in the section on the brake system gear pump.

Compact brake valve with hydro accumulator


LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

The compact brake valve performs the following tasks:


Charging the hydro accumulator
Inching function when the inch/brake pedal is slightly depressed
Braking function when the inch/brake pedal is fully depressed
Activating the parking brake via the parking brake solenoid valve

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

9.0-3 o f 6

Brake system

Service Manual

The accumulator charge valve fills the hydro accumulators 2, 3 and 4 to a


specified oil pressure. The accumulator charge pressure switch 5 monitors
the pressure in the hydro accumulators.
When the inch/brake pedal is pressed, oil flows from the service brake hydro
accumulators 3 and 4 to the wet disk brake. The contact on the brake light
pressure switch 6 closes and the brake lights light up.
See the detailed description in the section on the compact brake valve.

Service brake
The service brake is a wet disc brake 1 mounted in the front and rear axles.
The oil pressure pushes the brake discs together. The number of brake
discs and the brake pressure determine the braking force.

L550, L556, L566, L576


1 Brake piston
2 Brake discs

9.0-4 o f 6

Brake discs in the axle

3 Wheel hub (Multitrac axle)

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L580
4 Differential (Hercules axle)

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

See the detailed description of the wet disc brake in the section on the axles.

Service Manual

Brake system
Parking brake
The parking brake is attached to the output shaft of the transmission 4 and
thus acts on all four wheels.

The parking brake is opened by oil pressure and closed by spring force.
When you start the engine and press the parking brake button, the solenoid
valve 2 in the compact brake valve 1 is activated. Oil flows from the hydro
accumulator 3 to the parking brake 5, where it acts on the brake cylinder and
opens the callipers.
When you press the parking brake button again or turn off the engine, the
force of the springs in the brake cylinder closes the brake, thus generating
the required braking torque on the brake disc.
When the parking brake is closed, the LED in the parking brake button and
the parking brake symbol field in the display light up.
See the detailed description in the section on the parking brake.

Overspeed protection
The overspeed protection prevents the engine and the variable displacement
motors from overrevving, which can occur, for example, when driving downhill.

LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

When a set limit speed is exceeded, the overspeed protection solenoid


valve 3 is activated. Oil flows from the replenishing pump 2 to the rear axle
disc brake 5, causing the machine to slow down.
See the detailed description in the section on overspeed protection.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

9.0-5 o f 6

Service Manual

LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

Brake system

9.0-6 o f 6

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Brake system
Service brake

9.1 Service brake


9.1.1

Brake system gear pump


Technical data
See section 2.1

Design

Scavenging pump arrangement


1 Motor scavenging pump

2 Brake system gear pump


3 Cooling system gear pump

LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

The gear pumps are fitted on the accessory drive of the engine and is driven
by the engine at a specific transmission ratio via a spur gear.

Brake system gear pump components


1
2
3
4
5

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

Driver
O-ring
Flange
Seals
Bearing bushings

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

6
7
8
9

Gears
Housing
Housing cover
Shaft seal ring

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

9.1-1 o f 1 0

Brake system

Service Manual

Service brake

Function description
Basic function
The gear pump consists of two intermeshing gears enclosed in a housing.
One of the two gears is driven via the outgoing shaft (driving gear), and the
other driven by the gear teeth.
The fluid taken in is injected into the gaps between the teeth and pumped
outside along the housing from the intake port to the pressure port.

Oil supply for the brake system

The brake system gear pump 2 draws up oil from the hydraulic tank 4 via the
internal intake duct of the cooling system gear pump 3. The oil is pumped via
the discharge port to the compact brake valve 1.

Pressure cut-off

LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26.01.2007

The brake system gear pump pressure cut-off is performed by the pressure
relief valve in the compact brake valve.

9.1-2 o f 1 0

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Brake system
Service brake

9.1.2

Compact brake valve


Technical data
See section 2.1

Design
This compact brake valve is attached to the cab floor. It is activated using
the inch/brake pedal.

Main components of the compact brake valve


Actuation pedal
Inching angle sensor R1
Brake pressure adjusting screw
Brake light pressure switch
Compact brake valve housing

6 Accumulator charge valve


7 Parking brake solenoid valve
8 Accumulator charge
pressure switch
9 Base plate

LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

1
2
3
4
5

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

9.1-3 o f 1 0

Brake system

Service Manual

Cross section of the compact brake valve


1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Pedal idle position adjusting screw


Base plate
Parking brake check valve
Pressure balance check valve
Accumulator pressure test piston
Valve insert
Compact brake valve housing
Pilot valve actuating piston
Pressure relief valve

9.1-4 o f 1 0

10 Opening/closing pressure
adjusting screw
11 Inverted shuttle valve
12 Return spring for 2nd brake circuit
13 Pressure control piston for
2nd brake circuit
14 Return spring for 1st brake circuit
15 Pressure control piston for 1st
brake circuit
16 Spring cup

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

17 Pressure control spring


18 Brake pressure
adjusting screw
19 Seal rings
20 Pressure control springs
21 Spring sleeve
22 Actuating piston
23 Actuation pedal

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26.01.2007

Service brake

Service Manual

Brake system
Service brake

Function description
Basic function

Hydraulic diagram of the compact brake valve


1 Parking brake solenoid valve
2 Inching angle sensor
3 Pressure control piston for
1st circuit
4 Pressure control piston for
2nd circuit
5 Inverted shuttle valve
6 Check valve
7 Pressure balance pilot valve
8 Check valve

9
10
11
12

Accumulator charge valve


Flow control nozzle
Gear pump P connection
To the control valve block
(housing preheating)
13 Accumulator charge
pressure switch
14 Front axle hydro accumulator
15 Parking brake hydro accumulator

16 Parking brake connection


17 Front axle connection
18 To the overspeed protection
solenoid valve
19 Brake light pressure switch
20 Rear axle hydro accumulator
21 Hydraulic tank connections
M3 Accumulator charge pressure
test connection

The compact brake valve is supplied with oil by a gear pump. The integrated
accumulator charge valve 9 and the pilot valve 7 fill the hydro accumulator
with pressure oil.
If the accumulator charge cut-off pressure is reached, the accumulator
charge valve 9 switches the pump flow to circulate to the connection N.
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

If braking causes the accumulator pressure to fall to the accumulator charge cutin pressure, the accumulator charge valve 9 switches to accumulator charging.
The brake circuits of the front and rear axles are separated by the inverted
shuttle valve 5.
The parking brake solenoid valve 1 provides pressure oil to the disc brake.

Service brake
When the pedal is depressed in the first two thirds of its range, the hydraulic
inching function is activated. This function is triggered by the angle sensor
on the compact brake valve.
If the pedal is depressed further, the pressure control pistons of the 2nd circuit
control the pressure in the brake pistons in proportion to the pedal force.
At the end of the braking procedure, the oil flows back to the hydraulic tank.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

9.1-5 o f 1 0

Brake system

Service Manual

Service brake

If one brake circuit fails, the second remains operational due to the mechanical
contact between the two pressure control pistons in the compact brake valve.
The actuation force remains the same.

Parking brake
When you press the parking brake button, the parking brake solenoid valve
1 is opened. The accumulator pressure acts on the cylinders of the disc
brake and opens the brake.

Inching angle sensor


The angle sensor attached to the compact brake valve consists of two
redundant sensors. The angle sensor 1 sends an electrical signal to input
module 1 and the angle sensor 2 sends a signal to the input module 2.

LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26.01.2007

When the inch/brake pedal is pressed, the current to the control pressure
proportional valve (travel hydraulics pump) is reduced. The variable
displacement pump reduces its flow. This hydrostatically brakes the machine.

9.1-6 o f 1 0

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Brake system
Service brake

9.1.3

Service brake hydro accumulator


Technical data
See section 2.1

Design

Components of the hydro accumulator


1 Plug
2 Membrane

3 Closing head
4 Accumulator

The elastic partition between the fluid and the nitrogen is a membrane 2,
which is stretched in the accumulator 4. The closing head 3 prevents the
membrane from being pressed into the inlet opening when the hydro
accumulator is completely empty. The plug 1 allows the accumulator to be
checked and topped up using the filling and testing device.

Function description
Basic function
The purpose of the hydro accumulator is to store hydraulic energy and
supply it when needed.

LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

It has the following applications:


To act as an attenuator for pressure peaks, for example for the ride
control system or steering attenuation.
To act an energy reserve to supply energy when needed, for example for
the brake system.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

9.1-7 o f 1 0

Brake system

Service Manual

Service brake

Storing pressure for the service brake

Hydro accumulator arrangement


1
2
3
4

Compact brake valve


Parking brake hydro accumulator
Front axle hydro accumulator
Rear axle hydro accumulator

5 Accumulator charge
pressure switch
6 Brake light pressure switch

LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26.01.2007

The service brake hydro accumulators allow the brake to be applied a


certain number of times if the service brake pump fails. Oil flows from the
hydro accumulators through the compact brake valve 1 to the disc brake.

9.1-8 o f 1 0

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Brake system
Service brake

9.1.4

Brake light pressure switch


Technical data
See section 2.1

Design

Components of the pressure switch


1 Connection contact
2 Adjusting screw
3 Pressure spring

4 Switch contact
5 Membrane
6 Housing

The brake light pressure switch 1 is mounted on the compact brake valve 3.

Function description
Basic function
Membrane pressure switches are for switching electric circuits on and off.
The hydraulic pressure acts via a membrane on an adjustable spring. When
a set value is reached, the electric contact closes and the circuit is closed.
This type of membrane pressure switch is known as normally open.

Brake light switching function


The job of the brake light pressure switch is to switch on the brake lights.

LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

When the inch/brake pedal is pressed, the pressure on the parking brake
pressure switch rises. When a set level is reached, the contact closes and
the brake lights are switched on.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

9.1-9 o f 1 0

Brake system

Service Manual

Service brake

9.1.5

Accumulator charge pressure switch


Technical data
See section 2.1

Design

Components of the pressure switch


1 Connection contact
2 Adjusting screw
3 Pressure spring

4 Switch contact
5 Membrane
6 Housing

The accumulator charge pressure switch 2 is mounted on the compact brake


valve 3.

Function description
Basic function
The membrane pressure switches are for switching electric circuits on and off.
The hydraulic pressure acts via a membrane on an adjustable spring. When a
set value is reached, the electric contact opens and the circuit is interrupted.
This type of membrane pressure switch is known as normally closed.

Accumulator charge pressure monitoring function


The job of the accumulator charge pressure switch is to monitor the
accumulator charge pressure.

LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26.01.2007

If the pressure in one of the brake accumulators falls below the level set for
the pressure switch, the contact closes and the accumulator charge
pressure symbol field lights up. In addition, an audible signal sounds.

9.1-10 o f 1 0

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Brake system

Parking brake

9.2 Parking brake


Function description
Basic function of the parking brake

Components of the parking brake


1 Compact brake valve
2 Parking brake solenoid valve
3 Parking brake hydro accumulator

4 Transfer gear
5 Disc brake

The parking brake is a spring accumulator brake. The parking brake is


opened by oil pressure and closed by spring force.
The parking brake is supplied with oil by the compact brake valve 1. The
accumulator charge valve of the compact brake valve 1 fills the parking
brake hydro accumulator 3 to a specified oil pressure.
The parking brake hydro accumulator 3 provides oil pressure via the
solenoid valve 2 to open the parking brake. The solenoid valve 2 is actuated
using the parking brake button.
When the parking brake is opened, oil flows from the hydro accumulator 3
via the solenoid valve 2 to the disc brake 5.

Function of the parking brake switch


The parking brake can only be released when the engine is running.
When you start the engine and press the parking brake button 2, the parking
brake solenoid valve is activated. The brake pressure then acts via the open
parking brake solenoid valve on the brake cylinder, and opens the parking
brake against the force of the brake callipers. The parking brake symbol field
3 on the display goes out.

LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

When you press the parking brake button 2 again or turn off the engine, the
force of the springs in the brake cylinder closes the brake, thus generating
the required braking torque on the brake disc. The parking brake symbol
field 3 and the LED 1 in the parking brake button light up.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

9.2-1 o f 6

Brake system

Service Manual

Parking brake

9.2.1

Disc brake
Technical data
See section 2.1

Disc brake components


1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Counter nut
Plug
Adjusting screw
Anti-twist locking pin
Brake callipers
Dust seal
Pressure pin

8
9
10
11
12
13
14

Brake disc
Guide pin
Lock nut
Counter nut
Brake pad
Adjusting screw
Piston seal

15
16
17
18
19
20

Brake piston
Cup springs
Housing
Brake oil connection
Rubber centring element
Bleeder screw

The parking brake is a spring-loaded sliding saddle brake which acts on the
brake disc 8 attached outside on the output shaft of the transmission.

9.2-2 o f 6

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

Design

Service Manual

Brake system

Parking brake

Function description
Basic function of the disc brake

Disc brake in open position


The two identical brake pads 5 and the brake calliper 1 slide freely on the
guide pins 4, which are fastened in the transmission housing.
When the brake is applied, it clamps the brake pads 5, creating a braking
torque on the brake disk 3.
The clamping force is generated by the cup springs 9. The piston 8 is
pushed together with the pressure pin 2 and the front brake pad 5 towards
the brake disc 3.
When the front brake pad 5 comes into contact with the brake disc 3, the
reactive force pushes the brake callipers 1 along the guide pin 4 until the
rear brake pad 5 is also pressed against the brake disc 3.
The parking brake is released by tensioning the entire cup spring set 9. Oil in
the pressure chamber 7 pushes the piston 8 all the way back against the
force of the cup springs 9.

LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

Rubber fittings on the guide pin 4 push the entire brake calliper to the right
until the adjusting screw 6 touches the transmission housing. This moves the
rear brake pad 5 away from the brake disc 3.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

9.2-3 o f 6

Brake system

Service Manual

Parking brake

9.2.2

Parking brake hydro accumulator


Technical data
See section 2.1

Design

Components of the hydro accumulator


1 Plug
2 Membrane

3 Closing head
4 Accumulator

The elastic partition between the fluid and the nitrogen is a membrane 2,
which is stretched in the accumulator 4. The closing head 3 prevents the
membrane from being pressed into the inlet opening when the hydro
accumulator is completely empty. The plug 1 allows the accumulator to be
checked and topped up using the filling and testing device.

Function description
Basic function

It has the following applications:


To act as an attenuator for pressure peaks, for example for the ride
control system or steering attenuation.
To act an energy reserve to supply energy when needed, for example for
the brake system.

9.2-4 o f 6

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

The purpose of the hydro accumulator is to store hydraulic energy and


supply it when needed.

Service Manual

Brake system

Parking brake

Storing pressure for the parking brake

Components of the parking brake


1 Compact brake valve
2 Parking brake hydro accumulator

3 Transmission with disc brake

The parking brake is closed by spring force and opened by the brake oil from
the hydro accumulator 2.

LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

When the parking brake button is pressed, brake oil flows from the hydro
accumulator and releases the parking brake. The parking brake can only be
safely released when the parking brake symbol field is not lit.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

9.2-5 o f 6

Brake system

Service Manual

LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

Parking brake

9.2-6 o f 6

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Brake system
Overspeed protection

9.3 Overspeed protection


Design

Main components of the overspeed protection


1 Compact brake valve
2 Oil from the replenishing pump
3 Overspeed protection
solenoid valve

4 Solenoid valve block


5 Rear axle

The solenoid valve block 4 is fitted on left of the rear section beside the engine.

LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

Function description

Hydraulic diagram of the overspeed protection system


1 Compact brake valve
2 Pressure control piston for
2nd circuit
3 Brake light pressure switch

4 Replenishing pump
5 Solenoid valve block
6 Overspeed protection
solenoid valve

7 Rear axle disc brake


Test connection:
M5 Rear axle brake pressure

The overspeed protection prevents the engine and the variable displacement
motors from overrevving, which can occur, for example, when driving downhill.
When the engine or the variable displacement motors reach a set limit
speed, the overspeed protection solenoid valve 6 is activated. Oil flows from
the replenishing pump 4 to the rear axle disc brake 7, causing the machine
to slow down.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

9.3-1 o f 4

Brake system

Service Manual

Overspeed protection

Overspeed service code


If the engine or the variable displacement motors overspeed, the machine
reacts as follows:
The overspeed protection solenoid valve is energised
A service code appears in the display:
E 5030 Overspeed on one of the variable displacement motors
E 5032 Overspeed on variable displacement motor 1
E 5031 Overspeed on variable displacement motor 2
E 600B Overspeed on diesel engine
The warning buzzer sounds for one second.
Additionally, after 3 seconds of overspeed protection being active, the
service code E 5029 appears.

The brake is activated according to the intensity of overspeed. The following


situations may occur:
Situation A: In the event of serious overspeed, for example on a steep
slope, the brake activated constantly for more than 3 seconds. The service
code E 5029 appears with a short warning tone.
Situation B: Once the limit speed is exceeded, the machine is automatically
braked until the speed falls back below the threshold. After a short time, the
limit speed is exceeded again and the brake is activated again. If the brake
is activated for longer than 3 seconds, the service code E 5029 appears
with a short warning tone. This also happens if the brake intervention is
briefly interrupted.
Situation C: The machine is briefly braked. The speed then returns to the
normal range.

The service code E 5029 only appears during reckless driving, for example
at full speed down steep slopes. If the service code E 5029 is found several
times in the memory, it may affect the warranty on the machine, especially if
any damage was caused by overspeed.
The service codes are stored in the main electronics A15.

9.3-2 o f 4

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

Caution: Brake interventions with the service code E 5029 do not occur
during normal operation. This service code is only generated when the
machine is not operated properly.

Service Manual

Brake system
Overspeed protection

9.3.1

Overspeed protection solenoid valve


Technical data
See section 2.1

Design

Components of the solenoid valve block


1 Pilot control hydro accumulator
2 Pilot control solenoid valve

3 Overspeed protection
solenoid valve
4 Solenoid valve block assembly

The solenoid valve block is fitted on left of the rear section beside the engine.

Function description
Basic function
The solenoid valve block includes the following components in a single housing:
Pilot control solenoid valve (working hydraulics)
Overspeed protection solenoid valve (rear axle braking function)

Overspeed protection solenoid valve

LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

1 Compact brake valve


2 Oil from the replenishing pump
3 Overspeed protection solenoid valve

4 Solenoid valve block


5 Rear axle disc brake

During normal operation, the overspeed protection solenoid valve 3 is not


energised. Oil can flow freely from the compact brake valve 1 through the
overspeed protection solenoid valve 3 to the rear axle disc brake 5.
If the engine or the variable displacement motors reach a set limit speed, the
overspeed protection solenoid valve 3 is energised. Oil flows from the
connection 2 (from the replenishing pump) to the rear axle disc brake 5,
causing the machine to slow down.

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

9.3-3 o f 4

Brake system

Service Manual

LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

Overspeed protection

9.3-4 o f 4

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

10 Electrical system

10.0

Chapter contents
10

Electrical system ............................................................... 10.0-1


10.0.1
10.1

Electrical system with circuit diagrams...............................10.0-3


Electrical components...................................................................10.1-1

10.1.1

Electrical components in the cab........................................10.1-1

10.1.2

Fuse and relay board A4 ....................................................10.1-2

10.1.3

Main electronics (master) A15............................................10.1-6

10.1.4

Input modules (A16a, A16b, A16c) ..................................10.1-10

10.1.5

Output modules (A17a, A17b, A17c)................................10.1-15

10.1.6

Electrical components in the rear section.........................10.1-20

10.2

Battery installation ........................................................................10.2-1


Batteries .............................................................................10.2-2

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007

10.2.1

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

10.0-1 o f 1

Service Manual

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007

Electrical system

10.0-2 o f 2

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Electrical system
10.0.1

Electrical system with circuit diagrams


Design
The operating voltage of the machine is 24 volts. The batteries (2 x 12 V) are
connected in series.
The two batteries are installed in the right ballast weight.

Components of the
electrical system

The table below lists all the components of the electrical system. The entry
in the step column helps you locate the component in the circuit diagrams.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007

Abbreviations:
- WH = Wiring harness
- LFD = Liebherr ride control
- SV = Solenoid valve
- PSV = Proportional solenoid valve
- LED = Light-emitting diode
- SH = Service hours
- * Options

Machine view 1, left

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

10.0-3 o f 1

Electrical system

Service Manual

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007

Machine view 2, right

Machine view 3, above

10.0-4 o f 2

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual

Electrical system
Function description
Circuit diagrams
The circuit diagrams are on pages 1 to 75. The following list contains the
pages and their main functions.
Overview of pages for the electrical system:
1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW L550 - L580
2
3
The circuit diagrams of the electrical system show the function sequences
for the entire machine, including optional equipment. All components and
connections are marked and shown with the appropriate switching code so
that they are clearly identifiable. The keys also list the designations of
the components.
The circuit diagrams are divided into pages. The pages are also divided into
individual sections.
Click the links in the online documentation to skip to the relevant information.

Component designation -

The designations of the components and connectors are always shown with
-XX..:
- -XX = Component designation, e.g.
-P1 = Mechanical service hours indicator (optional)

Location code +

Location codes are shown with +XX. The location codes show where the
components are fitted on the machine.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007

The following location codes are shown:


- +B
Ballast weight, general
- +B1 Left ballast weight
- +B2 Rear ballast weight
- +F
Travel drive, general
- +F1 Front axle
- +F2 Rear axle
- +F3 Transmission
- +H
Rear section
- +H1 Rear section hatch
- +H2 Rear section below cab, right
- +H3 Rear section below cab, left
- +H4 Right rear section
- +H5 Left rear section
- +K
Cab, general
- +K1 Cab front instruments
- +K2 Cab rear wall
- +K3 Cab roof
- +K4 Cab instruments in side cover, rear right
- +K5 Cab instruments in side cover, rear left
- +K6 Cab floor
- +M Engine
- +V
Front section

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171


L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

10.0-5 o f 3

Electrical system

Service Manual
+V1
+V2
+V3

Front section
Lift arm
Tilt cylinder

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007

10.0-6 o f 4

Copyright by

MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978


L556 - 454 / from 15653

L566 - 460 / from 14171


L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

CANBUS3

HEAT/AIRCON
CONTROL
CC01

91/92 MOTORCONTROLLHECU

106
B

PROJ: 8920980_003

DISPLAYUNIT

SENSORS
(SWITCH,
SENSOR)

CANBUS1

45

MACHINE

INPUTMODULE1

CANBUS2
C

4x
CAN

1x
LAN

CANBUS3

ACTUATORS
(MAGNETICS,
SOLENOIDVALVES)

CANBUS4
4XRS232

OPTIONS(e.g.
WEIGHING EQUIPMENT
CENTRALGREASING,
etc.)

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

112

2xCFCard

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

97

93

CAN
CAN
AIRCONDITIONINGKEYPAD MAINKEYPAD

22 OUTPUTMODULE1
Ethernet/RS232/CAN
D

ELECTRIC LOAD
(LIGHTING,
WINDSCREENWIPER,
REAR
REARWINDOWHEATER

46 INPUTMODULE2

21

OUTPUTMODULE2

ELECTRICKEYPAD
FUSEANDRELAY BOARD

SENSORS

MACHINE

ACTUATORS

F
Ersteller

Datum

SPL

Ausgabe

Zustand

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

OVERVIEWDIAGRAM
ELECTRICALSYSTEMELECTRONICSGG6TIER3WHEELLOADER

WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

1
114

TABLEOFCONTENTS

SHEET

CUTOFFTILTCYLINDER

61

STARTER

TABLEOFCONTENTS

SHEET

TRAVELDIRECTIONSHYDRAULICPUMPBUZZERPRESSUREHIGHPRESSURETRAVELPUMP

54

FUNCTIONWORKINGBASKET

59

DISPLAYUNITCANBUS3

35

FUNCTIOND+PROFILELIGHTPARKINGLIGHT

20

DISPLAYUNITCANBUS3

36

FOOTFLAPVMC3MIDDLEFLAPVMC4

66

WORKINGPROJECTORREARREAR

31

FANMOTORANDSENSORICEUPPROTECTION

64

WORKINGPROJECTORREARCABIN

32

JOYSTICKSTEERING

72

WORKINGPROJECTORFRONTCABINXENONWORKINGPROJECTOR

30

JOYSTICKSTEERING

74

AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEMAMBIENTTEMPERATURESENSORSUNSENSOR

62

BMKINDEX

AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEMAMBIENTTEMPERATURESENSORSUNSENSOR

63

BMKINDEX

HEADFLAPVMC5TEMPERATURESENSORAUTOMATICAIRCONDITIONING

67

BMKINDEX

FUELTEMPERATURESENSORACTIVEOSCILLATING

107

BMKINDEX

CHARGEAIRCOOLEROILPRESSURESWITCH

106

BMKINDEX

10

COUNTRYSPECIFICTYPE/EXECUTION

BMKINDEX

11

KEYHANDOUTCONTAININGTYPECOUNTINGNUMBERSYSTEMANDPLACE

BMKINDEX

12

STEERINGCOLUMNSWITCHSTOPLIGHTLOWBEAMHIGHBEAM

25

BMKINDEX

13

LHCONTROLLEVERSWITCHCOMFORTCONTROL3AND4CONTROLCIRCUIT

51

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

BMKINDEX

14

GENERATOR

BMKINDEX

15

VENTILATORCONDENSERINTEGRATED

68

BMKINDEX

16

VENTILATORCONDENSERRETROFITKIT

69

BMKINDEX

17

MOTORCONTROLAUTOMATICRUNOUT

47

BMKINDEX

18

EMERGENCYSTEERINGPUMPLFDAIRFILTERCONTAMINATIONRIDECONTROL

23

BRAKEACCUMULATOR

21

EMERGENCYSTEERINGPUMPLFDAIRFILTERCONTAMINATIONRIDECONTROL

24

BRAKEACCUMULATOR

22

OUTPUTMODULE2BACKUPALARMANDCANBESWITCHEDOFF

45

CANBUS1

37

OUTPUTMODULE2BACKUPALARMANDCANBESWITCHEDOFF

46

CANBUS2

38

PARKINGBRAKESPEEDSENSORCENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEMGROENEVELD

78

DIAGNOSTICPLUGMOTORCONTROLANDAIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM

70

PHASESENSOR

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

105

BMKINDEX

DIESELPREHEATINGCOLDWEATHERKIT40

82

REVERSINGOBSTACLEDETECTORGROENEVELD

ANGLESENSORINCH/GASPEDAL

52

REARAREAMONITORINGVIAMONITORANDCAMERA

PROJ: 8920980_003

WARNINGBEACONMIRRORANDREARWINDOWHEATER

33

INJECTIONPUMPCYLINDER13

109

FLOATPOSITIONBUCKETRETURNTODIGLIFTKICKOUT

56

INJECTIONPUMPCYLINDER46

110

WINDSCREENWASHERFRONTANDREARHOOTER

28

79

WINDSCREENWASHERFRONTANDREARHOOTER

29

101

STANDBYAM4CYLINDERENGINE

111

EP3.AND4.CONTROLCIRCUIT

60

STANDBYAM6CYLINDERENGINE

102

TRAVELRANGESSWIVELANGLEHYDROMOTORSOVERSPEEDPROTECTION

53

TANKPIPESENSORTRANSMISSION/HYDRAULICOILTEMPERATUREVENTILATORCOOLINGWATERLEVEL

Datum

76

108

Ausgabe
nderung

75

ENGINESPEEDSENSOR2

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

Ident.Nr.

TABLEOFCONTENTS
WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

ZeichNr.

108

55

Datum

105

BACKUPALARMGEROTORSTEERINGDIESELPREHEATING

Ersteller

Zustand

108

ELECTRICALDIAGRAMDIESELENGINE4AND6CYLINDER

26

ENGINESPEEDSENSOR1

ELECTRONICIMMOBILISER

8920980
460901000003
7

21

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

2
114

TABLEOFCONTENTS

SHEET

WATERVALVEVMC1RECIRCULATEDAIRFLAPVMC2

GENERALOUTLAYELECTRICKEYPAD

94

KEYOFSYMBOLSDINEN613461DINEN613462DINEN60617

GENERALOUTLAYMAINKEYPAD

95

CENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEMLIEBHERR

77

GENERALOUTLAYHEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM

96

CIGARETTELIGHTERELECTRICALSOCKET12VRADIOLOUDSPEAKER

34

GENERALOUTLAYHEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEMSYSTEMSIDE

97

INGITIONLOCKBATTERIESGENERATORMAINFUSES

19

GENERALOUTLAYINPUTMODULE1

86

ADDITIONALEQUIPMENT12QUICKCHANGEDEVICE

58

GENERALOUTLAYINPUTMODULE2

87

ADDITIONALEQUIPMENT123AND4QUICKCHANGEDEVICE

57

GENERALOUTLAYINPUTMODULE3

88

AUXILIARYHEATERDBW2010

80

GENERALOUTLAYINPUTMODULE4

89

AUXILIARYHEATERTHERMO90

81

GENERALOUTLAYAIRCONDITIONINGKEYPADFLAPCONTROL

99

PROJ: 8920980_003

GENERALOUTLAYMOTORCONTROL4CYLINDER

113

GENERALOUTLAYMOTORCONTROL6CYLINDER

104

GENERALOUTLAYMOTORCONTROLENGINESIDE

93

GENERALOUTLAYOPTIONKEYPAD

98

GENERALOUTLAYOUTPUTMODULE1

90
91

GENERALOUTLAYOUTPUTMODULE3

92

83

VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSESL586

84

SUPPLYINPUTMODULE1AND2

41

SUPPLYINPUTMODULE3JOYSTICKSTEERING

71

SUPPLYINPUTMODULE3JOYSTICKSTEERING

73

SUPPLYINPUTMODULE4EP3.AND4.CONTROLCIRCUIT

50

SUPPLYMASTERSUPPLYDIAGNOSTICPLUG

40

SUPPLYOUTPUTMODULE1

42

SUPPLYOUTPUTMODULE1AND2

43

SUPPLYOUTPUTMODULE2

44

SUPPLYOUTPUTMODULE3

48

SUPPLYOUTPUTMODULE3AUTOMATICLIGHTINGSHUTDOWN

49

SUPPLYKEYPADS

39

HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTS

27

GENERALOUTLAYSENSORS

103

GENERALOUTLAYSENSORS

112

GENERALOUTLAYPROTECTIVEFOIL

100

OVERVIEWDIAGRAMELECTRICALSYSTEMELECTRONICSGG6TIER3WHEELLOADER

Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
nderung

Datum

SHEET

85

VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSES40

Zustand

TABLEOFCONTENTS

GENERALOUTLAYMASTER

GENERALOUTLAYOUTPUTMODULE2

WATERDETECTOR

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

22

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

TANKPIPESENSORTRANSMISSION/HYDRAULICOILTEMPERATUREVENTILATORCOOLINGWATERLEVEL

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

106

F
Ident.Nr.

WerkBischofshofenGmbH

ZeichNr.

114

TABLEOFCONTENTS
3

65

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

3
114

TYPE/COUNTINGNUMBER,SYSTEM,LOCATIONCODE

TYPE/COUNTINGNUMBER
CIRCUITSTWISTED

M1STARTERMOTOROPERATINGSUPPLYCODE

52
52

=BBALLAST
=FTRAVELDRIVE
=HHINDCARRIAGE
=KCABIN
=MENGINE
=VFRONTSECTION

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

=SYSTEM

=K
+K6
X1.S1

=KSYSTEM(CABIN)
+K6LOCATIONCODE(CABFLOOR)
X1.SPLUGNAMEANDPINCONTACT

X1.B1

X1.BPLUGNAMEANDSOCKETCONTACT

+K6
=K

52PINAMPLUG

CABLEGREENOPTION

/7.E4

+LOCATIONCODE

CROSSREFERENCEUPSHEET7E4

OPENLINEEND

+BBALLAST
+B1BALLASTLEFT
+B2BALLASTRIGHT

LETZTEMODIFICATION

+KCABIN
+K1CABINFITTINGS
+K2CABINREARPANEL
+K2.RHCABINREARPANELRELAYRACK
+K3CABROOF
+K4CABINFITTINGSSIDECOVERRIGHTREAR
+K5CABINFITTINGSSIDECOVERLEFTREAR
+K6CABFLOOR

+FTRAVELDRIVE
+F1FRONTAXLE
+F2REARAXLE
+F3TRANSMISSION

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

PROJ: 8920980_003

+HHINDCARRIAGE
+H1HINDCARRIAGEREARHATCH
+H2HINDCARRIAGEUNTERCABINRIGHT
+H3HINDCARRIAGEUNTERCABINLEFT
+H4HINDCARRIAGERIGHT
+H5HINDCARRIAGELEFT

+MENGINE

+VFRONTSECTION
+V1FRONTSECTION
+V2LIFTARM
+V3TILTCYLINDER

F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

KEYHANDOUTCONTAINING
TYPECOUNTINGNUMBERSYSTEMANDPLACE

WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

4
114

SHEET

SYSTEM PLACE

A3

RADIO

/34.D7

=K

A3.X1

PLUGRADIO

/34.D7

A3.X2

PLUGRADIO

A4.46.4*

SYSTEM PLACE

+K3

A13.X2

PLUGDISPLAYUNITLCD

/35.A3

=K

+K1

=K

+K3

A13a.X

DISPLAYUNIT

/35.D3

=K

+K1

/34.D7

=K

+K3

A15

MAINELECTRONICSMASTER

/85.B1

=K

+K2

PLUGRELAYBOARD

/30.D5

=K

+K2

A15.CAN.X

PLUGMASTER8POLIG

/35.B7

=K

+K2

A4.46.8*

PLUGRELAYBOARD

/30.D8

=K

+K2

A15.COM4.X

PLUGMASTERRSUBD

/40.B6

=K

+K2

A4.Kl.15.a*

Kl.15INPUTMODULE4

/50.A1

=K

+K2

A15.X

PLUGMASTER6POLIG

/40.E1

=K

+K2

A4.X40

PLUGRELAYBOARD

/40.A4

=K

+K2

A16a

INPUTMODULE1

/86.B1

=H

+H3

A4.X40.3a*

CONNECTIONRELAYBOARD

/47.A4

=K

+K2

A16a.X1

PLUGINPUTMODULE1

/51.C1

=H

+H3

A4.X41

PLUGRELAYBOARD

/80.E2

=K

+K2

A16a.X1.44*

CANCONNECTION.INPUTMODULE1

/37.E6

=H

+H3

A4.X42

PLUGRELAYBOARD

/40.C4

=K

+K2

A16b

INPUTMODULE2

/87.B1

=K

+K2

A4.X43

PLUGRELAYBOARD

/43.B2

=K

+K2

A16b.X1

PLUGINPUTMODULE2

/27.A8

=K

+K2

A4.X44

PLUGRELAYBOARD

/25.D3

=K

+K2

A16b.X1.10a*

PLUGCOMFORTCONTROL3.+4.CONTROLCIRCUIT

/51.D8

=K

+K2

A4.X44a:4*

CONNECTIONRELAYBOARD

/79.F8

=K

+K2

A16b.X1.9a*

PLUGCOMFORTCONTROL3.+4.CONTROLCIRCUIT

/51.D7

=K

+K2

A4.X45

PLUGRELAYBOARD

/35.E2

=K

+K2

A16b.X2.9+10b*

PLUGCOMFORTCONTROL3.+4.CONTROLCIRCUIT

/51.D7

=K

+K2

A4.X46

PLUGRELAYBOARD

/30.D4

=K

+K2

A16c

INPUTMODULE3

/88.B1

=H

+H3

A4.X47

PLUGRELAYBOARD

/33.B7

=K

+K2

A16c.X1

PLUGINPUTMODULE3

/71.E1

=H

+H3

A4.X48

PLUGRELAYBOARD

/49.C8

=K

+K

A16d

INPUTMODULE4

/89.B1

=H

+H3

A4.X48.*

PLUGRELAYBOARD

/69.B7

=K

+K2

A16d.X1

PLUGINPUTMODULE4

/60.B1

=H

+H3

A4.X49

PLUGRELAYBOARD

/25.B7

=K

+K2

A17.aX1a*

PLUGCENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEMGROENEVELD

/78.B2

=H

+H3

A4.X50

PLUGRELAYBOARD

/27.B5

=K

+K2

A17.X2*

PLUGQUICKCHANGEDEVICE

/57.D8

=H

+H

A4.X50.12a*

CONNECTIONRELAYBOARD

/33.B3

=K

+K2

A17a

OUTPUTMODULE1

/90.B1

=H

+H3

A4.X51

PLUGRELAYBOARD

/20.B4

=K

+K2

A17a.X1

PLUGOUTPUTMODULE1

/42.E7

=H

+H3

A4.X52

PLUGRELAYBOARD

/80.C3

=K

+K2

A17a.X1.43.57*

PLUGCANCONNECTIONINPUTMODULE1

/37.B6

=H

+H3

A4.X53

PLUGRELAYBOARD

/20.D3

=K

+K2

A17a.X1.48a*

OPTIONBUCKETRETURNTODIGBERPUSHBUTTONSWITCH

/56.E6

=H

+H3

A4.X55

PLUGRELAYBOARD

/19.C8

=K

+K2

A17a.X1.6a*

OPTIONBUCKETRETURNTODIGBERPUSHBUTTONSWITCH

/56.B6

=H

+H3

A4.X56

PLUGRELAYBOARD

/19.B2

=K

+K2

A17b

OUTPUTMODULE2

/91.B1

=H

+H3

A4.X56a*

CONNECTIONRELAYBOARD

/69.B2

=K

+K2

A17b..X1.43.57*

PLUGCANCONNECTIONOUTPUTMODULE2

/38.C1

=K

+K

A4.X56a:4*

CONNECTIONRELAYBOARD

/79.B4

=K

+K2

A17b.X1

PLUGOUTPUTMODULE2

/43.C1

=H

+H3

A4.X57

PLUGRELAYBOARD

/19.B3

=K

+K2

A17b.X1.44*

CANCONNECTIONOUTPUTMODULE2

/38.F1

=K

+K

A4.X58

PLUGRELAYBOARD

/27.B8

=K

+K2

A17b.X1.58*

CANCONNECTIONOUTPUTMODULE2

/38.F2

=K

+K

A9*

IMMOBILISER

/79.D4

=K

+K2

A17b.X143a*

CANCONNECTIONOUTPUTMODULE2

/38.D7

=H

+H3

A9.X*

PLUGIMMOBILISER

/79.D4

=K

+K2

A17c

OUTPUTMODULE3

/92.B1

=H

+H3

A11

MAINKEYPAD

/95.C3

=K

+K4

A17c.X1

PLUGOUTPUTMODULE3

/48.E2

=H

+H3

A11.X1

PLUGMAINKEYPAD

/35.B4

=K

+K4

A18

ELECTRICKEYPAD

/94.B2

=K

+K4

A13

DISPLAYUNITLCD

/35.B1

=K

+K1

A18.X1

PLUGELECTRICKEYPAD

/27.A2

=K

+K4

A13.X1

PLUGDISPLAYUNITLCD

/35.B1

=K

+K1

A18.X1.1a*

AUTOMATICLIGHTINGSHUTDOWN

/49.D6

=K

+K4

PROJ: 8920980_003

FUNCTION

SHEET

BMK

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

FUNCTION

BMK

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

Ident.Nr.

BMKINDEX
WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

5
114

SHEET

SYSTEM PLACE

A18.X1.1b*

AUTOMATICLIGHTINGSHUTDOWN

/49.D6

=K

A18.X2

PLUGELECTRIESKEYBOARD

/25.C2

A19

OPTIONKEYPAD

A19.X1

SYSTEM PLACE

+K4

B10

HOOTER

/28.C2

=H

+H

=K

+K4

B10.X1

PLUGHOOTER

/28.C2

=H

+H

/98.B3

=K

+K4

B10.X2

PLUGHOOTER

/28.C2

=H

+H

PLUGOPTIONKEYPAD

/35.E7

=K

+K4

B10a*

PLUGHOOTEROPTION

/28.C2

=H

+H

A19.X2

PLUGCANBUS3

/35.F7

=K

+K4

B10a.X2*

PLUGHOOTEROPTION

/28.C1

=H

+H

A21

AIRCONELECTRONICSCC0129POLIG

/96.A2

=K

+K4

B11l

LOUDSPEAKERLEFT

/34.E7

=K

+K3

A21.X1

PLUGAIRCONELECTRONICSCC01

/62.B3

=K

+K4

B11l.X1

PLUGLOUDSPEAKERLEFT

/34.E7

=K

+K3

A21.XB

DIAGNOSTICPLUGAIRCONDITIONINGELECTRONICS

/70.E6

=K

+K4

B11l.X2

PLUGLOUDSPEAKERLEFT

/34.F7

=K

+K3

A21a

AIRCONELECTRONICSCC0142POLIG

/97.B1

=K

+K4

B11r

LOUDSPEAKERRIGHT

/34.E8

=K

+K3

A21a.X2

PLUGAIRCONELECTRONICSCC01

/64.B1

=K

+K4

B11r.X1

PLUGLOUDSPEAKERRIGHT

/34.E8

=K

+K3

A22

KEYPADHEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM

/99.B2

=K

+K4

B11r.X2

PLUGLOUDSPEAKERRIGHT

/34.F8

=K

+K3

A22.X1

PLUGKEYBOARDHEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM

/39.E6

=K

+K4

B12

PRESSURESWITCHBRAKELIGHT

/25.E1

=H

+H3

A204

CENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEMGROENEVELD

/78.C5

=K

+K4

B12.X

PLUGPRESSURESWITCH

/25.E1

=H

+H3

A204.X*

PLUGCENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEMGROENEVELD

/78.C4

=K

+K4

B13

COOLINGWATERLEVEL

/21.C4

=H

+H

A205*

CENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEMGROENEVELD

/78.D3

=H

+H3

B13.X

PLUGCOOLINGWATERLEVEL

/21.C4

=H

+H

A205.X*

PLUGCENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEMGROENEVELD

/78.D3

=H

+H3

B14

TRANSMISSIONTEMPERATURE

/21.C5

=F

+F3

A700C.6

MOTORCONTROLENGINESIDE6CYLINDER

/104.A1

=M

+M

B14.X

PLUGTRANSMISSIONTEMPERATURE

/21.C5

=F

+F3

A700C.6.X1

PLUGENGINESIDE

/105.E2

=M

+M

B15

INDUCTIVESWITCHBUCKETRETURNTODIG

/56.C2

=V

+V3

A700C4

MOTORCONTROLENGINESIDE4CYLINDER

/113.A1

=M

+M

B15.X

PLUGINDUCTIVESWITCH

/56.C2

=V

+V3

A700D

MOTORCONTROLVEHICLESIDE

/93.B1

=M

+M

B16

BACKUPALARM

/45.C5

=H

+H5

A700D.X2

PLUGVEHICLESIDE

/47.E1

=M

+M

B16.X

PLUGBACKUPALARM

/45.D5

=H

+H5

A.X1*

PLUGCIRCULATINGPUMPDBW2010

/80.E6

=B

+B2

B16a.X1*

PLUGREVERSINGOBSTACLEDETECTORCANBESWITCHEDOFF

/45.D5

=H

+H5

B1

SPEEDSENSORTRANSMISSION

/78.C6

=F

+F3

B16b.X*

PLUGREVERSINGOBSTACLEDETECTORCANBESWITCHEDOFF

/45.C7

=H

+H5

B1.X

PLUGSPEEDSENSOR

/78.C6

=F

+F3

B16c.X1*

PLUGOPTIONBACKUPALARM

/45.C5

=H

+H1

B2

SPEEDSENSORCONTROLMOTOR1

/78.C7

=F

+F3

B17

INDUCTIVESWITCHLIFTKICKOUT

/56.C4

=V

+V

B2.X

PLUGSPEEDSENSORCONTROLMOTOR1

/78.C7

=F

+F3

B17.B

PLUGLIFTKICKOUT

/56.B4

=V

+V

B2a

SPEEDSENSORCONTROLMOTOR2

/78.C8

=F

+F3

B17.X

PLUGLIFTKICKOUT

/56.B4

=V

+V

B2a.X

PLUGSPEEDSENSORCONTROLMOTOR2

/78.C8

=F

+F3

B17.X_1

PLUGINDUCTIVESWITCH

/56.C4

=V

+V

B3

PRESSURESWITCHEMERGENCYSTEERINGPUMP

/23.C5

=H

+H5

B19

PRESSURESWITCHBRAKEACCUMULATOR

/21.C3

=K

+K6

B3.X

PLUGPRESSURESWITCH

/23.C5

=H

+H5

B19.X

PLUGPRESSURESWITCH

/21.C3

=K

+K6

B3a

PRESSURESWITCHCHECKEMERGENCYSTEERINGPUMP

/23.C4

=H

+H4

B25

TANKPIPESENSOR

/21.C1

=H

+H2

B3a.X

PLUGPRESSURESWITCH

/23.C4

=H

+H4

B25.X

PLUGTANKPIPESENSOR

/21.C1

=H

+H2

B4

AIRFILTERCONTAMINATION

/23.C6

=H

+H

B26

TEMPERATURESENSORICEUPPROTECTION

/64.D5

=K

+K4

B4.X_1

PLUGPRESSURESWITCH

/23.C6

=H

+H

B26a

TEMPERATURESENSORICEUPPROTECTION

/64.D7

=K

+K4

B8

HYDRAULICOILTEMPERATURESENSOR

/21.C6

=H

+H1

B27

PRESSURESWITCHAIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM

/62.C4

=H

+H

B8.X

PLUGHYDRAULICOILTEMPERATURESENSOR

/21.C6

=H

+H1

B27.X

PLUGPRESSURESWITCH

/62.C4

=H

+H

PROJ: 8920980_003

FUNCTION

SHEET

BMK

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

FUNCTION

BMK

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

Ident.Nr.

BMKINDEX
WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Ort

Blatt
von

Anlage

003

6
114

SHEET

SYSTEM PLACE

B27.X.2*

PLUGPRESSURESWITCH

/69.D8

=H

B28

PRESSURESWITCHRIDECONTROL

/23.C6

B28.X

PLUGPRESSURESWITCH

B32

SYSTEM PLACE

+H

B711

ENGINESPEEDSENSOR1

/108.B2

=M

+M

=K

+K

B711.X

PLUGENGINESPEEDSENSOR1

/108.B2

=M

+M

/23.C6

=K

+K

B712

ENGINESPEEDSENSOR2

/108.B4

=M

+M

PRESSURESWITCHFLOATPOSITION

/56.C1

=K

+K4

B712.X

PLUGENGINESPEEDSENSOR2

/108.B5

=M

+M

B32.X

PLUGPRESSURESWITCH

/56.C1

=K

+K4

B713

PHASESENSOR

/108.B7

=M

+M

B39

AIRCONAMBIENTTEMPERATURESENSOR

/62.D5

=K

+K6

B713.X

PLUGPHASESENSOR

/108.B7

=M

+M

B39.X

PLUGAMBIENTTEMPERATURESENSOR

/62.D6

=K

+K6

B.X6*

PLUGAUXILIARYHEATERDBW2010

/80.D5

=B

+B2

B40

INTERIORTEMPERATURESENSOR

/67.E6

=K

+K4

C.X1*

PLUGCIRCULATINGPUMPDBW2010

/80.E6

=B

+B2

B42

SUNSENSORAIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM

/62.D7

=K

+K1

E1

REARLAMPLEFT

/25.E2

=B

+B1

B42.X

PLUGSUNSENSORAIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM

/62.D7

=K

+K1

E2

INDOORLIGHTING

/19.E7

=K

+K3

B43

INDUCTIVESWITCHDISTRIBUTORLH

/77.C7

=H

+H5

E2.X1

PLUGINDOORLIGHTING

/19.E7

=K

+K3

B44

INDUCTIVESWITCHLEVELLH

/77.C4

=H

+H5

E2.X2

PLUGINDOORLIGHTING

/19.E7

=K

+K3

B45

PRESSURESENSORHIGHPRESSURETRAVELPUMP

/54.C7

=H

+H4

E2.X3

PLUGINDOORLIGHTING

/19.E7

=K

+K3

B45.X

PLUGPRESSURESENSORHIGHPRESSURETRAVELPUMP

/54.C7

=H

+H4

E3

DRIVINGHEADLIGHTLEFT

/25.E4

=V

+V1

B200*

INDUCTIVESWITCHJOYSTICKSTEERING

/72.C4

=K

+K4

E3.X

PLUGDRIVINGHEADLIGHTLEFT

/25.E4

=V

+V1

B200.X*

PLUGINDUCTIVESWITCH

/72.C4

=K

+K4

E3.Xa*

PLUGCOUNTRYSPECIFICTYPE/EXECUTIONLEFT

/26.E3

=V

+V

B201*

PRESSURESWITCHJOYSTICKSTEERING

/72.C2

=H

+H3

E3.Xb*

PLUGCOUNTRYSPECIFICTYPE/EXECUTIONLEFT

/26.F3

=V

+V

B201.X*

PLUGPRESSURESWITCH

/72.C2

=H

+H3

E4

DRIVINGHEADLIGHTRIGHT

/25.E5

=V

+V1

B202*

SIGNALTRANSMITTERJOYSTICKSTEERING

/71.C6

=K

+K4

E4.X

PLUGDRIVINGHEADLIGHTRIGHT

/25.E5

=V

+V1

B202.X*

PLUGSIGNALTRANSMITTERJOYSTICKSTEERING

/71.C6

=K

+K4

E4.Xa*

PLUGCOUNTRYSPECIFICTYPE/EXECUTIONRIGHT

/26.E6

=V

+V

B203*

PRESSURESWITCHCENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEM

/78.D5

=V

+V1

E4.Xb*

PLUGCOUNTRYSPECIFICTYPE/EXECUTIONRIGHT

/26.F6

=V

+V

B203.X*

PLUGPRESSURESWITCH

/78.E5

=V

+V1

E5

REARLIGHTRIGHT

/25.E7

=B

+B2

B213*

INDUCTIVESWITCHCUTOFFTILTCYLINDER

/61.C7

=V

+V2

E6

REARLIGHTLEFT24V5W

/25.E2

=B

+B1

B213.X*

PLUGINDUCTIVESWITCH

/61.C7

=V

+V2

E7

REARLIGHTRIGHT24V5W

/25.E6

=B

+B2

B701

OILPRESSURE

/106.B5

=M

+M

E8

CONTEURLIGHTLEFT24V4W

/25.E3

=K

+K3

B701.X

PLUGOILPRESSURE

/106.B5

=M

+M

E9

CONTEURLIGHTRIGHT24V4W

/25.E6

=K

+K3

B703

CHARGEAIRPRESSURE

/106.B2

=M

+M

E10

WORKINGPROJECTORFRONTLEFT24V70W

/30.E4

=K

+K3

B703.X

PLUGCHARGEAIRPRESSURE

/106.B2

=M

+M

E10.X

PLUGWORKINGPROJECTORFRONTLEFT

/30.E4

=K

+K3

B707

PLUGCHARGEAIRTEMPERATURE

/107.C7

=M

+M

E10a

WORKINGPROJECTORFRONTLEFT24V70W

/30.E5

=K

+K3

B707.X

PLUGCHARGEAIRTEMPERATURE

/107.C7

=M

+M

E10a..X

PLUGWORKINGPROJECTORFRONTLEFT

/30.E5

=K

+K3

B708

COOLANTTEMPERATURE

/107.C5

=M

+M

E10b*

XENONWORKINGPROJECTOR

/30.E5

=K

+K3

B708.X

PLUGCOOLANTTEMPERATURE

/107.C5

=M

+M

E10b.X*

PLUGXENON

/30.E5

=K

+K3

B709

FUELTEMPERATURE

/107.C3

=M

+M

E11

WORKINGPROJECTORFRONTRIGHT

/30.E7

=K

+K3

B709.X

PLUGFUELTEMPERATURE

/107.C3

=M

+M

E11.X

PLUGWORKINGPROJECTORFRONTRIGHT

/30.E7

=K

+K3

B710

WATERDETECTOR

/106.C7

=M

+M

E11a

WORKINGPROJECTORFRONTRIGHT

/30.E7

=K

+K3

B710.X

PLUGWATERDETECTOR

/106.C7

=M

+M

E11a.X

PLUGWORKINGPROJECTORFRONTRIGHT

/30.E7

=K

+K3

PROJ: 8920980_003

FUNCTION

SHEET

BMK

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

FUNCTION

BMK

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

Ident.Nr.

BMKINDEX
WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

7
114

SHEET

SYSTEM PLACE

E11b*

XENONWORKINGPROJECTOR

/30.E8

=K

E11b.X*

PLUGXENON

/30.E8

E12*

WORKINGPROJECTORCABROOFREARLEFT

E12.b*

SYSTEM PLACE

+K3

F02*

VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSESL586

/84.C7

=H

+H

=K

+K3

F03

EMERGENCYSTEERINGPUMP

/19.D4

=H

+H5

/32.E3

=K

+K3

F03**

OPTIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSES40

/83.C6

=H

+H5.

WORKINGPROJECTORCABROOFREARLEFT

/32.E4

=K

+K3

F03*

VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSESL586

/84.C6

=H

+H5

E12.b.X*

PLUGE12b

/32.D4

=K

+K3

F07

Kl.30HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTS

/19.D5

=H

+H5

E12.X*

PLUGE12

/32.E3

=K

+K3

F07*

VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSESL586

/84.D7

=H

+H5

E12a*

WORKINGPROJECTORCABROOFREARLEFT

/32.E4

=K

+K3

F07**

OPTIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSES40

/83.D7

=H

+H5.

E12a.X*

PLUGE12a

/32.D4

=K

+K3

F07*.X1*

OPTIONBATTERYKS40

/83.D7

=H

+H5.

E13*

WORKINGPROJECTORCABROOFREARRIGHT

/32.E6

=K

+K3

F07*.X1

VERSIONBATTERYKSL586

/84.D7

=H

+H5

E13.b*

WORKINGPROJECTORCABROOFREARRIGHT

/32.E7

=K

+K3

F07.X1

PLUGKl.30HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTS

/19.D5

=H

+H5

E13.b.X*

PLUGE13b

/32.D7

=K

+K3

F07.X2

PLUGKl.30HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTS

/19.E5

=H

+H5

E13.X*

PLUGE13

/32.D6

=K

+K3

F07B

HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTSKl.15

/27.C1

=K

+K2

E13a*

WORKINGPROJECTORCABROOFREARRIGHT

/32.E7

=K

+K3

F10

DISPLAYUNIT

/35.D2

=K

+K2

E13a.X*

PLUGE13a

/32.D7

=K

+K3

F11

PRESSURESWITCHB28B32

/56.E1

=K

+K2

E14l

LICENCEPLATELIGHTLEFT24V10W

/25.D8

=H

+H1

F12*

CENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEMGROENEVELD

/78.B3

=K

+K2

E14r

LICENCEPLATELIGHTRIGHT24V10W

/25.D8

=H

+H1

F13

CONDENSERFAN

/68.B2

=K

+K2

E16

WORKINGPROJECTORREARLEFT

/31.E4

=H

+H1

F14*

DIESELPREHEATING

/55.A8

=K

+K2

E16.X

PLUGWORKINGPROJECTORREARLEFT

/31.E4

=H

+H1

F15

LHCONTROLLEVER

/51.A5

=K

+K2

E17

WORKINGPROJECTORREARRIGHT

/31.E7

=H

+H1

F18

WINDSCREENWIPERREAR

/28.C8

=K

+K2

E17.X

PLUGWORKINGPROJECTORREARRIGHT

/31.E7

=H

+H1

F19

Kl.15AIRCONDITIONINGELECTRONICS

/62.B2

=K

+K2

E200

RESERVELIGHTING

/45.D8

=K

+K4

F19A

Kl.30AIRCONDITIONINGELECTRONICS

/62.B1

=K

+K2

E200.X

PLUGRESERVELIGHTING

/45.D8

=K

+K4

F20

WINDSCREENWASHER,HOOTER

/28.C3

=K

+K2

F2

HIGHBEAMLEFT

/25.B5

=K

+K2

F21

LOWBEAM/DRIVINGLIGHT

/25.B3

=K

+K2

F3

HIGHBEAMHIGHBEAM

/25.B6

=K

+K2

F22

STOPLIGHTLIGHTING

/45.A8

=K

+K2

F4

DRIVINGLIGHTLEFT

/25.B3

=K

+K2

F23*

REVERSINGOBSTACLEDETECTORPARTICLEFILTER

/75.A3

=K

+K2

F5

DRIVINGLIGHTRIGHT

/25.B4

=K

+K2

F24

IGNITIONONMOTORCONTROL

/47.B4

=K

+K2

F6

PROFILELIGHT/PARKINGLIGHTLEFT

/20.C6

=K

+K2

F25

WARNINGBEACON

/33.C2

=K

+K2

F7

PROFILELIGHT/PARKINGLIGHTRIGHT

/20.C6

=K

+K2

F26

DIAGNOSTICPLUGIMMOBILISER

/40.C6

=K

+K2

F8

DRIVER'SSEATRADIOKl.58

/19.B8

=K

+K2

F27

PROFILELIGHT/IDENTIFICATION/CONTEURLIGHT

/20.C8

=K

+K2

F8A

INDOORLIGHTINGAUXILIARYHEATER

/19.B7

=K

+K2

F29

IGNITIONSTARTERSWITCHBYPASS

/19.B3

=K

+K2

F9

LHCONTROLLEVEROPTIONS

/51.A6

=K

+K2

F30

VOLTAGECONVERTER(RADIO)

/34.B2

=K

+K2

F01

MAINFUSES

/19.D2

=H

+H5

F31A

WORKINGPROJECTORFRONTLEFT

/30.B3

=K

+K2

F01**

OPTIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSES40

/83.C3

=H

+H5.

F31B

WORKINGPROJECTORFRONTRIGHT

/30.B5

=K

+K2

F01*

VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSESL586

/84.C3

=H

+H5

F32A

WORKINGPROJECTORREARLEFT

/31.B2

=K

+K2

F02

HEATINGFLANGE

/19.D4

=H

+H

F32B

WORKINGPROJECTORREARRIGHT

/31.B5

=K

+K2

F02**

OPTIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSES40

/83.C7

=H

+H.

F33A

WORKINGPROJECTORCABROOFREARLEFT

/32.B2

=K

+K2

PROJ: 8920980_003

FUNCTION

SHEET

BMK

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

FUNCTION

BMK

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

Ident.Nr.

BMKINDEX
WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

8
114

SHEET

SYSTEM PLACE

F33B

WORKINGPROJECTORCABROOFREARRIGHT

/32.B4

=K

F34*

REFUELLINGPUMP

/55.A6

F35

MASTER

F36

SYSTEM PLACE

+K2

F010.X1

PLUGACKNOWLEDGEMENTHEATINGFLANGE

/19.C5

=H

+H5

=K

+K2

F010.X2

PLUGACKNOWLEDGEMENTHEATERFLANGE

/19.D5

=H

+H5

/40.B4

=K

+K2

F208*

DIESELPREHEATING40

/82.C4

=K

+K2

MOTORCONTROL

/47.B3

=K

+K2

F209*

INPUTMODULE4LOGIC

/50.B1

=K

+K2

F38

MOTORCONTROLLOGIC

/47.B5

=K

+K2

F210*

Kl:15INPUTMODULE4

/50.B3

=K

+K2

F39*

PRESELECTIONDIALAUXILIARYHEATER

/81.A5

=K

+K2

F213*

CUTOFFTILTCYLINDER

/61.C2

=K

+K2

F40*

AUXILIARYHEATER

/81.A8

=K

+K2

F216*

AUTOMATICRUNOUT

/47.B8

=K

+K2

F42*

AUXILIARYHEATERNOZZLESTICKPREHEATER

/80.D2

=K

+K2

G1

BATTERY

/19.E2

=B

+B

F43

MODULESLOGIC

/41.B2

=K

+K2

G1*

VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSESL586

/84.D3

=B

+B1

F44

INPUTMODULE1

/41.B7

=K

+K2

G1**

OPTIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSES40

/83.D3

=B

+B1.

F45

INPUTMODULE2

/41.B3

=K

+K2

G2

BATTERY

/19.E3

=B

+B1

F46*

INPUTMODULE3

/71.A3

=K

+K2

G2*

VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSESL586

/84.D4

=B

+B1

F47

OUTPUTMODULE1BK1

/42.B4

=K

+K2

G2**

OPTIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSES40

/83.D4

=B

+B1.

F48

OUTPUTMODULE1BK1

/42.B7

=K

+K2

G3

ALTERNATOR

/19.E4

=M

+M

F49*

OUTPUTMODULE1

/55.E2

=K

+K2

G3*

VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSESL586

/84.E6

=M

+M

F50*

WORKINGBASKET

/59.B1

=K

+K2

G3**

OPTIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSES40

/83.E6

=M

+M.

F51

OUTPUTMODULE2BK4

/43.A6

=K

+K2

G700*

GENERATOROPTION

/105.B4

=M

+M

F52

OUTPUTMODULE2BK3

/43.A7

=K

+K2

G700

GENERATOR

/105.B3

=M

+M

F53

OUTPUTMODULE1DO3

/77.B2

=K

+K2

H15

BLINKERLEFT24V21WORANGE

/25.E4

=V

+V1

F54

MASTERLOGIC

/40.B5

=K

+K2

H16

BLINKERRIGHT24V21W

/25.E5

=V

+V1

F55

OUTPUTMODULE2BK1

/44.A4

=K

+K2

H17

BLINKERBACKLEFT24V21W

/25.E2

=B

+B1

F56

OUTPUTMODULE2BK2

/44.A7

=K

+K2

H18

BLINKERRIGHTREAR24V21W

/25.E7

=B

+B2

F59

OUTPUTMODULE1BK4

/43.A2

=K

+K2

H20

BRAKELIGHTLEFT24V21W

/25.E2

=B

+B1

F60

OUTPUTMODULE1BK3

/43.A3

=K

+K2

H21

STOPLIGHTRIGHT24V21W

/25.E7

=B

+B2

F61

OUTPUTMODULE2DO3

/45.A1

=K

+K2

H22

WARNINGBEACON

/33.E3

=K

+K3

F62

OUTPUTMODULE2DO4

/45.A2

=K

+K2

H22.X

PLUGWARNINGBEACON

/33.E3

=K

+K3

F63*

OUTPUTMODULE3BK1

/48.A4

=K

+K2

H22a

OPTIONBACKUPALARM

/45.C3

=H

+H1

F64*

OUTPUTMODULE3BK2

/48.A6

=K

+K2

H22a.X1*

PLUGOPTIONBACKUPALARM

/45.C3

=H

+H1

F65*

OUTPUTMODULE3BK3

/49.A1

=K

+K2

H22a.X2*

PLUGOPTIONBACKUPALARM

/45.D3

=H

+H1

F66*

OUTPUTMODULE3BK4

/49.A3

=K

+K2

H40

BUZZER

/54.C8

=K

+K2

F71

KEYPADS

/39.B2

=K

+K2

H40.X1

PLUGBUZZER

/54.C8

=K

+K2

F73*

REARAREAMONITORING

/76.A5

=K

+K2

H40.X2

PLUGBUZZER

/54.C8

=K

+K2

F74

MIRROR/REARWINDOWHEATER

/33.B6

=K

+K2

H50

PROFILELIGHT/PARKINGLIGHTLEFTFRONT24V4W

/25.E4

=V

+V1

F75

RADIOKl.58ELECTRICALSOCKET12V

/34.B5

=K

+K2

H51

PROFILELIGHT/PARKINGLIGHT24V4W

/25.E5

=V

+V1

F76

RADIO

/34.B5

=K

+K2

H52

REVERSINGLAMPLEFT

/25.E3

=B

+B1

F010

FEEDBACKHEATINGFLANGE

/19.C5

=H

+H5

H53

REVERSINGLAMPRIGHT24V21W

/25.E6

=B

+B2

PROJ: 8920980_003

FUNCTION

SHEET

BMK

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

FUNCTION

BMK

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

Ident.Nr.

BMKINDEX
WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

9
114

SHEET

SYSTEM PLACE

H54

LOWBEAM24V70WH7

/25.E4

=V

H55

LOWBEAM24V70WH7

/25.E5

H56

HIGHBEAM24V70WH3

H57

SYSTEM PLACE

+V1

K33B

WORKINGPROJECTORCABROOFREARRIGHT

/32.B6

=K

+K2

=V

+V1

K208*

WORKINGBASKET

/59.B6

=K

+K2.

/25.E4

=V

+V1

K213*

CUTOFFTILTCYLINDER

/61.C6

=K

+K2

HIGHBEAM24V70WH3

/25.E5

=V

+V1

K216*

AUTOMATICRUNOUT

/47.D8

=K

+K2

H58*

REVERSEWARNINGLIGHTREDFLASHING

/55.C3

=B

+B1

K227*

DIESELPREHEATING40

/82.C5

=K

+K2

H59*

REVERSEWARNINGLIGHTREDFLASHING

/55.C4

=B

+B1

K228*

DIESELPREHEATING40

/82.C6

=K

+K2

K1

FLASHERUNIT

/27.C8

=K

+K2

K240

HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTS

/27.A4

=K

+K2

K2

PROFILELIGHT/IDENTIFICATION/CONTEURLIGHT

/20.C7

=K

+K2

K243*

AUXILIARYHEATERNOZZLESTICKPREHEATER

/80.D3

=K

+K2

K3

LOWBEAM

/25.B5

=K

+K2

K244

CONDENSERFAN

/68.B4

=K

+K2

K3A

HIGHBEAM

/25.B7

=K

+K2

K245

CONDENSERFAN

/69.B7

=K

+K

K5

SIMULATIOND+

/20.C4

=K

+K2

K245

CONDENSERFAN

/68.B7

=K

+K2

K5a

INTERVALWINDSCREENWIPERFRONT

/28.B4

=K

+K1

K246*

AUTOMATICLIGHTINGSHUTDOWN

/49.D7

=K

+K2

K5a.X

PLUGINTERVALWINDSCREENWIPERFRONT

/28.C5

=K

+K1

K248*

CONDENSERFAN

/69.B4

=K

+K2.

K8

WINDSCREENWIPERREAR

/28.C7

=K

+K2

Kl.15*

Kl.15CUTOFFTILTCYLINDER

/61.B2

=K

+K2

K9

WARNINGBEACON

/33.C3

=K

+K2

Kl.15.X

CONNECTIONKl.15A4

/19.B2

=K

+K2

K01

IGNITIONSTARTERSWITCHBYPASS

/19.C2

=K

+K2

Kl.30.X

CONNECTIONKl.30A4

/19.D2

=K

+K2

K04

HEATINGFLANGE

/19.D6

=H

+H5

Kl.30.Xa*

Kl.30DIESELPREHEATING40

/82.B3

=K

+K2

K04**

OPTIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSES40

/83.B7

=H

+H5.

Kl.30a*

Kl.30AUTOMATICRUNOUT

/47.A8

=K

+K2

K04*

VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSESL586

/84.B7

=H

+H5

L2

LEDF2

/25.C6

=K

+K2

K10

MIRROR/REARWINDOWHEATER

/33.B7

=K

+K2

L3

LEDF3

/25.C6

=K

+K2

K11

EMERGENCYSTEERINGPUMP

/23.C2

=H

+H4

L4

LEDF4

/25.C4

=K

+K2

K11*

VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSESL586

/84.B6

=H

+H4

L5

LEDF5

/25.C4

=K

+K2

K11**

OPTIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSES40

/83.B6

=H

+H4.

L6

LEDF6

/20.C6

=K

+K2

K11*.X3*

OPTIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSES40

/83.B6

=H

+H4.

L7

LEDF7

/20.C7

=K

+K2

K11*.X4*

OPTIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSES40

/83.B6

=H

+H4.

L8

LEDF8

/19.B8

=K

+K2

K12

RADIOELECTRICALSOCKET12V

/34.B4

=K

+K2

L8A

LEDF8A

/19.B7

=K

+K2

K22

HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTKl.15

/27.C2

=K

+K2

L9

LEDF9

/51.B6

=K

+K2

K22a

HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTSMG

/27.C3

=K

+K2

L07B

LEDF07B

/27.D1

=K

+K2

K22b

HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTSMG

/27.C4

=K

+K2

L10

LEDF10

/35.E2

=K

+K2

K25*

HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTSUSA

/27.C5

=K

+K2

L11

LEDF11

/56.E1

=K

+K2

K26*

HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTSUSA

/27.C7

=K

+K2

L12*

LEDF12

/78.B3

=K

+K2

K31A

WORKINGPROJECTORFRONTLEFT

/30.B4

=K

+K2

L13

LEDF13

/68.B3

=K

+K2

K31B

WORKINGPROJECTORFRONTRIGHT

/30.B7

=K

+K2

L14*

LEDF14

/55.B8

=K

+K2

K32A

WORKINGPROJECTORREARLEFT

/31.B4

=K

+K2

L15

LEDF15

/51.B5

=K

+K2

K32B

WORKINGPROJECTORREARRIGHT

/31.B7

=K

+K2

L18

LEDF18

/28.C8

=K

+K2

K33A

WORKINGPROJECTORCABROOFREARLEFT

/32.B3

=K

+K2

L19

LEDF19

/62.B2

=K

+K2

PROJ: 8920980_003

FUNCTION

SHEET

BMK

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

FUNCTION

BMK

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

Ident.Nr.

BMKINDEX
WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

10
114

SHEET

SYSTEM PLACE

L19A

LEDF19A

/62.B1

=K

L20

LEDF20

/28.C3

L21

LEDF21

L22

SYSTEM PLACE

+K2

L55

LEDF55

/44.B5

=K

+K2

=K

+K2

L56

LEDF56

/44.B7

=K

+K2

/25.C3

=K

+K2

L59

LEDF59

/43.B2

=K

+K2

LEDF22

/45.B8

=K

+K2

L60

LEDF60

/43.B3

=K

+K2

L23*

LEDF23

/75.B3

=K

+K2

L61

LEDF61

/45.B2

=K

+K2

L24

LEDF24

/47.B4

=K

+K2

L62

LEDF62

/45.B3

=K

+K2

L25

LEDF25

/33.C2

=K

+K2

L63*

LEDF63

/48.B4

=K

+K2

L26

LEDF26

/40.D6

=K

+K2

L64*

LEDF64

/48.B6

=K

+K2

L27

LEDF27

/20.C8

=K

+K2

L65*

LEDF65

/49.B2

=K

+K2

L29

LEDF29

/19.C3

=K

+K2

L66*

LEDF66

/49.B3

=K

+K2

L30

LEDF30

/34.B2

=K

+K2

L71

LEDF71

/39.B2

=K

+K2

L31A

LEDF31A

/30.C3

=K

+K2

L73*

LEDF73

/76.B5

=K

+K2

L31B

LEDF31B

/30.C6

=K

+K2

L74

LEDF74

/33.C6

=K

+K2

L32A

LEDF32A

/31.B3

=K

+K2

L75

LEDF75

/34.B5

=K

+K2

L32B

LEDF32B

/31.B6

=K

+K2

L76

LEDF76

/34.B6

=K

+K2

L33A

LEDF33A

/32.B2

=K

+K2

L77

LEDD+

/20.C4

=K

+K2

L33B

LEDF33B

/32.B5

=K

+K2

M1

STARTERMOTOR

/19.E3

=M

+M

L34*

LEDF34

/55.B6

=K

+K2

M1*

VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSESL586

/84.E5

=M

+M

L35

LEDF35

/40.C4

=K

+K2

M1**

OPTIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSES40

/83.E5

=M

+M.

L36

LEDF36

/47.B3

=K

+K2

M2

WINDSCREENWIPERFRONT

/28.D4

=K

+K1

L38

LEDF38

/47.B5

=K

+K2

M2.X1

PLUGWINDSCREENWIPERFRONT

/28.D4

=K

+K1

L39*

LEDF39

/81.B5

=K

+K2

M2.X2*

PLUGWINDSCREENWIPERFRONTRESERVE

/28.D5

=K

+K1

L40*

LEDF40

/81.B8

=K

+K2

M3

WINDSCREENWIPERREAR

/28.D7

=K

+K2

L42*

LEDF42

/80.D2

=K

+K2

M3.X

PLUGWINDSCREENWIPERREAR

/28.D7

=K

+K2

L43

LEDF43

/41.B2

=K

+K2

M4

WASHINGPUMPFRONT

/28.D6

=K

+K1

L44

LEDF44

/41.B7

=K

+K2

M4.X

PLUGWASHINGPUMPFRONT

/28.E6

=K

+K1

L45

LEDF45

/41.B4

=K

+K2

M5

FANMOTOR

/64.E3

=K

+K4

L46*

LEDF46

/71.B3

=K

+K2

M5.X

PLUGFANMOTOR

/64.D2

=K

+K4

L47

LEDF47

/42.B4

=K

+K2

M6

LIEBHERRCENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEM

/77.C3

=H

+H5

L48

LEDF48

/42.B7

=K

+K2

M6.X

PLUGLIEBHERRCENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEM

/77.D3

=H

+H5

L49*

LEDF49

/55.E2

=K

+K2

M7

COMPRESSORSEAT

/19.E8

=K

+K2

L50*

LEDF50

/59.B2

=K

+K2

M7.X

PLUGCOMPRESSORSEAT

/19.E8

=K

+K2

L51

LEDF51

/43.B6

=K

+K2

M8

EMERGENCYSTEERINGPUMP

/23.D2

=H

+H4

L52

LEDF52

/43.B7

=K

+K2

M8*

VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSESL586

/84.B5

=H

+H4

L53

LEDF53

/77.B2

=K

+K2

M8**

OPTIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSES40

/83.B5

=H

+H4.

L54

LEDF54

/40.C5

=K

+K2

M9

WASHINGPUMPREAR

/28.D8

=K

+K4

PROJ: 8920980_003

FUNCTION

SHEET

BMK

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

FUNCTION

BMK

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

Ident.Nr.

BMKINDEX
WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

11
114

SHEET

SYSTEM PLACE

M9.X

PLUGWASHINGPUMPREAR

/28.D8

=K

M10*

REFUELLINGPUMP

/55.E6

M11

WATERVALVE

M11.X

SYSTEM PLACE

+K4

OLE17*

CONNECTIONAUXILIARYHEATER

/80.D8

=K

+K2

=H

+H1

OLE18*

PLUGRELAYBOARD

/80.E2

=K

+K2

/65.E3

=K

+K4

OLE19*

LIGHTINGS210

/59.E3

=K

+K2

PLUGWATERVALVE

/65.E2

=K

+K4

OLE20*

LIGHTINGS210

/59.E4

=K

+K2

M13*

CONDENSERFAN

/69.D6

=H

+H3a

OLE21*

CONNECTIONAUXILIARYHEATERTHERMO90

/81.D3

=B

+B2

M13

CONDENSERFAN

/68.D7

=H

+H3

OLE22*

CONNECTIONAUXILIARYHEATER

/80.E7

=B

+B2

M13.X

PLUGCONDENSERFAN

/68.D7

=H

+H3

OLE23*

REVERSINGOBSTACLEDETECTOR

/75.C1

=H

+H3

M13.X*

PLUGCONDENSERFAN

/69.D6

=H

+H3a

OLE23*

QUICKCHANGEDEVICE

/57.E7

=K

+K4

M14

RECIRCULATEDAIRFLAP

/65.E7

=K

+K4

P1

WORKINGHOURMETER

/20.A3

=K

+K4

M14.X

PLUGRECIRCULATEDAIRFLAP

/65.E6

=K

+K4

P1.X1

PLUGWORKINGHOURMETER

/20.A3

=K

+K4

M15*

CIRCULATINGPUMPDWB2010

/80.D7

=H

+H1

P1.X2

PLUGWORKINGHOURMETER

/20.B3

=K

+K4

M15

FOOTFLAP

/66.E3

=K

+K4

R1

ANGLESENSORINCHPEDAL

/52.C3

=K

+K6

M15.X*

PLUGCIRCULATINGPUMPDWB2010

/80.D7

=H

+H1

R1.X

PLUGANGLESENSOR

/52.C3

=K

+K6

M15.X

PLUGFOOTFLAP

/66.E2

=K

+K4

R2

DROPRESISTORL2

/25.C6

=K

+K2

M16

MIDDLEFLAP

/66.E7

=K

+K4

R3

DROPRESISTORL3

/25.C6

=K

+K2

M16.X

PLUGMIDDLEFLAP

/66.E6

=K

+K4

R4

DROPRESISTORL4

/25.C4

=K

+K2

M17

HEADFLAP

/67.E3

=K

+K4

R5

ANGLESENSORGASPEDAL

/52.C7

=K

+K6

M17.X

PLUGHEADFLAP

/67.E3

=K

+K4

R5

DROPRESISTORL5

/25.C4

=K

+K2

M700

STARTERMOTOR

/105.B6

=M

+M

R5.X

PLUGANGLESENSOR

/52.C6

=K

+K6

MO1

MVMODULATION

/53.C2

=F

+F3

R6

DROPRESISTORL6

/20.C6

=K

+K2

OLE1

SPARELINEKl.W

/19.C4

=K

+K2

R6a*

MIRRORHEATING

/33.E6

=K

+K3

OLE2*

CONNECTIONAUXILIARYHEATER

/19.D7

=K

+K2

R6a.X*

PLUGMIRRORHEATING

/33.E6

=K

+K3

OLE3*

WORKINGPROJECTORCABROOFREAR

/31.A8

=K

+K2

R6b*

MIRRORHEATING

/33.E6

=K

+K3

OLE4*

LIGHTINGRFWEOAOPTIONAL

/33.E5

=K

+K2

R6b.X*

PLUGMIRRORHEATING

/33.E6

=K

+K3

OLE5*

PLUGCOMFORTCONTROL3.+4.CONTROLCIRCUIT

/51.F8

=K

+K2

R7

DROPRESISTORL7

/20.C7

=K

+K2

OLE6*

PLUGCOMFORTCONTROL3.+4.CONTROLCIRCUIT

/51.F8

=K

+K2

R8

DROPRESISTORL8

/19.B8

=K

+K2

OLE7*

LOGICOUTPUTMODULE3

/41.D1

=K

+K2

R8A

DROPRESISTORL8A

/19.B7

=K

+K2

OLE8*

LOGICINPUTMODULE3

/42.D1

=K

+K2

R9

DROPRESISTORL9

/51.B6

=K

+K2

OLE9*

PLUGRELAYBOARD

/45.C8

=K

+K2

R9A*

EXCITATIONRESERVE

/20.C2

=K

+K2

OLE10*

AUTOMATICRUNOUT

/47.B7

=K

+K2

R9B

EXCITATIONGG6

/20.C2

=K

+K2

OLE11*

CONNECTIONIMMOBILISER

/79.A4

=K

+K2

R07B

DROPRESISTORL07B

/27.D1

=K

+K2

OLE12*

CONNECTIONIMMOBILISER

/79.A8

=K

+K2

R10

DROPRESISTORL10

/35.E2

=K

+K2

OLE13*

CONNECTIONIMMOBILISER

/79.F7

=K

+K2

R10*

DIESELPREHEATING

/82.E5

=M

+M

OLE14*

PLUGRELAYBOARD

/80.B3

=K

+K2

R10.X*

PLUGDIESELPREHEATING

/82.E5

=M

+M

OLE15*

PLUGRELAYBOARD

/80.B6

=K

+K2

R11

DROPRESISTORL11

/56.E1

=K

+K2

OLE16*

PLUGRELAYBOARD

/80.C7

=K

+K2

R12

REARWINDOWHEATER

/33.E7

=K

+K2

PROJ: 8920980_003

FUNCTION

SHEET

BMK

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

FUNCTION

BMK

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

Ident.Nr.

BMKINDEX
WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

12
114

SHEET

SYSTEM PLACE

R12.X1

PLUGREARWINDOWHEATER

/33.E7

=K

R12.X2

PLUGREARWINDOWHEATER

/33.E7

R12:*

DROPRESISTORL12

R13

SYSTEM PLACE

+K2

R45

DROPRESISTORL45

/41.B4

=K

+K2

=K

+K2

R46*

DROPRESISTORL46

/71.B3

=K

+K2

/78.B3

=K

+K2

R47

DROPRESISTORL47

/42.B4

=K

+K2

DROPRESISTORL13

/68.B3

=K

+K2

R48

DROPRESISTORL48

/42.B7

=K

+K2

R13*

DIESELPREHEATING

/55.E8

=M

+M

R49*

DROPRESISTORL49

/55.E2

=K

+K2

R13.X*

PLUGDIESELPREHEATING

/55.E8

=M

+M

R50*

DROPRESISTORL50

/59.B2

=K

+K2

R14*

DROPRESISTORL14

/55.B8

=K

+K2

R51

DROPRESISTORL51

/43.B6

=K

+K2

R15

DROPRESISTORL15

/51.B5

=K

+K2

R52

DROPRESISTORL52

/43.B7

=K

+K2

R18

DROPRESISTORL18

/28.C8

=K

+K2

R53

DROPRESISTORF53

/77.B2

=K

+K2

R19

DROPRESISTORL19

/62.B2

=K

+K2

R54

DROPRESISTORL54

/40.C5

=K

+K2

R19A

DROPRESISTORL19A

/62.B1

=K

+K2

R55

DROPRESISTORL55

/44.B5

=K

+K2

R20

DROPRESISTORL20

/28.C3

=K

+K2

R56

DROPRESISTORL56

/44.B7

=K

+K2

R21

DROPRESISTORL21

/25.C3

=K

+K2

R59

DROPRESISTORL59

/43.B2

=K

+K2

R22

DROPRESISTORL22

/45.B8

=K

+K2

R60

DROPRESISTORL60

/43.B3

=K

+K2

R23*

DROPRESISTORL23

/75.B3

=K

+K2

R61

DROPRESISTORL61

/45.B2

=K

+K2

R24

DROPRESISTORL24

/47.B4

=K

+K2

R62

DROPRESISTORL62

/45.B3

=K

+K2

R25

DROPRESISTORL25

/33.C2

=K

+K2

R63*

DROPRESISTORL63

/48.B4

=K

+K2

R26

DROPRESISTORL26

/40.D6

=K

+K2

R64*

DROPRESISTORL64

/48.B6

=K

+K2

R27

DROPRESISTORL27

/20.C8

=K

+K2

R65*

DROPRESISTORL65

/49.B2

=K

+K2

R29

DROPRESISTORL29

/19.C3

=K

+K2

R66*

DROPRESISTORL66

/49.B3

=K

+K2

R30

DROPRESISTORL30

/34.B2

=K

+K2

R71

DROPRESISTORL71

/39.B2

=K

+K2

R31A

DROPRESISTORL31A

/30.C3

=K

+K2

R73*

DROPRESISTORL73

/76.B5

=K

+K2

R31B

DROPRESISTORL31B

/30.C6

=K

+K2

R74

DROPRESISTORL74

/33.C6

=K

+K2

R32A

DROPRESISTORL32A

/31.B3

=K

+K2

R75

DROPRESISTORL75

/34.B5

=K

+K2

R32B

DROPRESISTORL32B

/31.B6

=K

+K2

R76

DROPRESISTORL75

/34.B6

=K

+K2

R33A

DROPRESISTORL33A

/32.B2

=K

+K2

R77

DROPRESISTORL77

/20.C4

=K

+K2

R33B

DROPRESISTORL33B

/32.B5

=K

+K2

R701

HEATERFLANGE

/19.F6

=M

+M

R34*

DROPRESISTORL34

/55.B6

=K

+K2

S1

IGNITIONSWITCH

/19.A3

=K

+K4

R35

DROPRESISTORL35

/40.C4

=K

+K2

S1.X1

PLUGIGNITIONSWITCH

/19.A3

=K

+K4

R36

DROPRESISTORL36

/47.B3

=K

+K2

S1.X1.8a*

CONNECTIONIMMOBILISER

/79.A6

=K

+K4

R38

DROPRESISTORL38

/47.B5

=K

+K2

S1.X2

PLUGIGNITIONSWITCH

/19.B4

=K

+K4

R39*

DROPRESISTORL39

/81.B5

=K

+K2

S1.X3

PLUGIGNITIONSWITCH

/19.B4

=K

+K4

R40*

DROPRESISTORL40

/81.B8

=K

+K2

S2

LHCONTROLLEVERVNRANDOPTIONS

/51.E4

=K

+K4

R42*

DROPRESISTORL42

/80.D2

=K

+K2

S2.1

FORWARDNEUTRALBACKWARDS

/51.F4

=K

+K4

R43

DROPRESISTORL43

/41.B2

=K

+K2

S2.2

KICKDOWN

/51.F5

=K

+K4

R44

DROPRESISTORL44

/41.B7

=K

+K2

S2.3

PUSHBUTTONSWITCHOPTION1

/51.F5

=K

+K4

PROJ: 8920980_003

FUNCTION

SHEET

BMK

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

FUNCTION

BMK

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

Ident.Nr.

BMKINDEX
WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

13
114

SHEET

SYSTEM PLACE

S2.4

PUSHBUTTONSWITCHOPTION2

/51.F6

=K

S2.X

PLUGLHCONTROLLEVERVNRANDOPTIONS

/51.E5

S2a*

LHCONTROLLEVERWITHANALOGUESENSOR+GRIPSENSOR

S2a.X2*

SYSTEM PLACE

+K4

SPLICE.X7

REVERSINGLAMP

/25.D7

=H

+H4

=K

+K4

SPLICE.X8

BRAKELIGHT

/25.F1

=H

+H4

/60.D4

=K

+K4

SPLICE.X10*

CENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEMGROENEVELD

/78.B2

=H

+H3

PLUGLHCONTROLLEVER

/60.D5

=K

+K4

SPLICE.X30*

WORKINGBASKET

/59.D4

=K

+K6

S3

STEERINGCOLUMNSWITCH

/25.B1

=K

+K1

SPLICE.X70*

LHCONTROLLEVERWITHANALOGUESENSORGRIPSENSOR

/60.C5

=K

+K

S3.X1

PLUGSTEERINGCOLUMNSWITCH

/28.E2

=K

+K1

Splice.X1

LOGICMODULES

/41.D2

=K

+K

S3.X2

PLUGSTEERINGCOLUMNSWITCH

/25.A2

=K

+K1

Splice.X3

OPTIONSLHCONTROLLEVER

/51.D5

=K

+K

S15

BATTERYMAINSWITCH

/19.E1

=H

+H5

Splice.X4*

CONDENSERFAN

/69.D4

=K

+K

S15*

VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSESL586

/84.E2

=H

+H5

Splice.X9

WINDSCREENWIPERFRONT

/28.A5

=K

+K

S15**

OPTIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSES40

/83.E2

=H

+H5.

Splice.X11*

MIRROR/REARWINDOWHEATER

/33.D6

=K

+K3

S23*

QUICKCHANGEDEVICE

/57.C7

=K

+K4

Splice.X12*

MIRROR/REARWINDOWHEATER

/33.F6

=K

+K3

S23.X1*

PLUGQUICKCHANGEDEVICE

/57.C7

=K

+K4

T1

VOLTAGECONVERTER

/34.B7

=K

+K2

S23.X2*

PLUGQUICKCHANGEDEVICE

/57.D7

=K

+K4

T1.X

PLUGVOLTAGECONVERTER

/34.A7

=K

+K2

S23a*

QUICKCHANGEDEVICE

/57.C6

=K

+K4

V1

FREEWHEELINGDIODEK01

/19.C2

=K

+K2

S43*

BACKUPALARMCANBESWITCHEDOFF

/45.A7

=K

+K4

V2*

BLOCKINGDIODE

/28.C1

=H

+H

S43.X1*

PLUGBACKUPALARM

/45.A7

=K

+K4

V2

FREEWHEELINGDIODEk01.30

/19.C3

=K

+K2

S43.X2*

PLUGBACKUPALARM

/45.A7

=K

+K4

V2.X1*

PLUGBLOCKINGDIODE

/28.B1

=H

+H

S202*

PUSHBUTTONSWITCHJOYSTICKSTEERING

/72.C3

=K

+K4

V2.X2*

PLUGBLOCKINGDIODE

/28.C1

=H

+H

S204*

REFUELLINGPUMP

/55.C6

=H

+H2

V3

FREEWHEELINGDIODEK12

/34.B4

=K

+K2

S210*

WORKINGBASKET

/59.D3

=K

+K4

V8

FREEWHEELINGDIODEK5

/20.C3

=K

+K2

S210.X1*

PLUGWORKINGBASKET

/59.D3

=K

+K4

V9

FREEWHEELINGDIODEK3

/25.C5

=K

+K2

S210.X2*

PLUGWORKINGBASKET

/59.D3

=K

+K4

V10

FREEWHEELINGDIODEK2

/20.C7

=K

+K2

S212*

RFWEOAOPTIONAL

/33.C4

=K

+K4

V11

FREEWHEELINGDIODEK22

/27.C3

=K

+K2

S212.X1*

PLUGRFWEOAOPTIONAL

/33.B4

=K

+K4

V12

FREEWHEELINGDIODEK22a

/27.C4

=K

+K2

S212.X2*

PLUGRFWEOAOPTIONAL

/33.C5

=K

+K4

V13

FREEWHEELINGDIODEK22b

/27.C4

=K

+K2

S212a*

SYMBOLRFWEOAOPTIONAL

/33.B4

=K

+K4

V14*

FREEWHEELINGDIODEK25

/27.C6

=K

+K2

S213*

EMERGENCYOFF1WORKINGBASKET

/59.D7

=K

+K4

V15*

FREEWHEELINGDIODEK26

/27.C7

=K

+K2

S213*

CUTOFFTILTCYLINDER

/61.C4

=V

+V1

V16

FREEWHEELINGDIODEK31A

/30.B5

=K

+K2

S213.X1*

PLUGCUTOFFTILTCYLINDER

/61.C4

=V

+V1

V17

FREEWHEELINGDIODEK31B

/30.B7

=K

+K2

S213.X2*

PLUGCUTOFFTILTCYLINDER

/61.C4

=V

+V1

V18

FREEWHEELINGDIODEK32A

/31.B4

=K

+K2

S214*

EMERGENCYOFF2WORKINGBASKET

/59.D8

=K

+K4

V19

FREEWHEELINGDIODEK32B

/31.B7

=K

+K2

S216*

EMERGENCYOFFAUTOMATICRUNOUT

/47.C8

=K

+K3

V20

FREEWHEELINGDIODEK33A

/32.B4

=K

+K2

S222

COMFORTCONTROL3.+4.COMFORTCONTROL

/51.E7

=K

+K4

V21

FREEWHEELINGDIODEK33B

/32.B6

=K

+K2

S222.X1*

PLUGCOMFORTCONTROL3.+4.CONTROLCIRCUIT

/51.E7

=K

+K4

V32

FREEWHEELINGDIODEK244

/68.B4

=K

+K2

S222.X2*

PLUGCOMFORTCONTROL3.+4.CONTROLCIRCUIT

/51.E8

=K

+K4

V32C

BLOCKINGDIODE

/31.B7

=K

+K2

SPLICE.X2

SPLICELOGICMODULES

/42.C2

=K

+K2

V33

FREEWHEELINGDIODEK244

/68.B4

=K

+K2

PROJ: 8920980_003

FUNCTION

SHEET

BMK

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

FUNCTION

BMK

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

Ident.Nr.

BMKINDEX
WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

14
114

SHEET

SYSTEM PLACE

V33C

BLOCKINGDIODE

/32.B6

=K

V34

FREEWHEELINGDIODEK245

/68.B7

V35

FREEWHEELINGDIODEK245

V36

SYSTEM PLACE

+K2

X2.B.50*

PLUGCABFLOORX2.S.50

/69.D6

=K

+K6

=K

+K2

X2.B.51*

PLUGCABFLOORX2.S.51

/69.D7

=K

+K6

/68.B7

=K

+K2

X2.B.52*

PLUGCABFLOORX2.S.52

/69.E7

=K

+K6

FREEWHEELINGDIODEK246

/49.D7

=K

+K

X2.J

HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTSEU

/27.C6

=K

+K2

V37

FREEWHEELINGDIODEK246

/49.D7

=K

+K

X2.S

PLUGCABFLOOR

/62.C5

=K

+K6

V46*

FREEWHEELINGDIODEK243

/80.D2

=K

+K2

X2.S**

PLUGCABFLOOROPTION

/69.E8

=K

+K6

V48*

FREEWHEELINGDIODEK246

/49.D8

=K

+K2

X2.S.50*

PLUGCABFLOORX2.S.50

/69.D6

=K

+K6

V49

FREEWHEELINGDIODEK245

/68.B7

=K

+K2

X2.S.51*

PLUGCABFLOORX2.S.51

/69.D7

=K

+K6

V50

FREEWHEELINGDIODEK244

/68.B5

=K

+K2

X2.S.52*

PLUGCABFLOORX2.S.52

/69.E7

=K

+K6

V53

FREEWHEELINGDIODEK240

/27.A3

=K

+K2

X3*

PLUGPRESELECTIONDIALTHERMO90

/81.B1

=K

+K4

V57

FREEWHEELINGDIODEK10

/33.C8

=K

+K2

X3.J

HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTSUSA

/27.C8

=K

+K2

V58

FREEWHEELINGDIODEK9

/33.C3

=K

+K2

X4*

PLUGPRESELECTIONDIALDBW2010

/80.B1

=K

+K4

V59

FREEWHEELINGDIODEK8

/28.C6

=K

+K2

X4.J*

JUMPERRESERVE

/20.C1

=K

+K2

V60

FREEWHEELINGDIODEK3A

/25.C7

=K

+K2

X5*

PLUGNOZZLESTICKPREHEATERDBW2010

/80.E3

=B

+B2

V80

BLOCKINGDIODE

/20.B2

=K

+K2

X5.J*

JUMPERRESERVE

/20.C2

=K

+K2

V81

BLOCKINGDIODE

/20.C3

=K

+K2

X6.J

JUMPERGG6

/20.C2

=K

+K2

V82

BLOCKINGDIODE

/20.D3

=K

+K2

X11.ST1*

PLUGAUXILIARYHEATERTHERMO90

/81.D5

=B

+B2

V83*

BLOCKINGDIODE

/27.D2

=K

+K2

X12.ST2*

PLUGAUXILIARYHEATERTHERMO90

/81.C6

=B

+B2

V84*

BLOCKINGDIODE

/27.D2

=K

+K2

X13.ST3*

PLUGAUXILIARYHEATERTHERMO90

/81.D7

=B

+B2

V85

BLOCKINGDIODE

/27.D3

=K

+K2

X16.B

PLUGLIGHTINGREARHATCH

/31.D4

=H

+H

V86

BLOCKINGDIODE

/27.D4

=K

+K2

X16.S

PLUGLIGHTINGREARHATCH

/31.D4

=H

+H

V87

BLOCKINGDIODE

/27.D8

=K

+K2

X22a.B

PLUGCABIN

/30.D4

=K

+K4

V88*

BLOCKINGDIODE

/27.D8

=K

+K2

X22a.S

PLUGCABIN

/30.D4

=K

+K4

V89

BLOCKINGDIODE

/27.C8

=K

+K2

X22b.B

PLUGWIRINGHARNESSCABIN

/19.D7

=K

+K4

V100*

BLOCKINGDIODE

/57.B7

=K

+K2

X22b.S

PLUGWIRINGHARNESSCAB

/19.D7

=K

+K4

V100.X1*

PLUGBLOCKINGDIODE

/57.B7

=K

+K2

X26.B

PLUGE12

/32.D3

=K

+K3

V100.X2*

PLUGBLOCKINGDIODE

/57.B7

=K

+K2

X26.S*

PLUGE12

/32.E3

=K

+K3

W1

ANTENNA

/34.D8

=K

+K3

X26a.S*

PLUGE12b

/32.E4

=K

+K3

X1.B

PLUGCABFLOOR

/20.E3

=K

+K6

X27.B

PLUGE12a

/32.D4

=K

+K3

X1.B.64*

PLUGQUICKCHANGEDEVICE

/57.B8

=H

+H

X27.S*

PLUGE12a

/32.D4

=K

+K3

X1.B.65*

PLUGQUICKCHANGEDEVICE

/57.E8

=H

+H

X28.B

PLUGFANMOTOR

/21.B7

=H

+H

X1.J

HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTSEU

/27.C5

=K

+K2

X28.B

PLUGE13

/32.D6

=K

+K3

X1.S

PLUGCABFLOOR

/20.D3

=K

+K6

X28.S

PLUGFANMOTOR

/21.B7

=H

+H

X1.S.61a*

PLUGCABFLOORX1.S.61

/69.C8

=K

+K

X28.S*

PLUGE13

/32.D6

=K

+K3

X2.B

PLUGCABFLOOR

/62.C5

=K

+K6

X28a.S*

PLUGE13b

/32.E7

=K

+K3

X2.B**

PLUGCABFLOOROPTION

/69.E8

=K

+K6

X29.B

PLUGE13a

/32.D7

=K

+K3

PROJ: 8920980_003

FUNCTION

SHEET

BMK

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

FUNCTION

BMK

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

Ident.Nr.

BMKINDEX
WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

15
114

SHEET

SYSTEM PLACE

X29.S*

PLUGE13a

/32.D7

=K

X31

PLUGINDUCTIVESWITCH

/77.C5

X33

PLUGMAGNETICSPILOTCONTROLUNIT

X33.X

SYSTEM PLACE

+K3

X.RS232.B

PLUGDIAGNOSTICLEADAIRCONDITIONINGELECTRONICS

/70.B7

=K

+K

=H

+H5

XA16a.X1.58*

CANCONNECTION.INPUTMODULE1

/37.E7

=H

+H3

/56.C7

=K

+K4

XB39

PLUGAMBIENTTEMPERATURESENSOR

/62.D6

=K

+K6

PLUGMAGNETICSPILOTCONTROLUNIT

/56.C7

=K

+K4

XE14l.a*

PLUGLICENCEPLATELIGHTITALIANVERSION

/25.D7

=H

+H1

X37a*

PLUGRFWEOOPTIONAL

/25.C8

=H

+H3

XE14l.a.*

PLUGLICENCEPLATELIGHTITALIANVERSION

/25.E7

=H

+H1

X37b*

PLUGRFWEOOPTIONAL

/25.C8

=H

+H3

XE14l.b*

PLUGLICENCEPLATELIGHTITALIANVERSION

/25.D7

=H

+H1

X43

PLUGINDUCTIVESWITCH

/77.C7

=V

+V1

XE14r.a*

PLUGLICENCEPLATELIGHTITALIANVERSION

/25.D8

=H

+H1

X44*

PLUGRELAYBOARDDIESELPREHEATING

/82.B5

=K

+K2

XE14r.a.*

PLUGLICENCEPLATELIGHTITALIANVERSION

/25.E8

=H

+H1

X45.B*

PLUGCONNECTORLINTFILTER

/69.B5

=K

+K2

XE14r.b*

PLUGLICENCEPLATELIGHTITALIANVERSION

/25.E8

=H

+H1

X45.S*

PLUGCONNECTORLINTFILTER

/69.B5

=K

+K2

XMSP1

MASSGROUPINGBLOCKHINDCARRIAGEFRONTLEFT

/19.D3

=H

+H2

X48.B*

PLUGEMERGENCYOFF2WORKINGBASKET

/59.C8

=H

+H

XMSP1.e*

MASSGROUPINGBLOCKHINDCARRIAGEFRONTLEFT

/59.F4

=H

+H2

X48.S*

PLUGEMERGENCYOFF2WORKINGBASKET

/59.C8

=H

+H

XMSP1a

MASSGROUPINGBLOCKHINDCARRIAGEFRONTLEFT

/31.F4

=K

+H2

X50.B*

PLUGCENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEMGROENEVELD

/78.C2

=H

+H3

XMSP1b

MASSGROUPINGBLOCKHINDCARRIAGEFRONTLEFT

/43.D2

=H

+H2

X50.S*

PLUGCENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEMGROENEVELD

/78.C2

=H

+H3

XMSP1c

MASSGROUPINGBLOCKHINDCARRIAGEFRONTLEFT

/25.F6

=H

+H2

X51.B*

PLUGEMERGENCYOFF

/59.A7

=K

+K

XMSP1d*

MASSGROUPINGBLOCKHINDCARRIAGEFRONTLEFT

/48.D3

=H

+H2

X51.S*

PLUGEMERGENCYOFF

/59.A7

=K

+K

XMSP4.1

MASSGROUPINGBLOCKHINDCARRIAGEREARLEFT

/19.E1

=H

+H

X52.B*

PLUGREVERSINGOBSTACLEDETECTOR

/75.D4

=K

+K2

XMSP4.1*

VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSESL586

/84.D2

=H

+H

X60

DIAGNOSTICPLUG

/40.F6

=K

+K2

XMSP4.1**

OPTIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSES40

/83.D2

=H

+H.

X60a

DIAGNOSTICPLUGENGINECONTROLUNIT

/70.E2

=M

+M

XMSP4.2

MASSGROUPINGBLOCKHINDCARRIAGEBACKLEFT

/19.D3

=H

+H5

X70

12VELECTRICALSOCKET

/34.E4

=K

+K5

XMSP4.3

MASSGROUPINGBLOCKHINDCARRIAGEBACKLEFT

/19.F3

=H

+H5

X70.X1

PLUG12VELECTRICALSOCKET

/34.E4

=K

+K5

XMSP6.1

MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL

/19.D2

=K

+K2

X70.X2

PLUG12VELECTRICALSOCKET

/34.E4

=K

+K5

XMSP6.10*

MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL

/71.C2

=K

+K2

X71

ELECTRICALSOCKETCIGARETTELIGHTER

/34.E3

=K

+K4

XMSP6.11*

MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL

/71.C4

=K

+K2

X71.X

PLUGCIGARETTELIGHTER

/34.E3

=K

+K4

XMSP6.12*

MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL

/57.E8

=K

+K2

X73

CIGARETTELIGHTER

/34.F3

=K

+K4

XMSP6.13*

MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL

/33.F7

=K

+K2

X75.B*

PLUGINTERIORTEMPERATURESENSOR

/67.C6

=K

+K4

XMSP6.14*

MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL

/55.C8

=K

+K2

X75.S

PLUGINTERIORTEMPERATURESENSOR

/67.C6

=K

+K4

XMSP6.15*

MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL

/81.C6

=K

+K2

X223.B*

PLUGDIESELPREHEATING40

/80.F3

=K

+K2

XMSP6.16*

MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL

/80.F1

=K

+K2

X223.S*

PLUGDIESELPREHEATING40

/82.B6

=K

+K2

XMSP6.18*

MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL

/30.F5

=K

+K2

X321a*

COUNTRYSPECIFICTYPE/EXECUTIONLEFT

/26.E2

=V

+V

XMSP6.19*

MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL

/82.F6

=K

+K6

X321b*

COUNTRYSPECIFICTYPE/EXECUTIONRIGHT

/26.E8

=V

+V

XMSP6.2

MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL

/19.D2

=K

+K2

X700.B

PLUGMOTORCONTROL

/105.D7

=M

+M

XMSP6.20*

MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL

/82.F6

=K

+K6

X700.S

PLUGMOTORCONTROL

/105.D7

=M

+M

XMSP6.21*

MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL

/76.C5

=K

+K2

X701.B

PLUGMOTORCONTROL

/105.D8

=M

+M

XMSP6.22*

MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL

/75.D4

=K

+K2

X701.S

PLUGMOTORCONTROL

/105.D8

=M

+M

XMSP6a

MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL

/28.F8

=K

+K2

X.M7a.S

PLUGDIAGNOSTICLEADAIRCONDITIONINGELECTRONICS

/70.B6

=K

+K2

XMSP6b

MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL

/39.B4

=K

+K2

PROJ: 8920980_003

FUNCTION

SHEET

BMK

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

FUNCTION

BMK

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

Ident.Nr.

BMKINDEX
WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

16
114

SHEET

SYSTEM PLACE

XMSP6c

MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL

/33.F7

=K

XMSP6d*

MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL

/45.B7

XMSP6e*

MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL

XMSP7a

SYSTEM PLACE

+K2

Y11a.JPT*

PLUGOPTIONALEQUIPMENT3

/57.C3

=V

+V

=K

+K2

Y11b*

EP3AND4CONTROLCIRCUIT

/50.C7

=V

+V1

/33.B5

=K

+K2

Y11b.JPT*

PLUGEP3AND4CONTROLCIRCUIT

/50.C7

=V

+V1

MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABROOF

/32.F6

=K

+K3

Y12

OPTIONALEQUIPMENT2

/57.C2

=V

+V

XMSP7b

MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABROOF

/25.F6

=K

+K3

Y12.JPT

PLUGOPTIONALEQUIPMENT2

/57.C2

=V

+V

XMSP10*

VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSESL586

/84.F4

=M

+M

Y12a*

EP3AND4CONTROLCIRCUIT

/50.C6

=V

+V1

XMSP12

MASSGROUPINGBLOCKA4

/19.D2

=K

+K2

Y12a*

OPTIONALEQUIPMENT4

/57.C4

=V

+V

XMSP12.1*

MASSGROUPINGBLOCKA4

/47.E8

=K

+K2

Y12a.JPT*

PLUGEP3AND4CONTROLCIRCUIT

/50.C6

=V

+V1

XMSP12.2*

MASSGROUPINGBLOCKA4

/79.C6

=K

+K2

Y12a.JPT*

PLUGOPTIONALEQUIPMENT4

/57.C4

=V

+V

XMSP63*

MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL

/78.D4

=K

+K2

Y12b*

EP3AND4CONTROLCIRCUIT

/50.C8

=V

+V1

XMSP200*

MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL

/50.C2

=K

+K2

Y12b.JPT*

PLUGEP3AND4CONTROLCIRCUIT

/50.C8

=V

+V1

XMSP201*

MASSGROUPINGBLOCKHINDCARRIAGEFRONTLEFT

/61.D4

=K

+K2

Y13

FANMOTORINTERCOOLER

/21.C7

=H

+H

XMSP.20*

MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL

/69.F7

=K

+K2

Y13.X

PLUGFANMOTOR

/21.C7

=H

+H

Y2

TRAVELLINGDIRECTIONFORWARD

/54.C1

=H

+H

Y14

WORKINGHYDRAULICSLOCKOUT

/57.C5

=H

+H

Y2.DT

PLUGTRAVELLINGDIRECTIONFORWARD

/54.C1

=H

+H

Y14.JPT

PLUGWORKINGHYDRAULICSLOCKOUT

/57.C5

=H

+H

Y2a

TRAVELLINGDIRECTIONFORWARD

/54.C3

=H

+H

Y15

PWMSWIVELANGLETRAVELPUMP

/54.C5

=H

+H

Y2a.DT

PLUGTRAVELLINGDIRECTIONFORWARD

/54.C3

=H

+H

Y15.JPT

PLUGPWMSWIVELANGLETRAVELPUMP

/54.C5

=H

+H

Y3

TRAVELLINGDIRECTIONBACKWARDS

/54.C2

=H

+H

Y15a

PWMSWIVELANGLETRAVELPUMP

/54.C6

=H

+H

Y3.DT

PLUGTRAVELLINGDIRECTIONBACKWARDS

/54.C2

=H

+H

Y15a.JPT

PLUGPWMSWIVELANGLETRAVELPUMP

/54.C6

=H

+H

Y3a

TRAVELLINGDIRECTIONBACKWARDS

/54.C4

=H

+H

Y16

OVERSPEEDPROTECTION

/53.C5

=H

+H

Y3a.DT

PLUGTRAVELLINGDIRECTIONBACKWARDS

/54.C4

=H

+H

Y16.JPT

PLUGOVERSPEEDPROTECTION

/53.C5

=H

+H

Y6

TRAVELRANGES,MODULATION

/53.C2

=F

+F3

Y17

LIFTKICKOUT

/56.C7

=K

+K4

Y6.1

TRAVELRANGE1

/53.C4

=F

+F3

Y18

FLOATPOSITION

/56.C7

=K

+K4

Y6.2

TRAVELRANGE2

/53.C2

=F

+F3

Y20

RIDECONTROL

/23.C7

=V

+V1

Y6.3

TRAVELRANGE3

/53.C3

=F

+F3

Y20.JPT

PLUGRIDECONTROL

/23.C7

=V

+V1

Y6.X

PLUGTRAVELRANGES,MODULATION

/53.C2

=F

+F3

Y21

RIDECONTROL

/23.C8

=V

+V1

Y9

BUCKETRETURNTODIG

/56.C7

=K

+K4

Y21.JPT

PLUGRIDECONTROL

/23.C8

=V

+V1

Y9a

BUCKETRETURNTODIGBERPUSHBUTTONSWITCH

/56.C6

=V

+V1

Y22

AIRCONDITIONINGCOMPRESSOR

/62.E5

=M

+M

Y9a.JPT*

PLUGBUCKETRETURNTODIGBERPUSHBUTTONSWITCH

/56.C6

=V

+V1

Y22.X

PLUGAIRCONDITIONINGCOMPRESSOR

/62.E5

=M

+M

Y10

PARKINGBRAKE

/78.C1

=H

+K6

Y50

FANREVERSAL

/21.C8

=H

+H3

Y10.JPT

PLUGPARKINGBRAKE

/78.C1

=H

+K6

Y50.AF2

PLUGFANREVERSAL

/21.C8

=H

+H3

Y11

OPTIONALEQUIPMENT1

/57.C1

=V

+V

Y51*

JOYSTICKSTEERINGLEFT

/72.C6

=H

+H3

Y11.JPT

PLUGOPTIONALEQUIPMENT1

/57.C1

=V

+V

Y51.AF2*

PLUGJOYSTICKSTEERINGLEFT

/72.C6

=H

+H3

Y11a*

EP3AND4CONTROLCIRCUIT

/50.C5

=V

+V1

Y52*

JOYSTICKSTEERINGRIGHT

/72.C7

=H

+H3

Y11a*

OPTIONALEQUIPMENT3

/57.C3

=V

+V

Y52.AF2*

PLUGJOYSTICKSTEERINGRIGHT

/72.C7

=H

+H3

Y11a.JPT*

PLUGEP3AND4CONTROLCIRCUIT

/50.C5

=V

+V1

Y53

QUICKCHANGEDEVICE

/57.C8

=V

+V1

PROJ: 8920980_003

FUNCTION

SHEET

BMK

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

FUNCTION

BMK

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

Ident.Nr.

BMKINDEX
WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Ort

Blatt
von

Anlage

003

17
114

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

BMK

FUNCTION

SHEET

SYSTEM PLACE

Y53.JPT

PLUGQUICKCHANGEDEVICE

/57.D8

=V

+V1

Y57

HYDROMOTORSWIVELANGLE1

/53.C8

=F

+F3

Y57.DT

PLUGHYDROMOTORSWIVELANGLE1

/53.C8

=F

+F3

Y63*

GEROTORSTEERING

/55.C4

=H

+H3

Y63.JPT*

PLUGGEROTORSTEERING

/55.C4

=H

+H3

Y64*

SAFETYJOYSTICKSTEERING

/72.C8

=H

+H3

Y64.JPT*

PLUGSAFETYJOYSTICKSTEERING

/72.C8

=H

+H3

Y65*

WORKINGBASKETTILTCYLINDERLOCKOUT

/59.E4

=V

+V1

Y65.JPT*

PLUGWORKINGBASKETTILTCYLINDERLOCKOUT

/59.E4

=V

+V1

Y66*

WORKINGBASKETTILTCYLINDERLOCKOUT

/59.E5

=V

+V1

Y66.JPT*

PLUGWORKINGBASKETTILTCYLINDERLOCKOUT

/59.E5

=V

+V1

Y67*

WORKINGBASKETTILTCYLINDERFINECONTROL

/59.E6

=V

+V1

Y67.JPT*

PLUGWORKINGBASKETTILTCYLINDERFINECONTROL

/59.E6

=V

+V1

Y68*

CUTOFFTILTCYLINDER

/61.E6

=V

+V1

Y68.JPT*

PLUGCUTOFFTILTCYLINDER

/61.E6

=V

+V1

Y711

INJECTIONPUMP1

/109.B3

=M

+M

Y712

INJECTIONPUMP2

/109.B4

=M

+M

Y713

INJECTIONPUMP3

/109.B6

=M

+M

Y714

INJECTIONPUMP4

/110.B3

=M

+M

Y715

INJECTIONPUMP5

/110.B4

=M

+M

Y716

INJECTIONPUMP6

/110.B6

=M

+M

YEP1

HYDRAULICMOTOR1

/53.C6

=F

+F3

YEP1.DT

PLUGHYDRAULICMOTOR1

/53.C6

=F

+F3

YEP2

HYDROMOTORS2

/53.C7

=F

+F3

YEP2.DT

PLUGHYDRAULICMOTOR2

/53.C7

=F

+F3

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

PROJ: 8920980_003

F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

Ident.Nr.

BMKINDEX
WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

18
114

WH 2.5Q

58

15

15

50a

50a

P 0 12

A16a.X1

OLE1
Verb.
1

+H5
F07
10A
RD

BK 70Q

31

RD 70Q

+H5
XMSP4.3

BK 70Q

Ausgabe
nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

+H2
XMSP1c

E2.X1

B
6

BK 2.5Q

RD 25Q

WH 2Q

+K2
M7
2

28

E2.X2

E2.X3

=K

+H2
XMSP1b

+M
R701
0

M7.X

+K3
XMSP7a

BK 2Q

BK 2Q
=K

BK 2Q

+K2
XMSP6b

IGNITION LOCKBATTERIESGENERATOR
MAINFUSES
4

+K3
E2
0

WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

D+

M7.X

RD 1.5Q

+M
G3

WH 2Q

31

/81.B6

50

Datum

B+

Kl.30.F07 RD 1.5Q

+M
M1

/D+

* 30

WH 1Q

+B1
G2

X1.B
X1.S

R.5

=K

/27.A5

Ersteller

+K4
X22b.S
X22b.B

28

RD 25Q

/20.E3

BK 70Q

RD 25Q

+B
G1
+H5
S15

30.1

RD 25Q

RD 70Q

A4.X55

RD 25Q

XMSP4.1
+H

A4.X57

30.2 50
+H5
K04

2
1

GND

OLE2

=H

ELECTRICALSOCKET
RADIO
F8
/34.B3

L8

100A
F02
+H

+H5
F01
100A

*
1

L8A

65

+H5
XMSP4.2

BK 25Q

+H2
XMSP1

200A
F03
+H5
WH 1.5Q

1 1

+K2
XMSP6.1

BK,BK 25Q,25Q

BK 25Q

+K2
XMSP6.2

RD 25Q

BK 25Q

RD 25Q

MP

R8

WH 2Q

+H5
F010
5A
HBR

+K6
X1.S
X1.B
+K6

65

V2

GND

=K

Zustand

RD 6Q

XMSP12

RD 25Q

R8A

T.4

GND

Kl.30.X
1

Verb.

L29

85

15A
BU

GND

87

Kl.30.F08

R29

A700D.DO2
X2 39

A700D.X2

F8

=K+K4X3:1

10A
RD
A

WH 2Q

K01

A700D.X2

/93.E2

A700D
+M

WH 6Q

V1

A700D.DI2
X2 64

F8A

ENGINEECU
SELECTION
HEATERFLANGE

86

25A
WH

WH 1.5Q
=K+K6X1.S:65

F29

/23.B2

30

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

/93.E2

A700D
+M

E
Kl.15

ENGINEECU
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
HEATERFLANGE

WH 1.5Q

Kl.15.X
1

T.1

39

T.3

64

A4
=K
+K2

A4.X57

S.4

A4.X56

RD 2.5Q

Kl.30

S1.X3

A4
=K
+K2

BK 1.5Q

A9IMMOBILISERKl.15

S1.X2

A4.X57

X1 24
A16a.UI15
A
+H3
Kl50a
A16a
/86.D2 ANALOGUEall-purpose Input15
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1

30

ENGINESIDE/105.B6

PROJ: 8920980_003

30

WH 2.5Q

10

24

WH 2.5Q

+K4
S1

10

A9Kl.15

S1.X1

/79.C6

+K6
X1.S
X1.B

WH 2.5Q

WH 2.5Q

Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

19
114

A18.X2

A4.X49
A4
=K
+K2

LEDGREEN
L77

10

OLDM.4
M.9

K.10

PROFILELIGHT/PARKINGLIGHT

R77

E
86

R9B

V81

220

F6
86

F27

10A
RD

87

87a

R27

GND

L27

T.7

T.8

A4.X57

A4.X57

WH 1.5Q
19
WH 1.5Q
Kl.58aR

/25.C8

Kl.58aL
/25.D2

19

WH 1.5Q
6

WH 1.5Q
5
WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q
4
WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q
Kl.58aL
/25.D3

WH 1.5Q
Kl.58aL

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

/25.E4

T.6

A4.X57

2
2
/19.F5

D+

GND

T.5

+K6
X1.S
X1.B

GND

A4.X57

A4.X53

/D+ WH 1Q

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

+K6
X1.S
X1.B

L7

GND

WH 1Q

O.1

L6

85

87a

WH 1.5Q

87

Kl.58aR

85

/25.D6

WH 1.5Q

V82

R7

WH 1.5Q

X6.J
10A

R6

Kl.58aR

X5.J
10A

K2

V8

/25.D6

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

K5
X4.J
10A

3A
VT

30

V10

Kl.58aR

F7

3A
VT

30

/25.E5

R9A

Kl.30

/51.A4

=K
+K2
A4.X51

F15.2
Kl.15

V80

PROJ: 8920980_003

+K2
XMSP6b

/51.A4

WH 1Q

BK 1Q

JUMPERX6220Ohm/5WattL550L586

P1.X2

Kl.15
F15.1

JUMPERX5RESERVE

A4
=K
+K2

ELECTRICKEYPAD
CAN:
/94.D3
OUTLETA6
A18
PARKINGLIGHT
+K4
A
=K
A18.PWM6
X2 3

WH 1Q

INFO
JUMPERX4RESERVE0OHMEXCITATION

+K4
P1

P1.X1

F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

Ident.Nr.

FUNCTIOND+
PROFILELIGHTPARKINGLIGHT
4

ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

20
114

A
A16a.UI4
X1 7

A16a.X1

/93.D2

A700D
+M

A700D.AI11.1
X2 63

A700D.X2

/86.C5
A16a
/86.D2 ANALOGUEall-purpose Input13
A16a
transmisson overtemperature+H3
+H3
A16a.UI13
X1 22

A16a.X1

INPUTMODULE1
CAN:
resistor input 1
hydraulics oil temperature
D
A16a.RI1
X1 46

A16a.X1

OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.D1
PWMOutput 6(Bank2)
A17a
VENTILATOR
+H3
A
A17a.PWM6
X1 19

A17a.X1

OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.D2
PWMOutput6(Bank
A17b
FANREVERSAL
+H3
A
A17b.PWM6
X1 19

A17b.X1

+H
X28.B
X28.S

+K6
B19
0

0
sw

ge

UP

+
B

+H
B13
0

+H1
B8
0

B19.X

+F3
B14
0

B13.X

1
1

+H
Y13
0

B8.X

Y13.X

+H3
Y50
0

Y50.AF2

BK 1.5Q

+H
X28.S
X28.B

BU 1Q

WH 1Q

WH 1Q

BK 1Q

BK 1Q

BK 1.5Q

2
B25.X

Y13.X

B8.X

+H2
B25

B14.X

vi

B13.X

gn

Y50.AF2
B19.X

3
1

B25.X

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

RD 1Q

WH 1Q

BU 1Q

PROJ: 8920980_003

BK 1.5Q

+H3
A16a
/86.E5

+H3

A16a

EARTHTANKSENSOR
EARTH
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1

/86.D5

GND PRESSURERESERVOIRBRAKE

EARTH
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1

X1 32
A16a.24V

+H3
A16a

VccPRESSURERESERVOIRBRAKE
/86.E2
SUPPLY24V
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1

+M
A700D

+H3
A16a

COOLANT LEVEL
SIGNAL
ENGINEECU

/93.D2

/86.C5

X1 47
A16a.RI1
D
hydraulics oil temperature
resistor input 2
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1

A17a.X1

A17b.X1

X1 61
A17a.GND_PWM6

+H3
A17a

EARTHVENTILATOR
/90.D5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1

61

A16a.X1

X2 62
A700D.AI11.2

61

A700D.X2

47

A16a.X1

X1 61
A16a.GND

62

A16a.X1

X1 65
A16a.GND

61

A16a.X1

32

E
65

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

RD 1Q

WH 1Q

WH 1Q

WH 1.5Q

19

PRESSURERESERVOIRBRAKE

INPUTMODULE1
CAN:

19

A16a.X1

37

A16a.X1

A16a
+H3

ENGINEECU
VCC
coolant level signal

46

A16a.24V
X1 37

INPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/86.C2 ANALOGUEall-purpose Input 4

22

A16a
+H3

INPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/86.D2 ANALOGUEall-purpose Input 14
A16a
TANKSENSOR
+H3
A
A16a.UI14
X1 23
23

/86.F2

INPUTMODULE1
CAN:
SUPPLY24V
24VTANKSENSOR

63

X1 61
A17b.GND_PWM6

+H3
A17b
/91.D5

EARTHFANREVERSAL
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2

F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

TANKPIPESENSORTRANSMISSION/HYDRAULICOILTEMPERATURE
WerkBischofshofenGmbH
VENTILATORCOOLINGWATERLEVEL,BRAKEACCUMULATOR
3

Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

21
114

WH 1Q

A16a.RI1
X1 46

A16a.X1
+H3

A17a.X1
+H3

A17b.PWM6
X1 19

A17b.X1
+H3

X28.B
X28.S

+H3
A16a

/35.D5

X1 32
A16a.24V

=M
+M
+H3
A700D
D
pressure
accumulator
brake
A16a
=M+M/34.D2

MasseTankgeber
Masse
CAN:
INPUTMODUL1

/35.E2

Supply24V
CAN:
INPUTMODUL1

X2 62
A700D.AI11.2
KHLWASSERSTANDS.
SIGNAL
MOTORECU

B13a..X2

BK 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q

+H3
A17a.X1

X1 47
A16a.RI1

+H3
A16a Hydraulikltempertur

/35.B5 Widerstandseingang2
CAN:
INPUTMODUL1

+H3
A17b.X1

X1 61
A17a.GND_PWM6

+H3
A17a

/37.D5

MasseLfter
Masse
CAN:
OUTPUTMODUL1

61

+H3
A16a.X1
WH 1Q

X1 65
A16a.GND

A700D.X2

62

+H3
A16a.X1

65

+H3
A16a.X1

32

B13a.X

W160 +WL017 BU

B13a

47

X28.S
X28.B

B13SteckverbindungSuperseal
L544L554

WH 1Q

WH 1Q

W160 +WL016 BK

B13a.X

Y50.AF2
+H3

BK 1.5Q

B13a..X2

WH 1Q

B8.X

2
Y13.X

+H3
Y50
2

1
C

B8

Y13
0

B13.X

Y13.X
1

B8.X

61

+F3
B14

B19.X
+K6

+H3
Y50.AF2

ge

2
B25.X

B13

sw

B14.X

+K6
B19

B13.X
1

B19.X

vi

X1 61
A17b.GND_PWM6

+H3
A17b MasseLfterumkehr

/38.D5

Masse
CAN:
OUTPUTMODUL2

INFORMATIONFROM
Ident.Nr.8920980
Zeich.Nr.460901000000
VALIDTOSERIALNUMBER:see attachment

F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

A17a.PWM6
X1 19

19

A16a.X1

+H3

W160 +WL016 BU
1

PROJ: 8920980_003

A16a.UI13
X1 22

B25

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

1
gn

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

W160 +WL016 RD

B25.X

A700D.X2

+H3

OUTPUTMODUL2
CAN:
/38.D2 PWMAusgang6(Bank2)
A17b
Lfterumkehr

19

A16a.X1

=M

+H3

A16a.UI4
X1 7

+H3

OUTPUTMODUL1
CAN:
/37.D2 PWMAusgang6(Bank2)
A17a
Lfter

A16a.X1
+H3

37

A16a.X1
+H3

A16a.UI14
X1 23
23

A16a.24V
X1 37

A700D.AI11.1
X2 63

INPUTMODUL1
INPUTMODUL1
CAN:
CAN:
/35.D2
analogerUniversaleingang13 /35.B5 Widerstandseingang1
A16a Getriebebertemperatur A16a Hydraulikltempertur

46

+H3

W160 +WL017 RD

+H3

MOTORECU
VCC
KHLWASSERSTANDS.

22

INPUTMODUL1
INPUTMODULE1
CAN:
CAN:
=M+M/34.D2
/35.D2
analogerUniversaleingang14 /35.B2 analogue all-purpose input4
A16a
A16a pressure accumulatorbrakeA700D
Tankgeber
+M

WH 1Q

A16a
+H3

WH 1Q

/35.E2
A

INPUTMODUL1
CAN:
Versorgung24V
24VTankgeber

63

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

TANKPIPESENSORTRANSMISSION/HYDRAULICOILTEMPERATURE
WerkBischofshofenGmbH
VENTILATORCOOLINGWATERLEVEL,BRAKEACCUMULATOR
3

Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

22
114

WH 1Q

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

WH 1.5Q

30
30

WH 1Q
1
X1 60
A17b.GND_PWM5

+H3
A17b

EARTHemergency steering
/91.D5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2

+H3
A16a
/86.D5

GNDNLPCheck
EARTH
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1

+H3
A16a
/86.E2

/86.D5

1
2

VccNLP
SUPPLY24V
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1

A700D.X2

X1 60
A16a.GND

+H3
A16a

BK 1.5Q

X1 34
A16a.24V

A16a.X1

X1 59
A16a.GND

+M
A700D

GNDNLP
EARTH
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1

/93.E2

X2 46
A700D.TI1.GND

A17b.X1

AIR FILTER CONTAMINATION


VACUUM
ENGINEECU

A17b.X1

X1 62
A17b.GND_PWM7

+H3
A17b

EARTHLFD
/91.D5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2

63

A16a.X1

Y21.JPT

62

A17b.X1

Y20.JPT

BK 1.5Q

A16a.X1

VccNLPCheck
SUPPLY24V
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1

59

60

B28.X

BK 1Q

BK 1Q

B4.X_1

60

/86.E2

33

WH 1Q

A16a

B3.X

BK 1Q

BK 1.5Q

WH 25Q

+V1
Y21
0

WH 1Q

Y21.JPT

+V1
Y20
0

Kl.15

Y20.JPT
1

/56.E2

UP

+K
B28

+H5
B3
0

UP

+H
B4
0

B28.X

WH 1Q

+H4
B3a
0

B4.X_1

46

Ausgabe

WH 1.5Q

WH 1Q

WH 1Q

WH 1Q

WH 1.5Q

85

B3.X

X1 33
A16a.24V

Datum

A17b.X1

34

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

B3a.X

+H3
A16a.X1

Ersteller

A17b.X1

OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.D2
PWMAusgang8(bank
A17b LFD/FLOATPOSITION
+H3
A
A17b.PWM8
X1 21

B3a.X

Zustand

+K6
X1.B
X1.S

86

88a

+H4
M8
0

OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.D2
PWMOutput7(bank
A17b
LFD
+H3
A
A17b.PWM7
X1 20

21

A16a.X1

20

A16a.X1

ENGINEECU
INPUTMODULE1
VACUUM
CAN:
/93.E2
A700D AIR FILTER CONTAMINATION /86.D2 ANALOGUEall-purpose input6
A16a
LFD
+M
+H3
A700D.TI1
A
X2 60
A16a.UI6
X1 19
A700D.X2
19

18

INPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/86.C2 ANALOGUEall-purpose input3
A16a
PRESSURENLP
+H3
A
A16a.UI3
X1 6

RD 25Q

PROJ: 8920980_003

88

GNDVIAEARTHSTRIP

A16a.X1

+H4
K11

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

Kl.30.F08

INPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/86.C2 ANALOGUEall-purpose input1
A16a PRESSURENLPCheck
+H3
A
A16a.UI1
X1 4

/19.C4

A17b.X1

60

OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.D2
PWMOutput5(bank
A17b
emergency steering
A
A17b.PWM5
X1 18

X1 63
A17b.GND_PWM8

+H3
A17b
/91.D5

EARTHLFD
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2

F
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

EMERGENCYSTEERINGPUMPLFDAIRFILTERCONTAMINATION
RIDECONTROL

WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

23
114

+H3

MOTORECU
UNTERDRUCK
LUFTFILTERVERSCHM.

A700D.X2
+M
=M

A16a.UI6
X1 19

A17b.X1
+H3
=H

=H
+H3
A17b.X1

=H+H/38.D5

X1 60
A17b.GND_PWM5
MasseNotlenkung
Masse
CAN:
OUTPUTMODUL2

=H
+H3
A17b.X1

X1 62
A17b.GND_PWM7

X1 63
A17b.GND_PWM8

=H
=H
+H3
+H3
MasseLFD/Schaufelschwimmstellung
MasseLFD/Schaufelschwimmstellung
A17b
A17b

F1110A/RD =K+K/15.E2

=H
+H3
A17b

60

Kl.15.6

WH 1Q

63

M
=H
+H3
A17b.X1

UNTERDRUCK
MOTORECU

62

=M+M/34.E2

2
29

=M
A700D.TI1.GND
+M
A700D LUFTFILTERVERSCHM.GND

BK 1.5Q

=K
+K6
X1.S

29

WH 1Q

BK 1Q

B28.X

46

WH 1Q

WH 1.5Q

30

WH 1Q

+K
B28

BK 1.5Q

B4.X_1
+H

=M
+M
A700D.X2

+V1
Y21.JPT
1
+V1
Y21
0
2
Y21.JPT
+V1

B28.X

BK 1.5Q

WH 25Q

+V1
Y20.JPT
1
+V1
Y20
0
2
Y20.JPT
+V1

A17b.X1
+H3
=H

WH 1.5Q

30
WH 1Q

+H
Splice.X6

=K
+K6
X2.B
X2.S
+K6
=K

A17b.PWM8
X1 21

WH 1Q

+H
B4

B3.X
+H5

+H3
=H

B3a.X
+H4

+H
B4.X_1

X1.S
+K6
=K

=H+H/38.D5

Masse
=H+H/38.D5
CAN:
OUTPUTMODUL2

Masse
CAN:
OUTPUTMODUL2

INFORMATIONFROM
Ident.Nr.8920980
Zeich.Nr.460901000000
VALIDTOSERIALNUMBER:see attachment

F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

A17b.PWM7
X1 20

X2 46

=H
+H4
M8

+H3
=H

WH 1Q

A16a.X1
+H3
=H

+H5
B3

WH 1Q

1
1

+H5
B3.X

INPUTMODUL1
OUTPUTMODUL2
OUTPUTMODUL2
CAN:
CAN:
CAN:
=H+H/35.D2analogue all-purpose =H+H/38.D2
input6
PWMAusgang7(Bank2)=H+H/38.D2 PWMAusgang8(Bank2)
A16a
A17b
A17b
LFD
LFD
LFD/Schaufelschwimmstellung

+H3
=H

A700D.TI1
X2 60

=M

WH 1Q

WH 1Q

A16a.X1
+H3

30.1 31
K11.X3
K11.X1
+H4 +H4
=H =H

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

A16a.UI3
X1 6

PROJ: 8920980_003

=H =H
+H4 +H4
K11.X4
K11.X2
30.2 50
=H
+H4
K11

GNDberMasseband

+H4
B3a.X
+H4
B3a

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

Kl.30.F08

18

A16a.X1
+H3

=K+K/4.C4

A17b.X1
+H3
=H

A16a.UI1
X1 4

+H3

A17b.PWM5
X1 18

+H3
=H

21

OUTPUTMODUL2
INPUTMODUL1
INPUTMODUL1
CAN:
CAN:
CAN:
=M+M/34.E2
=H+H/38.C2 PWMAusgang5(Bank2) =H+H/35.B2analogue all-purpose input1
=H+H/35.B2analogue all-purpose input3 A700D
A17b
A16a pressureNLPCheck
A16a
Notlenkung
DruckNLP
+M

20

19

60

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

EMERGENCYSTEERINGPUMPLFDAIRFILTERCONTAMINATION
RIDECONTROL

WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

24
114

HIGHBEAM

30

86

30

F4

A17b.X1

F5

7,5A
BN

7,5A
BN

V9

R5

L21

L4

L5

7,5A
BN

V60

85

87a
A

GND

87

R2

R3

L2

L3

GND

10

XMSP1c

E4.X

XMSP1c

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
1
1

XE14l.a.

H53

E7

H21

H18

+B2
E5
0

XE14l.b

+K3
XMSP7b

+H2
XMSP1c

XE14r.b

X16.B
X16.S

EXTENSION OF THE
LICENCE-PLATE LIGHTING
FOR THEITALIANVERSION

+H2
XMSP1c

+H4
Splice.X8
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

STEERINGCOLUMNSWITCHSTOPLIGHT
LOWBEAMHIGHBEAM

WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

XE14r.a.

+H1
E14r
BK,BK 1.5Q,1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q

/27.E7
Kl.49

/20.E6
Kl.58aR

WH 1.5Q
1
1

SW 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

+K3
E9

H51 H16

BK 1.5Q
4

WH 1.5Q
3

/20.E6

H55

WH 1.5Q
3

WH 1.5Q

H57

XE14r.a
1

+H1
E14l

BK 1.5Q
2
2

XE14r.b

XE14l.b

BK 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q

+V1
E4

+H
X16.S
X16.B

XE14l.a

BK 1.5Q

+V1
E3

+K4
X22b.S
X22b.B

SW 1.5Q

H56

F.6

H54

H50

WH 1.5Q
2

+H4
Splice.X7

A4.X45

/27.E5

18
18
/20.E6

17
17

16
2

WH 1.5Q
3

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q
4

E3.X

+K3
XMSP7a

16

19
19

/20.E5

/27.E6
WH 1.5Q
5

10

H15

X1.S
X1.B

5
1

H52

A4.X45

*
E

BK 1.5QEXTEN
6

X1.S
X1.B
+K6

SW 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q

A4.X45 F.5

GND

F.1

Kl.58aL

E6

GND

BK 1.5Q

H20

A4.X45

WH 1.5Q
3

BK 1.5Q

H17

XMSP1b

nderung

+H3
X37a

85

GND

F.3

SW 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

/20.E5

3
/20.E6
WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

Kl.58aL

Kl.49

B12.1
WH 1.5Q

+K4
X22b.S
X22b.B

+K3
E8

B12.X

GND

A4.X44

+B1
E1
0

87

R4

E.3

/27.E5

/45.E8

R21

GND

F3

7,5A
BN

X37b
+H3

X2 4
A18.PWM7
A
low beam
/94.E3
OUTLETA7
CAN:
ELECTRICKEYPAD

+H3
B12
0

F2

K3A

10A
RD

K3

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q

F21

=K
+K4
A18

/33.E4

A17b.DO3
X1 37

86

B12.X

X1.37

+H3

87a

A18.X2

OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.F2
digital output 3
A17b
REVERSINGLIGHT

hb/lbF/A
LH
0

/33.E4

K.8

Zustand

LOWBEAM/DRIVINGLIGHT

A4.X49

K.6

Kl.15

PROJ: 8920980_003

WH 1.5Q

+K1
S3

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

A4
=K
+K2

A4.X49

K.4

/20.E7

A4.X49

K.2

WH 1.5Q

A4.X49

X1.37

56

Kl.58aR

30

56a

BK 1.5Q
2
2

56b

37

49a

=K

WH 1.5Q

=K

BK 1.5Q

=K
2

=K

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

3/7 S3.X2

A16b.X1

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

2/7

/87.C2

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

5/7

A16b.X1

INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
ANALOGUEuniversal
HIGHBEAM
A
A16b.UI2
X1 5

A16b
+K2

/87.C2

4/7

INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
ANALOGUEuniversal
DRIVINGLIGHT
A
A16b.UI1
X1 4

A16b
+K2

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

25
114

/7.E7
Kl.49a.2

INPUTMODULE2
CAN:

/36.B2ANALOGUEUniversaleingang1
DRIVINGLIGHT

/36.B2ANALOGUEUniversaleingang2
HIGHBEAM

A16b
+K2

49a

56b

56a

15

A4.X49

A4.X49

K.4

A4.X49

K.6

K.8
B

A4
=K
+K2

56

A4.X49

K.2

A16b.X1

A16b.UI2
X1 5

A16b.X1

3/7

S3.X2
5/7
+K1
S3.X2
2/7
+K1
S3.X2

A16b
+K2

A16b.UI1
X1 4

2
2

LOWBEAM/DRIVINGLIGHT

HIGHBEAM

Kl.15

PROJ: 8920980_003

+K1

+K1
S3
0

30

F21
10A
RD

a bc

L OR

ab

E
F4
7,5A
BN

F5
7,5A
BN

87

30

F2
7,5A
BN
87a

86

K3

F3
7,5A
BN

85

87a

GND

86

K3a

87

85

GND
C

GND

GND

H50 H54

H56

=V
+V1
E3

=V 2
+V1
E4

H57

H55

H51

4
WH 1.5Q

D
31

intstall 3pin
socket!

58

+V
X321b
0

31

BK,BK 1.5Q,1.5Q
1

XMSP1c

54

54

BK 1.5Q BK 1.5Q

E4.X

WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q

BK 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q BK 1.5Q

3
WH 1.5Q

H16

E4.Xa

XMSP1c

E3.Xa

E3.X

WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q

58

+V
X321b

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

/7.E5

/5.E6
4

WH 1.5Q

18
3
Kl.58aR.1
4
Kl.49.3
5

+V
E4.Xa

1
1

18

17
17

16

19
19
3

+V
E3.Xa

H15

1.5Q,1.5Q BK,BK

8JB0019333001
LBHID6200003

F.6

E4.Xb
+V

/5.E5

/7.E6

Kl.49.2
5
Kl.58aL.1
4
2

+K6 +K6
X1.SX1.S

16

+K6 +K6
X1.SX1.S

E3.Xb
+V

A4.X45

F.1

WH 1.5Q

F.3

54

A4.X45

A4.X45F.5

A4.X45

WH 1.5Q

3
3

4
WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

+V
X321a
0
31

GND

BK 1.5Q

58

install3-pin
socket!

31

WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q

54

WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q

58

WH 1.5Q

+V
X321a

Abblentlicht
OUTLETA7
CAN:
ELECTRIESKEYBOARD

/39.E4

+K4
A18

A4.X44
E.3

WH 1.5Q

8JB0019333001
LBHID6200003

GND

HELLAint

X2 4
A18.PWM7

WH 1.5Q

A18.X2

GND

HELLA

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

+K1 +K1 +K1


S3.X1S3.X1S3.X1
B

INPUTMODULE2
CAN:

5 S3.X2
4/7
+K1

Kl.49aR.2

Kl.49aL.2

/7.B5

/7.B5

E3.Xb

E4.Xb

F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

Ident.Nr.

COUNTRYSPECIFIC
TYPE/EXECUTION
4

ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

26
114

A18.X1

A4.X50

RD,RD 1.5Q,1.5Q

A4.X50

L.4

A4
=K
+K2

RD 1.5Q
RD 1.5Q

Kl.30.F07
Kl.30

7
ELECTRICKEYPAD
CAN:
/94.C3 FLASHINGSPEEDINPUT
A18 HAZARDWARNINGLIGHT
+K4
A
=K
A18.Flasher
X1 6

/19.F5
/39.B3

L.3

86

30

A18.X1

10

RD 1.5Q

ELECTRICKEYPAD
CAN:
/94.D3
OUTLETA1
A18 HAZARDWARNINGLIGHT
+K4
A
=K
A18.PWM1
X1 10

K240

INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
ANALOGUEuniversal
INDICATORSIGNAL
A
A16b.UI3
6 X1

A16b.X1
+K2

/87.C2

A16b
+K2
A

V53

85

87

87a

GND
WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

L.1

A4.X50
RD 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
U.3

U.4

A4.X58

A4.X58

11

A4.X50

L.11

V89

M.7

C
E

30

86

30

K22

F07B

86

30

K22a

10A
RD
87a

87

85

86

K22b

V11

V12

87a

87

V13

85

87a

87

X1.J
10A
RD

30

86

K25
V14

85

87a

87

X2.J
10A
RD

30

86

49

K26

GND

87a

87

85

GND

49a

A4.X58
U.6

E1/H18RIGHTREAR

WH 1.5Q

/25.D7

Kl.49

10

X1.S
X1.B

WH 1.5Q

M.10
OLDM.3

V88

10

L.6

Kl.49

E5/H17LEFTREAR

A4.X51

WH 1.5Q 10

WH 1.5Q 6

A4.X50

/25.E4

8
8

+K6
X1.S
X1.B
E3/H15LEFTFRONT

56

Kl.49

hb/lbF/A
LH
0

30

X1.S
X1.B

/25.D2

=K
+K1
S3
0

56a

L.5

WH 1.5Q

56b

WH 1.5Q 5

WH 1.5Q 12

49a

+K6
X1.S
X1.B

A4.X50

M.12
OLDM.1

WH 1.5Q

A4.X51

Kl.49

GND

V87

/25.E5

31
GND

V86

E4/H16RIGHTFRONT

X3.J
10A
RD

85

GND

WH 1.5Q
2

WH 1.5Q
3

WH 1.5Q
L

GND

V85

GND

+K1
S3.X1

K1

V84 V83

F07bKL.15

R07B
L07B

V15

WH 1.5Q

A4.X51
OLDM.6

A4
=K
+K2

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

L.8

A4.X50

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

PROJ: 8920980_003

WH 1.5Q

F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

Ident.Nr.

HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTS
WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

27
114

OPTION
HORNOPERATIONVIAPUSHBUTTONSWITCHON
LHCONTROLLEVER

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q

12

A4.X49

A4
=K
+K2

31

WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q

+K2
XMSP6a

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

Kl.15

3
2

=K

BK 1.5Q

15A
BU

A18.X2

86

30

K8

F18

V59

10

85

87

10A
RD

87a

R20
L20

SW 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q

B10.X2
+H

R18

GND

L18

GND

GND

A4.X44

53

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

31b

M3.X

M9.X

+K2
M3

M4.X

53a

+K4
M9
0

M9.X

31

sw

sw

31

swbl

wsbl

+K1
M4
0

bl

M3.X

53

7/7

6/7

7
1
7

53a

WH 1.5Q

swbl

wsbl

53c

WH 1.5Q
0 J 1

53

+K1
M2
0

wash
53b

31b

bl

M3.X

1
+

WH 1.5Q
6

*
M4.X

1/7

horn

0 1

M2.X2

M2.X1

WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q

S3.X2

=K
+H2
XMSP1a

E.7
WH 1.5Q

K.1

A4.X49

E.9

A4.X44

47

X1 47
A17b.GND_PWM2
D
+H3
EARTHOPTIONS
A17b
/91.C5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

B10a.X2
+H

K.12

WH 1.5Q

+H
B10

15

WH 1.5Q 6

1.5Q
1.5Q
1.5Q
1.5Q
1.5Q
1.5Q

F20

WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH

WH 1.5Q

B10.X1

31b

0
K5a.X

6905155

31b
Datum
Ausgabe
nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

+K2
XMSP6a

S3.X1
Ersteller

BK 1.5Q

15

WH 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

Zustand

+K1
K5a
E

V2
B10a
1
+H
+H
V2.X2 1/1

A18.X1

Kl.15

1
1

A4
=K
+K2

86

0 1

WH 1.5Q

25

+K6
X1.S
X1.B

WH 1.5Q

PROJ: 8920980_003

SW 1.5Q
5

25

K5a.X

WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q

OPT3
sw5

S3
+K1

V2.X1

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

ELECTRICKEYPAD
ELECTRICKEYPAD
CAN:
CAN:
/94.D3
OUTLETA3
/94.D3
OUTLETA4
A18 WINDSCREENWIPER
A18 WASHINGPUMPREAR
+K4
+K4
A
A
=K
=K
A18.PWM3
A18.PWM4
X1 12
X2 1

OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.C2
PWMOutput2(Array
A17b
OPTIONS
+H3
A
A17b.PWM2
X1 5

+K
Splice.X9

OPT1
sw4
OPT2
sw3

12

+K2
XMSP6a

+K2
XMSP6a

+K2
XMSP6a

WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

Ident.Nr.

WINDSCREENWASHERFRONT
ANDREARHOOTER
4

ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

28
114

Splice.X9

A18
+K4

+K6
X1.S

+K4

31b

BK 1.5Q

12

86

30

K8
V44

10

87a

87

85

F18
10A
RD

85

GND

87

87a

GND

GND

A4.X49

A4.X44

A4.X55
+K2

A4.X44

11

GND

K.1

E.9

BK 1.5Q

86

K271

E.7

M4
0

53

+K2
M3

sw

M4.X

sw

BK 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q

15
31b

S3.X1

+K2
XMSP6a

M9.X

31

BK 1.5Q

M3.X
+K2

+K4
M9
0

53

0 J 1

31

53a

53b

S3.X2

2
7/7

31b

M9.X

+K2
XMSP6a

+K2
XMSP6a

WH 1.5Q

+K1
M2

6/7

53a

+
wsbl

swbl

bl

wsbl

1
53c

53

+K2
* M3.X

1
+

31b

+K2
M3.X

swbl

+K2
M3.X

*
M4.X

bl

1/7

M2.X2

M2.X1

S3
+K1

WH 1.5Q

+K2
XMSP6a

INFORMATIONFROM
Ident.Nr.8920980
Zeich.Nr.460901000000
VALIDTOSERIALNUMBER:see attachment

F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

12

E
30

+K2
XMSP6a

+H2
XMSP1a

A4
=K
+K2

F20
15A
BU

A4.X49

V59

A18.X2

K.12

31

A18.PWM4
X2 1

+K1
K5
Kl.15

PROJ: 8920980_003

A4
=K
+K2

Kl.15

15

+K2
+K2
A4.X55 A4.X55

4
5

10

I 86

B10.X2
+H
=H

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

3
2

A18.X1
=H
+H
B10.X1
=H
+H
B10

ELEKTRICKEYPAD
CAN:
OutputA4
windscreen washerrear

A18.PWM3
X1 12

25

25

/39.D4

ELEKTRICKEYPAD
CAN:
/39.D4
OutputA3
SWindscreen wiper A18

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

Ident.Nr.

WINDSCREENWASHERFRONT
ANDREARHOOTER
4

ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

29
114

WH 1.5Q

A4.X58
A4
=K
+K2

E1

PROJ: 8920980_003

F31A

Kl.30

E1
30

KL.15

E2

oder
Kl.30

F31B

30

KL.15

E1 A E2

E1 A E2

87a

87

10A
RD

85

86

K31B

V16

10A
RD

E1 A E2

V17

E1 A E2

87a

R31A

87

85

R31B
GND

L31A

GND

L31B

XMSP7a

WH 2Q

WH 2Q

+K2
XMSP6.18

Datum
Ausgabe
nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

WH 2Q
2

XMSP7a

E11b.X

+K2
XMSP6.18

OPTIONXENON
WORKINGPROJECTOR
Ident.Nr.

WORKINGPROJECTORFRONTCABIN
XENONWORKINGPROJECTOR

WerkBischofshofenGmbH

+K3
E11b
0

BK 2Q

E11a.X

OPTIONXENON
WORKINGPROJECTOR
Ersteller

ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

SW 1.5Q

+K3
E11a

SW 1.5Q

+K3
XMSP7a

E11b.X

E11.X

A4.46.8
+K2

3
1

+K3
E11

E11a.X

SW 1.5Q

SW 1.5Q
5

E10b.X

E10a..X

SW 1.5Q

WH 2Q

2
SW 1.5Q
1

1
2

E11.X

+K3
E10b
0

+K3
E10a

SW 1.5Q

+K3
XMSP7a

E10b.X

E10.X

+K4
X22a.B
X22a.S

A4.46.4
+K2

BK 2Q

+K3
E10

E10a..X

G.8

WH 2Q

WH 2Q

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

A4.X46

G.7

SW 1.5Q

+K4
X22a.B
X22a.S

A4.X46

G.4

A4.X46

G.3

A4.X46

X2 5
A18.PWM8
=K
A
+K4
WORKINGPROJECTORFRONT
A18
/94.E3
OUTLETA8
CAN:
ELECTRICKEYPAD

A18.X2

GND

GND

Zustand

86

K31A

E10.X

Kl.15

Kl.30

E2
oder

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

Kl.15

Kl.30

WORKINGPROJECTORFRONT

U.5

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

30
114

A4.X58

Verb.

=K+K2A4.X58:7

OLE3
U.8

A4
=K
+K2

WORKINGPROJECTORREARAMREAR

E2

E1
30

oder

F32A

Kl.30

Kl.15

WH 1.5Q
E1

Kl.30

Kl.15

Kl.30

KL.15

86

V32C

E2
oder

K32A

Kl.30

F32B

KL.15

V18

10A
RD

E1 A E2

E1 A E2

87a

87

85

10A
RD

E1 A E2

R32A
L32A

87

85

X58

GND

/32.A7

GND

Datum
Ausgabe
nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

10

WH 2Q
14

WH 2Q
WH 2Q
4

BK 2Q

+H2
XMSP1a

WerkBischofshofenGmbH

ZeichNr.

Ident.Nr.

WORKINGPROJECTORREARREAR
3

+H
X16.B
X16.S

BK 2Q

E17.X

BK 2Q
Ersteller

3
2

+H2
XMSP1a

WH 2Q
1

+H1
E17

E16

+H
X16.B
X16.S

E17.X

E16.X

X1.S

E16.X

13

11
11
1

+H
X16.S
X16.B

X2 6
A18.PWM9
=K
A
+K4
A18 WORKINGPROJECTORREAR
/94.E3
OUTLETA9
CAN:
ELECTRICKEYPAD

G.10

13

+K6
X1.S
X1.B

X1.S

A18.X2

A4.X46

G.9

WH 2Q

+H
X16.S
X16.B

A4.X46

G.6

WH 2Q

+K6
X1.S
X1.B

A4.X46

12

G.5

WH 2Q

A4.X46

WH 2Q

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

87a

L32B

GND

Zustand

B
V19

R32B

GND

BK 2Q

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

86

K32B

PROJ: 8920980_003

30

E1 A E2

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

31
114

+K2
A4.X58
U7

A4
=K
+K2

E2
oder

F33A

Kl.30

KL.15

V33C

E2

86

X58

Kl.15

E1
30

/31.C8

E1

Kl.30

Kl.15

WORKINGPROJECTORREARAMCABROOF

Kl.30

WH 1.5Q

oder

K33A

Kl.30

F33B

KL.15

V20

10A
RD

E1 A E2

E1 A E2

87a

87

10A
RD

85

E1 A E2

R33A

87a

87

85

GND
GND

GND

+K3
XMSP7a
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

10
10

1.5Q
1
2

+K3
X28a.S

1.5Q

E13.b.X

Ident.Nr.

ZeichNr.

BK 2Q

+K3
XMSP7a

WerkBischofshofenGmbH
4

+K3
E13.b

WH 2Q 12
WH 2Q

1
1
1

E13.b.X

1.5Q

X28a.S
+K3

1.5Q
2

+K3
X29.S
X29.B

WORKINGPROJECTORREARCABIN
3

E13a.X

BK 2Q

+K3
XMSP7a

WORKINGPROJECTOR
DOUBLE

+K3
X28.S
X28.B

G.12

+K3
E13a

SW 1.5Q

E13.X

A4.X46

11
WH 2Q

9
9

WH 2Q
1

E13a.X

1.5Q

+K3
X26a.S

+K3
X29.B
X29.S

1
2

E12.b.X

+K4
X22a.B
X22a.S

+K3
E13

BK 2Q

+K3
XMSP7a

G.11

SW 1.5Q

1.5Q

E13.X

=K

A4.X46

+K3
E12.b

1.5Q

SW 1.5Q

=K

X27.S
X27.B

+K4
X22a.B
X22a.S

+K3
X28.B
X28.S

E12a.X

WORKINGPROJECTOR
SIMPLE

WH 2Q

+K3
E12a

2
2

+K3
X26.S
X26.B

1
1

E12.X

E12.b.X

1.5Q

E12a.X

+K3
E12

X26a.S
+K3

=K
+K3
X27.B
X27.S

WORKINGPROJECTOR
DOUBLE

E12.X

G.2

7
7
1

WH 2Q

+K4
X22a.B
X22a.S

SW 1.5Q

=K
+K3
X26.B
X26.S

A4.X46

WH 2Q

G.1

WORKINGPROJECTOR
SIMPLE

+K4
X22a.B
X22a.S

A4.X46

WH 2Q

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

Zustand

V21

L33B

BK 2Q

R33B

GND

L33A

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

86

K33B

PROJ: 8920980_003

30

E1 A E2

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

32
114

ELECTRICKEYPAD
CAN:
/94.D3
OUTLETA2
A18
WARNINGBEACON
+K4
A
=K
A18.PWM2
X1 11

WH 1.5Q

ELECTRICKEYPAD
CAN:
/94.D3
OUTLETA5
A18 REARWINDOWHEATER
+K4
A
=K
A18.PWM5
X2 2

OptionBACKUPALARM
OPTICALOPTIONALREVERSINGACTIVE

RD 1Q

A18.X2
=K

BK 1.5Q
H.4

A4.X47

Kl.30

A4
=K
+K2

=K
+K2
K10

S212.X1

86

F74

S212.X2

30

V57

87a

10A
RD
87a

87

R74

85

WH 1.5Q
Masse

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

WH 2.5Q
+K3

+K3

R6a

R6b

0
2

1
1

BK 2.5Q

=K
BK 2.5Q

+K2
XMSP6.13

Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.

R12.X2

BK 2.5Q

R6b.X

Splice.X12
+K3

WARNINGBEACONMIRRORAND
REARWINDOWHEATER
4

R12.X1
+K2
R12

Verb.

OLE4

WH 2.5Q

OPTIONMIRRORHEATING

WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

R6b.X

R6a.X

WH 2.5Q

WH 2.5Q

=K+K4S212.X2:9
1

R6a.X

WH 1.5Q

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

=K

H.2

=K

WH 1.5Q

+K3
Splice.X11

BK 2.5Q

+K4
X22a.B
X22a.S

36

WH 1.5Q
REVERSINGLIGHT

+K3
H22

X1.37

/25.A8

H22.X

/25.A8

X1.37

+K4
X22a.B
X22a.S

WH 1.5Q

+K6

36

35

35

WH 1.5Q

+K6
X2.S
X2.B
+K6

A4.X47

H.1

L.10

WH 1.5Q
15

WH 1.5Q

A4.X50

L.9

+K6
X1.S

WH 1.5Q

A4.X50

R.8

10

A4.X55

A4.X47

WH 2.5Q

GND

GND

Ausgabe

L74

L25

Datum

85
GND

GND

R25

Ersteller

87

V58

86

15A
BU

K9

F25

Zustand

+K2
XMSP6e

Kl.15

10
10

12

PROJ: 8920980_003

30

S212.X2

210

WH 1.5Q

0
S212
+K4

1
E

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

S212a

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

A4
=K
+K2

S212.X1

+K2
A4.X50.12a

L.12

A4.X50

A18.X1

11

WH 1.5Q

+K2
XMSP6c

8920980
460901000003
7

1
Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

33
114

RD 2.5Q
WH 1.5Q

RD 2.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q

S.5

A4.X56

=K
T1.X

S.9

A4.X56

O.5

A4.X53

C.7

A4.X42

=K
4

24V
+K2

A4
=K
+K2

T1

A4.X56
S.7

A4.X56

5
BK 1.5Q

6
WH 1.5Q

3
BK 1.5Q

S.3

WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

RD 1.5Q

+K4
X22a.B
X22a.S
+K4

12

+K4
X22b.S
X22b.B

=K
7

A3.X1

=K

+K3
A3

X70.X2

Ausgabe
nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

+K3
B11l

+K3
B11r

2
B11l.X2

CIGARETTELIGHTERELECTRICALSOCKET12VRADIO
LOUDSPEAKER

WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

B11r.X1

B11l.X1

CIGARETTE
LIGHTER
24V

Datum

RD<>BNRD
BK<>BN

ELECTRICALSOCKET12V

Ersteller

+K3

=K
RD 0.75Q

=K

W1

6
6

Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

10165605

BK 0.75Q

=K

RD 0.75Q
+

X70.X1
+K5
X70
10165605

1
2

LSli
5

LSre
3

=K

RADIO

A3.X2

+K4
X71

4
+

BK 0.75Q

BK 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

IGN

=K

XMSP6a
+K2

Zustand

12

O.3

GND

BK 1.5Q

L76
RD 1.5Q

L75

11

R76

BK 1.5Q

A4.X53

=K

11

R75

GND

=K

85

GND

R.6

=K

B
A

L30

A4.X55

RD 1.5Q

87

WH 1.5Q

87a

=K

10A
RD

/19.B8
F8Kl.58

F76

10A
RD

PROJ: 8920980_003

R30

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

V3

F75

K12

86

T1.X

15A
BU

WH 1.5Q

30

F30

WH 1.5Q

+K2
XMSP6a

12V

WH 1.5Q

A4
=K
+K2

Kl.30

A4
=K
+K2

BK 2.5Q

BK 2.5Q

RD 2.5Q

B11r.X2

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

34
114

/99.C2

/99.C2

+K4
A22
/99.C2

/99.C2

Ausgabe
nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

A21.X1

RD 1Q

A19.X1

A19.X1

A19.X1

A19.X1

L10

X1 8
A19.CAN_Low
A
+K4
CAN_Low
A19
/98.D4
CAN_Low
CAN:
OPTIONSKEYBOARD

BK 1.5Q

WH 0.5Q

RD 1Q

A21.X1

=K

F.11

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM
CAN:
CAN:
/96.C2
CAN1_LowOUT
/96.C2
CAN1_HighOUT
CAN1_LowOUT
CAN1_HighOUT
A
A
A21.CAN1
A21.CAN1
X1 16
X1 17

X1 7
A19.CAN_High
A
+K4
CAN_High
A19
/98.D4
CAN_High
CAN:
OPTIONSKEYBOARD

X1 4
A19.CAN_Low
A
+K4
CAN_Low
A19
/98.C4
CAN_Low
CAN:
OPTIONSKEYBOARD

X1 3
A19.CAN_High
A
+K4
CAN_High
A19
/98.C4
CAN_High
CAN:
OPTIONSKEYBOARD

+K4

+K4

+K4

+K4

RD 1Q
BU 1Q

F
Ident.Nr.

DISPLAYUNIT
CANBUS3

WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

A19.X2
7

11
Datum

HEAT/AIRCON
CAN:
CAN_High
CAN_High
A
A22.CAN_High
X1 3

=K

+K2
XMSP6c
Ersteller

A21.X1

X1 13
X1 14
A21.CAN1
A21.CAN1
A
A
+K4
+K4
CAN1_LowINPUT
CAN1_HighINPUT
A21
A21
/96.C2
CAN1_Low&#5486
/96.C2
CAN1_High&#5486
CAN:
CAN:
HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM

=K

A4.X45

A21.X1

=K

WH,WH 0.5Q,0.5Q

+K2
XMSP6b

=K

R10

GND

=K

=K

BU 1Q

A13a.X
+K1

5A
LBN

A15.CAN.X

X1 7
A22.CAN_High
A
CAN_High
CAN_High
CAN:
HEAT/AIRCON

A22.X1

=K
F10

A15.CAN.X

CANHIGH3
A
A15.CAN3H
.CAN.X 7

14

A22.X1

A22.X1

A22.X1

HEAT/AIRCON
CAN:
CAN_Low
CAN_Low
A
A22.CAN_Low
X1 4

WIRINGHARNESS
PREPARATION
COLOURGRAPHICDISPLAY

Kl.15

WH 0.5Q

0.5Q
BK

=K

X1 8
A22.CAN_Low
A
CAN_Low
CAN_Low
CAN:
HEAT/AIRCON

+K4
A22

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

=K

A15
+K2
=K

17

RD 0.5Q
BU 0.5Q

A4
=K
+K2

A11.X1
+K4
=K

/85.C1
CANLOW3
A
A15.CAN3L
.CAN.X 2

RD 1Q

A11.X1
+K4
=K

=K

A15
+K2
=K

+K2
XMSP6a

/85.C1

A11
+K4
=K

MASTERMODULE
CAN:

BU 1Q

/95.D4

MASTERMODULE
CAN:

13

A11
+K4
=K

MAINKEYBOARD
CAN:
CAN_High
CAN_High
A
A11.CAN_High
X1 3

16

/95.D4

CANBUS3

=K

=K

rpm
time
hours

=K

PROJ: 8920980_003

STOP

MAINKEYBOARD
CAN:
CAN_Low
CAN_Low
A
A11.CAN_Low
X1 4

BU 1Q

/95.D4

X1 7
A11.CAN_High
A
CAN_High
CAN_High
CAN:
MAINKEYBOARD

/95.E4

=K
+K4
A11

RD 1Q

3/

Zustand

A13.X2
+K1
=K

A11.X1

A13.X1

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

BK 1.5Q

1/2

1/

1/1

MP

check

A11.X1

mph
km/h

50

120

+K1
A13

A
12

40

11

100

90

40

10

A
13

=K

BU 1Q

30

20

=K
X1 8
A11.CAN_Low
A
CAN_Low
CAN_Low
CAN:
MAINKEYBOARD

=K
+K4
A11

A
23

ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

35
114

A11.CAN_Low
X1 4

A11.CAN_High
X1 3

+K4
A22.X1

W156 +WL006 BU

A11.X1

X1 8
A22.CAN_Low
CAN_Low
/43.C2
CAN_Low
CAN:
HEIZ/KLIMATASTATUR
HEIZ/KLIMATASTATUR
CAN:
/43.C2
CAN_Low
A22
CAN_Low

+K4
A19.X1

+K4
A19.X1

X1 8
A19.CAN_Low

+K4
A19

/42.C4
GND

/41.C4

/41.C4

A21
+K4

+K4
A19

/42.C4

A21.X1

A19.X1

A21.X1

+K4
A19

CAN_High
CAN_High
CAN:
OPTIONSTASTATUR

/42.C4

X1 14
A21.CAN1

+K4
A21

/41.C4

/41.D4

A21
+K4

CAN1_HighIN
CAN1_HighIN
CAN:
HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE
HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE
CAN:
CAN1_HighOUT
CAN1_HighOUT

A21.CAN1
X1 17

A21.X1

A19.X1

X1 4
A19.CAN_Low
CAN_Low
CAN_Low
CAN:
OPTIONSTASTATUR

X1 3
A19.CAN_High

+K4
A19

/42.C4

CAN_High
CAN_High
CAN:
OPTIONSTASTATUR
E

A4.X45

+K2
XMSP6b

A19.X2

F.11

W156 +WL036 RD
2

W156 +WL036 BU

INFORMATIONFROM
Ident.Nr.8920980
Zeich.Nr.460901000000
VALIDTOSERIALNUMBER:see attachment

F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

A15.CAN3H
.CAN.X 7

A21.CAN1
X1 16

X1 7
A19.CAN_High

CAN_Low
CAN_Low
CAN:
OPTIONSTASTATUR

CANHIGH3

A15..CAN.X

CAN1_LowIN
CAN1_LowIN
CAN:
HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE
HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE
CAN:
CAN1_LowOUT
CAN1_LowOUT

W156 +WL045 RD

W156 +WL045 BU

Kl.15
F10
5A
LBN

+K4
A21

A22.CAN_High
X1 3

A22.X1
+K4

A15
+K2

X1 13
A21.CAN1

+K4
A22.X1
+K4

A21.X1

CAN_High
/43.C2
CAN_High
CAN:
HEIZ/KLIMATASTATUR
HEIZ/KLIMATASTATUR
CAN:
/43.C2
CAN_High
A22
CAN_High

A22.CAN_Low
X1 4

A4
=K
+K2

A15..CAN.X

+K4
A22

WH 0.5Q

BK 0.5Q

+K4

/33.C1
CANLOW3
A15.CAN3L
.CAN.X 2

X1 7
A22.CAN_High

+K4
A22

11

+K4
A22.X1

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

W156 +WL005 RD
W156 +WL005 BU

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

PROJ: 8920980_003

A11.X1

A15
+K2

/33.C1

W156 +WL010 RD

A11
+K4

14

/40.C4

17

A11
+K4

W156 +WL034 RD

/40.C4

+K2
XMSP6a

MasterModul
CAN:

rpm
time
hours

STOP

MasterModul
CAN:

W156 +WL010 BU

BK 1.5Q

1/1

A13.X2
+K1

/40.C4

13

40

1/

3/

/40.C4

MP

2
1

1/2

A13.X1

check

50

120

mph
km/h

CANCONNECTION3(C)

CAN_High
CAN_High
CAN:
HAUPTTASTATUR
HAUPTTASTATUR
CAN:
CAN_High
CAN_High

16

A
12

W156 +WL034 BU

11

10

40

100
90

+K4
A11

CAN_Low
CAN_Low
CAN:
HAUPTTASTATUR
HAUPTTASTATUR
CAN:
CAN_Low
CAN_Low

A
13

X1 7
A11.CAN_High

30

20

+K1
A13

+K4
A11

A
23

W156 +WL006 RD

3
2

A11.X1

X1 8
A11.CAN_Low

A11.X1

DISPLAYCAN

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

Ident.Nr.

DISPLAYUNIT
CANBUS3
4

ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

36
114

5
MASTERMODULE
CAN:

A15
+K2
=K

CANHIGH1
A
A15.CAN1H
.CAN.X 5

A15.CAN.X

A17a.X1.43.57
+H3

A16c.X1

B
2

A17a.X1.43.57
+H3

44

39

RD 1Q

RD 1Q

BU 1Q

38
38

X1.S
X1.B

BU 1Q

PROJ: 8920980_003

CANBUS1

+H3
A16a
/86.C5

X1 43
A16a.CAN_Low
D
CANlow(Resverb.)
CANlow
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1

X1 57
A16a.CAN_High

+H3
A16a
/86.D5

CANhigh(Resverb.)
CANhigh
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1

/86.C5

A16a.X1

A16c.X1

+H3
A16a.X1.44

X1 58
A16a.CAN_High

+H3
A16a

58

58

44

A17a.CAN_High
X1 57

A17a.X1

X1 44
A16a.CAN_Low
D
CANlow
CANlow
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1

+H3
A16a

/88.C5

A16c
+H3

/88.D5

A16c
+H3

INPUTMODULE3
CAN:
CANhigh
CANhigh

A16c.CAN_High
X1 57

A16c.X1

57

A16a.X1

+H3

BU 1Q

A16a.X1

A16a.X1

A17a.X1

RD 1Q

A700D.X2

BU 1Q

A700D.X2

A700D.CAN1H.1
X2 8

A700D.CAN1L.2
X2 9

CAN1HIGH

INPUTMODULE3
CAN:
CANlow
CANlow
D
A16c.CAN_Low
X1 43

CANhigh
CANhigh
CAN:
INPUTMODULE3

RD 1Q

A700D
+M

OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.D5
CANhigh
A17a
CANhigh

/88.D5

+H3
XA16a.X1.58

E
1

/93.C6
CAN1LOW

OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.C5
CANlow
A17a
CANlow
+H3
D
A17a.CAN_Low
X1 43

/88.C5

+H3
A16c

43

ENGINEECU
CAN:

+H3
A16c

BU 1Q

ENGINEECU
CAN:

CANhigh
/90.D5
CANhigh
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1

X1 58
A16c.CAN_High

CAN:
ENGINEECU

+H3
A17a

X1 44
A16c.CAN_Low
D
CANlow
CANlow
CAN:
INPUTMODULE3

57

CAN:
ENGINEECU

A16c.X1

X1 58
A17a.CAN_High

RD 1Q

/93.C6

/93.C6

A700D
+M

CAN1RES

A17a.X1

58

/93.C6

+M
A700D

X1 44
A17a.CAN_Low
D
+H3
CANlow
A17a
/90.C5
CANlow
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1

43

CAN1LOW

A17a.X1

57

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

+M
A700D

X2 54
A700D.CAN1R

44

A700D.X2

X2 40
A700D.CAN1L.1

54

A700D.X2

40

BU 1Q

43

RD 1Q

=K

BU 1Q

=K

A15.CAN.X

+K6
X1.S
X1.B

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

MASTERMODULE
CAN:

CANLOW1
A
A15.CAN1L
.CAN.X 4

/85.C1

A15
+K2
=K

OUTPUTMODULE3

OUTPUTMODULE1

INPUTMODULE1

INPUTMODULE3

OUTPUTMODULE2

/85.C1

39

CANhigh
CANhigh
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1

/86.D5

F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

Ident.Nr.

CANBUS1
WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

37
114

+K
A17b.X1.44

29

43

X1 29
A17c.CAN_Res

+H3
A17c

RESERVE
/92.E2 CANMATCHINGRESISTOR
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE3

+H3
A17c.X1

58

A17c.CAN_High
X1 58

59

59

58

X1.S
X1.B

OUTPUTMODULE3
CAN:
/92.D5
CANhigh
A17c
CANhigh

44

A17c.X1
58

A17c.X1

57

CANlow
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE3

OUTPUTMODULE3
CAN:
/92.C5
CANlow
A17c
CANlow
+H3
D
A17c
X1 44

RD 1Q

BU 1Q

43

58

A16b.CAN_High
X1 57

A16b.X1

RD 1Q

BU 1Q

RD 1Q

BU 1Q

A17b.X1

X1 58
A17b.CAN_High

+H3
A17b.X143a

A17b.X1

X1 57
A17b.CAN_High

OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.E2 CANMATCHINGRESISTOR
A17b
CANEND

+H3
A17b

+H3

/91.D5
A17b.CAN_Res
X1 29

A17b.X1

57

CANhigh
CANhigh
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2

/91.D5

+H3
A17b

CANhigh(CANEm.
CANhigh
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2

29

OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.C5
CANlow
A17b
CANlow(CANEm.
+H3
D
A17b.CAN_Low
X1 43

58

44

A17b.X1

X1 44
A17b
D
+H3
CANlow
A17b
/91.C5
CANlow
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2

A16d.CAN_High
X1 57

+K
A17b.X1.58

/92.C5

CANlow(CANEm.CAN_Resverb.)

58

A17b.X1

INPUTMODUL4
CAN:
CANhigh
CANhigh(Resverb.)

A16d.X1

+H3
A17c

X1 43
A17c.CAN_Low
D

CANBUS2

CANhigh
CANhigh
CAN:
INPUTMODUL4

BU 1Q

A16d.X1

/89.D5

A16d
+H3

CAN:
MASTERMODULE

RD 1Q

/89.C5

A16d
+H3

/87.D5

A16b
+K2

43

INPUTMODUL4
CAN:
CANlow
CANlow(Resverb.)
D
A16d.CAN_Low
X1 43

/89.D5

INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
CANhigh
CANhigh(CANEm

/85.C1

57

/89.C5

+K6
X1.S
X1.B

.CAN.X 6
A15.CAN2H
A
CANHIGH2

=K
+K2
A15

INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
CANlow
CANlow(CANEm.
D
A16b.CAN_Low
X1 43

A16b.X1

RD 1Q

44

BU 1Q

A15.CAN.X

.CAN.X 3
A15.CAN2L
A
CANLOW2

X1 58
A16d.CAN_High

+H3
A16d

WH 1.5Q

+H3
A16d

/87.C5

A16b
+K2

A16b.CAN_High
X1 58

A15.CAN.X
=K
+K2
A15

RD 1Q

1
BU 1Q

44

A16d.X1

43

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

A17b..X1.43.57
+K

CAN:
MASTERMODULE

/87.D5

A16b
+K2

INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
CANhigh
CANhigh

A16b.X1

/85.C1

X1 44
A16d.CAN_Low
D
CANlow
CANlow
CAN:
INPUTMODUL4

A17c.X1
INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
CANlow
CANlow
D
A16b.CAN_Low
X1 44

A16b.X1

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

PROJ: 8920980_003

A16d.X1

WH 1.5Q

A16b
+K2

A17b..X1.43.57
+K

/87.C5

OUTPUTMODULE3

OUTPUTMODULE2

INPUTMODULE1

INPUTMODULE3

OUTPUTMODULE1

ERECTIONOUTPUTMODULE3
CANEND
(JUMPER)
REMOVE!

F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

Ident.Nr.

CANBUS2
WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

38
114

SUPPLYELECTRICKEYPAD

SUPPLYMAINKEYBOARD

/27.A5 F07Kl.30

Kl.15

A4
=K
+K2

F71

10A
RD

R71

XMSP6b
+K2

BK 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q

RD 1.5Q

C.6

WH 1.5Q

WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q

A4.X42

C.4

X1 5
A18.Kl30
=K
A
+K4
SUPPLY
A18
/94.C3
SUPPLY
CAN:
ELECTRICKEYPAD

A18.X1

X1 1
A18.Kl15
=K
A
+K4
INFORMATIONINPUT
A18
/94.C3
INFORMATIONINPUT
CAN:
ELECTRICKEYPAD

A18.X1

X1 2
A18.GND
=K
A
+K4
SUPPLYEARTH
A18
/94.C3
SUPPLYEARTH
CAN:
ELECTRICKEYPAD

=K
+K4
A11
/95.D4

A11.X1

X1 1
A11.Kl15
A
+24V
SUPPLY
CAN:
MAINKEYBOARD

=K
+K4
A11
/95.D4

A11.X1
A18.X1

X1 2
A11.GND
A
SUPPLYEARTH
SUPPLYEARTH
CAN:
MAINKEYBOARD

XMSP6c
+K2

XMSP6c
+K2

Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

X1 5
A19.Kl15
A
+K4
SUPPLYKl.15
A19
/98.D4
SUPPLY
CAN:
OPTIONSKEYBOARD

+K4
A22
/99.C2

BK 1.5Q

A22.X1

X1 1
A22.Kl15
A
INFORMATIONINPUT
INFORMATIONINPUT
CAN:
HEAT/AIRCON

/99.C2

Ident.Nr.

SUPPLYKEYPADS
WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

+K4
A22

ZeichNr.

A22.X1

X1 2
A22.GND
A
SUPPLYEARTH
SUPPLYEARTH
CAN:
HEAT/AIRCON

+K4
A22
/99.C2

8920980
460901000003
7

WH 1.5Q

A22.X1

X1 2
A19.GND
A
+K4
SUPPLYEARTH
A19
/98.C4
SUPPLYEARTH
CAN:
OPTIONSKEYBOARD

A19.X1

A19.X1

BK 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

X1 1
A19.Kl15
A
+K4
INFORMATIONINPUT
A19
/98.C4
INFORMATIONINPUT
CAN:
OPTIONSKEYBOARD

A19.X1

WH 1.5Q

Kl.15

/51.B6

SUPPLYHEAT/AIRCONKEYBOARD

Kl.15

/51.B6

SUPPLYOPTIONKEYPAD

Zustand

WH 1.5Q

PROJ: 8920980_003

* A4.X42

GND

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

L71

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

XMSP6b
+K2

Kl.30

X1 5
A22.Kl15
A
SUPPLYKl.15
SUPPLY
CAN:
HEAT/AIRCON

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

39
114

SUPPLYMASTERMODULE

SUPPLYDIAGNOSTICPLUG
MASTERMODULE
CAN:

A
/85.C5

A15.COM4.X

A15
+K2
=K

Receive(RXD)
A
A15.RXD
.COM4.X 2

Transmit(TXD)
A
A15.TXD
.COM4.X 3

A15.COM4.X

=K

=K

5A
HBR
A

R35

R54

L35

L54

GND

A4
=K
+K2

Kl.30

PROJ: 8920980_003

/85.B5

A15
+K2
=K

=K

F54

10A
RD

GND

XMSP6b
+K2

C
10A
RD

A4.X42

RD 0.5Q

F26

BU 0.5Q

10
BK 0.5Q

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

XMSP6b
+K2

C.8

R26
L26
GND

A4.X40

10

RD 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q

A.9

A4.X40
A.10

A9Kl.30

RD 1.5Q

RD 1.5Q

XMSP6b
+K2

CAN:
MASTERMODULE

CAN:
MASTERMODULE

/85.C1
CAN:
MASTERMODULE

CAN:
MASTERMODULE

Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

+K2
X60

DIAGNOSTICPLUG
Ident.Nr.

SUPPLYMASTER
SUPPLYDIAGNOSTICPLUG

WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

*9

.PWR.X 6
A15.VBat
A
Kl.30

/85.B1

=K
+K2
A15

.PWR.X 2
A15.DIGIN0
A
Kl.15

/85.C1

=K
+K2
A15

/85.B1

.PWR.X 5
A15.Shield
A
HOUSINGMASTER

/79.C6

=K
+K2
A15

A15.X

IMMOBILISERKl.30

.PWR.X 1
A15.GND
A
EARTH

=K
+K2
A15

A15.X

A15.X

BK 1.5Q

A15.X

Zustand

MASTERMODULE
CAN:

F35

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

SIGNALGround(S
A
A15.GND
.COM4.X 5

A15.COM4.X

Kl.15
E

Kl.30

A4
=K
+K2

MASTERMODULE
CAN:
/85.B5

A15
+K2
=K

A.4

A4.X40

ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

40
114

SUPPLYINPUTMODULE2

SUPPLYINPUTMODULE1

Kl.15

A4
=K
+K2

Kl.15

Kl.15

A4
=K
+K2

F43

F45

5A
VI

F44

10A
RD

10A
RD

R45

R44

L43

L45

L44

R43

GND

/42.C2

GND

A4.X44

XMSP6b
+K2

XMSP1a
+H2

+K6
X1.S
X1.B

A16a.X1

XMSP1a
+H2

WH 1.5Q

+K2
A16b

X1 2
A16b.24V_logic
A
VBatt24VLog
SUPPLY24V
CAN:
INPUTMODULE2

BK 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

40
40

+K2
A16b
/87.D2

+K2
A16b
/87.E2

VBatt24V
SUPPLY24V
CAN:
INPUTMODULE2

+K2
A16b
/87.E2

X1 2
A16a.24V_logic
A
+H3
VBatt24VLog
A16a
/86.C2 SUPPLY24VLOGICALPART
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1

SUPPLYEARTH
EARTH
CAN:
INPUTMODULE2

+H3
A16a
/86.D2

X1 16
A16a.GND_logic
A
SUPPLYGNDLOGIK
EARTHLOGICALPART
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1

A16a.X1

X1 30
A16a.24V

+H3
A16a

VBatt24V
SUPPLY24V
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1

/86.E2

31

A16a.X1

30

A16a.X1

X1 31
A16b.GND

A16b.X1

X1 30
A16b.24V

31

30

16

A16b.X1

X1 16
A16b.GND_logic
A
EARTHLOGIK
EARTHLOGICALPART
CAN:
INPUTMODULE2

X1 31
A16a.GND

+H3
A16a
/86.E2

SUPPLYEARTH
EARTH
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1

/87.C2

A16b.X1

A16b.X1

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

=H+H3A17c.X1:2,=K+K6X2.S:33

+K6
X1.S
X1.B

BK 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

XMSP6b
+K2

16

+K
Splice.X1

41

WH 1.5Q

A.5

OLE7
Verb.

A4.X40

E.11

WH 1.5Q

S.12

41

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

11

A4.X56

/48.C2

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

GND

12

PROJ: 8920980_003

F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

Ident.Nr.

SUPPLYINPUTMODULE1AND2
WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

41
114

SUPPLYOutputmodule1
A

Kl.15

Kl.15

A4
=K
+K2

Kl.15

F47

F43
B

/41.B1

PROJ: 8920980_003

GND

R47

R48

L47

L48
GND

GND

A4.X44

+H3
A17a
/90.D1

EARTHLOGICALPART
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1

44

WH 1.5Q

D
BK 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

A17a.X1

X1 3
A17a.GND
A
+H3
SUPPLYEARTH
A17a
/90.C1
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1

10

A17a.X1

X1 15
A17a.24V_B2
A
+H3
SUPPLY24VBank2
A17a
/90.D1
SUPPLY24VBank2
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1

17

A17a.X1

XMSP1a
+H2

15

BK 1.5Q

X1 1
A17a.24V_B1
A
+H3
VBatt24VBank1
A17a
/90.B1
SUPPLY24VBANK1
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1

SUPPLYEARTHLOGICALPART

+K6
X1.S
X1.B

WH 1.5Q

A17a.X1

X1 16
A17a.GND_logic
A

BK 1.5Q
2

A17a.X1

X1 2
A17a.24V_logic
A
+H3
VBatt24VLog
A17a
/90.C1 SUPPLY24VLOGICALPART
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1

XMSP1a
+H2

44

WH 1.5Q

+K6
X1.S
X1.B

43

/44.C2

43

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

=K+K6X2.S:64
WH 1.5Q

Splice.X2.F43KL.15

42

XMSP1a
+H2

42

OLE8
Verb.
1

WH 1.5Q

E.10

X1 17
A17a.GND
A
+H3
SUPPLYEARTH
A17a
/90.D1
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1

/71.C1

Kl.15

A17a.X1

A4.X44

E.8

16

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

+K6
X1.S
X1.B

10

11

A4.X56
+K2
Splice.X2

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

R43
L43

S.11

10A
RD

F48

10A
RD

5A
VI

SUPPLYLOGIC

SUPPLYBANK1

SUPPLYBANK2

F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

Ident.Nr.

SUPPLYOUTPUTMODULE1
WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

42
114

F59

F60

10A
RD

R52

L59

L60

L51

L52

GND

A4.X43

GND

A4.X43
D.5

A4.X42

A4.X42
WH 1.5Q

+K6
X1.S
X1.B

50

+K6
X1.S
X1.B

46

45

+K6
X1.S
X1.B

45

C.11

WH 1.5Q

50

WH 1.5Q

GND

C.3

46

PROJ: 8920980_003

R51

WH 1.5Q

X1 28
A17a.24V_B4

X1 26
A17a.GND

+H3
+H3
A17aVBatt24VBk4zuM2/33(2.AST) A17a
/90.E1

SUPPLY24VBank4
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1

SUPPLYEARTH
/90.E1
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1

SUPPLYBANK4

A17a.X1

A17a.X1

A17b.X1

X1 14
A17a.24V_B3
A
+H3
A17aVBatt24VBk3zuM2/35(2.AST)
/90.D1
SUPPLY24VBank3
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1

VBatt24VBk4
/91.E2
SUPPLY24VBank4
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2

SUPPLYBANK3

+H3
A17a.DO2
X1 35

A17a.X1

A17b.X1

X1 28
A17b.24V_B4

+H3
A17b

34

32

A17a.DO1
X1 33

OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.E1
digital output2
A17a 2.ASTpump2zuM2/14

X1 26
A17b.GND

+H3
A17b
/91.E2

SUPPLYEARTH
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2

A17b.X1

X1 12
A17b.GND
A
+H3
SUPPLYEARTH
A17b
/91.C2
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2

SUPPLYBANK4

35

A17b.X1

XMSP1b
+H2

14

A17b.DO2
X1 35

X1 12
A17a.GND
A
+H3
SUPPLYEARTH
A17a
/90.C1
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1

XMSP1b
+H2

+H3

33

A17a.X1

OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.E1
digital output1
A17a 2.ASTJoystickzuM2/28

12

+H3

SUPPLYSUPPLYDO2
/90.E1 SUPPLYforDIGTALOUTPUT2
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1

BK 1.5Q

+H3
A17a

SUPPLYSUPPLYDO1
/90.E1 SUPPLYfor digital output1
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1

28

BK 1.5Q

A17a.X1

26

33

A17b.DO1
X1 33

XMSP1b
+H2
BK 1.5Q

+H3

OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.E2
digital output2
A17b 2.ASTTRANSMISSION

+H3
A17a

35

XMSP1b
+H2

12

OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.E2
digital output 1
A17b
2.ASTpump1

X1 34
A17a.V_DO2

BK 1.5Q

SUPPLYSUPPLYDO
/91.E2
SUPPLY
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2

A17a.X1

X1 32
A17a.V_DO1

26

+H3
A17b

VBattSUPPLYDO1
/91.E2
SUPPLY
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2

A17a.X1

A17a.X1

X1 34
A17b.V_DO2

+H3
A17b

A17b.X1

34

A17b.X1

X1 32
A17b.V_DO1

14

A17b.X1

32

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

28

R60

D.4

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

10A
RD

R59

GND

+K6
X1.S
X1.B

A
E

F52

10A
RD

F51

10A
RD

51

A4
=K
+K2

51

Kl.15

11

Kl.15

SUPPLYOutputmodule2

A4
=K
+K2

Kl.15

SUPPLYOutputmodule1

Kl.15

A17b.X1

X1 14
A17b.24V_B3
A
+H3
VBatt24VBK3
A17b
/91.D2
SUPPLY24VBank3
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2

SUPPLYBANK3

F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

Ident.Nr.

SUPPLYOUTPUTMODULE1AND2
WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

43
114

SUPPLYOutputmodule2
A4
=K
+K2

Kl.15

A
Kl.15

F55

F56

10A
RD

10A
RD

R56

L55

L56

GND

A4.X43

WH 1.5Q
49

A17b.X1

X1 3
A17b.GND
A
+H3
SUPPLYEARTH
A17b
/91.C2
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2

BK 1.5Q

X1 15
A17b.24V_B2
A
+H3
VBatt24VBank2
A17b
/91.D2
SUPPLY24VBank2
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2

SUPPLYBANK1

A17b.X1

17

WH 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q

A17b.X1

49

48
48

X1 1
A17b.24V_B1
A
+H3
VBatt24VBank1
A17b
/91.B2
SUPPLY24V
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2

SUPPLYLOGIC

+K6
X1.S
X1.B

15

A17b.X1

X1 16
A17b.GND_logic
A
+H3
VBattEARTH
A17b
/91.D2
EARTHLOGICALPART
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2

XMSP1b
+H2

16

BK 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

+K6
X1.S
X1.B

A17b.X1

X1 2
A17b.24V_logic
A
+H3
VBatt24VLOGICALPART
A17b
/91.C2
SUPPLY24V
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2

XMSP1b
+H2

Splice.X2.F43KL.15
WH 1.5Q

XMSP1b
+H2

D.6

WH 1.5Q

A.12

A17b.X1

A4.X40

/42.C3

12

SUPPLYOUTPUTMODULE2

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

R55

GND

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

PROJ: 8920980_003

X1 17
A17b.GND
A
+H3
SUPPLYEARTH
A17b
/91.D2
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2

SUPPLYBANK2

F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

Ident.Nr.

SUPPLYOUTPUTMODULE2
WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

44
114

WH 1.5Q
9

C.5

5
1
=K+K4S43.X2:9

BK 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

E200.X

1
WH 1.5Q

+K4
E200

+H3
A17b

VBattDO3
/91.F2
SUPPLY
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2

B12.1

BK 1.5Q

/25.D1

54 X1
A17b.GND_DO4

X1 38
A17b

+H3

+H3
A17b

EARTHBackup
A17b
EARTH
/91.D5
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2

VBattD04
/91.F2
SUPPLY
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2

Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

+K2
XMSP6a

Ident.Nr.

OUTPUTMODULE2BACKUPALARM
ANDCANBESWITCHEDOFF

WerkBischofshofenGmbH
4

STOPLIGHT

X1 36
A17b.V_DO3

A17b.X1

54

A17b.X1

38

A17b.X1

10

E200.X

Zustand

20

+K6
X1.S
X1.B

20

B16b.X

B16.X

+H5
2 B16a.X1

C
WH 1.5Q

WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q

OLE9
Verb.

WH 1.5Q
1

1
1

B16b.X

+H5

A4.X44

22

22

21

X2.S
X2.B
+K6

WH 1.5Q

21
52
52

+K6
X1.S
X1.B
BK 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

X2.S
X2.B
+K6

+H5
B16

+H1
B16c.X1

+K2
XMSP6d

BK 1.5Q

53
53

+H5
B16
0

M
2

H22a.X2

B16.X

+H1
H22a
0

B16a.X1
1

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

S43.X2

WH 1.5Q

B16c.X1
+H1

L22
GND

WH 1.5Q

+K6
X1.S
X1.B

10

R22

WH 1.5Q

A4.X42

H22a.X1

10A
RD
A

10

PROJ: 8920980_003

A4.X43

F22

S43.X2

10

S43.X1

OPTION&#5482
Rear side/ERECTIONUPbonnet

GND

36

L62

D.10

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

L61
GND

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

R62

=K
+K4
S43
0

WH 1.5Q

R61

WH 1.5Q

S43.X1

A17b.X1

10A
RD

A
E

10

F62

10A
RD

39

F61

+H3
A17b.DO4
39 X1

Kl.15

BK 1.5Q

A4
=K
+K2
WH 1.5Q

OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
Digitalausgang4
/91.F2
A17b
BackupALARM

Kl.15

WH 1.5Q

Kl.15

OPTIONBackupALARMCANBESWITCHEDOFF

SUPPLYOutputmodule2
A4
=K
+K2

ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

45
114

=K
+K4
S43
0

GND

=K
+K2
XMSP6d

22

WH 1.5Q
22

A4.X44

20

+K6
X1.S
X1.B

BK 1.5Q
D

X1 36
A17b.V_DO3

=H
+H3
A17b

54

38

=H
+H3
A17b.X1

54 X1
A17b.GND_DO4

X1 38
A17b

Reserve
Masse
CAN:
OUTPUTMODUL2

VBattDO3
Reserve
=H+H/51.F2
VersorgungfrDigitalausgang3
=H+H/51.F2
VersorgungfrDigitalausgang4
CAN:
CAN:
OUTPUTMODUL2
OUTPUTMODUL2

=H
+H3
A17b

=K+K/7.D1

=H
+H3
A17b

+H3
A17b.X1

36

+H3
A17b.X1

B12.1.2

WH 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q

20

B16.X
+H5

B16b.X
+H5
=H

=H
2
+H5
B16a.X1
2

+H1
B16c.X1

+H5
B16
0

BK 1.5Q

52
52

53
53

H22a.X2

=H
+H5
B16b.X

B16a.X1
+H5
=H

21

21

+K6
X2.S
X2.B

X2.S
X2.B
+K6

+H5
B16
0

M
2

=K
+K6
X1.S
X1.B
+K6
=K

+H1
H22a
0

B16c.X1
+H1

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

H22a.X1

=K
+K6
X1.S
X1.B
+K6
=K

10

S43.X2

C.5

+H5
B16.X

Verb. A4.X44:5

10

PROJ: 8920980_003

S43.X1

A4.X42

=H+H/51.D5

INFORMATIONFROM
Ident.Nr.8920980
Zeich.Nr.460901000000
VALIDTOSERIALNUMBER:see attachment

F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

10

Bremslicht

A4.X43

S43.X2

WH 1.5Q

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

GND

D.10

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

GND

F22
10A
RD

=K+K4S43.X2:9

=K
+K4
S43a
S2
6905201
6002120 0

Rckfahrwarneinrichtungoptisch
Heckseitig/MontageaufMotorhaube

S43.X1
WH 1.5Q

A17b.X1
+H3
=H

WH 1.5Q

A17b.DO4
39 X1

F62
10A
RD

39

F61
10A
RD

A17b
+H3
=H

WH 1.5Q

=H+H/51.F2

Kl.15

WH 1.5Q

A4
=K
+K2

Kl.15

10

Kl.15

OUTPUTMODUL2
CAN:
Digitalausgang4
Reserve

A4
=K
+K2

OptionBackupAlarmwhich can be switched off

SupplyOutputmodule2
A

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

Ident.Nr.

OUTPUTMODULE2BACKUPALARM
ANDCANBESWITCHEDOFF
4

ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

46
114

+K2
A4.X40.3a

+K2
Kl.30a
1

WH 1.5Q

SUPPLYLHECUUP/CR

PROJ: 8920980_003

R24

R38

L36

L24

L38

GND

GND

A4.X40

A.1

R36

GND

A.2

XMSP6c
+K2

XMSP6c

RD 6Q

Verb.

37
37

1
5A
LBN

A4.X41
+K2
B.2

A700D.X2

+K2
F216
5A
LBN

X2 68
A700D.15

+M
A700D

IGNITION
ON
ENGINEECU

/93.B2

=K
+K2.RH

2 100mm

RD 1.5Q

F38

10A
RD

=K+K2K216:87

F24

40A
OG

WH 1.5Q

F36

68

+K6
X1.S
X1.B

Kl.30

Kl.15

Kl.30

A4
=K
+K2

A4.X40

OLE10

A4.X40

A.3

+K3
S216

21

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

+M
A700D
/93.B2

SUPPLY30b
PERFORMANCEPART
ENGINEECU

+M
A700D
/93.C2

X2 15
A700D.31.2
EARTH
PERFORMANCEPART
ENGINEECU

+M
A700D
/93.C2

X2 2
A700D.30.2
SUPPLY30b
PERFORMANCEPART
ENGINEECU

+M
A700D

EARTH
PERFORMANCEPART
ENGINEECU

/93.C2

X2 4
A700D.30.3

+M
A700D

SUPPLY30b
ELECTRONICS
ENGINEECU

/93.C2

A700D.X2

87 10022680

10022680

87a

E
1

A700D.X2

X2 16
A700D.31.3

A700D.X2

16

A700D.X2

15

A700D.X2

X2 1
A700D.30.1

31

BK 1.5Q

BU 1Q

RD 1Q

BU 2.5Q

RD 2.5Q

BU 2.5Q

15

+K2
XMSP12.1
+M
A700D.X2

+K2
K216
0

RD 2.5Q

30

57

X1.S
X1.B

57

56

=K
+K2.RH

56

X1.S
X1.B

BU 1Q

RD 1Q

BU 2.5Q
24

+K6
X1.S
X1.B

24

55

RD 2.5Q
21

54

X1.S
X1.B

55

+K6
X1.S
X1.B

21

54

BU 2.5Q

RD 2.5Q

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

+K6
X1.S
X1.B

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

WH 1.5Q

22

XMSP6c

X2 3
A700D.31.1

+M
A700D

EARTH
ELECTRONICS
ENGINEECU

/93.C2

OPTIONLAGGING AUTOMATICS

F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

Ident.Nr.

MOTORCONTROLAUTOMATICRUNOUT
WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

47
114

CONNECTWITHA4.X56.12F43

F64

10A
RD

10A
RD

R63

R64

L63

L64

/41.F1

GND

A4.X41
+K2

10

A4.X41
+K2

WH 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q

29

+K6
X2.S
X2.B
+K6

XMSP1d
+H2

29

28

33

+K6
X2.S
X2.B
+K6

XMSP1d
+H2

28

33

+K6
X2.S
X2.B
+K6

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

XMSP1d
+H2

A17c.X1

X1 3
A17c.GND
A
+H3
SUPPLYEARTH
A17c
/92.C2
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE3

A17c.X1

X1 15
A17c.24V_B2
A
+H3
SUPPLY24VBank2
A17c
/92.D2
SUPPLY24VBank2
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE3

17

A17c.X1

X1 1
A17c.24V_B1
A
+H3
VBatt24VBank1
A17c
/92.B2
SUPPLY24VBANK1
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE3

15

A17c.X1

X1 16
A17c.GND_logic
A
+H3
VBattEARTHLOGICALPART
A17c
/92.D2
EARTHLOGICALPART
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE3

A17c.X1

X1 2
A17c.24V_logic
A
+H3
VBatt24VLOGICALPART
A17c
/92.C2 SUPPLY24VLOGICALPART
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE3

A17c.X1

16

E
2

F63

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

GND

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

PROJ: 8920980_003

Kl.15

A4
=K
+K2

Kl.15

SUPPLYOutputmodul3

X1 17
A17c.GND
A
+H3
SUPPLYEARTH
A17c
/92.D2
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE3

F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

Ident.Nr.

SUPPLYOUTPUTMODULE3
WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

48
114

SUPPLYOutputmodule3

F66

L65

L66

GND

A4
=K
+K2

GND

E
F71
10A
RD

WH 1.5Q

11

A4.X40

A4.X40

1
1

30

86

+K2
K246

D
V48

+K4
A18.X1.1a

87a

87

85

V36

V37

WH 1.5Q

GND
MP

A4.X48

I.11

I.10

MP

10

BK 1.5Q

A18.X1.1b
+K4

A4.X48
I.8

A4
=K
+K2

X1 1
A18.Kl15
A
+K4
A18 INFORMATIONINPUT
/52.C3 INFORMATIONINPUT
CAN:
ELECTRIESKEYBOARD

WH 1.5Q

A4.X48

12

C.6

A18.X1
WH 1.5Q

A4.X42

I.12

C.4

WH 1.5Q

* A4.X42

SUPPLYOPTIONS/KLIMATASTATUR

31

WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q

31

+K6
X2.S
X2.B
+K6

30

+K6
X2.S
X2.B
+K6

XMSP1d
+H2

30

WH 1.5Q

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

XMSP1d
+H2

GND

X1 12
A17c.GND
A
+H3
SUPPLYEARTH
A17c
/92.C2
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE3

A17c.X1

A17c.X1

X1 28
A17c.24V_B4

+H3
A17c

SUPPLY24VBank4
/92.E2
SUPPLY24VBank4
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE3

26

A17c.X1

X1 14
A17c.24V_B3
A
+H3
SUPPLY24VBank3
A17c
/92.D2
SUPPLY24VBank3
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE3

28

A17c.X1

12

E
14

+K6
X2.B
X2.S

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

WH 1.5Q

R66

32

PROJ: 8920980_003

SUPPLYELECTRICKEYPAD

R65

32

10A
RD

SUPPLYMAINKEYPAD

10A
RD

Kl.15

F65

OUTPUTMODULE3
CAN:
/92.C2
PWMOutput1(Bank1)
A17c VccCUTOFFLIGHTING
+H3
A
A17c.PWM1
X1 4

Kl.15

Kl.15

A4
=K
+K2

X1 26
A17c.GND

+H3
A17c
/92.E2

OPTIONAUTOMATICLIGHTING
CUTOFF(ABA)

SUPPLYEARTH
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE3

F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

Ident.Nr.

SUPPLYOUTPUTMODULE3AUTOMATIC
LIGHTINGSHUTDOWN
4

ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

49
114

A17c.X1

OUTPUTMODULE3
CAN:
/92.C2
PWMOutput4(Bank1)
A17c 4.CONTROLCIRCUITEPMV1
+H3
A
A17c.PWM4
X1 7

A17c.X1

OUTPUTMODULE3
CAN:
/92.D2
PWMOutput5(Bank2)
A17c 4.CONTROLCIRCUITEPMV2
+H3
A
A17c.PWM5
X1 18

A17c.X1

F209
5A
LBN

F210
10A
RD

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

PROJ: 8920980_003

18

OUTPUTMODULE3
CAN:
/92.C2
PWMOutput3(Bank1)
A17c 3.CONTROLCIRCUITEPMV2
+H3
A
A17c.PWM3
X1 6

WH 6Q

A17c.X1

/89.D2

+H3
A16d
/89.E2

Y12b.JPT

Y11b.JPT

SUPPLY24V
SUPPLY24V
CAN:
INPUTMODUL4

+H3
A16d

BK 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q

A17c.X1

50

49

A17c.X1

X1 47
X1 48
X1 49
X1 50
A17c.GND_PWM2
A17c.GND_PWM3
A17c.GND_PWM4
A17c.GND_PWM9
D
D
D
D
+H3
+H3
+H3
+H3
RESERVE
A17cGND3.CONTROLCIRCUITEPMV1 A17cGND3.CONTROLCIRCUITEPMV2 A17cGND4.CONTROLCIRCUITEPMV1 A17c
/92.C5
EARTH
/92.C5
EARTH
/92.C5
EARTH
/92.C5
EARTH
CAN:
CAN:
CAN:
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE3
OUTPUTMODULE3
OUTPUTMODULE3
OUTPUTMODULE3

SUPPLYEARTH
EARTH
CAN:
INPUTMODUL4

/89.E2

A17c.X1

48

A17c.X1

X1 31
A16d.GND

47

BK 1.5Q

A16d.X1

X1 30
A16d.24V

31

WH 1.5Q

A16d.X1

D
BK 1.5Q

+H3
A16d

X1 16
A16d.GND_logic
A
EARTHLOGICALPART
EARTHLOGICALPART
CAN:
INPUTMODUL4

30

BK 1.5Q

A16d.X1

X1 2
A16d.24V_logic
A
+H3
SUPPLYEARTH
A16d
/89.C2 SUPPLY24VLOGICALPART
CAN:
INPUTMODUL4

16

WH 1.5Q

A16d.X1

Y12b.JPT
1
+V1
Y12b
0

Y12a.JPT

Y11a.JPT

2
2

BK 1.5Q

Y11b.JPT
1
+V1
Y11b
0

57

56

Y12a.JPT
1
+V1
Y12a
0

57

WH 1.5Q

Y11a.JPT
1
+V1
Y11a
0

+K6
X2.S
X2.B

56

BK 1.5Q

+K6
X2.S
X2.B

55

54

+K6
X2.S
X2.B

54

+K6
X2.S
X2.B

XMSP200
+K2

55

WH 1.5Q

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

XMSP200
+K2

OUTPUTMODULE3
CAN:
/92.C2
PWMOutput2(Bank1)
A17c 3.CONTROLCIRCUITEPMV1
+H3
A
A17c.PWM2
X1 5

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

=K
+K2.RH

WH 6Q

+K2
A4.Kl.15.a
1

F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

SUPPLYINPUTMODULE4EP3.AND4.CONTROLCIRCUIT
WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

50
114

Kl.15

A4
=K
+K2

F9

10A
RD

A4.X45

WH 1Q
5

A4.X45 F.10

F.9

INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
ANALOGUEUniversal
CONTROLLEVEROption1
A
A16b.UI9
X1 8

/87.C2

A16b
+K2

WH 1Q

A16b.X1

18

A16b.X1

10

A4.X44

INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
ANALOGUEUniversal
CONTROLLEVERBACKWARD2
A
A16b.UI6
X1 19
19

INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
ANALOGUEUniversal
/87.D2
CONTROLLEVERFORWARD2 A16b
+K2
A
A16b.UI5
X1 18

WH 1Q

WH 1Q

A16a.X1

A16a.X1

XMSP6c
+K2

A16b.X1

/87.C2

A16b
+K2

INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
ANALOGUEUniversal
CONTROLLEVEROption2
A
A16b.UI10
X1 9

A16b.X1

/87.C2

A16b
+K2

A16b.X1

WH 1Q

10

11

12

OPT2
sw3

10

WH 1Q

10

E
1

OPT3
sw5

S222.X1

S222.X2

10

S222.X2

12

11

10

COMFORTCONTROLVIA1<>5
3CONTROLCIRCUITVIA1<>5AND6<>2
INFOASSEMBLYINSTRUCTIONS!

0
S2.1

S2.2

S2.3

S2.4

BK 1.5Q

VNR

WH 1.5Q

+K4
S2

S2.X

OPT1
sw4

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

0
S222
+K4

WH 1Q

WH 1Q

A16b.X1.10a
+K2

WH 1Q

A16b.X2.9+10b
+K2
WH 1Q

A16b.X2.9+10b
+K2

A16b.X1.9a
+K2

WH 1Q

WH 1Q

WH 1Q

WH 1Q

WH 1Q

BK 1Q

WH 1Q

D
1

WH 1Q

23

+K6
X1.B
X1.S
+K6

23

+K6
X1.B
X1.S
+K6

LHCONTROLLEVERVNRANDOPTIONS
OLE5
OLE6

F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

+K
Splice.X3

S222.X1

INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
ANALOGUEUniversal
CONTROLLEVEROption3
A
A16b.UI11
X1 10

WH 1Q

22

PROJ: 8920980_003

GND

E.4

22

L9

GND

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

L15

10

R9

F15.3

R15

/39.E8

Kl.15

F15.2

10A
RD

/39.E3

F15

Kl.15

F15.1

/20.C3

INPUTMODULE1
INPUTMODULE1
CAN:
CAN:
/86.C2 ANALOGUEall-purpose Input9
/86.C2 ANALOGUEall-purpose Input10
/87.D2
A16a CONTROLLEVERFORWARD1 A16a CONTROLLEVERBACKWARD1 A16b
+H3
+H3
+K2
A
A
A16a.UI9
A16a.UI10
X1 8
X1 9

/20.B2

Kl.15

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

LHCONTROLLEVER
SWITCHCOMFORTCONTROL3AND4CONTROLCIRCUIT

WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.

Verb.
Verb.

1
1

8920980
460901000003
7

=K+K4S222.X2:9
=K+K4S222.X2:10

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

51
114

A16b.X1

35

A16b.24V
X1 35

RD 0.5Q

21

15
15

14
14
BU 0.5Q

12

/87.E2

A16b
+K2

INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
SUPPLY24V
24Vthrottle transmitter2

+K6
X2.B
X2.S

12

11
11

BU 0.5Q

RD 0.5Q
1

BU 0.5Q

RD 0.5Q

A16b.X1

BU 0.5Q

A16a.X1

25

A16a.X1

/87.D2

A16a.UI16
X1 25

RD 0.5Q

BU 0.5Q

BU 0.5Q

A16b.X1

A16a.24V
X1 39

INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
ANALOGUEUniversal
throttle transmitter2
A
A16b.UI8
X1 21

A16b
+K2

+H3

+K6
R5
R5.X

BK 0.5Q

EARTHInchPot.1
EARTH
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1

16

A16b.X1

X1 67
A16a.GND

EARTHInchPot.2
EARTH
CAN:
INPUTMODULE2

+H3
A16a
/86.E5

EARTHthrottle transmitter1
EARTH
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1

63

67

A16a.X1

X1 62
A16b.GND

/87.D5

62

A16b.X1
+K2
A16b

BK 0.5Q

BK 0.5Q

BK 0.5Q

63

X1 63
A16a.GND

16

13
BK 0.5Q

13

X2.S
X2.B
+K6

/86.D5

signal

X2.S
X2.B
+K6

+H3
A16a

3
signal

A16a.X1

BK 0.5Q

R1.X

signal

R5.X

3
signal

+K6
R1

1
4

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

A16b.24V
X1 34

INPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/86.E2 ANALOGUEall-purpose input16
A16a
throttle transmitter1

R1.X

/86.F2

A16a
+H3

INPUTMODULE1
CAN:
SUPPLY24V
24Vthrottle transmitter1

+K6
X2.B
X2.S

/87.E2

A16b
+K2

INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
SUPPLY24V
24VInchPotentiometer2

39

A16b.X1

PROJ: 8920980_003

/87.D2

A16b
+K2

RD 0.5Q

INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
ANALOGUEUniversal
InchPotentiometer2
A
A16b.UI7
X1 20

21

A16a.X1

RD 0.5Q

A16a.X1

20

INPUTMODULE1
INPUTMODULE1
CAN:
CAN:
SUPPLY24V
/86.D2 ANALOGUEall-purpose Input8
24VInchPotentiometer1A16a
InchPotentiometer1
+H3
A
A16a.24V
A16a.UI8
X1 35
X1 21
35

/86.E2

A16a
+H3

34

X1 63
A16b.GND

+K2
A16b
/87.D5

EARTHthrottler transmitter
EARTH
CAN:
INPUTMODULE2

F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

Ident.Nr.

ANGLESENSORINCH/GASPEDAL
WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

52
114

A17b.X1

OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.D1
PWMOutput13(Bank4)
A17a
oil engine1
+H3
A
A17a.PWM13
X1 22

A17a.X1

OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.D1
PWMOutput14(Bank4)
A17a
oil engine2
+H3
A
A17a.PWM14
X1 23

A17a.X1

OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
A
/90.D1
PWMOutput8(Bank2)
A17a Swivel angle limitation.oil engine1
+H3
A
A17a.PWM8
X1 21

A17a.X1

21

A17a.X1

OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.C2
PWMOutput1(Bank
A17b OVERSPEEDPROTECTION
+H3
A
A17b.PWM1
X1 4

23

A17a.X1

OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.C1
PWMOutput9(Bank3)
A17a
cruising range1
+H3
A
A17a.PWM9
X1 8

22

OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.C1
PWMOutput11(Bank3)
A17a
cruising range3
+H3
A
A17a.PWM11
X1 10

A17a.X1

10

A17a.X1

11

OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.C1
PWMOutput10(Bank3)
A17a
cruising range2
+H3
A
A17a.PWM10
X1 9
9

OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.C1
PWMOutput12(Bank3)
A17a
Modulation
+H3
A
A17a.PWM12
X1 11

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

Y6.3

Y16.JPT

YEP2.DT

Y57.DT

H
G

YEP1.DT

G
F

+F3
Y57

Y6.1

0
E
Y6.X

Y57.DT

Y6.2

+H
Y16

YEP2.DT
1
+F3
YEP2

MO1

YEP1.DT
1
+F3
YEP1

+F3
Y6

Y16.JPT
Y6.X
A

BK 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q

+H3
A17a

+H3
A17a

EARTHModulation
/90.C5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1

EARTHTRAVELRANGES2
/90.C5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1

X1 52
A17a.GND_PWM11

+H3
A17a

EARTHTRAVELRANGES3
/90.C5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1

X1 46
A17b.GND_PWM1
D
+H3
EARTHoverspeed
A17b
/91.C5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2

A17a.X1

X1 64
A17a.GND_PWM13

+H3
A17a

A17a.X1

X1 65
A17a.GND_PWM14

EARTHoil engine1
/90.D5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1

+H3
A17a

EARTHoil engine2
/90.E5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1

63

A17a.X1

65

A17b.X1

X1 50
A17a.GND_PWM9
D
+H3
EARTHTRAVELRANGES1
A17a
/90.C5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1

64

A17a.X1

46

A17a.X1

X1 51
A17a.GND_PWM10

50

A17a.X1

X1 53
A17a.GND_PWM12

51

A17a.X1

52

E
53

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

PROJ: 8920980_003

X1 63
A17a.GND_PWM8

+H3
A17a
/90.D5

Swivel angle limitation.oil engine1


EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1

F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

TRAVELRANGESSWIVELANGLEHYDROMOTORS
OVERSPEEDPROTECTION

WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

53
114

A
A17b.PWM9
X1 8

A17a.X1

A17b.X1

TRAVELLINGDIRECTIONPump2BACKWARD

A
A17b.PWM10
X1 9

A17b.X1

A17b.X1

OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.C2
PWMOutput4(Bank
A17b SWIVELANGLEtravel pump2
+H3
A
A17b.PWM4
X1 7

INPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/86.C2 ANALOGUEOutput2

A16a
+H3

HIGHPRESSURETRAVELPUMP

A
A16a.UI2
X1 5

A16a.X1

OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.D1
PWMOutput7(Bank2)
A17a
BUZZER
+H3
A
A17a.PWM7
X1 20

A17a.X1

26
26

WH 1Q

BU 1Q

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

+K6
X1.B
X1.S

Y15.JPT

Y15a.JPT

H40.X2

IP

+H4
B45
0

+K2
H40
0

+
C

BK 1Q

B45.X

Y15a.JPT
1
+H
Y15a
0

Y3a.DT

1
1

+H
Y15
0

+H
Y3a
0

Y2a.DT

Y15.JPT

Y3.DT

+H
Y2a
0
2

Y2.DT

+H
Y3
0

Y3a.DT

+H
Y2
0

Y2a.DT

Y3.DT

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

Y2.DT

H40.X1

B45.X

BK 1Q

20

20

+K6
X2.S
X2.B
+K6

RD 1Q

BK 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q

+H3
A17a EARTHTRAVELLINGDIRECTIONPump1FORWARD

+H3
A17a EARTHTRAVELLINGDIRECTIONPump1BACKWARD

+H3
A17b

/90.E5

/90.E5

/91.C5

EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1

EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1

EARTHTRAVELLINGDIRECTIONPump

EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2

+H3
A17b
/91.C5

EARTHTRAVELLINGDIRECTIONPump

EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2

X1 48
A17b.GND_PWM3
D
+H3
EARTHtravel
pump
A17b
/91.C5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2

A17b.X1

X1 49
A17b.GND_PWM4
D
+H3
EARTHSWIVELANGLE
A17b
/91.C5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2

A16a.X1

41

A17b.X1

X1 51
A17b.GND_PWM10

49

A17b.X1

X1 41
A16a.24V
D
+H3
HIGHPRESSUREtravel
pump
A16a
/86.B5
SUPPLY24V
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1

A17a.X1

62

X1 50
A17b.GND_PWM9
D

48

A17b.X1

X1 67
A17a.GNDPWM16

51

A17a.X1

X1 66
A17a.GND_PWM15

50

A17a.X1

67

E
66

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

PROJ: 8920980_003

WH 1Q

A17b.X1

20

TRAVELLINGDIRECTIONPump2

A17a.PWM16
X1 25

24

A17a.X1

TRAVELLINGDIRECTIONPump1BACKWARD

A17b
+H3

OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.C2
PWMOutput3(Bank
A17b SWIVELANGLEtravel pump1
+H3
A
A17b.PWM3
X1 6

A
A17a.PWM15
X1 24

A17b
+H3

TRAVELLINGDIRECTIONPump1FORWARD

A17a
+H3

OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.C2
PWMOutput10(Ban

A17a
+H3

OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.C2
PWMOutput9(Bank

25

OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.E1
PWMOutput16(Bank4)

OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.D1
PWMOutput15(Bank4)

X1 62
A17a.GND_PWM7

+H3
A17a
/90.D5

EARTHBUZZER
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1

F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

TRAVELDIRECTIONSHYDRAULICPUMPBUZZER
PRESSUREHIGHPRESSURETRAVELPUMP

WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

54
114

OPTIONGEROTORSTEERING

+H3

+H3

A17a.V_DO4
X1 38

A17a.DO4
X1 39

A17a.X1

38

A17a.X1

OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.D2
PWMOutput15(Ban
A17b VccMVGEROTORSTEERING
+H3
A
A17b.PWM15
X1 24

A17b.X1

39

OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.F1
digital output4
A17a back up alarm .OPTICAL

OPTIONFUELPREHEATING
Kl.30

A4
=K
+K2
F34

Kl.15

A4
=K
+K2

24

OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.F1 SUPPLYfor digital output4
A17a supply for digital output 4via.A4

A
E

F14

20A
YE

15A
BU

L34

L14
GND

A4.X42

A4.X44

GND

WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q

RD 2.5Q

1
1

Y63.JPT

+H2
S204

BK 2.5Q

+H3
Y63

BK,BK 1.5Q,1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

XMSP6.14
+K2
C

WH 2.5Q

=B
+B1
H59

Y63.JPT

10
10

=B
+B1
H58

BK 1.5Q

A4
=K
+K2
F49

WH 2.5Q

BK 1.5Q

A4.X43

BK 1.5Q

10A
RD

+M

A17b.X1

X1 54
A17a.GND_DO4

R49
L49

+H3
A17b

/90.D5

/91.E5

EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1

X1 66
A17b.GND_PWM15

+H3
A17a EARTHback up alarm.OPTICAL

GND

R13

66

A17a.X1

M10
0

EARTHGEROTORSTEERING
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2

Kl.15

OPTIONBACKUPALARMVISUALREDFLASHING
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe

Zustand

R14
B

WH 1.5Q

PROJ: 8920980_003

+K6
X2.B
X2.S

54

R34

WH 1.5Q

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

OPTIONREFUELLINGPUMP

WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

Ident.Nr.

BACKUPALARMGEROTORSTEERING
DIESELPREHEATING
4

ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

55
114

OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.C1
PWMOutput3(Bank1)
A17a BUCKETRETURNTODIG
+H3
A
A17a.PWM3
X1 6

A16a.X1

X33.X 2

36
WH 1Q

BK 1Q

BK 1Q

BK 1Q

BK 1Q

32

33
33

32

+K6
X1.S
X1.B

31

D
BK 1.5Q

WH 1Q
2
2

BK 1Q

WH 1Q

WH 1Q

+V
B17.B
B17.X

Y18

Y17

Y9

+K4
X33
0

+V1
Y9a
0

BK 1Q

BK 1Q

+H3
A17a.X1.48a

BK 1Q

/23.E6

10A
RD

F11

BK 1Q

WH 1Q

Kl.15

A4
=K
+K2

1
OPT2
sw3

OPT3
sw5

31

OPT1
sw4

1
1

X33.X

B17.X_1
+
+V
B17
0

B17.X_1

F.7

A4.X45

36

35
35
WH 1Q

WH 1Q

34

WH 1.5Q

WH 1Q

OPTION
BUCKETRETURNTODIGVIA
PUSHBUTTONSWITCHAMLHCONTROLLEVER

34

+K6
X1.B
X1.S

WH 1Q

B32.X

WH 1Q

27
27

B17.X
B17.B
+V

WH 1Q

R11

X1 11
A16a.UI12
A
+H3
A16a BUCKETRETURNTODIG
/86.C2 ANALOGUEall-purpose input12
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1

GND

Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

X1 66
A16a.GND

+H3
A16a
/86.E5

BUCKETRETURNTODIG
EARTH
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1

+H3
A16a
/86.D5

LIFTKICKOUT
EARTH
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1

+H3
A17a
/90.C5

EARTHBUCKETRETURNTODIG

EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.

X1 49
A17a.GND_PWM4
D
+H3
A17a EARTHLIFTKICKOUT
/90.C5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1

8920980
460901000003
7

A17a.X1

60

A17a.X1

X1 48
A17a.GND_PWM3
D

49

48

A17a.X1

X1 64
A16a.GND

FLOATPOSITIONBUCKETRETURNTODIG
LIFTKICKOUT

WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

A16a.X1

X1 10
A16a.UI11
A
+H3
LIFTKICKOUT
A16a
/86.C2 ANALOGUEall-purpose input11
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1

64

A16a.X1

10

A16a.X1

11

A16a.X1

66

L11

Zustand

A17a.X1.6a
+H3

A17a.X1

WH 1Q

36

18

A16a.24V
X1 38

A17a.X1

OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.D1
PWMOutput5(Bank2)
A17a
FLOATPOSITION
+H3
A
A17a.PWM5
X1 18

B15.X
+
+V3
B15
0

B15.X

+K4
B32
0

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

B32.X

A17a.X1

38

A16a.24V
X1 36

INPUTMODULE1
CAN:
SUPPLY24V
24VLIFTKICKOUT

OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.C1
PWMOutput4(Bank1)
A17a
LIFTKICKOUT
+H3
A
A17a.PWM4
X1 7

WH 1Q

A16a
+H3

+H3
A16a.X1

Kl.15

+K6
X1.B
X1.S

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

PROJ: 8920980_003

/86.F2

WH 1Q

A16a.X1

INPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/86.F2
SUPPLY24V
A16a 24VBUCKETRETURNTODIG

A
INPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/86.D2 ANALOGUEall-purpose input5
A16a
FLOATPOSITION
+H3
A
A16a.UI5
X1 18

18

WH 1Q

WH 1Q

X1 60
A17a.GND_PWM5

+H3
A17a
/90.D5

EARTHFLOATPOSITION
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

56
114

/87.C2

A16b.X1

10

2
BK 1.5Q

=K+K4S23.X2:9

+K2
XMSP6.12

EARTHAdditional equipment
/91.C5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2

+H3
A17c

RESERVE
/92.C5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE3

+H3
A17c
/92.C5

RESERVE
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE3

Verb.

47

+H3
A17b

A17a.X1

X1 47
A17a.GND_PWM2
D
+H3
EARTHAHS
A17a
/90.C5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1

Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

Ident.Nr.

ADDITIONALEQUIPMENT123AND4
QUICKCHANGEDEVICE

WerkBischofshofenGmbH
4

+H
X1.B.65

E
1

OLE23

EARTHAdditional equipment
/91.C5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2

X1 51
A17c.GND_PWM10

+H
+K6
X1.B
X1.S

F2210AX44/5

+H3
A17b

A17c.X1

X1 52
A17c.GND_PWM11

51

A17c.X1

X1 53
A17b.GND_PWM12

52

A17b.X1

X1 52
A17b.GND_PWM11

53

A17b.X1

63
1

A17.X2
70mm

+K2
XMSP6.12

WH 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q

S23.X2

BK 1.5Q
2

BK 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

S23.X1

10

BK 1.5Q

Y14.JPT

0 1

+V1
Y53
0

S23a
0

+H
A17.X2

BK 1.5Q

Y12a.JPT

+K4
S23
0

*
S23.X2
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q

Y11a.JPT

S23.X1

Y14.JPT
+H
Y14
0

Y12.JPT

Y11.JPT

Y12a.JPT
1
+V
Y12a
0

+V
Y12
0

Y11a.JPT
1
+V
Y11a
0

+V
Y11
0

WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

63

+K6
X1.S
X1.B
+K6

X1.B.64
+H

WH 1.5Q

64

+K2
V100

Zustand

INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
ANALOGUEUniversal
alarm buzzer
A
A16b.UI12
X1 11

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

PROJ: 8920980_003

Y12.JPT

52

Y11.JPT

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

WH 1.5Q

A17a.X1

A16b
+K2

OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.C1
PWMOutput2(Bank1)
A17a
AHS
+H3
A
A17a.PWM2
X1 5

64

A17c.X1

WH 1.5Q

OUTPUTMODULE3
CAN:
/92.C2
PWMOutput10(Bank3)
A17c
RESERVE
+H3
A
A17c.PWM10
X1 9

11

A17c.X1

WH 1.5Q

A17b.X1

10

A17b.X1

OUTPUTMODULE3
CAN:
/92.C2
PWMOutput9(Bank3)
A17c
RESERVE
+H3
A
A17c.PWM9
X1 8

11

OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.C2
PWMOutput12(Bank
A17b
Additional equipment2
+H3
A
A17b.PWM12
X1 11

OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.C2
PWMOutput11(Bank
A17b
Additional equipment1
+H3
A
A17b.PWM11
X1 10

ZeichNr.

SEEASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS!

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

57
114

A17a.PWM2
X1 5

A4
=K
+K2

=H
+H3
A17bMasseZusatzausrstung1
Masse
CAN:
OUTPUTMODUL2

X1 53
A17b.GND_PWM12

=H
+H3
A17bMasseZusatzausrstung2

=H+H/38.C5

Masse
CAN:
OUTPUTMODUL2

X1 47
A17b.GND_PWM2

=H
+H3
A17b GNDQuick change device

=H+H/38.B5

MGND
CAN:
OUTPUTMODUL2

=H
+H3
A17a

=H+H/37.B5

A4.X45

XMSP6a
+K2

F.12

X1 47
A17a.GND_PWM2
MasseAHS
Masse
CAN:
OUTPUTMODUL1

+K4
A21

/41.B4

BK 1.5Q

+K4
A21.X1

X1 3
A21.Kl15

Klemme30
Versorgung
CAN:
HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE

+K4
A21

/41.B4

RD 2.5Q

+K4
A21.X1

X1 2
A21.GND

+K4
A21

Klemme15
Klemme15
CAN:
HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE

/41.B4

AnspeisungMasse
AnspeisungMasse
CAN:
HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE

INFORMATIONFROM
Ident.Nr.8920980
Zeich.Nr.460901000000
VALIDTOSERIALNUMBER:see attachment

F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

A4.X41

X1 1
A21.Kl30
47

=H
+H3
A17a.X1

47

=H
+H3
A17b.X1

53

52

X1 52
A17b.GND_PWM11

=H+H/38.C5

=H
+H3
A17b.X1

GND

B.5

+K4
A21.X1
=H
+H3
A17b.X1

F19
10A
rt

GND

BK 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q
1

+H
Y14.JPT
1
+H
Y14
0
2
Y14.JPT
+H

BK 1.5Q

BK 1.5Q

F19a
20A
ge

WH 1.5Q

+V1
Y53.JPT
1
+V1
Y53
0
2
Y53.JPT
+V1

WH 1.5Q

+V
Y12.JPT
1
+V
Y12
0
2
Y12.JPT
+V

=V
+V
Y11.JPT
1
+V
Y11
0
2
Y11.JPT
+V
=V

BK 1.5Q

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

PROJ: 8920980_003

F19Kl.15.Kl.15

A17a.X1
+H3
=H

SpeisungKlimaanlage

/25.F1

A17b.X1
+H3
=H

+H3
=H

Kl.15

A17b.PWM2
X1 5

12

A17b.X1
+H3
=H

+H3
=H

WH 1Q

A17b.PWM12
X1 11

OUTPUTMODUL1
CAN:
=H+H/37.B2 PWMAusgang2(Bank1)
A17a
AHS

A17b.X1
+H3
=H

+H3
=H

A17b.PWM11
X1 10

OUTPUTMODUL2
CAN:
=H+H/38.B2 PWMOutput2(Bank1)
A17b Squick change device

+H3
=H

10

OUTPUTMODUL2
CAN:
=H+H/38.C2 PWMAusgang12(Bank3)
A17b Zusatzausrstung2

11

OUTPUTMODUL2
CAN:
=H+H/38.C2 PWMAusgang11(Bank3)
A17b Zusatzausrstung1

Kl.30

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

Ident.Nr.

ADDITIONALEQUIPMENT12
QUICKCHANGEDEVICE
4

ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

58
114

OPTIONWORKINGBASKET
WH 1.5Q

WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q

WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q

WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q

87a

WH 1.5Q

+K6
X2.S
X2.B

9
9

S210.X2

BK 1.5Q

5
5

WH 1.5Q

1
1

+H2
XMSP1.e

210

+K4
S213

22

Ausgabe
nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

Y67.JPT
BK 1.5Q

+H2
XMSP1.e

WerkBischofshofenGmbH
5

WH 1.5Q
2
2
WH 1.5Q

+H
X48.S
X48.B

25

A16c.X1

X1 25
A16c.UI16

+H3
A16c

basket functionNotOFF2
/88.E1 ANALOGUEall-purpose input16
CAN:
INPUTMODULE3

ZeichNr.

X1 6
A16c.UI3
A
+H3
basket
functionNotOFF1
A16c
/88.C1 ANALOGUEall-purpose input3
CAN:
INPUTMODULE3

Ident.Nr.

FUNCTIONWORKINGBASKET
3

A16c.X1
2

BK 1.5Q

+H2
XMSP1.e

Y66.JPT

BK 1.5Q

Verb.

OLE20

+H2
XMSP1.e

+V1
Y67
0

2
2

Y65.JPT

Verb.

WH 1.5Q

+V1
Y66
0

+V1
Y65
0

Y67.JPT

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q
=K+K4S210.X2:9

Y66.JPT

BK 1.5Q
=K+K4S210.X2:10

Y65.JPT

+K6
X2.S
X2.B
+K6

10

S210.X2

WH 1.5Q

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

22

WH 1.5Q

+K6
Splice.X30

10

S210.X1

Datum

21

D
3

Ersteller

+K4
S214

21

+K4
S210
0

WH 1.5Q

X2.S
X2.B

WH 1.5Q

S210.X1

WH 1.5Q

+H
X48.B
X48.S
3

BK 1.5Q
5
5

WH 1.5Q

+K6
X2.S
X2.B

+K6
X2.S
X2.B

WH 1.5Q

WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q

WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q

A4.X43

WH 1.5Q

WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
WH 1.5Q

30

WH 1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

PROJ: 8920980_003

GND

85

K208

WH 1.5Q

Zustand

87

L50

OLE19

+K6
X2.B
X2.S

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

K208
*
=K
+K2.RH

86

+K6
X2.B
X2.S

R50

WH 1.5Q

10A
RD

A16c.X1

F50

A16c.X1

+K
X51.S 1/1
X51.B
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q

WH 1.5Q

Kl.15

A4
=K
+K2

INPUTMODULE3
CAN:
/88.C1 ANALOGUEall-purpose Input9
A16c
basket functionMode2
+H3
A
A16c.UI9
X1 8
8

INPUTMODULE3
CAN:
/88.C1 ANALOGUEall-purpose Input4
A16c
basket functionMode1
+H3
A
A16c.UI4
X1 7

WH 1.5Q

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

59
114

OPTIONPROPORTIONALCONTROL3.AND4.CONTROLCIRCUIT

A16d.X1

INPUTMODUL4
INPUTMODUL4
CAN:
CAN:
/89.C2 ANALOGUEall-purpose Input2 /89.C2 ANALOGUEall-purpose Input9
A16d 3.CONTROLCIRCUITAktiv A16d
OPTION
+H3
+H3
A
A
A16d.UI2
A16d.UI9
X1 5
X1 8

BK 1Q

WH 1Q

WH 1Q

GND

+K4
S2a
0

cap.sensor
feed24V

S2.X1

Ausgabe
nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

GND

GND

Out

Vcc5V

Out

GND

Ident.Nr.

WerkBischofshofenGmbH

ZeichNr.

EP3.AND4.CONTROLCIRCUIT
3

CAPACITIVE

Hallsensors+SW1
feed5V
Ulow(V)Umid(V)Uhigh(V)
Sensor10,5052,524,54
Sensor20,5562,5214,539

state off1,4....1,6mAnot active


state on2,9....3,6mAactive
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

FNR

JOYSTICK SENSOR
Vcc5V

WH 1Q

Datum

NO

SW1

WH 1Q

Ersteller

NC

COM

WH 1Q

+K6
X1.B
X1.S
+K6

WH 1Q

+K6
X1.B
X1.S
+K6

HALL SENSOR
1.and2.

VNR

Vcc24V

WH 1Q

WH 1Q

S2a.X2

INPUTMODUL2

/50.D2 ANALOGUEUniversal
A16b JOYSTICK REVERSE2
+K2
A16b.UI6
X1 19
A16b.X1
+K2

S020mA

CAN:

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

7
INPUTMODUL2

/50.D2 ANALOGUEUniversal
A16b
JOYSTICKFORWARD2
+K2
A16b.UI5
X1 18
A16b.X1
+K2

WH 1Q

INPUTMODUL1

CAN:

INPUTMODUL1

=H+H/48.C2 ANALOGUEUniversale=H+H/48.C2 ANALOGUEUniversal


A16a
JOYSTICK FORWARD1 A16a JOYSTICKREVERSE1
+H3
+H3
A16a.UI9
A16a.UI10
X1 8
X1 9
A16a.X1
A16a.X1
+H3
+H3

SW1

A4.X44
E.4

Zustand

BU 1Q

RD 1Q
A
F15.3

BK 1Q

FUNKTIONFNR

F15.2

E
F15
10A
RD

BU 1Q

/6.C3

F15.1

RD 1Q

/6.B2

WH 1Q

Kl.15

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

A4
=K
+K2

CAN:

A16d.X1

+K
Splice.X70

CAN:

PROJ: 8920980_003

A16d.X1

54

A16d.X1

INPUTMODUL4
CAN:
EARTH
GNDRockerRollerCap
A16d.GND
X1 54

WH 1Q

A16d.X1

/89.D5

A16d
+H3

10

A16d.X1

INPUTMODUL4
CAN:
/89.C2 ANALOGUEall-purpose Input11
A16d
OUTPUTHallsensor2
+H3
A
A16d.UI11
X1 10

A16d.X1

INPUTMODUL4
CAN:
/89.C2 ANALOGUEall-purpose Input3
A16d
OUTPUTHall sensor1
+H3
A
A16d.UI3
X1 6

A16d.X1

INPUTMODUL4
CAN:
/89.C2 ANALOGUEall-purpose input4
A16d
CONTROL5V
+H3
A
A16d.UI4
X1 7

WH 1Q

A16d.X1

36

A16d.X1

A16d.GND
X1 59

/89.C5

A16d
+H3

INPUTMODUL4
CAN:
SUPPLY5V
RollerRockerCap
D
A16d.5V
X1 50
50

A16d.24VV
X1 36

/89.D5

A16d
+H3

INPUTMODUL4
CAN:
EARTH
capacitive Joysticksensor

59

/89.F2

A16d
+H3

INPUTMODUL4
CAN:
/89.C2 ANALOGUEall-purpose input1
A16d
capacitiveJoystick sensor
+H3
A
A16d.UI1
X1 4
4

INPUTMODUL4
CAN:
SUPPLY24V
capacitiveJoystick sensor

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

60
114

+K2
Kl.15
1

BK 1Q

=K
+K2.RH

+K2
XMSP201

+V1
S213
0

B213.X
=V +
+V2
B213
0
S
B213.X

*
30

85

+K2
K213

10

0
10

87a

87

86

BK

WH,WH 1Q,1Q

BU

3
B213.X

S213.X2

BK 1Q

S213.X1

10

1
BN

BK 1Q

Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

+K2
F213
7,5A
HBR

S213.X2

S213.X1

=K
+K2.RH

XMSP201
+K2

WH 1Q

=K
XMSP201

WH 1Q

WH 1Q

FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN

WH 1Q

Y68.JPT

+V1
Y68
0

BK 1Q

Y68.JPT

=K
+K2
XMSP201

F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand

WH 6Q

PROJ: 8920980_003

WH 1Q

WH,WH 1Q,1Q

WH 1Q

OPTIONCUTOFFTILTCYLINDER

nderung

Datum

Name

Datum

DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42

F
Ident.Nr.

CUTOFFTILTCYLINDER
WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3

ZeichNr.

8920980
460901000003
7

Anlage
Ort

003
8

Blatt
von

61
114

/96.B2

HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM

/96.B2

X1 2
A21.GND
A
SUPPLYEARTH
SUPPLYEARTH
CAN:

HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM

28

A21.X1

29

26

27

10

A21
+K4

/68.E8

RD 0.5Q
6
6

5
5
1

+K4
X22b.S
X22b.B

BU 0.75Q

RD 0.75Q

WH 2.5Q

1
C

XB39
B39.X
Y22.X

B42.X
+K1
B42

0
2

B42.X

WH 2.5Q

53

+K6
B39
0

B39.X
XB39

62

+K4
X22b.S
X22b.B

BU 0.5Q

BU 0.75Q

RD 0.75Q

WH 1.5Q

62
WH 1.5Q

+K4
A21

HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM

+K6
X2.B
X2.S

F19Kl.15.Kl.15

/96.B2

+K4
A21

X1 3
A21.K